diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation')
285 files changed, 12134 insertions, 3882 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-selinux-disable b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-selinux-disable new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c340278e3cf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/obsolete/sysfs-selinux-disable @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +What: /sys/fs/selinux/disable +Date: April 2005 (predates git) +KernelVersion: 2.6.12-rc2 (predates git) +Contact: selinux@vger.kernel.org +Description: + + The selinuxfs "disable" node allows SELinux to be disabled at runtime + prior to a policy being loaded into the kernel. If disabled via this + mechanism, SELinux will remain disabled until the system is rebooted. + + The preferred method of disabling SELinux is via the "selinux=0" boot + parameter, but the selinuxfs "disable" node was created to make it + easier for systems with primitive bootloaders that did not allow for + easy modification of the kernel command line. Unfortunately, allowing + for SELinux to be disabled at runtime makes it difficult to secure the + kernel's LSM hooks using the "__ro_after_init" feature. + + Thankfully, the need for the SELinux runtime disable appears to be + gone, the default Kconfig configuration disables this selinuxfs node, + and only one of the major distributions, Fedora, supports disabling + SELinux at runtime. Fedora is in the process of removing the + selinuxfs "disable" node and once that is complete we will start the + slow process of removing this code from the kernel. + + More information on /sys/fs/selinux/disable can be found under the + CONFIG_SECURITY_SELINUX_DISABLE Kconfig option. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm index c0e23830f56a..58e94e7d55be 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-class-tpm @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/ Date: April 2005 KernelVersion: 2.6.12 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The device/ directory under a specific TPM instance exposes the properties of that TPM chip @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ Description: The device/ directory under a specific TPM instance exposes What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/active Date: April 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "active" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is accepting commands. An inactive TPM chip still contains all the state of an active chip (Storage Root Key, NVRAM, etc), and can be @@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ Description: The "active" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is accepting What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/cancel Date: June 2005 KernelVersion: 2.6.13 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "cancel" property allows you to cancel the currently pending TPM command. Writing any value to cancel will call the TPM vendor specific cancel operation. @@ -29,7 +29,7 @@ Description: The "cancel" property allows you to cancel the currently What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/caps Date: April 2005 KernelVersion: 2.6.12 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "caps" property contains TPM manufacturer and version info. Example output: @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Description: The "caps" property contains TPM manufacturer and version info. What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/durations Date: March 2011 KernelVersion: 3.1 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "durations" property shows the 3 vendor-specific values used to wait for a short, medium and long TPM command. All TPM commands are categorized as short, medium or long in @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Description: The "durations" property shows the 3 vendor-specific values What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/enabled Date: April 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "enabled" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is enabled, meaning that it should be visible to the OS. This property may be visible but produce a '0' after some operation that @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ Description: The "enabled" property prints a '1' if the TPM chip is enabled, What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/owned Date: April 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "owned" property produces a '1' if the TPM_TakeOwnership ordinal has been executed successfully in the chip. A '0' indicates that ownership hasn't been taken. @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ Description: The "owned" property produces a '1' if the TPM_TakeOwnership What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/pcrs Date: April 2005 KernelVersion: 2.6.12 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "pcrs" property will dump the current value of all Platform Configuration Registers in the TPM. Note that since these values may be constantly changing, the output is only valid @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Description: The "pcrs" property will dump the current value of all Platform What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/pubek Date: April 2005 KernelVersion: 2.6.12 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "pubek" property will return the TPM's public endorsement key if possible. If the TPM has had ownership established and is version 1.2, the pubek will not be available without the @@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ Description: The "pubek" property will return the TPM's public endorsement What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/temp_deactivated Date: April 2006 KernelVersion: 2.6.17 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "temp_deactivated" property returns a '1' if the chip has been temporarily deactivated, usually until the next power cycle. Whether a warm boot (reboot) will clear a TPM chip @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Description: The "temp_deactivated" property returns a '1' if the chip has What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/device/timeouts Date: March 2011 KernelVersion: 3.1 -Contact: tpmdd-devel@lists.sf.net +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org Description: The "timeouts" property shows the 4 vendor-specific values for the TPM's interface spec timeouts. The use of these timeouts is defined by the TPM interface spec that the chip @@ -183,3 +183,14 @@ Description: The "timeouts" property shows the 4 vendor-specific values The four timeout values are shown in usecs, with a trailing "[original]" or "[adjusted]" depending on whether the values were scaled by the driver to be reported in usec from msecs. + +What: /sys/class/tpm/tpmX/tpm_version_major +Date: October 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.5 +Contact: linux-integrity@vger.kernel.org +Description: The "tpm_version_major" property shows the TCG spec major version + implemented by the TPM device. + + Example output: + + 2 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-dma-idxd b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-dma-idxd new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f4be46cc6cb6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-dma-idxd @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/cdev_major +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The major number that the character device driver assigned to + this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/errors +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The error information for this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_batch_size +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The largest number of work descriptors in a batch. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_work_queues_size +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The maximum work queue size supported by this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_engines +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The maximum number of engines supported by this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_groups +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The maximum number of groups can be created under this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_tokens +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The total number of bandwidth tokens supported by this device. + The bandwidth tokens represent resources within the DSA + implementation, and these resources are allocated by engines to + support operations. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_transfer_size +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The number of bytes to be read from the source address to + perform the operation. The maximum transfer size is dependent on + the workqueue the descriptor was submitted to. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/max_work_queues +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The maximum work queue number that this device supports. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/numa_node +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The numa node number for this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/op_cap +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The operation capability bit mask specify the operation types + supported by the this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/state +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The state information of this device. It can be either enabled + or disabled. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/group<m>.<n> +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The assigned group under this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/engine<m>.<n> +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The assigned engine under this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/wq<m>.<n> +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The assigned work queue under this device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/configurable +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: To indicate if this device is configurable or not. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/dsa<m>/token_limit +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The maximum number of bandwidth tokens that may be in use at + one time by operations that access low bandwidth memory in the + device. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/group_id +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The group id that this work queue belongs to. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/size +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The work queue size for this work queue. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/type +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The type of this work queue, it can be "kernel" type for work + queue usages in the kernel space or "user" type for work queue + usages by applications in user space. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/cdev_minor +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The minor number assigned to this work queue by the character + device driver. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/mode +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The work queue mode type for this work queue. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/priority +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The priority value of this work queue, it is a vlue relative to + other work queue in the same group to control quality of service + for dispatching work from multiple workqueues in the same group. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/state +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The current state of the work queue. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/wq<m>.<n>/threshold +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The number of entries in this work queue that may be filled + via a limited portal. + +What: sys/bus/dsa/devices/engine<m>.<n>/group_id +Date: Oct 25, 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6.0 +Contact: dmaengine@vger.kernel.org +Description: The group that this engine belongs to. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io index 8ca498447aeb..b0d90cc696a8 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io +++ b/Documentation/ABI/stable/sysfs-driver-mlxreg-io @@ -1,5 +1,4 @@ What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/asic_health - Date: June 2018 KernelVersion: 4.19 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> @@ -19,7 +18,6 @@ Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned The files are read only. What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/fan_dir - Date: December 2018 KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> @@ -29,18 +27,16 @@ Description: This file shows the system fans direction: The files are read only. -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/jtag_enable - +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/cpld3_version Date: November 2018 KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned - on LED board. + on LED or Gearbox board. The files are read only. What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/jtag_enable - Date: November 2018 KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> @@ -108,7 +104,6 @@ What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_comex_pwr_fail What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_from_comex What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_system What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_voltmon_upgrade_fail - Date: November 2018 KernelVersion: 5.0 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> @@ -121,6 +116,21 @@ Description: These files show the system reset cause, as following: ComEx The files are read only. +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/cpld4_version +Date: November 2018 +KernelVersion: 5.0 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files show with which CPLD versions have been burned + on LED board. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_comex_thermal +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_comex_wd +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_from_asic +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_reload_bios +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_sff_wd +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_swb_wd Date: June 2019 KernelVersion: 5.3 Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> @@ -134,9 +144,65 @@ Description: These files show the system reset cause, as following: The files are read only. -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_comex_thermal -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_comex_wd -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_from_asic -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_reload_bios -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_sff_wd -What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_swb_wd +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/config1 +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/config2 +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files show system static topology identification + like system's static I2C topology, number and type of FPGA + devices within the system and so on. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_ac_pwr_fail +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_platform +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_soc +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/reset_sw_pwr_off +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: These files show the system reset causes, as following: reset + due to AC power failure, reset invoked from software by + assertion reset signal through CPLD. reset caused by signal + asserted by SOC through ACPI register, reset invoked from + software by assertion power off signal through CPLD. + + The files are read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/pcie_asic_reset_dis +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file allows to retain ASIC up during PCIe root complex + reset, when attribute is set 1. + + The file is read/write. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/vpd_wp +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file allows to overwrite system VPD hardware wrtie + protection when attribute is set 1. + + The file is read/write. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/voltreg_update_status +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file exposes the configuration update status of burnable + voltage regulator devices. The status values are as following: + 0 - OK; 1 - CRC failure; 2 = I2C failure; 3 - in progress. + + The file is read only. + +What: /sys/devices/platform/mlxplat/mlxreg-io/hwmon/hwmon*/ufm_version +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: Vadim Pasternak <vadimpmellanox.com> +Description: This file exposes the firmware version of burnable voltage + regulator devices. + + The file is read only. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget index 95a36589a66b..4594cc2435e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/configfs-usb-gadget @@ -16,6 +16,10 @@ Description: write UDC's name found in /sys/class/udc/* to bind a gadget, empty string "" to unbind. + max_speed - maximum speed the driver supports. Valid + names are super-speed-plus, super-speed, + high-speed, full-speed, and low-speed. + bDeviceClass - USB device class code bDeviceSubClass - USB device subclass code bDeviceProtocol - USB device protocol code diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy index 29aaedf33246..cd572912c593 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/ima_policy @@ -25,11 +25,11 @@ Description: lsm: [[subj_user=] [subj_role=] [subj_type=] [obj_user=] [obj_role=] [obj_type=]] option: [[appraise_type=]] [template=] [permit_directio] - [appraise_flag=] + [appraise_flag=] [keyrings=] base: func:= [BPRM_CHECK][MMAP_CHECK][CREDS_CHECK][FILE_CHECK][MODULE_CHECK] [FIRMWARE_CHECK] [KEXEC_KERNEL_CHECK] [KEXEC_INITRAMFS_CHECK] - [KEXEC_CMDLINE] + [KEXEC_CMDLINE] [KEY_CHECK] mask:= [[^]MAY_READ] [[^]MAY_WRITE] [[^]MAY_APPEND] [[^]MAY_EXEC] fsmagic:= hex value @@ -42,6 +42,9 @@ Description: appraise_flag:= [check_blacklist] Currently, blacklist check is only for files signed with appended signature. + keyrings:= list of keyrings + (eg, .builtin_trusted_keys|.ima). Only valid + when action is "measure" and func is KEY_CHECK. template:= name of a defined IMA template type (eg, ima-ng). Only valid when action is "measure". pcr:= decimal value @@ -113,3 +116,12 @@ Description: Example of appraise rule allowing modsig appended signatures: appraise func=KEXEC_KERNEL_CHECK appraise_type=imasig|modsig + + Example of measure rule using KEY_CHECK to measure all keys: + + measure func=KEY_CHECK + + Example of measure rule using KEY_CHECK to only measure + keys added to .builtin_trusted_keys or .ima keyring: + + measure func=KEY_CHECK keyrings=.builtin_trusted_keys|.ima diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio index faaa2166d741..d3e53a6d8331 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio @@ -1726,3 +1726,16 @@ Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org Description: List of valid periods (in seconds) for which the light intensity must be above the threshold level before interrupt is asserted. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_filter_notch_center_frequency +KernelVersion: 5.5 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Center frequency in Hz for a notch filter. Used i.e. for line + noise suppression. + +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/in_temp_thermocouple_type +KernelVersion: 5.5 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + One of the following thermocouple types: B, E, J, K, N, R, S, T. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-dma-buffer b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-dma-buffer new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d526e6571001 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-iio-dma-buffer @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +What: /sys/bus/iio/devices/iio:deviceX/buffer/length_align_bytes +KernelVersion: 5.4 +Contact: linux-iio@vger.kernel.org +Description: + DMA buffers tend to have a alignment requirement for the + buffers. If this alignment requirement is not met samples might + be dropped from the buffer. + + This property reports the alignment requirements in bytes. + This means that the buffer size in bytes needs to be a integer + multiple of the number reported by this file. + + The alignment requirements in number of sample sets will depend + on the enabled channels and the bytes per channel. This means + that the alignment requirement in samples sets might change + depending on which and how many channels are enabled. Whereas + the alignment requirement reported in bytes by this property + will remain static and does not depend on which channels are + enabled. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..da86efc7781b --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-mdio @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/ +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + This folder contains statistics about global and per + MDIO bus address statistics. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/transfers +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of transfers for this MDIO bus. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/errors +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of transfer errors for this MDIO bus. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/writes +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of write transactions for this MDIO bus. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/reads +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of read transactions for this MDIO bus. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/transfers_<addr> +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of transfers for this MDIO bus address. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/errors_<addr> +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of transfer errors for this MDIO bus address. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/writes_<addr> +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of write transactions for this MDIO bus address. + +What: /sys/bus/mdio_bus/devices/.../statistics/reads_<addr> +Date: January 2020 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: netdev@vger.kernel.org +Description: + Total number of read transactions for this MDIO bus address. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq index 01196e19afca..9758eb85ade3 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-devfreq @@ -7,6 +7,13 @@ Description: The name of devfreq object denoted as ... is same as the name of device using devfreq. +What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../name +Date: November 2019 +Contact: Chanwoo Choi <cw00.choi@samsung.com> +Description: + The /sys/class/devfreq/.../name shows the name of device + of the corresponding devfreq object. + What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../governor Date: September 2011 Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> @@ -48,12 +55,15 @@ What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../trans_stat Date: October 2012 Contact: MyungJoo Ham <myungjoo.ham@samsung.com> Description: - This ABI shows the statistics of devfreq behavior on a - specific device. It shows the time spent in each state and - the number of transitions between states. + This ABI shows or clears the statistics of devfreq behavior + on a specific device. It shows the time spent in each state + and the number of transitions between states. In order to activate this ABI, the devfreq target device driver should provide the list of available frequencies - with its profile. + with its profile. If need to reset the statistics of devfreq + behavior on a specific device, enter 0(zero) to 'trans_stat' + as following: + echo 0 > /sys/class/devfreq/.../trans_stat What: /sys/class/devfreq/.../userspace/set_freq Date: September 2011 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu index fc20cde63d1e..2e0e3b45d02a 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-devices-system-cpu @@ -196,6 +196,12 @@ Description: does not reflect it. Likewise, if one enables a deep state but a lighter state still is disabled, then this has no effect. +What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpuidle/stateN/default_status +Date: December 2019 +KernelVersion: v5.6 +Contact: Linux power management list <linux-pm@vger.kernel.org> +Description: + (RO) The default status of this state, "enabled" or "disabled". What: /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpuX/cpuidle/stateN/residency Date: March 2014 diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi index 9e99f2909612..1efac0ddb417 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-wmi @@ -46,3 +46,13 @@ Description: * 0 - normal, * 1 - overboost, * 2 - silent + +What: /sys/devices/platform/<platform>/throttle_thermal_policy +Date: Dec 2019 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: "Leonid Maksymchuk" <leonmaxx@gmail.com> +Description: + Throttle thermal policy mode: + * 0 - default, + * 1 - overboost, + * 2 - silent diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-mellanox-bootctl b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-mellanox-bootctl index c65a80574869..401d202f478b 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-mellanox-bootctl +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-mellanox-bootctl @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/driver/lifecycle_state +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/lifecycle_state Date: Oct 2019 KernelVersion: 5.5 Contact: "Liming Sun <lsun@mellanox.com>" @@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Description: GA Non-Secured - Non-Secure chip and not able to change state RMA - Return Merchandise Authorization -What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/driver/post_reset_wdog +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/post_reset_wdog Date: Oct 2019 KernelVersion: 5.5 Contact: "Liming Sun <lsun@mellanox.com>" @@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Description: to reboot the chip and recover it to the old state if the new boot partition fails. -What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/driver/reset_action +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/reset_action Date: Oct 2019 KernelVersion: 5.5 Contact: "Liming Sun <lsun@mellanox.com>" @@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Description: emmc - boot from the onchip eMMC emmc_legacy - boot from the onchip eMMC in legacy (slow) mode -What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/driver/second_reset_action +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/second_reset_action Date: Oct 2019 KernelVersion: 5.5 Contact: "Liming Sun <lsun@mellanox.com>" @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Description: swap_emmc - swap the primary / secondary boot partition none - cancel the action -What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/driver/secure_boot_fuse_state +What: /sys/bus/platform/devices/MLNXBF04:00/secure_boot_fuse_state Date: Oct 2019 KernelVersion: 5.5 Contact: "Liming Sun <lsun@mellanox.com>" diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power index 6f87b9dd384b..5e6ead29124c 100644 --- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-power @@ -407,3 +407,16 @@ Contact: Kalesh Singh <kaleshsingh96@gmail.com> Description: The /sys/power/suspend_stats/last_failed_step file contains the last failed step in the suspend/resume path. + +What: /sys/power/sync_on_suspend +Date: October 2019 +Contact: Jonas Meurer <jonas@freesources.org> +Description: + This file controls whether or not the kernel will sync() + filesystems during system suspend (after freezing user space + and before suspending devices). + + Writing a "1" to this file enables the sync() and writing a "0" + disables it. Reads from the file return the current value. + The default is "1" if the build-time "SUSPEND_SKIP_SYNC" config + flag is unset, or "0" otherwise. diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-charger-uevent b/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-charger-uevent new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..419a92dd0d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/usb-charger-uevent @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +What: Raise a uevent when a USB charger is inserted or removed +Date: 2020-01-14 +KernelVersion: 5.6 +Contact: linux-usb@vger.kernel.org +Description: There are two USB charger states: + USB_CHARGER_ABSENT + USB_CHARGER_PRESENT + There are five USB charger types: + USB_CHARGER_UNKNOWN_TYPE: Charger type is unknown + USB_CHARGER_SDP_TYPE: Standard Downstream Port + USB_CHARGER_CDP_TYPE: Charging Downstream Port + USB_CHARGER_DCP_TYPE: Dedicated Charging Port + USB_CHARGER_ACA_TYPE: Accessory Charging Adapter + https://www.usb.org/document-library/battery-charging-v12-spec-and-adopters-agreement + + Here are two examples taken using udevadm monitor -p when + USB charger is online: + UDEV change /devices/soc0/usbphynop1 (platform) + ACTION=change + DEVPATH=/devices/soc0/usbphynop1 + DRIVER=usb_phy_generic + MODALIAS=of:Nusbphynop1T(null)Cusb-nop-xceiv + OF_COMPATIBLE_0=usb-nop-xceiv + OF_COMPATIBLE_N=1 + OF_FULLNAME=/usbphynop1 + OF_NAME=usbphynop1 + SEQNUM=2493 + SUBSYSTEM=platform + USB_CHARGER_STATE=USB_CHARGER_PRESENT + USB_CHARGER_TYPE=USB_CHARGER_SDP_TYPE + USEC_INITIALIZED=227422826 + + USB charger is offline: + KERNEL change /devices/soc0/usbphynop1 (platform) + ACTION=change + DEVPATH=/devices/soc0/usbphynop1 + DRIVER=usb_phy_generic + MODALIAS=of:Nusbphynop1T(null)Cusb-nop-xceiv + OF_COMPATIBLE_0=usb-nop-xceiv + OF_COMPATIBLE_N=1 + OF_FULLNAME=/usbphynop1 + OF_NAME=usbphynop1 + SEQNUM=2494 + SUBSYSTEM=platform + USB_CHARGER_STATE=USB_CHARGER_ABSENT + USB_CHARGER_TYPE=USB_CHARGER_UNKNOWN_TYPE diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.rst index 881353fd5bff..180958388ff9 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/NMI-RCU.rst @@ -1,4 +1,7 @@ +.. _NMI_rcu_doc: + Using RCU to Protect Dynamic NMI Handlers +========================================= Although RCU is usually used to protect read-mostly data structures, @@ -9,7 +12,7 @@ work in "arch/x86/oprofile/nmi_timer_int.c" and in "arch/x86/kernel/traps.c". The relevant pieces of code are listed below, each followed by a -brief explanation. +brief explanation:: static int dummy_nmi_callback(struct pt_regs *regs, int cpu) { @@ -18,12 +21,12 @@ brief explanation. The dummy_nmi_callback() function is a "dummy" NMI handler that does nothing, but returns zero, thus saying that it did nothing, allowing -the NMI handler to take the default machine-specific action. +the NMI handler to take the default machine-specific action:: static nmi_callback_t nmi_callback = dummy_nmi_callback; This nmi_callback variable is a global function pointer to the current -NMI handler. +NMI handler:: void do_nmi(struct pt_regs * regs, long error_code) { @@ -53,11 +56,12 @@ anyway. However, in practice it is a good documentation aid, particularly for anyone attempting to do something similar on Alpha or on systems with aggressive optimizing compilers. -Quick Quiz: Why might the rcu_dereference_sched() be necessary on Alpha, - given that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? +Quick Quiz: + Why might the rcu_dereference_sched() be necessary on Alpha, given that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? +:ref:`Answer to Quick Quiz <answer_quick_quiz_NMI>` -Back to the discussion of NMI and RCU... +Back to the discussion of NMI and RCU:: void set_nmi_callback(nmi_callback_t callback) { @@ -68,7 +72,7 @@ The set_nmi_callback() function registers an NMI handler. Note that any data that is to be used by the callback must be initialized up -before- the call to set_nmi_callback(). On architectures that do not order writes, the rcu_assign_pointer() ensures that the NMI handler sees the -initialized values. +initialized values:: void unset_nmi_callback(void) { @@ -82,7 +86,7 @@ up any data structures used by the old NMI handler until execution of it completes on all other CPUs. One way to accomplish this is via synchronize_rcu(), perhaps as -follows: +follows:: unset_nmi_callback(); synchronize_rcu(); @@ -98,24 +102,23 @@ to free up the handler's data as soon as synchronize_rcu() returns. Important note: for this to work, the architecture in question must invoke nmi_enter() and nmi_exit() on NMI entry and exit, respectively. +.. _answer_quick_quiz_NMI: -Answer to Quick Quiz - - Why might the rcu_dereference_sched() be necessary on Alpha, given - that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? +Answer to Quick Quiz: + Why might the rcu_dereference_sched() be necessary on Alpha, given that the code referenced by the pointer is read-only? - Answer: The caller to set_nmi_callback() might well have - initialized some data that is to be used by the new NMI - handler. In this case, the rcu_dereference_sched() would - be needed, because otherwise a CPU that received an NMI - just after the new handler was set might see the pointer - to the new NMI handler, but the old pre-initialized - version of the handler's data. + The caller to set_nmi_callback() might well have + initialized some data that is to be used by the new NMI + handler. In this case, the rcu_dereference_sched() would + be needed, because otherwise a CPU that received an NMI + just after the new handler was set might see the pointer + to the new NMI handler, but the old pre-initialized + version of the handler's data. - This same sad story can happen on other CPUs when using - a compiler with aggressive pointer-value speculation - optimizations. + This same sad story can happen on other CPUs when using + a compiler with aggressive pointer-value speculation + optimizations. - More important, the rcu_dereference_sched() makes it - clear to someone reading the code that the pointer is - being protected by RCU-sched. + More important, the rcu_dereference_sched() makes it + clear to someone reading the code that the pointer is + being protected by RCU-sched. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/arrayRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/arrayRCU.rst index f05a9afb2c39..4051ea3871ef 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/arrayRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/arrayRCU.rst @@ -1,19 +1,21 @@ -Using RCU to Protect Read-Mostly Arrays +.. _array_rcu_doc: +Using RCU to Protect Read-Mostly Arrays +======================================= Although RCU is more commonly used to protect linked lists, it can also be used to protect arrays. Three situations are as follows: -1. Hash Tables +1. :ref:`Hash Tables <hash_tables>` -2. Static Arrays +2. :ref:`Static Arrays <static_arrays>` -3. Resizeable Arrays +3. :ref:`Resizable Arrays <resizable_arrays>` Each of these three situations involves an RCU-protected pointer to an array that is separately indexed. It might be tempting to consider use of RCU to instead protect the index into an array, however, this use -case is -not- supported. The problem with RCU-protected indexes into +case is **not** supported. The problem with RCU-protected indexes into arrays is that compilers can play way too many optimization games with integers, which means that the rules governing handling of these indexes are far more trouble than they are worth. If RCU-protected indexes into @@ -24,16 +26,20 @@ to be safely used. That aside, each of the three RCU-protected pointer situations are described in the following sections. +.. _hash_tables: Situation 1: Hash Tables +------------------------ Hash tables are often implemented as an array, where each array entry has a linked-list hash chain. Each hash chain can be protected by RCU as described in the listRCU.txt document. This approach also applies to other array-of-list situations, such as radix trees. +.. _static_arrays: Situation 2: Static Arrays +-------------------------- Static arrays, where the data (rather than a pointer to the data) is located in each array element, and where the array is never resized, @@ -41,13 +47,17 @@ have not been used with RCU. Rik van Riel recommends using seqlock in this situation, which would also have minimal read-side overhead as long as updates are rare. -Quick Quiz: Why is it so important that updates be rare when - using seqlock? +Quick Quiz: + Why is it so important that updates be rare when using seqlock? + +:ref:`Answer to Quick Quiz <answer_quick_quiz_seqlock>` +.. _resizable_arrays: -Situation 3: Resizeable Arrays +Situation 3: Resizable Arrays +------------------------------ -Use of RCU for resizeable arrays is demonstrated by the grow_ary() +Use of RCU for resizable arrays is demonstrated by the grow_ary() function formerly used by the System V IPC code. The array is used to map from semaphore, message-queue, and shared-memory IDs to the data structure that represents the corresponding IPC construct. The grow_ary() @@ -60,7 +70,7 @@ the remainder of the new, updates the ids->entries pointer to point to the new array, and invokes ipc_rcu_putref() to free up the old array. Note that rcu_assign_pointer() is used to update the ids->entries pointer, which includes any memory barriers required on whatever architecture -you are running on. +you are running on:: static int grow_ary(struct ipc_ids* ids, int newsize) { @@ -112,7 +122,7 @@ a simple check suffices. The pointer to the structure corresponding to the desired IPC object is placed in "out", with NULL indicating a non-existent entry. After acquiring "out->lock", the "out->deleted" flag indicates whether the IPC object is in the process of being -deleted, and, if not, the pointer is returned. +deleted, and, if not, the pointer is returned:: struct kern_ipc_perm* ipc_lock(struct ipc_ids* ids, int id) { @@ -144,8 +154,10 @@ deleted, and, if not, the pointer is returned. return out; } +.. _answer_quick_quiz_seqlock: Answer to Quick Quiz: + Why is it so important that updates be rare when using seqlock? The reason that it is important that updates be rare when using seqlock is that frequent updates can livelock readers. diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/index.rst b/Documentation/RCU/index.rst index 5c99185710fa..81a0a1e5f767 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/RCU/index.rst @@ -7,8 +7,13 @@ RCU concepts .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 3 + arrayRCU + rcubarrier + rcu_dereference + whatisRCU rcu listRCU + NMI-RCU UP Design/Memory-Ordering/Tree-RCU-Memory-Ordering diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt index 9c015976b174..b8096316fd11 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/lockdep-splat.txt @@ -99,7 +99,7 @@ With this change, the rcu_dereference() is always within an RCU read-side critical section, which again would have suppressed the above lockdep-RCU splat. -But in this particular case, we don't actually deference the pointer +But in this particular case, we don't actually dereference the pointer returned from rcu_dereference(). Instead, that pointer is just compared to the cic pointer, which means that the rcu_dereference() can be replaced by rcu_access_pointer() as follows: diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.rst index bf699e8cfc75..c9667eb0d444 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcu_dereference.rst @@ -1,4 +1,7 @@ +.. _rcu_dereference_doc: + PROPER CARE AND FEEDING OF RETURN VALUES FROM rcu_dereference() +=============================================================== Most of the time, you can use values from rcu_dereference() or one of the similar primitives without worries. Dereferencing (prefix "*"), @@ -8,7 +11,7 @@ subtraction of constants, and casts all work quite naturally and safely. It is nevertheless possible to get into trouble with other operations. Follow these rules to keep your RCU code working properly: -o You must use one of the rcu_dereference() family of primitives +- You must use one of the rcu_dereference() family of primitives to load an RCU-protected pointer, otherwise CONFIG_PROVE_RCU will complain. Worse yet, your code can see random memory-corruption bugs due to games that compilers and DEC Alpha can play. @@ -25,24 +28,24 @@ o You must use one of the rcu_dereference() family of primitives for an example where the compiler can in fact deduce the exact value of the pointer, and thus cause misordering. -o You are only permitted to use rcu_dereference on pointer values. +- You are only permitted to use rcu_dereference on pointer values. The compiler simply knows too much about integral values to trust it to carry dependencies through integer operations. There are a very few exceptions, namely that you can temporarily cast the pointer to uintptr_t in order to: - o Set bits and clear bits down in the must-be-zero low-order + - Set bits and clear bits down in the must-be-zero low-order bits of that pointer. This clearly means that the pointer must have alignment constraints, for example, this does -not- work in general for char* pointers. - o XOR bits to translate pointers, as is done in some + - XOR bits to translate pointers, as is done in some classic buddy-allocator algorithms. It is important to cast the value back to pointer before doing much of anything else with it. -o Avoid cancellation when using the "+" and "-" infix arithmetic +- Avoid cancellation when using the "+" and "-" infix arithmetic operators. For example, for a given variable "x", avoid "(x-(uintptr_t)x)" for char* pointers. The compiler is within its rights to substitute zero for this sort of expression, so that @@ -54,16 +57,16 @@ o Avoid cancellation when using the "+" and "-" infix arithmetic "p+a-b" is safe because its value still necessarily depends on the rcu_dereference(), thus maintaining proper ordering. -o If you are using RCU to protect JITed functions, so that the +- If you are using RCU to protect JITed functions, so that the "()" function-invocation operator is applied to a value obtained (directly or indirectly) from rcu_dereference(), you may need to interact directly with the hardware to flush instruction caches. This issue arises on some systems when a newly JITed function is using the same memory that was used by an earlier JITed function. -o Do not use the results from relational operators ("==", "!=", +- Do not use the results from relational operators ("==", "!=", ">", ">=", "<", or "<=") when dereferencing. For example, - the following (quite strange) code is buggy: + the following (quite strange) code is buggy:: int *p; int *q; @@ -81,11 +84,11 @@ o Do not use the results from relational operators ("==", "!=", after such branches, but can speculate loads, which can again result in misordering bugs. -o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from +- Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from rcu_dereference() against non-NULL values. As Linus Torvalds explained, if the two pointers are equal, the compiler could substitute the pointer you are comparing against for the pointer - obtained from rcu_dereference(). For example: + obtained from rcu_dereference(). For example:: p = rcu_dereference(gp); if (p == &default_struct) @@ -93,7 +96,7 @@ o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from Because the compiler now knows that the value of "p" is exactly the address of the variable "default_struct", it is free to - transform this code into the following: + transform this code into the following:: p = rcu_dereference(gp); if (p == &default_struct) @@ -105,14 +108,14 @@ o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from However, comparisons are OK in the following cases: - o The comparison was against the NULL pointer. If the + - The comparison was against the NULL pointer. If the compiler knows that the pointer is NULL, you had better not be dereferencing it anyway. If the comparison is non-equal, the compiler is none the wiser. Therefore, it is safe to compare pointers from rcu_dereference() against NULL pointers. - o The pointer is never dereferenced after being compared. + - The pointer is never dereferenced after being compared. Since there are no subsequent dereferences, the compiler cannot use anything it learned from the comparison to reorder the non-existent subsequent dereferences. @@ -124,31 +127,31 @@ o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from dereferenced, rcu_access_pointer() should be used in place of rcu_dereference(). - o The comparison is against a pointer that references memory + - The comparison is against a pointer that references memory that was initialized "a long time ago." The reason this is safe is that even if misordering occurs, the misordering will not affect the accesses that follow the comparison. So exactly how long ago is "a long time ago"? Here are some possibilities: - o Compile time. + - Compile time. - o Boot time. + - Boot time. - o Module-init time for module code. + - Module-init time for module code. - o Prior to kthread creation for kthread code. + - Prior to kthread creation for kthread code. - o During some prior acquisition of the lock that + - During some prior acquisition of the lock that we now hold. - o Before mod_timer() time for a timer handler. + - Before mod_timer() time for a timer handler. There are many other possibilities involving the Linux kernel's wide array of primitives that cause code to be invoked at a later time. - o The pointer being compared against also came from + - The pointer being compared against also came from rcu_dereference(). In this case, both pointers depend on one rcu_dereference() or another, so you get proper ordering either way. @@ -159,13 +162,13 @@ o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from of such an RCU usage bug is shown in the section titled "EXAMPLE OF AMPLIFIED RCU-USAGE BUG". - o All of the accesses following the comparison are stores, + - All of the accesses following the comparison are stores, so that a control dependency preserves the needed ordering. That said, it is easy to get control dependencies wrong. Please see the "CONTROL DEPENDENCIES" section of Documentation/memory-barriers.txt for more details. - o The pointers are not equal -and- the compiler does + - The pointers are not equal -and- the compiler does not have enough information to deduce the value of the pointer. Note that the volatile cast in rcu_dereference() will normally prevent the compiler from knowing too much. @@ -175,7 +178,7 @@ o Be very careful about comparing pointers obtained from comparison will provide exactly the information that the compiler needs to deduce the value of the pointer. -o Disable any value-speculation optimizations that your compiler +- Disable any value-speculation optimizations that your compiler might provide, especially if you are making use of feedback-based optimizations that take data collected from prior runs. Such value-speculation optimizations reorder operations by design. @@ -188,11 +191,12 @@ o Disable any value-speculation optimizations that your compiler EXAMPLE OF AMPLIFIED RCU-USAGE BUG +---------------------------------- Because updaters can run concurrently with RCU readers, RCU readers can see stale and/or inconsistent values. If RCU readers need fresh or consistent values, which they sometimes do, they need to take proper -precautions. To see this, consider the following code fragment: +precautions. To see this, consider the following code fragment:: struct foo { int a; @@ -244,7 +248,7 @@ to some reordering from the compiler and CPUs is beside the point. But suppose that the reader needs a consistent view? -Then one approach is to use locking, for example, as follows: +Then one approach is to use locking, for example, as follows:: struct foo { int a; @@ -299,6 +303,7 @@ As always, use the right tool for the job! EXAMPLE WHERE THE COMPILER KNOWS TOO MUCH +----------------------------------------- If a pointer obtained from rcu_dereference() compares not-equal to some other pointer, the compiler normally has no clue what the value of the @@ -308,7 +313,7 @@ guarantees that RCU depends on. And the volatile cast in rcu_dereference() should prevent the compiler from guessing the value. But without rcu_dereference(), the compiler knows more than you might -expect. Consider the following code fragment: +expect. Consider the following code fragment:: struct foo { int a; @@ -354,6 +359,7 @@ dereference the resulting pointer. WHICH MEMBER OF THE rcu_dereference() FAMILY SHOULD YOU USE? +------------------------------------------------------------ First, please avoid using rcu_dereference_raw() and also please avoid using rcu_dereference_check() and rcu_dereference_protected() with a @@ -370,7 +376,7 @@ member of the rcu_dereference() to use in various situations: 2. If the access might be within an RCU read-side critical section on the one hand, or protected by (say) my_lock on the other, - use rcu_dereference_check(), for example: + use rcu_dereference_check(), for example:: p1 = rcu_dereference_check(p->rcu_protected_pointer, lockdep_is_held(&my_lock)); @@ -378,14 +384,14 @@ member of the rcu_dereference() to use in various situations: 3. If the access might be within an RCU read-side critical section on the one hand, or protected by either my_lock or your_lock on - the other, again use rcu_dereference_check(), for example: + the other, again use rcu_dereference_check(), for example:: p1 = rcu_dereference_check(p->rcu_protected_pointer, lockdep_is_held(&my_lock) || lockdep_is_held(&your_lock)); 4. If the access is on the update side, so that it is always protected - by my_lock, use rcu_dereference_protected(): + by my_lock, use rcu_dereference_protected():: p1 = rcu_dereference_protected(p->rcu_protected_pointer, lockdep_is_held(&my_lock)); @@ -410,18 +416,19 @@ member of the rcu_dereference() to use in various situations: SPARSE CHECKING OF RCU-PROTECTED POINTERS +----------------------------------------- The sparse static-analysis tool checks for direct access to RCU-protected pointers, which can result in "interesting" bugs due to compiler optimizations involving invented loads and perhaps also load tearing. -For example, suppose someone mistakenly does something like this: +For example, suppose someone mistakenly does something like this:: p = q->rcu_protected_pointer; do_something_with(p->a); do_something_else_with(p->b); If register pressure is high, the compiler might optimize "p" out -of existence, transforming the code to something like this: +of existence, transforming the code to something like this:: do_something_with(q->rcu_protected_pointer->a); do_something_else_with(q->rcu_protected_pointer->b); @@ -435,7 +442,7 @@ Load tearing could of course result in dereferencing a mashup of a pair of pointers, which also might fatally disappoint your code. These problems could have been avoided simply by making the code instead -read as follows: +read as follows:: p = rcu_dereference(q->rcu_protected_pointer); do_something_with(p->a); @@ -448,7 +455,7 @@ or as a formal parameter, with "__rcu", which tells sparse to complain if this pointer is accessed directly. It will also cause sparse to complain if a pointer not marked with "__rcu" is accessed using rcu_dereference() and friends. For example, ->rcu_protected_pointer might be declared as -follows: +follows:: struct foo __rcu *rcu_protected_pointer; diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.rst index a2782df69732..f64f4413a47c 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/rcubarrier.rst @@ -1,4 +1,7 @@ +.. _rcu_barrier: + RCU and Unloadable Modules +========================== [Originally published in LWN Jan. 14, 2007: http://lwn.net/Articles/217484/] @@ -21,7 +24,7 @@ given that readers might well leave absolutely no trace of their presence? There is a synchronize_rcu() primitive that blocks until all pre-existing readers have completed. An updater wishing to delete an element p from a linked list might do the following, while holding an -appropriate lock, of course: +appropriate lock, of course:: list_del_rcu(p); synchronize_rcu(); @@ -32,13 +35,13 @@ primitive must be used instead. This primitive takes a pointer to an rcu_head struct placed within the RCU-protected data structure and another pointer to a function that may be invoked later to free that structure. Code to delete an element p from the linked list from IRQ -context might then be as follows: +context might then be as follows:: list_del_rcu(p); call_rcu(&p->rcu, p_callback); Since call_rcu() never blocks, this code can safely be used from within -IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows: +IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows:: static void p_callback(struct rcu_head *rp) { @@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ IRQ context. The function p_callback() might be defined as follows: Unloading Modules That Use call_rcu() +------------------------------------- But what if p_callback is defined in an unloadable module? @@ -69,10 +73,11 @@ in realtime kernels in order to avoid excessive scheduling latencies. rcu_barrier() +------------- We instead need the rcu_barrier() primitive. Rather than waiting for a grace period to elapse, rcu_barrier() waits for all outstanding RCU -callbacks to complete. Please note that rcu_barrier() does -not- imply +callbacks to complete. Please note that rcu_barrier() does **not** imply synchronize_rcu(), in particular, if there are no RCU callbacks queued anywhere, rcu_barrier() is within its rights to return immediately, without waiting for a grace period to elapse. @@ -88,79 +93,79 @@ must match the flavor of rcu_barrier() with that of call_rcu(). If your module uses multiple flavors of call_rcu(), then it must also use multiple flavors of rcu_barrier() when unloading that module. For example, if it uses call_rcu(), call_srcu() on srcu_struct_1, and call_srcu() on -srcu_struct_2(), then the following three lines of code will be required -when unloading: +srcu_struct_2, then the following three lines of code will be required +when unloading:: 1 rcu_barrier(); 2 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_1); 3 srcu_barrier(&srcu_struct_2); The rcutorture module makes use of rcu_barrier() in its exit function -as follows: +as follows:: - 1 static void - 2 rcu_torture_cleanup(void) - 3 { - 4 int i; + 1 static void + 2 rcu_torture_cleanup(void) + 3 { + 4 int i; 5 - 6 fullstop = 1; - 7 if (shuffler_task != NULL) { + 6 fullstop = 1; + 7 if (shuffler_task != NULL) { 8 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_shuffle task"); 9 kthread_stop(shuffler_task); -10 } -11 shuffler_task = NULL; -12 -13 if (writer_task != NULL) { -14 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_writer task"); -15 kthread_stop(writer_task); -16 } -17 writer_task = NULL; -18 -19 if (reader_tasks != NULL) { -20 for (i = 0; i < nrealreaders; i++) { -21 if (reader_tasks[i] != NULL) { -22 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( -23 "Stopping rcu_torture_reader task"); -24 kthread_stop(reader_tasks[i]); -25 } -26 reader_tasks[i] = NULL; -27 } -28 kfree(reader_tasks); -29 reader_tasks = NULL; -30 } -31 rcu_torture_current = NULL; -32 -33 if (fakewriter_tasks != NULL) { -34 for (i = 0; i < nfakewriters; i++) { -35 if (fakewriter_tasks[i] != NULL) { -36 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( -37 "Stopping rcu_torture_fakewriter task"); -38 kthread_stop(fakewriter_tasks[i]); -39 } -40 fakewriter_tasks[i] = NULL; -41 } -42 kfree(fakewriter_tasks); -43 fakewriter_tasks = NULL; -44 } -45 -46 if (stats_task != NULL) { -47 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_stats task"); -48 kthread_stop(stats_task); -49 } -50 stats_task = NULL; -51 -52 /* Wait for all RCU callbacks to fire. */ -53 rcu_barrier(); -54 -55 rcu_torture_stats_print(); /* -After- the stats thread is stopped! */ -56 -57 if (cur_ops->cleanup != NULL) -58 cur_ops->cleanup(); -59 if (atomic_read(&n_rcu_torture_error)) -60 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: FAILURE"); -61 else -62 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: SUCCESS"); -63 } + 10 } + 11 shuffler_task = NULL; + 12 + 13 if (writer_task != NULL) { + 14 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_writer task"); + 15 kthread_stop(writer_task); + 16 } + 17 writer_task = NULL; + 18 + 19 if (reader_tasks != NULL) { + 20 for (i = 0; i < nrealreaders; i++) { + 21 if (reader_tasks[i] != NULL) { + 22 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( + 23 "Stopping rcu_torture_reader task"); + 24 kthread_stop(reader_tasks[i]); + 25 } + 26 reader_tasks[i] = NULL; + 27 } + 28 kfree(reader_tasks); + 29 reader_tasks = NULL; + 30 } + 31 rcu_torture_current = NULL; + 32 + 33 if (fakewriter_tasks != NULL) { + 34 for (i = 0; i < nfakewriters; i++) { + 35 if (fakewriter_tasks[i] != NULL) { + 36 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING( + 37 "Stopping rcu_torture_fakewriter task"); + 38 kthread_stop(fakewriter_tasks[i]); + 39 } + 40 fakewriter_tasks[i] = NULL; + 41 } + 42 kfree(fakewriter_tasks); + 43 fakewriter_tasks = NULL; + 44 } + 45 + 46 if (stats_task != NULL) { + 47 VERBOSE_PRINTK_STRING("Stopping rcu_torture_stats task"); + 48 kthread_stop(stats_task); + 49 } + 50 stats_task = NULL; + 51 + 52 /* Wait for all RCU callbacks to fire. */ + 53 rcu_barrier(); + 54 + 55 rcu_torture_stats_print(); /* -After- the stats thread is stopped! */ + 56 + 57 if (cur_ops->cleanup != NULL) + 58 cur_ops->cleanup(); + 59 if (atomic_read(&n_rcu_torture_error)) + 60 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: FAILURE"); + 61 else + 62 rcu_torture_print_module_parms("End of test: SUCCESS"); + 63 } Line 6 sets a global variable that prevents any RCU callbacks from re-posting themselves. This will not be necessary in most cases, since @@ -176,9 +181,14 @@ for any pre-existing callbacks to complete. Then lines 55-62 print status and do operation-specific cleanup, and then return, permitting the module-unload operation to be completed. -Quick Quiz #1: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might +.. _rcubarrier_quiz_1: + +Quick Quiz #1: + Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might be required? +:ref:`Answer to Quick Quiz #1 <answer_rcubarrier_quiz_1>` + Your module might have additional complications. For example, if your module invokes call_rcu() from timers, you will need to first cancel all the timers, and only then invoke rcu_barrier() to wait for any remaining @@ -188,11 +198,12 @@ Of course, if you module uses call_rcu(), you will need to invoke rcu_barrier() before unloading. Similarly, if your module uses call_srcu(), you will need to invoke srcu_barrier() before unloading, and on the same srcu_struct structure. If your module uses call_rcu() --and- call_srcu(), then you will need to invoke rcu_barrier() -and- +**and** call_srcu(), then you will need to invoke rcu_barrier() **and** srcu_barrier(). Implementing rcu_barrier() +-------------------------- Dipankar Sarma's implementation of rcu_barrier() makes use of the fact that RCU callbacks are never reordered once queued on one of the per-CPU @@ -200,19 +211,19 @@ queues. His implementation queues an RCU callback on each of the per-CPU callback queues, and then waits until they have all started executing, at which point, all earlier RCU callbacks are guaranteed to have completed. -The original code for rcu_barrier() was as follows: +The original code for rcu_barrier() was as follows:: - 1 void rcu_barrier(void) - 2 { - 3 BUG_ON(in_interrupt()); - 4 /* Take cpucontrol mutex to protect against CPU hotplug */ - 5 mutex_lock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); - 6 init_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); - 7 atomic_set(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count, 0); - 8 on_each_cpu(rcu_barrier_func, NULL, 0, 1); - 9 wait_for_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); -10 mutex_unlock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); -11 } + 1 void rcu_barrier(void) + 2 { + 3 BUG_ON(in_interrupt()); + 4 /* Take cpucontrol mutex to protect against CPU hotplug */ + 5 mutex_lock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); + 6 init_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); + 7 atomic_set(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count, 0); + 8 on_each_cpu(rcu_barrier_func, NULL, 0, 1); + 9 wait_for_completion(&rcu_barrier_completion); + 10 mutex_unlock(&rcu_barrier_mutex); + 11 } Line 3 verifies that the caller is in process context, and lines 5 and 10 use rcu_barrier_mutex to ensure that only one rcu_barrier() is using the @@ -226,18 +237,18 @@ This code was rewritten in 2008 and several times thereafter, but this still gives the general idea. The rcu_barrier_func() runs on each CPU, where it invokes call_rcu() -to post an RCU callback, as follows: +to post an RCU callback, as follows:: - 1 static void rcu_barrier_func(void *notused) - 2 { - 3 int cpu = smp_processor_id(); - 4 struct rcu_data *rdp = &per_cpu(rcu_data, cpu); - 5 struct rcu_head *head; + 1 static void rcu_barrier_func(void *notused) + 2 { + 3 int cpu = smp_processor_id(); + 4 struct rcu_data *rdp = &per_cpu(rcu_data, cpu); + 5 struct rcu_head *head; 6 - 7 head = &rdp->barrier; - 8 atomic_inc(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count); - 9 call_rcu(head, rcu_barrier_callback); -10 } + 7 head = &rdp->barrier; + 8 atomic_inc(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count); + 9 call_rcu(head, rcu_barrier_callback); + 10 } Lines 3 and 4 locate RCU's internal per-CPU rcu_data structure, which contains the struct rcu_head that needed for the later call to @@ -248,20 +259,25 @@ the current CPU's queue. The rcu_barrier_callback() function simply atomically decrements the rcu_barrier_cpu_count variable and finalizes the completion when it -reaches zero, as follows: +reaches zero, as follows:: 1 static void rcu_barrier_callback(struct rcu_head *notused) 2 { - 3 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count)) - 4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion); + 3 if (atomic_dec_and_test(&rcu_barrier_cpu_count)) + 4 complete(&rcu_barrier_completion); 5 } -Quick Quiz #2: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes +.. _rcubarrier_quiz_2: + +Quick Quiz #2: + What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in rcu_barrier() returning prematurely? +:ref:`Answer to Quick Quiz #2 <answer_rcubarrier_quiz_2>` + The current rcu_barrier() implementation is more complex, due to the need to avoid disturbing idle CPUs (especially on battery-powered systems) and the need to minimally disturb non-idle CPUs in real-time systems. @@ -269,6 +285,7 @@ However, the code above illustrates the concepts. rcu_barrier() Summary +--------------------- The rcu_barrier() primitive has seen relatively little use, since most code using RCU is in the core kernel rather than in modules. However, if @@ -277,8 +294,12 @@ so that your module may be safely unloaded. Answers to Quick Quizzes +------------------------ + +.. _answer_rcubarrier_quiz_1: -Quick Quiz #1: Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might +Quick Quiz #1: + Is there any other situation where rcu_barrier() might be required? Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally @@ -292,7 +313,12 @@ Answer: Interestingly enough, rcu_barrier() was not originally implementing rcutorture, and found that rcu_barrier() solves this problem as well. -Quick Quiz #2: What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes +:ref:`Back to Quick Quiz #1 <rcubarrier_quiz_1>` + +.. _answer_rcubarrier_quiz_2: + +Quick Quiz #2: + What happens if CPU 0's rcu_barrier_func() executes immediately (thus incrementing rcu_barrier_cpu_count to the value one), but the other CPU's rcu_barrier_func() invocations are delayed for a full grace period? Couldn't this result in @@ -323,3 +349,5 @@ Answer: This cannot happen. The reason is that on_each_cpu() has its last is to add an rcu_read_lock() before line 8 of rcu_barrier() and an rcu_read_unlock() after line 8 of this same function. If you can think of a better change, please let me know! + +:ref:`Back to Quick Quiz #2 <rcubarrier_quiz_2>` diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt index f48f4621ccbc..a360a8796710 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/stallwarn.txt @@ -225,18 +225,13 @@ an estimate of the total number of RCU callbacks queued across all CPUs In kernels with CONFIG_RCU_FAST_NO_HZ, more information is printed for each CPU: - 0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 Nonlazy posted: ..D + 0: (64628 ticks this GP) idle=dd5/3fffffffffffffff/0 softirq=82/543 last_accelerate: a345/d342 dyntick_enabled: 1 The "last_accelerate:" prints the low-order 16 bits (in hex) of the jiffies counter when this CPU last invoked rcu_try_advance_all_cbs() from rcu_needs_cpu() or last invoked rcu_accelerate_cbs() from -rcu_prepare_for_idle(). The "Nonlazy posted:" indicates lazy-callback -status, so that an "l" indicates that all callbacks were lazy at the start -of the last idle period and an "L" indicates that there are currently -no non-lazy callbacks (in both cases, "." is printed otherwise, as -shown above) and "D" indicates that dyntick-idle processing is enabled -("." is printed otherwise, for example, if disabled via the "nohz=" -kernel boot parameter). +rcu_prepare_for_idle(). "dyntick_enabled: 1" indicates that dyntick-idle +processing is enabled. If the grace period ends just as the stall warning starts printing, there will be a spurious stall-warning message, which will include diff --git a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.rst index 58ba05c4d97f..c7f147b8034f 100644 --- a/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.txt +++ b/Documentation/RCU/whatisRCU.rst @@ -1,15 +1,18 @@ +.. _whatisrcu_doc: + What is RCU? -- "Read, Copy, Update" +====================================== Please note that the "What is RCU?" LWN series is an excellent place to start learning about RCU: -1. What is RCU, Fundamentally? http://lwn.net/Articles/262464/ -2. What is RCU? Part 2: Usage http://lwn.net/Articles/263130/ -3. RCU part 3: the RCU API http://lwn.net/Articles/264090/ -4. The RCU API, 2010 Edition http://lwn.net/Articles/418853/ - 2010 Big API Table http://lwn.net/Articles/419086/ -5. The RCU API, 2014 Edition http://lwn.net/Articles/609904/ - 2014 Big API Table http://lwn.net/Articles/609973/ +| 1. What is RCU, Fundamentally? http://lwn.net/Articles/262464/ +| 2. What is RCU? Part 2: Usage http://lwn.net/Articles/263130/ +| 3. RCU part 3: the RCU API http://lwn.net/Articles/264090/ +| 4. The RCU API, 2010 Edition http://lwn.net/Articles/418853/ +| 2010 Big API Table http://lwn.net/Articles/419086/ +| 5. The RCU API, 2014 Edition http://lwn.net/Articles/609904/ +| 2014 Big API Table http://lwn.net/Articles/609973/ What is RCU? @@ -24,14 +27,21 @@ the experience has been that different people must take different paths to arrive at an understanding of RCU. This document provides several different paths, as follows: -1. RCU OVERVIEW -2. WHAT IS RCU'S CORE API? -3. WHAT ARE SOME EXAMPLE USES OF CORE RCU API? -4. WHAT IF MY UPDATING THREAD CANNOT BLOCK? -5. WHAT ARE SOME SIMPLE IMPLEMENTATIONS OF RCU? -6. ANALOGY WITH READER-WRITER LOCKING -7. FULL LIST OF RCU APIs -8. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES +:ref:`1. RCU OVERVIEW <1_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`2. WHAT IS RCU'S CORE API? <2_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`3. WHAT ARE SOME EXAMPLE USES OF CORE RCU API? <3_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`4. WHAT IF MY UPDATING THREAD CANNOT BLOCK? <4_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`5. WHAT ARE SOME SIMPLE IMPLEMENTATIONS OF RCU? <5_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`6. ANALOGY WITH READER-WRITER LOCKING <6_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`7. FULL LIST OF RCU APIs <7_whatisRCU>` + +:ref:`8. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES <8_whatisRCU>` People who prefer starting with a conceptual overview should focus on Section 1, though most readers will profit by reading this section at @@ -49,8 +59,10 @@ everything, feel free to read the whole thing -- but if you are really that type of person, you have perused the source code and will therefore never need this document anyway. ;-) +.. _1_whatisRCU: 1. RCU OVERVIEW +---------------- The basic idea behind RCU is to split updates into "removal" and "reclamation" phases. The removal phase removes references to data items @@ -116,8 +128,10 @@ So how the heck can a reclaimer tell when a reader is done, given that readers are not doing any sort of synchronization operations??? Read on to learn about how RCU's API makes this easy. +.. _2_whatisRCU: 2. WHAT IS RCU'S CORE API? +--------------------------- The core RCU API is quite small: @@ -136,7 +150,7 @@ later. See the kernel docbook documentation for more info, or look directly at the function header comments. rcu_read_lock() - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ void rcu_read_lock(void); Used by a reader to inform the reclaimer that the reader is @@ -150,7 +164,7 @@ rcu_read_lock() longer-term references to data structures. rcu_read_unlock() - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ void rcu_read_unlock(void); Used by a reader to inform the reclaimer that the reader is @@ -158,15 +172,15 @@ rcu_read_unlock() read-side critical sections may be nested and/or overlapping. synchronize_rcu() - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ void synchronize_rcu(void); Marks the end of updater code and the beginning of reclaimer code. It does this by blocking until all pre-existing RCU read-side critical sections on all CPUs have completed. - Note that synchronize_rcu() will -not- necessarily wait for + Note that synchronize_rcu() will **not** necessarily wait for any subsequent RCU read-side critical sections to complete. - For example, consider the following sequence of events: + For example, consider the following sequence of events:: CPU 0 CPU 1 CPU 2 ----------------- ------------------------- --------------- @@ -182,7 +196,7 @@ synchronize_rcu() any that begin after synchronize_rcu() is invoked. Of course, synchronize_rcu() does not necessarily return - -immediately- after the last pre-existing RCU read-side critical + **immediately** after the last pre-existing RCU read-side critical section completes. For one thing, there might well be scheduling delays. For another thing, many RCU implementations process requests in batches in order to improve efficiencies, which can @@ -211,10 +225,10 @@ synchronize_rcu() checklist.txt for some approaches to limiting the update rate. rcu_assign_pointer() - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ void rcu_assign_pointer(p, typeof(p) v); - Yes, rcu_assign_pointer() -is- implemented as a macro, though it + Yes, rcu_assign_pointer() **is** implemented as a macro, though it would be cool to be able to declare a function in this manner. (Compiler experts will no doubt disagree.) @@ -231,7 +245,7 @@ rcu_assign_pointer() the _rcu list-manipulation primitives such as list_add_rcu(). rcu_dereference() - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ typeof(p) rcu_dereference(p); Like rcu_assign_pointer(), rcu_dereference() must be implemented @@ -248,13 +262,13 @@ rcu_dereference() Common coding practice uses rcu_dereference() to copy an RCU-protected pointer to a local variable, then dereferences - this local variable, for example as follows: + this local variable, for example as follows:: p = rcu_dereference(head.next); return p->data; However, in this case, one could just as easily combine these - into one statement: + into one statement:: return rcu_dereference(head.next)->data; @@ -266,8 +280,8 @@ rcu_dereference() unnecessary overhead on Alpha CPUs. Note that the value returned by rcu_dereference() is valid - only within the enclosing RCU read-side critical section [1]. - For example, the following is -not- legal: + only within the enclosing RCU read-side critical section [1]_. + For example, the following is **not** legal:: rcu_read_lock(); p = rcu_dereference(head.next); @@ -290,9 +304,9 @@ rcu_dereference() at any time, including immediately after the rcu_dereference(). And, again like rcu_assign_pointer(), rcu_dereference() is typically used indirectly, via the _rcu list-manipulation - primitives, such as list_for_each_entry_rcu() [2]. + primitives, such as list_for_each_entry_rcu() [2]_. - [1] The variant rcu_dereference_protected() can be used outside +.. [1] The variant rcu_dereference_protected() can be used outside of an RCU read-side critical section as long as the usage is protected by locks acquired by the update-side code. This variant avoids the lockdep warning that would happen when using (for @@ -305,7 +319,7 @@ rcu_dereference() a lockdep splat is emitted. See Documentation/RCU/Design/Requirements/Requirements.rst and the API's code comments for more details and example usage. - [2] If the list_for_each_entry_rcu() instance might be used by +.. [2] If the list_for_each_entry_rcu() instance might be used by update-side code as well as by RCU readers, then an additional lockdep expression can be added to its list of arguments. For example, given an additional "lock_is_held(&mylock)" argument, @@ -315,6 +329,7 @@ rcu_dereference() The following diagram shows how each API communicates among the reader, updater, and reclaimer. +:: rcu_assign_pointer() @@ -375,12 +390,16 @@ c. RCU applied to scheduler and interrupt/NMI-handler tasks. Again, most uses will be of (a). The (b) and (c) cases are important for specialized uses, but are relatively uncommon. +.. _3_whatisRCU: 3. WHAT ARE SOME EXAMPLE USES OF CORE RCU API? +----------------------------------------------- This section shows a simple use of the core RCU API to protect a global pointer to a dynamically allocated structure. More-typical -uses of RCU may be found in listRCU.txt, arrayRCU.txt, and NMI-RCU.txt. +uses of RCU may be found in :ref:`listRCU.rst <list_rcu_doc>`, +:ref:`arrayRCU.rst <array_rcu_doc>`, and :ref:`NMI-RCU.rst <NMI_rcu_doc>`. +:: struct foo { int a; @@ -440,40 +459,43 @@ uses of RCU may be found in listRCU.txt, arrayRCU.txt, and NMI-RCU.txt. So, to sum up: -o Use rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() to guard RCU +- Use rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() to guard RCU read-side critical sections. -o Within an RCU read-side critical section, use rcu_dereference() +- Within an RCU read-side critical section, use rcu_dereference() to dereference RCU-protected pointers. -o Use some solid scheme (such as locks or semaphores) to +- Use some solid scheme (such as locks or semaphores) to keep concurrent updates from interfering with each other. -o Use rcu_assign_pointer() to update an RCU-protected pointer. +- Use rcu_assign_pointer() to update an RCU-protected pointer. This primitive protects concurrent readers from the updater, - -not- concurrent updates from each other! You therefore still + **not** concurrent updates from each other! You therefore still need to use locking (or something similar) to keep concurrent rcu_assign_pointer() primitives from interfering with each other. -o Use synchronize_rcu() -after- removing a data element from an - RCU-protected data structure, but -before- reclaiming/freeing +- Use synchronize_rcu() **after** removing a data element from an + RCU-protected data structure, but **before** reclaiming/freeing the data element, in order to wait for the completion of all RCU read-side critical sections that might be referencing that data item. See checklist.txt for additional rules to follow when using RCU. -And again, more-typical uses of RCU may be found in listRCU.txt, -arrayRCU.txt, and NMI-RCU.txt. +And again, more-typical uses of RCU may be found in :ref:`listRCU.rst +<list_rcu_doc>`, :ref:`arrayRCU.rst <array_rcu_doc>`, and :ref:`NMI-RCU.rst +<NMI_rcu_doc>`. +.. _4_whatisRCU: 4. WHAT IF MY UPDATING THREAD CANNOT BLOCK? +-------------------------------------------- In the example above, foo_update_a() blocks until a grace period elapses. This is quite simple, but in some cases one cannot afford to wait so long -- there might be other high-priority work to be done. In such cases, one uses call_rcu() rather than synchronize_rcu(). -The call_rcu() API is as follows: +The call_rcu() API is as follows:: void call_rcu(struct rcu_head * head, void (*func)(struct rcu_head *head)); @@ -481,7 +503,7 @@ The call_rcu() API is as follows: This function invokes func(head) after a grace period has elapsed. This invocation might happen from either softirq or process context, so the function is not permitted to block. The foo struct needs to -have an rcu_head structure added, perhaps as follows: +have an rcu_head structure added, perhaps as follows:: struct foo { int a; @@ -490,7 +512,7 @@ have an rcu_head structure added, perhaps as follows: struct rcu_head rcu; }; -The foo_update_a() function might then be written as follows: +The foo_update_a() function might then be written as follows:: /* * Create a new struct foo that is the same as the one currently @@ -520,7 +542,7 @@ The foo_update_a() function might then be written as follows: call_rcu(&old_fp->rcu, foo_reclaim); } -The foo_reclaim() function might appear as follows: +The foo_reclaim() function might appear as follows:: void foo_reclaim(struct rcu_head *rp) { @@ -544,7 +566,7 @@ namely foo_reclaim(). The summary of advice is the same as for the previous section, except that we are now using call_rcu() rather than synchronize_rcu(): -o Use call_rcu() -after- removing a data element from an +- Use call_rcu() **after** removing a data element from an RCU-protected data structure in order to register a callback function that will be invoked after the completion of all RCU read-side critical sections that might be referencing that @@ -552,14 +574,16 @@ o Use call_rcu() -after- removing a data element from an If the callback for call_rcu() is not doing anything more than calling kfree() on the structure, you can use kfree_rcu() instead of call_rcu() -to avoid having to write your own callback: +to avoid having to write your own callback:: kfree_rcu(old_fp, rcu); Again, see checklist.txt for additional rules governing the use of RCU. +.. _5_whatisRCU: 5. WHAT ARE SOME SIMPLE IMPLEMENTATIONS OF RCU? +------------------------------------------------ One of the nice things about RCU is that it has extremely simple "toy" implementations that are a good first step towards understanding the @@ -579,7 +603,7 @@ more details on the current implementation as of early 2004. 5A. "TOY" IMPLEMENTATION #1: LOCKING - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ This section presents a "toy" RCU implementation that is based on familiar locking primitives. Its overhead makes it a non-starter for real-life use, as does its lack of scalability. It is also unsuitable @@ -591,7 +615,7 @@ you allow nested rcu_read_lock() calls, you can deadlock. However, it is probably the easiest implementation to relate to, so is a good starting point. -It is extremely simple: +It is extremely simple:: static DEFINE_RWLOCK(rcu_gp_mutex); @@ -614,7 +638,7 @@ It is extremely simple: [You can ignore rcu_assign_pointer() and rcu_dereference() without missing much. But here are simplified versions anyway. And whatever you do, -don't forget about them when submitting patches making use of RCU!] +don't forget about them when submitting patches making use of RCU!]:: #define rcu_assign_pointer(p, v) \ ({ \ @@ -647,18 +671,23 @@ that the only thing that can block rcu_read_lock() is a synchronize_rcu(). But synchronize_rcu() does not acquire any locks while holding rcu_gp_mutex, so there can be no deadlock cycle. -Quick Quiz #1: Why is this argument naive? How could a deadlock +.. _quiz_1: + +Quick Quiz #1: + Why is this argument naive? How could a deadlock occur when using this algorithm in a real-world Linux kernel? How could this deadlock be avoided? +:ref:`Answers to Quick Quiz <8_whatisRCU>` 5B. "TOY" EXAMPLE #2: CLASSIC RCU - +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ This section presents a "toy" RCU implementation that is based on "classic RCU". It is also short on performance (but only for updates) and on features such as hotplug CPU and the ability to run in CONFIG_PREEMPT kernels. The definitions of rcu_dereference() and rcu_assign_pointer() are the same as those shown in the preceding section, so they are omitted. +:: void rcu_read_lock(void) { } @@ -683,14 +712,14 @@ CPU in turn. The run_on() primitive can be implemented straightforwardly in terms of the sched_setaffinity() primitive. Of course, a somewhat less "toy" implementation would restore the affinity upon completion rather than just leaving all tasks running on the last CPU, but when I said -"toy", I meant -toy-! +"toy", I meant **toy**! So how the heck is this supposed to work??? Remember that it is illegal to block while in an RCU read-side critical section. Therefore, if a given CPU executes a context switch, we know that it must have completed all preceding RCU read-side critical sections. -Once -all- CPUs have executed a context switch, then -all- preceding +Once **all** CPUs have executed a context switch, then **all** preceding RCU read-side critical sections will have completed. So, suppose that we remove a data item from its structure and then invoke @@ -698,19 +727,32 @@ synchronize_rcu(). Once synchronize_rcu() returns, we are guaranteed that there are no RCU read-side critical sections holding a reference to that data item, so we can safely reclaim it. -Quick Quiz #2: Give an example where Classic RCU's read-side - overhead is -negative-. +.. _quiz_2: + +Quick Quiz #2: + Give an example where Classic RCU's read-side + overhead is **negative**. + +:ref:`Answers to Quick Quiz <8_whatisRCU>` -Quick Quiz #3: If it is illegal to block in an RCU read-side +.. _quiz_3: + +Quick Quiz #3: + If it is illegal to block in an RCU read-side critical section, what the heck do you do in PREEMPT_RT, where normal spinlocks can block??? +:ref:`Answers to Quick Quiz <8_whatisRCU>` + +.. _6_whatisRCU: 6. ANALOGY WITH READER-WRITER LOCKING +-------------------------------------- Although RCU can be used in many different ways, a very common use of RCU is analogous to reader-writer locking. The following unified diff shows how closely related RCU and reader-writer locking can be. +:: @@ -5,5 +5,5 @@ struct el { int data; @@ -762,7 +804,7 @@ diff shows how closely related RCU and reader-writer locking can be. return 0; } -Or, for those who prefer a side-by-side listing: +Or, for those who prefer a side-by-side listing:: 1 struct el { 1 struct el { 2 struct list_head list; 2 struct list_head list; @@ -774,40 +816,44 @@ Or, for those who prefer a side-by-side listing: 8 rwlock_t listmutex; 8 spinlock_t listmutex; 9 struct el head; 9 struct el head; - 1 int search(long key, int *result) 1 int search(long key, int *result) - 2 { 2 { - 3 struct list_head *lp; 3 struct list_head *lp; - 4 struct el *p; 4 struct el *p; - 5 5 - 6 read_lock(&listmutex); 6 rcu_read_lock(); - 7 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { 7 list_for_each_entry_rcu(p, head, lp) { - 8 if (p->key == key) { 8 if (p->key == key) { - 9 *result = p->data; 9 *result = p->data; -10 read_unlock(&listmutex); 10 rcu_read_unlock(); -11 return 1; 11 return 1; -12 } 12 } -13 } 13 } -14 read_unlock(&listmutex); 14 rcu_read_unlock(); -15 return 0; 15 return 0; -16 } 16 } - - 1 int delete(long key) 1 int delete(long key) - 2 { 2 { - 3 struct el *p; 3 struct el *p; - 4 4 - 5 write_lock(&listmutex); 5 spin_lock(&listmutex); - 6 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { 6 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { - 7 if (p->key == key) { 7 if (p->key == key) { - 8 list_del(&p->list); 8 list_del_rcu(&p->list); - 9 write_unlock(&listmutex); 9 spin_unlock(&listmutex); - 10 synchronize_rcu(); -10 kfree(p); 11 kfree(p); -11 return 1; 12 return 1; -12 } 13 } -13 } 14 } -14 write_unlock(&listmutex); 15 spin_unlock(&listmutex); -15 return 0; 16 return 0; -16 } 17 } +:: + + 1 int search(long key, int *result) 1 int search(long key, int *result) + 2 { 2 { + 3 struct list_head *lp; 3 struct list_head *lp; + 4 struct el *p; 4 struct el *p; + 5 5 + 6 read_lock(&listmutex); 6 rcu_read_lock(); + 7 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { 7 list_for_each_entry_rcu(p, head, lp) { + 8 if (p->key == key) { 8 if (p->key == key) { + 9 *result = p->data; 9 *result = p->data; + 10 read_unlock(&listmutex); 10 rcu_read_unlock(); + 11 return 1; 11 return 1; + 12 } 12 } + 13 } 13 } + 14 read_unlock(&listmutex); 14 rcu_read_unlock(); + 15 return 0; 15 return 0; + 16 } 16 } + +:: + + 1 int delete(long key) 1 int delete(long key) + 2 { 2 { + 3 struct el *p; 3 struct el *p; + 4 4 + 5 write_lock(&listmutex); 5 spin_lock(&listmutex); + 6 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { 6 list_for_each_entry(p, head, lp) { + 7 if (p->key == key) { 7 if (p->key == key) { + 8 list_del(&p->list); 8 list_del_rcu(&p->list); + 9 write_unlock(&listmutex); 9 spin_unlock(&listmutex); + 10 synchronize_rcu(); + 10 kfree(p); 11 kfree(p); + 11 return 1; 12 return 1; + 12 } 13 } + 13 } 14 } + 14 write_unlock(&listmutex); 15 spin_unlock(&listmutex); + 15 return 0; 16 return 0; + 16 } 17 } Either way, the differences are quite small. Read-side locking moves to rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock, update-side locking moves from @@ -825,22 +871,27 @@ delete() can now block. If this is a problem, there is a callback-based mechanism that never blocks, namely call_rcu() or kfree_rcu(), that can be used in place of synchronize_rcu(). +.. _7_whatisRCU: 7. FULL LIST OF RCU APIs +------------------------- The RCU APIs are documented in docbook-format header comments in the Linux-kernel source code, but it helps to have a full list of the APIs, since there does not appear to be a way to categorize them in docbook. Here is the list, by category. -RCU list traversal: +RCU list traversal:: list_entry_rcu + list_entry_lockless list_first_entry_rcu list_next_rcu list_for_each_entry_rcu list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu list_for_each_entry_from_rcu + list_first_or_null_rcu + list_next_or_null_rcu hlist_first_rcu hlist_next_rcu hlist_pprev_rcu @@ -854,7 +905,7 @@ RCU list traversal: hlist_bl_first_rcu hlist_bl_for_each_entry_rcu -RCU pointer/list update: +RCU pointer/list update:: rcu_assign_pointer list_add_rcu @@ -864,10 +915,12 @@ RCU pointer/list update: hlist_add_behind_rcu hlist_add_before_rcu hlist_add_head_rcu + hlist_add_tail_rcu hlist_del_rcu hlist_del_init_rcu hlist_replace_rcu - list_splice_init_rcu() + list_splice_init_rcu + list_splice_tail_init_rcu hlist_nulls_del_init_rcu hlist_nulls_del_rcu hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu @@ -876,7 +929,9 @@ RCU pointer/list update: hlist_bl_del_rcu hlist_bl_set_first_rcu -RCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier +RCU:: + + Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock synchronize_net rcu_barrier rcu_read_unlock synchronize_rcu @@ -885,7 +940,9 @@ RCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_dereference_check kfree_rcu rcu_dereference_protected -bh: Critical sections Grace period Barrier +bh:: + + Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock_bh call_rcu rcu_barrier rcu_read_unlock_bh synchronize_rcu @@ -896,7 +953,9 @@ bh: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_dereference_bh_protected rcu_read_lock_bh_held -sched: Critical sections Grace period Barrier +sched:: + + Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock_sched call_rcu rcu_barrier rcu_read_unlock_sched synchronize_rcu @@ -910,7 +969,9 @@ sched: Critical sections Grace period Barrier rcu_read_lock_sched_held -SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier +SRCU:: + + Critical sections Grace period Barrier srcu_read_lock call_srcu srcu_barrier srcu_read_unlock synchronize_srcu @@ -918,13 +979,14 @@ SRCU: Critical sections Grace period Barrier srcu_dereference_check srcu_read_lock_held -SRCU: Initialization/cleanup +SRCU: Initialization/cleanup:: + DEFINE_SRCU DEFINE_STATIC_SRCU init_srcu_struct cleanup_srcu_struct -All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access +All: lockdep-checked RCU-protected pointer access:: rcu_access_pointer rcu_dereference_raw @@ -974,15 +1036,19 @@ g. Otherwise, use RCU. Of course, this all assumes that you have determined that RCU is in fact the right tool for your job. +.. _8_whatisRCU: 8. ANSWERS TO QUICK QUIZZES +---------------------------- -Quick Quiz #1: Why is this argument naive? How could a deadlock +Quick Quiz #1: + Why is this argument naive? How could a deadlock occur when using this algorithm in a real-world Linux kernel? [Referring to the lock-based "toy" RCU algorithm.] -Answer: Consider the following sequence of events: +Answer: + Consider the following sequence of events: 1. CPU 0 acquires some unrelated lock, call it "problematic_lock", disabling irq via @@ -1021,10 +1087,14 @@ Answer: Consider the following sequence of events: approach where tasks in RCU read-side critical sections cannot be blocked by tasks executing synchronize_rcu(). -Quick Quiz #2: Give an example where Classic RCU's read-side - overhead is -negative-. +:ref:`Back to Quick Quiz #1 <quiz_1>` + +Quick Quiz #2: + Give an example where Classic RCU's read-side + overhead is **negative**. -Answer: Imagine a single-CPU system with a non-CONFIG_PREEMPT +Answer: + Imagine a single-CPU system with a non-CONFIG_PREEMPT kernel where a routing table is used by process-context code, but can be updated by irq-context code (for example, by an "ICMP REDIRECT" packet). The usual way of handling @@ -1046,11 +1116,15 @@ Answer: Imagine a single-CPU system with a non-CONFIG_PREEMPT even the theoretical possibility of negative overhead for a synchronization primitive is a bit unexpected. ;-) -Quick Quiz #3: If it is illegal to block in an RCU read-side +:ref:`Back to Quick Quiz #2 <quiz_2>` + +Quick Quiz #3: + If it is illegal to block in an RCU read-side critical section, what the heck do you do in PREEMPT_RT, where normal spinlocks can block??? -Answer: Just as PREEMPT_RT permits preemption of spinlock +Answer: + Just as PREEMPT_RT permits preemption of spinlock critical sections, it permits preemption of RCU read-side critical sections. It also permits spinlocks blocking while in RCU read-side critical @@ -1069,6 +1143,7 @@ Answer: Just as PREEMPT_RT permits preemption of spinlock Besides, how does the computer know what pizza parlor the human being went to??? +:ref:`Back to Quick Quiz #3 <quiz_3>` ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/fan_performance_states.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/fan_performance_states.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..21d233ca50d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/fan_performance_states.rst @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=========================== +ACPI Fan Performance States +=========================== + +When the optional _FPS object is present under an ACPI device representing a +fan (for example, PNP0C0B or INT3404), the ACPI fan driver creates additional +"state*" attributes in the sysfs directory of the ACPI device in question. +These attributes list properties of fan performance states. + +For more information on _FPS refer to the ACPI specification at: + +http://uefi.org/specifications + +For instance, the contents of the INT3404 ACPI device sysfs directory +may look as follows:: + + $ ls -l /sys/bus/acpi/devices/INT3404:00/ + total 0 +... + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state0 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state1 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state10 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state11 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state2 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state3 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state4 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state5 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state6 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state7 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state8 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 20:38 state9 + -r--r--r-- 1 root root 4096 Dec 13 01:00 status + ... + +where each of the "state*" files represents one performance state of the fan +and contains a colon-separated list of 5 integer numbers (fields) with the +following interpretation:: + +control_percent:trip_point_index:speed_rpm:noise_level_mdb:power_mw + +* ``control_percent``: The percent value to be used to set the fan speed to a + specific level using the _FSL object (0-100). + +* ``trip_point_index``: The active cooling trip point number that corresponds + to this performance state (0-9). + +* ``speed_rpm``: Speed of the fan in rotations per minute. + +* ``noise_level_mdb``: Audible noise emitted by the fan in this state in + millidecibels. + +* ``power_mw``: Power draw of the fan in this state in milliwatts. + +For example:: + + $cat /sys/bus/acpi/devices/INT3404:00/state1 + 25:0:3200:12500:1250 + +When a given field is not populated or its value provided by the platform +firmware is invalid, the "not-defined" string is shown instead of the value. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst index 4d13eeea1eca..71277689ad97 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/acpi/index.rst @@ -12,3 +12,4 @@ the Linux ACPI support. dsdt-override ssdt-overlays cppc_sysfs + fan_performance_states diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/blockdev/zram.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/blockdev/zram.rst index 6eccf13219ff..27c77d853028 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/blockdev/zram.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/blockdev/zram.rst @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ ======================================== -zram: Compressed RAM based block devices +zram: Compressed RAM-based block devices ======================================== Introduction ============ -The zram module creates RAM based block devices named /dev/zram<id> +The zram module creates RAM-based block devices named /dev/zram<id> (<id> = 0, 1, ...). Pages written to these disks are compressed and stored in memory itself. These disks allow very fast I/O and compression provides -good amounts of memory savings. Some of the usecases include /tmp storage, -use as swap disks, various caches under /var and maybe many more :) +good amounts of memory savings. Some of the use cases include /tmp storage, +use as swap disks, various caches under /var and maybe many more. :) Statistics for individual zram devices are exported through sysfs nodes at /sys/block/zram<id>/ @@ -43,17 +43,17 @@ The list of possible return codes: ======== ============================================================= -EBUSY an attempt to modify an attribute that cannot be changed once - the device has been initialised. Please reset device first; + the device has been initialised. Please reset device first. -ENOMEM zram was not able to allocate enough memory to fulfil your - needs; + needs. -EINVAL invalid input has been provided. ======== ============================================================= -If you use 'echo', the returned value that is changed by 'echo' utility, +If you use 'echo', the returned value is set by the 'echo' utility, and, in general case, something like:: echo 3 > /sys/block/zram0/max_comp_streams - if [ $? -ne 0 ]; + if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then handle_error fi @@ -65,7 +65,8 @@ should suffice. :: modprobe zram num_devices=4 - This creates 4 devices: /dev/zram{0,1,2,3} + +This creates 4 devices: /dev/zram{0,1,2,3} num_devices parameter is optional and tells zram how many devices should be pre-created. Default: 1. @@ -73,12 +74,12 @@ pre-created. Default: 1. 2) Set max number of compression streams ======================================== -Regardless the value passed to this attribute, ZRAM will always -allocate multiple compression streams - one per online CPUs - thus +Regardless of the value passed to this attribute, ZRAM will always +allocate multiple compression streams - one per online CPU - thus allowing several concurrent compression operations. The number of allocated compression streams goes down when some of the CPUs become offline. There is no single-compression-stream mode anymore, -unless you are running a UP system or has only 1 CPU online. +unless you are running a UP system or have only 1 CPU online. To find out how many streams are currently available:: @@ -89,7 +90,7 @@ To find out how many streams are currently available:: Using comp_algorithm device attribute one can see available and currently selected (shown in square brackets) compression algorithms, -change selected compression algorithm (once the device is initialised +or change the selected compression algorithm (once the device is initialised there is no way to change compression algorithm). Examples:: @@ -167,9 +168,9 @@ Examples:: zram provides a control interface, which enables dynamic (on-demand) device addition and removal. -In order to add a new /dev/zramX device, perform read operation on hot_add -attribute. This will return either new device's device id (meaning that you -can use /dev/zram<id>) or error code. +In order to add a new /dev/zramX device, perform a read operation on the hot_add +attribute. This will return either the new device's device id (meaning that you +can use /dev/zram<id>) or an error code. Example:: @@ -186,8 +187,8 @@ execute:: Per-device statistics are exported as various nodes under /sys/block/zram<id>/ -A brief description of exported device attributes. For more details please -read Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram. +A brief description of exported device attributes follows. For more details +please read Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-zram. ====================== ====== =============================================== Name access description @@ -245,7 +246,7 @@ whitespace: File /sys/block/zram<id>/mm_stat -The stat file represents device's mm statistics. It consists of a single +The mm_stat file represents the device's mm statistics. It consists of a single line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace: ================ ============================================================= @@ -261,7 +262,7 @@ line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace: Unit: bytes mem_limit the maximum amount of memory ZRAM can use to store the compressed data - mem_used_max the maximum amount of memory zram have consumed to + mem_used_max the maximum amount of memory zram has consumed to store the data same_pages the number of same element filled pages written to this disk. No memory is allocated for such pages. @@ -271,7 +272,7 @@ line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace: File /sys/block/zram<id>/bd_stat -The stat file represents device's backing device statistics. It consists of +The bd_stat file represents a device's backing device statistics. It consists of a single line of text and contains the following stats separated by whitespace: ============== ============================================================= @@ -316,9 +317,9 @@ To use the feature, admin should set up backing device via:: echo /dev/sda5 > /sys/block/zramX/backing_dev before disksize setting. It supports only partition at this moment. -If admin want to use incompressible page writeback, they could do via:: +If admin wants to use incompressible page writeback, they could do via:: - echo huge > /sys/block/zramX/write + echo huge > /sys/block/zramX/writeback To use idle page writeback, first, user need to declare zram pages as idle:: @@ -326,7 +327,7 @@ as idle:: echo all > /sys/block/zramX/idle From now on, any pages on zram are idle pages. The idle mark -will be removed until someone request access of the block. +will be removed until someone requests access of the block. IOW, unless there is access request, those pages are still idle pages. Admin can request writeback of those idle pages at right timing via:: @@ -341,16 +342,16 @@ to guarantee storage health for entire product life. To overcome the concern, zram supports "writeback_limit" feature. The "writeback_limit_enable"'s default value is 0 so that it doesn't limit -any writeback. IOW, if admin want to apply writeback budget, he should +any writeback. IOW, if admin wants to apply writeback budget, he should enable writeback_limit_enable via:: $ echo 1 > /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit_enable Once writeback_limit_enable is set, zram doesn't allow any writeback -until admin set the budget via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit. +until admin sets the budget via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit. (If admin doesn't enable writeback_limit_enable, writeback_limit's value -assigned via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit is meaninless.) +assigned via /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit is meaningless.) If admin want to limit writeback as per-day 400M, he could do it like below:: @@ -361,13 +362,13 @@ like below:: /sys/block/zram0/writeback_limit. $ echo 1 > /sys/block/zram0/writeback_limit_enable -If admin want to allow further write again once the bugdet is exausted, +If admins want to allow further write again once the bugdet is exhausted, he could do it like below:: $ echo $((400<<MB_SHIFT>>4K_SHIFT)) > \ /sys/block/zram0/writeback_limit -If admin want to see remaining writeback budget since he set:: +If admin wants to see remaining writeback budget since last set:: $ cat /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit @@ -375,12 +376,12 @@ If admin want to disable writeback limit, he could do:: $ echo 0 > /sys/block/zramX/writeback_limit_enable -The writeback_limit count will reset whenever you reset zram(e.g., +The writeback_limit count will reset whenever you reset zram (e.g., system reboot, echo 1 > /sys/block/zramX/reset) so keeping how many of writeback happened until you reset the zram to allocate extra writeback budget in next setting is user's job. -If admin want to measure writeback count in a certain period, he could +If admin wants to measure writeback count in a certain period, he could know it via /sys/block/zram0/bd_stat's 3rd column. memory tracking diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst index 0636bcb60b5a..3f801461f0f3 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst @@ -61,6 +61,8 @@ v1 is available under Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v1/. 5-6. Device 5-7. RDMA 5-7-1. RDMA Interface Files + 5-8. HugeTLB + 5.8-1. HugeTLB Interface Files 5-8. Misc 5-8-1. perf_event 5-N. Non-normative information @@ -2056,6 +2058,33 @@ RDMA Interface Files mlx4_0 hca_handle=1 hca_object=20 ocrdma1 hca_handle=1 hca_object=23 +HugeTLB +------- + +The HugeTLB controller allows to limit the HugeTLB usage per control group and +enforces the controller limit during page fault. + +HugeTLB Interface Files +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + + hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.current + Show current usage for "hugepagesize" hugetlb. It exists for all + the cgroup except root. + + hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.max + Set/show the hard limit of "hugepagesize" hugetlb usage. + The default value is "max". It exists for all the cgroup except root. + + hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.events + A read-only flat-keyed file which exists on non-root cgroups. + + max + The number of allocation failure due to HugeTLB limit + + hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.events.local + Similar to hugetlb.<hugepagesize>.events but the fields in the file + are local to the cgroup i.e. not hierarchical. The file modified event + generated on this file reflects only the local events. Misc ---- diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/device-mapper/dm-raid.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/device-mapper/dm-raid.rst index f6344675e395..695a2ea1d1ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/device-mapper/dm-raid.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/device-mapper/dm-raid.rst @@ -419,3 +419,5 @@ Version History rebuild errors. 1.15.0 Fix size extensions not being synchronized in case of new MD bitmap pages allocated; also fix those not occuring after previous reductions + 1.15.1 Fix argument count and arguments for rebuild/write_mostly/journal_(dev|mode) + on the status line. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt index 1c5d2281efc9..2a97aaec8b12 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/devices.txt @@ -319,7 +319,7 @@ 182 = /dev/perfctr Performance-monitoring counters 183 = /dev/hwrng Generic random number generator 184 = /dev/cpu/microcode CPU microcode update interface - 186 = /dev/atomicps Atomic shapshot of process state data + 186 = /dev/atomicps Atomic snapshot of process state data 187 = /dev/irnet IrNET device 188 = /dev/smbusbios SMBus BIOS 189 = /dev/ussp_ctl User space serial port control diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst index 059ddcbe769d..9bc93f0ce0c9 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/ext4.rst @@ -181,14 +181,17 @@ When mounting an ext4 filesystem, the following option are accepted: system after its metadata has been committed to the journal. commit=nrsec (*) - Ext4 can be told to sync all its data and metadata every 'nrsec' - seconds. The default value is 5 seconds. This means that if you lose - your power, you will lose as much as the latest 5 seconds of work (your - filesystem will not be damaged though, thanks to the journaling). This - default value (or any low value) will hurt performance, but it's good - for data-safety. Setting it to 0 will have the same effect as leaving - it at the default (5 seconds). Setting it to very large values will - improve performance. + This setting limits the maximum age of the running transaction to + 'nrsec' seconds. The default value is 5 seconds. This means that if + you lose your power, you will lose as much as the latest 5 seconds of + metadata changes (your filesystem will not be damaged though, thanks + to the journaling). This default value (or any low value) will hurt + performance, but it's good for data-safety. Setting it to 0 will have + the same effect as leaving it at the default (5 seconds). Setting it + to very large values will improve performance. Note that due to + delayed allocation even older data can be lost on power failure since + writeback of those data begins only after time set in + /proc/sys/vm/dirty_expire_centisecs. barrier=<0|1(*)>, barrier(*), nobarrier This enables/disables the use of write barriers in the jbd code. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst index 4405b7485312..4433f3929481 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/index.rst @@ -76,6 +76,7 @@ configure specific aspects of kernel behavior to your liking. device-mapper/index efi-stub ext4 + nfs/index gpio/index highuid hw_random diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt index ade4e6ec23e0..ec92120a7952 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt @@ -511,7 +511,7 @@ 1 -- check protection requested by application. Default value is set via a kernel config option. Value can be changed at runtime via - /selinux/checkreqprot. + /sys/fs/selinux/checkreqprot. cio_ignore= [S390] See Documentation/s390/common_io.rst for details. @@ -1165,10 +1165,10 @@ efi= [EFI] Format: { "old_map", "nochunk", "noruntime", "debug", - "nosoftreserve" } + "nosoftreserve", "disable_early_pci_dma", + "no_disable_early_pci_dma" } old_map [X86-64]: switch to the old ioremap-based EFI - runtime services mapping. 32-bit still uses this one by - default. + runtime services mapping. [Needs CONFIG_X86_UV=y] nochunk: disable reading files in "chunks" in the EFI boot stub, as chunking can cause problems with some firmware implementations. @@ -1180,6 +1180,10 @@ claim. Specify efi=nosoftreserve to disable this reservation and treat the memory by its base type (i.e. EFI_CONVENTIONAL_MEMORY / "System RAM"). + disable_early_pci_dma: Disable the busmaster bit on all + PCI bridges while in the EFI boot stub + no_disable_early_pci_dma: Leave the busmaster bit set + on all PCI bridges while in the EFI boot stub efi_no_storage_paranoia [EFI; X86] Using this parameter you can use more than 50% of @@ -1245,7 +1249,8 @@ 0 -- permissive (log only, no denials). 1 -- enforcing (deny and log). Default value is 0. - Value can be changed at runtime via /selinux/enforce. + Value can be changed at runtime via + /sys/fs/selinux/enforce. erst_disable [ACPI] Disable Error Record Serialization Table (ERST) @@ -1933,9 +1938,31 @@ <cpu number> begins at 0 and the maximum value is "number of CPUs in system - 1". - The format of <cpu-list> is described above. - + managed_irq + + Isolate from being targeted by managed interrupts + which have an interrupt mask containing isolated + CPUs. The affinity of managed interrupts is + handled by the kernel and cannot be changed via + the /proc/irq/* interfaces. + + This isolation is best effort and only effective + if the automatically assigned interrupt mask of a + device queue contains isolated and housekeeping + CPUs. If housekeeping CPUs are online then such + interrupts are directed to the housekeeping CPU + so that IO submitted on the housekeeping CPU + cannot disturb the isolated CPU. + + If a queue's affinity mask contains only isolated + CPUs then this parameter has no effect on the + interrupt routing decision, though interrupts are + only delivered when tasks running on those + isolated CPUs submit IO. IO submitted on + housekeeping CPUs has no influence on those + queues. + The format of <cpu-list> is described above. iucv= [HW,NET] @@ -3978,6 +4005,19 @@ test until boot completes in order to avoid interference. + rcuperf.kfree_rcu_test= [KNL] + Set to measure performance of kfree_rcu() flooding. + + rcuperf.kfree_nthreads= [KNL] + The number of threads running loops of kfree_rcu(). + + rcuperf.kfree_alloc_num= [KNL] + Number of allocations and frees done in an iteration. + + rcuperf.kfree_loops= [KNL] + Number of loops doing rcuperf.kfree_alloc_num number + of allocations and frees. + rcuperf.nreaders= [KNL] Set number of RCU readers. The value -1 selects N, where N is the number of CPUs. A value @@ -4348,9 +4388,7 @@ See security/selinux/Kconfig help text. 0 -- disable. 1 -- enable. - Default value is set via kernel config option. - If enabled at boot time, /selinux/disable can be used - later to disable prior to initial policy load. + Default value is 1. apparmor= [APPARMOR] Disable or enable AppArmor at boot time Format: { "0" | "1" } diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/fault_injection.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/fault_injection.rst index f3a5b0a8ac05..eb029c0c15ce 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/fault_injection.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/fault_injection.rst @@ -1,6 +1,7 @@ +=================== +NFS Fault Injection +=================== -Fault Injection -=============== Fault injection is a method for forcing errors that may not normally occur, or may be difficult to reproduce. Forcing these errors in a controlled environment can help the developer find and fix bugs before their code is shipped in a diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/index.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b5a3c90fac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,15 @@ +============= +NFS +============= + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + nfs-client + nfsroot + nfs-rdma + nfsd-admin-interfaces + nfs-idmapper + pnfs-block-server + pnfs-scsi-server + fault_injection diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-client.rst index f2571c8bef74..c4b777c7584b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-client.rst @@ -1,3 +1,6 @@ +========== +NFS Client +========== The NFS client ============== @@ -59,10 +62,11 @@ The DNS resolver NFSv4 allows for one server to refer the NFS client to data that has been migrated onto another server by means of the special "fs_locations" -attribute. See - http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3530#section-6 -and - http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-nfsv4-referrals-00 +attribute. See `RFC3530 Section 6: Filesystem Migration and Replication`_ and +`Implementation Guide for Referrals in NFSv4`_. + +.. _RFC3530 Section 6\: Filesystem Migration and Replication: http://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc3530#section-6 +.. _Implementation Guide for Referrals in NFSv4: http://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-nfsv4-referrals-00 The fs_locations information can take the form of either an ip address and a path, or a DNS hostname and a path. The latter requires the NFS client to @@ -78,8 +82,8 @@ Assuming that the user has the 'rpc_pipefs' filesystem mounted in the usual (2) If no valid entry exists, the helper script '/sbin/nfs_cache_getent' (may be changed using the 'nfs.cache_getent' kernel boot parameter) is run, with two arguments: - - the cache name, "dns_resolve" - - the hostname to resolve + - the cache name, "dns_resolve" + - the hostname to resolve (3) After looking up the corresponding ip address, the helper script writes the result into the rpc_pipefs pseudo-file @@ -94,43 +98,44 @@ Assuming that the user has the 'rpc_pipefs' filesystem mounted in the usual script, and <ttl> is the 'time to live' of this cache entry (in units of seconds). - Note: If <ip address> is invalid, say the string "0", then a negative - entry is created, which will cause the kernel to treat the hostname - as having no valid DNS translation. + .. note:: + If <ip address> is invalid, say the string "0", then a negative + entry is created, which will cause the kernel to treat the hostname + as having no valid DNS translation. A basic sample /sbin/nfs_cache_getent ===================================== - -#!/bin/bash -# -ttl=600 -# -cut=/usr/bin/cut -getent=/usr/bin/getent -rpc_pipefs=/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs -# -die() -{ - echo "Usage: $0 cache_name entry_name" - exit 1 -} - -[ $# -lt 2 ] && die -cachename="$1" -cache_path=${rpc_pipefs}/cache/${cachename}/channel - -case "${cachename}" in - dns_resolve) - name="$2" - result="$(${getent} hosts ${name} | ${cut} -f1 -d\ )" - [ -z "${result}" ] && result="0" - ;; - *) - die - ;; -esac -echo "${result} ${name} ${ttl}" >${cache_path} - +.. code-block:: sh + + #!/bin/bash + # + ttl=600 + # + cut=/usr/bin/cut + getent=/usr/bin/getent + rpc_pipefs=/var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs + # + die() + { + echo "Usage: $0 cache_name entry_name" + exit 1 + } + + [ $# -lt 2 ] && die + cachename="$1" + cache_path=${rpc_pipefs}/cache/${cachename}/channel + + case "${cachename}" in + dns_resolve) + name="$2" + result="$(${getent} hosts ${name} | ${cut} -f1 -d\ )" + [ -z "${result}" ] && result="0" + ;; + *) + die + ;; + esac + echo "${result} ${name} ${ttl}" >${cache_path} diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-idmapper.rst index b86831acd583..58b8e63412d5 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/idmapper.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-idmapper.rst @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ +============= +NFS ID Mapper +============= -========= -ID Mapper -========= Id mapper is used by NFS to translate user and group ids into names, and to translate user and group names into ids. Part of this translation involves performing an upcall to userspace to request the information. There are two @@ -20,22 +20,24 @@ legacy rpc.idmap daemon for the id mapping. This result will be stored in a custom NFS idmap cache. -=========== Configuring =========== + The file /etc/request-key.conf will need to be modified so /sbin/request-key can direct the upcall. The following line should be added: -#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ... -#====== ======= =============== =============== =============================== -create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600 +``#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ...`` +``#====== ======= =============== =============== ===============================`` +``create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600`` + This will direct all id_resolver requests to the program /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap. The last parameter, 600, defines how many seconds into the future the key will expire. This parameter is optional for /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap. When the timeout is not specified, nfs.idmap will default to 600 seconds. -id mapper uses for key descriptions: +id mapper uses for key descriptions:: + uid: Find the UID for the given user gid: Find the GID for the given group user: Find the user name for the given UID @@ -45,23 +47,24 @@ You can handle any of these individually, rather than using the generic upcall program. If you would like to use your own program for a uid lookup then you would edit your request-key.conf so it look similar to this: -#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ... -#====== ======= =============== =============== =============================== -create id_resolver uid:* * /some/other/program %k %d 600 -create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600 +``#OP TYPE DESCRIPTION CALLOUT INFO PROGRAM ARG1 ARG2 ARG3 ...`` +``#====== ======= =============== =============== ===============================`` +``create id_resolver uid:* * /some/other/program %k %d 600`` +``create id_resolver * * /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap %k %d 600`` + Notice that the new line was added above the line for the generic program. request-key will find the first matching line and corresponding program. In this case, /some/other/program will handle all uid lookups and /usr/sbin/nfs.idmap will handle gid, user, and group lookups. -See <file:Documentation/security/keys/request-key.rst> for more information +See Documentation/security/keys/request-key.rst for more information about the request-key function. -========= nfs.idmap ========= + nfs.idmap is designed to be called by request-key, and should not be run "by hand". This program takes two arguments, a serialized key and a key description. The serialized key is first converted into a key_serial_t, and diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-rdma.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-rdma.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ef0f3678b1fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfs-rdma.rst @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +=================== +Setting up NFS/RDMA +=================== + +:Author: + NetApp and Open Grid Computing (May 29, 2008) + +.. warning:: + This document is probably obsolete. + +Overview +======== + +This document describes how to install and setup the Linux NFS/RDMA client +and server software. + +The NFS/RDMA client was first included in Linux 2.6.24. The NFS/RDMA server +was first included in the following release, Linux 2.6.25. + +In our testing, we have obtained excellent performance results (full 10Gbit +wire bandwidth at minimal client CPU) under many workloads. The code passes +the full Connectathon test suite and operates over both Infiniband and iWARP +RDMA adapters. + +Getting Help +============ + +If you get stuck, you can ask questions on the +nfs-rdma-devel@lists.sourceforge.net mailing list. + +Installation +============ + +These instructions are a step by step guide to building a machine for +use with NFS/RDMA. + +- Install an RDMA device + + Any device supported by the drivers in drivers/infiniband/hw is acceptable. + + Testing has been performed using several Mellanox-based IB cards, the + Ammasso AMS1100 iWARP adapter, and the Chelsio cxgb3 iWARP adapter. + +- Install a Linux distribution and tools + + The first kernel release to contain both the NFS/RDMA client and server was + Linux 2.6.25 Therefore, a distribution compatible with this and subsequent + Linux kernel release should be installed. + + The procedures described in this document have been tested with + distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/). + +- Install nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater on the client + + An NFS/RDMA mount point can be obtained by using the mount.nfs command in + nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater (nfs-utils-1.1.1 was the first nfs-utils + version with support for NFS/RDMA mounts, but for various reasons we + recommend using nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater). To see which version of + mount.nfs you are using, type: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ /sbin/mount.nfs -V + + If the version is less than 1.1.2 or the command does not exist, + you should install the latest version of nfs-utils. + + Download the latest package from: http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/nfs + + Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions. + + If you will not need the idmapper and gssd executables (you do not need + these to create an NFS/RDMA enabled mount command), the installation + process can be simplified by disabling these features when running + configure: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4 + + To build nfs-utils you will need the tcp_wrappers package installed. For + more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files. + + After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in + the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3, + or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called + mount.nfs4. The standard technique is to create a symlink called + mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs. + + This mount.nfs binary should be installed at /sbin/mount.nfs as follows: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ sudo cp utils/mount/mount.nfs /sbin/mount.nfs + + In this location, mount.nfs will be invoked automatically for NFS mounts + by the system mount command. + + .. note:: + mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater is only needed + on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of + nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from + nfs-utils-1.1.2 is needed on the client. + +- Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA + + The NFS/RDMA client and server are both included in the mainline Linux + kernel version 2.6.25 and later. This and other versions of the Linux + kernel can be found at: https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/ + + Download the sources and place them in an appropriate location. + +- Configure the RDMA stack + + Make sure your kernel configuration has RDMA support enabled. Under + Device Drivers -> InfiniBand support, update the kernel configuration + to enable InfiniBand support [NOTE: the option name is misleading. Enabling + InfiniBand support is required for all RDMA devices (IB, iWARP, etc.)]. + + Enable the appropriate IB HCA support (mlx4, mthca, ehca, ipath, etc.) or + iWARP adapter support (amso, cxgb3, etc.). + + If you are using InfiniBand, be sure to enable IP-over-InfiniBand support. + +- Configure the NFS client and server + + Your kernel configuration must also have NFS file system support and/or + NFS server support enabled. These and other NFS related configuration + options can be found under File Systems -> Network File Systems. + +- Build, install, reboot + + The NFS/RDMA code will be enabled automatically if NFS and RDMA + are turned on. The NFS/RDMA client and server are configured via the hidden + SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA config option that depends on SUNRPC and INFINIBAND. The + value of SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA will be: + + #. N if either SUNRPC or INFINIBAND are N, in this case the NFS/RDMA client + and server will not be built + + #. M if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are on (M or Y) and at least one is M, + in this case the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built as modules + + #. Y if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are Y, in this case the NFS/RDMA client + and server will be built into the kernel + + Therefore, if you have followed the steps above and turned no NFS and RDMA, + the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built. + + Build a new kernel, install it, boot it. + +Check RDMA and NFS Setup +======================== + +Before configuring the NFS/RDMA software, it is a good idea to test +your new kernel to ensure that the kernel is working correctly. +In particular, it is a good idea to verify that the RDMA stack +is functioning as expected and standard NFS over TCP/IP and/or UDP/IP +is working properly. + +- Check RDMA Setup + + If you built the RDMA components as modules, load them at + this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel + card: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ modprobe ib_mthca + $ modprobe ib_ipoib + + If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM) + running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can + use it. Otherwise, you will need to run an SM, such as OpenSM, on one + of your end nodes. + + If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state + 4: ACTIVE + + where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc. + + To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this + assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2): + + .. code-block:: sh + + host1$ ip link set dev ib0 up + host1$ ip address add dev ib0 a.b.c.x + host2$ ip link set dev ib0 up + host2$ ip address add dev ib0 a.b.c.y + host1$ ping a.b.c.y + host2$ ping a.b.c.x + + For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures. + +- Check NFS Setup + + For the NFS components enabled above (client and/or server), + test their functionality over standard Ethernet using TCP/IP or UDP/IP. + +NFS/RDMA Setup +============== + +We recommend that you use two machines, one to act as the client and +one to act as the server. + +One time configuration: +----------------------- + +- On the server system, configure the /etc/exports file and start the NFS/RDMA server. + + Exports entries with the following formats have been tested:: + + /vol0 192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) + /vol0 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) + + The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand + HCA or the client's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC. + + .. note:: + The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does + not use a reserved port. + +Each time a machine boots: +-------------------------- + +- Load and configure the RDMA drivers + + For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ modprobe ib_mthca + $ modprobe ib_ipoib + $ ip li set dev ib0 up + $ ip addr add dev ib0 a.b.c.d + + .. note:: + Please use unique addresses for the client and server! + +- Start the NFS server + + If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in + kernel config), load the RDMA transport module: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ modprobe svcrdma + + Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the + server: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ /etc/init.d/nfs start + + or + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ service nfs start + + Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ echo rdma 20049 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist + +- On the client system + + If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in + kernel config), load the RDMA client module: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ modprobe xprtrdma.ko + + Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), use this + command to mount the NFS/RDMA server: + + .. code-block:: sh + + $ mount -o rdma,port=20049 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt + + To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check + the "proto" field for the given mount. + + Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA! diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.rst index 56a96fb08a73..c05926f79054 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfsd-admin-interfaces.rst @@ -1,5 +1,6 @@ +================================== Administrative interfaces for nfsd -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ +================================== Note that normally these interfaces are used only by the utilities in nfs-utils. @@ -13,18 +14,16 @@ nfsd/threads. Before doing that, NFSD can be told which sockets to listen on by writing to nfsd/portlist; that write may be: - - an ascii-encoded file descriptor, which should refer to a - bound (and listening, for tcp) socket, or - - "transportname port", where transportname is currently either - "udp", "tcp", or "rdma". + - an ascii-encoded file descriptor, which should refer to a + bound (and listening, for tcp) socket, or + - "transportname port", where transportname is currently either + "udp", "tcp", or "rdma". If nfsd is started without doing any of these, then it will create one udp and one tcp listener at port 2049 (see nfsd_init_socks). -On startup, nfsd and lockd grace periods start. - -nfsd is shut down by a write of 0 to nfsd/threads. All locks and state -are thrown away at that point. +On startup, nfsd and lockd grace periods start. nfsd is shut down by a write of +0 to nfsd/threads. All locks and state are thrown away at that point. Between startup and shutdown, the number of threads may be adjusted up or down by additional writes to nfsd/threads or by writes to @@ -34,7 +33,7 @@ For more detail about files under nfsd/ and what they control, see fs/nfsd/nfsctl.c; most of them have detailed comments. Implementation notes -^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ +==================== Note that the rpc server requires the caller to serialize addition and removal of listening sockets, and startup and shutdown of the server. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfsroot.rst index ae4332464560..82a4fda057f9 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/nfsroot.rst @@ -1,27 +1,34 @@ +=============================================== Mounting the root filesystem via NFS (nfsroot) =============================================== -Written 1996 by Gero Kuhlmann <gero@gkminix.han.de> -Updated 1997 by Martin Mares <mj@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz> -Updated 2006 by Nico Schottelius <nico-kernel-nfsroot@schottelius.org> -Updated 2006 by Horms <horms@verge.net.au> -Updated 2018 by Chris Novakovic <chris@chrisn.me.uk> +:Authors: + Written 1996 by Gero Kuhlmann <gero@gkminix.han.de> + + Updated 1997 by Martin Mares <mj@atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz> + + Updated 2006 by Nico Schottelius <nico-kernel-nfsroot@schottelius.org> + + Updated 2006 by Horms <horms@verge.net.au> + Updated 2018 by Chris Novakovic <chris@chrisn.me.uk> -In order to use a diskless system, such as an X-terminal or printer server -for example, it is necessary for the root filesystem to be present on a -non-disk device. This may be an initramfs (see Documentation/filesystems/ -ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt), a ramdisk (see Documentation/admin-guide/initrd.rst) or a -filesystem mounted via NFS. The following text describes on how to use NFS -for the root filesystem. For the rest of this text 'client' means the -diskless system, and 'server' means the NFS server. +In order to use a diskless system, such as an X-terminal or printer server for +example, it is necessary for the root filesystem to be present on a non-disk +device. This may be an initramfs (see +Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt), a ramdisk (see +Documentation/admin-guide/initrd.rst) or a filesystem mounted via NFS. The +following text describes on how to use NFS for the root filesystem. For the rest +of this text 'client' means the diskless system, and 'server' means the NFS +server. -1.) Enabling nfsroot capabilities - ----------------------------- + +Enabling nfsroot capabilities +============================= In order to use nfsroot, NFS client support needs to be selected as built-in during configuration. Once this has been selected, the nfsroot @@ -34,8 +41,8 @@ DHCP, BOOTP and RARP is safe. -2.) Kernel command line - ------------------- +Kernel command line +=================== When the kernel has been loaded by a boot loader (see below) it needs to be told what root fs device to use. And in the case of nfsroot, where to find @@ -44,19 +51,17 @@ This can be established using the following kernel command line parameters: root=/dev/nfs - This is necessary to enable the pseudo-NFS-device. Note that it's not a real device but just a synonym to tell the kernel to use NFS instead of a real device. nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>] - If the `nfsroot' parameter is NOT given on the command line, - the default "/tftpboot/%s" will be used. + the default ``"/tftpboot/%s"`` will be used. <server-ip> Specifies the IP address of the NFS server. - The default address is determined by the `ip' parameter + The default address is determined by the ip parameter (see below). This parameter allows the use of different servers for IP autoconfiguration and NFS. @@ -66,7 +71,8 @@ nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>] IP address. <nfs-options> Standard NFS options. All options are separated by commas. - The following defaults are used: + The following defaults are used:: + port = as given by server portmap daemon rsize = 4096 wsize = 4096 @@ -79,13 +85,11 @@ nfsroot=[<server-ip>:]<root-dir>[,<nfs-options>] flags = hard, nointr, noposix, cto, ac -ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: - <dns0-ip>:<dns1-ip>:<ntp0-ip> - +ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>:<dns0-ip>:<dns1-ip>:<ntp0-ip> This parameter tells the kernel how to configure IP addresses of devices and also how to set up the IP routing table. It was originally called - `nfsaddrs', but now the boot-time IP configuration works independently of - NFS, so it was renamed to `ip' and the old name remained as an alias for + nfsaddrs, but now the boot-time IP configuration works independently of + NFS, so it was renamed to ip and the old name remained as an alias for compatibility reasons. If this parameter is missing from the kernel command line, all fields are @@ -93,17 +97,17 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: this means that the kernel tries to configure everything using autoconfiguration. - The <autoconf> parameter can appear alone as the value to the `ip' + The <autoconf> parameter can appear alone as the value to the ip parameter (without all the ':' characters before). If the value is "ip=off" or "ip=none", no autoconfiguration will take place, otherwise autoconfiguration will take place. The most common way to use this is "ip=dhcp". <client-ip> IP address of the client. - Default: Determined using autoconfiguration. - <server-ip> IP address of the NFS server. If RARP is used to determine + <server-ip> IP address of the NFS server. + If RARP is used to determine the client address and this parameter is NOT empty only replies from the specified server are accepted. @@ -115,19 +119,19 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: (see below). Default: Determined using autoconfiguration. - The address of the autoconfiguration server is used. + The address of the autoconfiguration server is used. <gw-ip> IP address of a gateway if the server is on a different subnet. - Default: Determined using autoconfiguration. - <netmask> Netmask for local network interface. If unspecified - the netmask is derived from the client IP address assuming - classful addressing. + <netmask> Netmask for local network interface. + If unspecified the netmask is derived from the client IP address + assuming classful addressing. Default: Determined using autoconfiguration. - <hostname> Name of the client. If a '.' character is present, anything + <hostname> Name of the client. + If a '.' character is present, anything before the first '.' is used as the client's hostname, and anything after it is used as its NIS domain name. May be supplied by autoconfiguration, but its absence will not trigger autoconfiguration. @@ -138,21 +142,21 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: Default: Client IP address is used in ASCII notation. <device> Name of network device to use. - Default: If the host only has one device, it is used. - Otherwise the device is determined using - autoconfiguration. This is done by sending - autoconfiguration requests out of all devices, - and using the device that received the first reply. - - <autoconf> Method to use for autoconfiguration. In the case of options - which specify multiple autoconfiguration protocols, + Otherwise the device is determined using + autoconfiguration. This is done by sending + autoconfiguration requests out of all devices, + and using the device that received the first reply. + + <autoconf> Method to use for autoconfiguration. + In the case of options + which specify multiple autoconfiguration protocols, requests are sent using all protocols, and the first one to reply is used. Only autoconfiguration protocols that have been compiled into the kernel will be used, regardless of the value of - this option. + this option:: off or none: don't use autoconfiguration (do static IP assignment instead) @@ -221,7 +225,6 @@ ip=<client-ip>:<server-ip>:<gw-ip>:<netmask>:<hostname>:<device>:<autoconf>: nfsrootdebug - This parameter enables debugging messages to appear in the kernel log at boot time so that administrators can verify that the correct NFS mount options, server address, and root path are passed to the @@ -229,36 +232,32 @@ nfsrootdebug rdinit=<executable file> - To specify which file contains the program that starts system initialization, administrators can use this command line parameter. The default value of this parameter is "/init". If the specified file exists and the kernel can execute it, root filesystem related - kernel command line parameters, including `nfsroot=', are ignored. + kernel command line parameters, including 'nfsroot=', are ignored. A description of the process of mounting the root file system can be - found in: - - Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst - - + found in Documentation/driver-api/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst -3.) Boot Loader - ---------- +Boot Loader +=========== To get the kernel into memory different approaches can be used. They depend on various facilities being available: -3.1) Booting from a floppy using syslinux +- Booting from a floppy using syslinux When building kernels, an easy way to create a boot floppy that uses syslinux is to use the zdisk or bzdisk make targets which use zimage and bzimage images respectively. Both targets accept the FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line. - e.g. + e.g:: + make bzdisk FDARGS="root=/dev/nfs" Note that the user running this command will need to have @@ -267,32 +266,36 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: For more information on syslinux, including how to create bootdisks for prebuilt kernels, see http://syslinux.zytor.com/ - N.B: Previously it was possible to write a kernel directly to - a floppy using dd, configure the boot device using rdev, and - boot using the resulting floppy. Linux no longer supports this - method of booting. + .. note:: + Previously it was possible to write a kernel directly to + a floppy using dd, configure the boot device using rdev, and + boot using the resulting floppy. Linux no longer supports this + method of booting. -3.2) Booting from a cdrom using isolinux +- Booting from a cdrom using isolinux When building kernels, an easy way to create a bootable cdrom that uses isolinux is to use the isoimage target which uses a bzimage image. Like zdisk and bzdisk, this target accepts the FDARGS parameter which can be used to set the kernel command line. - e.g. + e.g:: + make isoimage FDARGS="root=/dev/nfs" The resulting iso image will be arch/<ARCH>/boot/image.iso This can be written to a cdrom using a variety of tools including cdrecord. - e.g. + e.g:: + cdrecord dev=ATAPI:1,0,0 arch/x86/boot/image.iso For more information on isolinux, including how to create bootdisks for prebuilt kernels, see http://syslinux.zytor.com/ -3.2) Using LILO +- Using LILO + When using LILO all the necessary command line parameters may be specified using the 'append=' directive in the LILO configuration file. @@ -300,15 +303,19 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: However, to use the 'root=' directive you also need to create a dummy root device, which may be removed after LILO is run. - mknod /dev/boot255 c 0 255 + e.g:: + + mknod /dev/boot255 c 0 255 For information on configuring LILO, please refer to its documentation. -3.3) Using GRUB +- Using GRUB + When using GRUB, kernel parameter are simply appended after the kernel specification: kernel <kernel> <parameters> -3.4) Using loadlin +- Using loadlin + loadlin may be used to boot Linux from a DOS command prompt without requiring a local hard disk to mount as root. This has not been thoroughly tested by the authors of this document, but in general @@ -317,7 +324,8 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: Please refer to the loadlin documentation for further information. -3.5) Using a boot ROM +- Using a boot ROM + This is probably the most elegant way of booting a diskless client. With a boot ROM the kernel is loaded using the TFTP protocol. The authors of this document are not aware of any no commercial boot @@ -326,7 +334,8 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: etherboot, both of which are available on sunsite.unc.edu, and both of which contain everything you need to boot a diskless Linux client. -3.6) Using pxelinux +- Using pxelinux + Pxelinux may be used to boot linux using the PXE boot loader which is present on many modern network cards. @@ -342,8 +351,8 @@ They depend on various facilities being available: -4.) Credits - ------- +Credits +======= The nfsroot code in the kernel and the RARP support have been written by Gero Kuhlmann <gero@gkminix.han.de>. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs-block-server.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/pnfs-block-server.rst index 2143673cf154..b00a2e705cc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs-block-server.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/pnfs-block-server.rst @@ -1,4 +1,6 @@ +=================================== pNFS block layout server user guide +=================================== The Linux NFS server now supports the pNFS block layout extension. In this case the NFS server acts as Metadata Server (MDS) for pNFS, which in addition @@ -22,16 +24,19 @@ If the nfsd server needs to fence a non-responding client it calls /sbin/nfsd-recall-failed with the first argument set to the IP address of the client, and the second argument set to the device node without the /dev prefix for the file system to be fenced. Below is an example file that shows -how to translate the device into a serial number from SCSI EVPD 0x80: +how to translate the device into a serial number from SCSI EVPD 0x80:: -cat > /sbin/nfsd-recall-failed << EOF -#!/bin/sh + cat > /sbin/nfsd-recall-failed << EOF -CLIENT="$1" -DEV="/dev/$2" -EVPD=`sg_inq --page=0x80 ${DEV} | \ - grep "Unit serial number:" | \ - awk -F ': ' '{print $2}'` +.. code-block:: sh -echo "fencing client ${CLIENT} serial ${EVPD}" >> /var/log/pnfsd-fence.log -EOF + #!/bin/sh + + CLIENT="$1" + DEV="/dev/$2" + EVPD=`sg_inq --page=0x80 ${DEV} | \ + grep "Unit serial number:" | \ + awk -F ': ' '{print $2}'` + + echo "fencing client ${CLIENT} serial ${EVPD}" >> /var/log/pnfsd-fence.log + EOF diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs-scsi-server.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/pnfs-scsi-server.rst index 5bef7268bd9f..d2f6ee558071 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/pnfs-scsi-server.txt +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/nfs/pnfs-scsi-server.rst @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ +================================== pNFS SCSI layout server user guide ================================== diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst index e70b365dbc60..311cd7cc2b75 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpuidle.rst @@ -506,6 +506,9 @@ object corresponding to it, as follows: ``disable`` Whether or not this idle state is disabled. +``default_status`` + The default status of this state, "enabled" or "disabled". + ``latency`` Exit latency of the idle state in microseconds. diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_idle.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_idle.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..afbf778035f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/intel_idle.rst @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +.. include:: <isonum.txt> + +============================================== +``intel_idle`` CPU Idle Time Management Driver +============================================== + +:Copyright: |copy| 2020 Intel Corporation + +:Author: Rafael J. Wysocki <rafael.j.wysocki@intel.com> + + +General Information +=================== + +``intel_idle`` is a part of the +:doc:`CPU idle time management subsystem <cpuidle>` in the Linux kernel +(``CPUIdle``). It is the default CPU idle time management driver for the +Nehalem and later generations of Intel processors, but the level of support for +a particular processor model in it depends on whether or not it recognizes that +processor model and may also depend on information coming from the platform +firmware. [To understand ``intel_idle`` it is necessary to know how ``CPUIdle`` +works in general, so this is the time to get familiar with :doc:`cpuidle` if you +have not done that yet.] + +``intel_idle`` uses the ``MWAIT`` instruction to inform the processor that the +logical CPU executing it is idle and so it may be possible to put some of the +processor's functional blocks into low-power states. That instruction takes two +arguments (passed in the ``EAX`` and ``ECX`` registers of the target CPU), the +first of which, referred to as a *hint*, can be used by the processor to +determine what can be done (for details refer to Intel Software Developer’s +Manual [1]_). Accordingly, ``intel_idle`` refuses to work with processors in +which the support for the ``MWAIT`` instruction has been disabled (for example, +via the platform firmware configuration menu) or which do not support that +instruction at all. + +``intel_idle`` is not modular, so it cannot be unloaded, which means that the +only way to pass early-configuration-time parameters to it is via the kernel +command line. + + +.. _intel-idle-enumeration-of-states: + +Enumeration of Idle States +========================== + +Each ``MWAIT`` hint value is interpreted by the processor as a license to +reconfigure itself in a certain way in order to save energy. The processor +configurations (with reduced power draw) resulting from that are referred to +as C-states (in the ACPI terminology) or idle states. The list of meaningful +``MWAIT`` hint values and idle states (i.e. low-power configurations of the +processor) corresponding to them depends on the processor model and it may also +depend on the configuration of the platform. + +In order to create a list of available idle states required by the ``CPUIdle`` +subsystem (see :ref:`idle-states-representation` in :doc:`cpuidle`), +``intel_idle`` can use two sources of information: static tables of idle states +for different processor models included in the driver itself and the ACPI tables +of the system. The former are always used if the processor model at hand is +recognized by ``intel_idle`` and the latter are used if that is required for +the given processor model (which is the case for all server processor models +recognized by ``intel_idle``) or if the processor model is not recognized. + +If the ACPI tables are going to be used for building the list of available idle +states, ``intel_idle`` first looks for a ``_CST`` object under one of the ACPI +objects corresponding to the CPUs in the system (refer to the ACPI specification +[2]_ for the description of ``_CST`` and its output package). Because the +``CPUIdle`` subsystem expects that the list of idle states supplied by the +driver will be suitable for all of the CPUs handled by it and ``intel_idle`` is +registered as the ``CPUIdle`` driver for all of the CPUs in the system, the +driver looks for the first ``_CST`` object returning at least one valid idle +state description and such that all of the idle states included in its return +package are of the FFH (Functional Fixed Hardware) type, which means that the +``MWAIT`` instruction is expected to be used to tell the processor that it can +enter one of them. The return package of that ``_CST`` is then assumed to be +applicable to all of the other CPUs in the system and the idle state +descriptions extracted from it are stored in a preliminary list of idle states +coming from the ACPI tables. [This step is skipped if ``intel_idle`` is +configured to ignore the ACPI tables; see `below <intel-idle-parameters_>`_.] + +Next, the first (index 0) entry in the list of available idle states is +initialized to represent a "polling idle state" (a pseudo-idle state in which +the target CPU continuously fetches and executes instructions), and the +subsequent (real) idle state entries are populated as follows. + +If the processor model at hand is recognized by ``intel_idle``, there is a +(static) table of idle state descriptions for it in the driver. In that case, +the "internal" table is the primary source of information on idle states and the +information from it is copied to the final list of available idle states. If +using the ACPI tables for the enumeration of idle states is not required +(depending on the processor model), all of the listed idle state are enabled by +default (so all of them will be taken into consideration by ``CPUIdle`` +governors during CPU idle state selection). Otherwise, some of the listed idle +states may not be enabled by default if there are no matching entries in the +preliminary list of idle states coming from the ACPI tables. In that case user +space still can enable them later (on a per-CPU basis) with the help of +the ``disable`` idle state attribute in ``sysfs`` (see +:ref:`idle-states-representation` in :doc:`cpuidle`). This basically means that +the idle states "known" to the driver may not be enabled by default if they have +not been exposed by the platform firmware (through the ACPI tables). + +If the given processor model is not recognized by ``intel_idle``, but it +supports ``MWAIT``, the preliminary list of idle states coming from the ACPI +tables is used for building the final list that will be supplied to the +``CPUIdle`` core during driver registration. For each idle state in that list, +the description, ``MWAIT`` hint and exit latency are copied to the corresponding +entry in the final list of idle states. The name of the idle state represented +by it (to be returned by the ``name`` idle state attribute in ``sysfs``) is +"CX_ACPI", where X is the index of that idle state in the final list (note that +the minimum value of X is 1, because 0 is reserved for the "polling" state), and +its target residency is based on the exit latency value. Specifically, for +C1-type idle states the exit latency value is also used as the target residency +(for compatibility with the majority of the "internal" tables of idle states for +various processor models recognized by ``intel_idle``) and for the other idle +state types (C2 and C3) the target residency value is 3 times the exit latency +(again, that is because it reflects the target residency to exit latency ratio +in the majority of cases for the processor models recognized by ``intel_idle``). +All of the idle states in the final list are enabled by default in this case. + + +.. _intel-idle-initialization: + +Initialization +============== + +The initialization of ``intel_idle`` starts with checking if the kernel command +line options forbid the use of the ``MWAIT`` instruction. If that is the case, +an error code is returned right away. + +The next step is to check whether or not the processor model is known to the +driver, which determines the idle states enumeration method (see +`above <intel-idle-enumeration-of-states_>`_), and whether or not the processor +supports ``MWAIT`` (the initialization fails if that is not the case). Then, +the ``MWAIT`` support in the processor is enumerated through ``CPUID`` and the +driver initialization fails if the level of support is not as expected (for +example, if the total number of ``MWAIT`` substates returned is 0). + +Next, if the driver is not configured to ignore the ACPI tables (see +`below <intel-idle-parameters_>`_), the idle states information provided by the +platform firmware is extracted from them. + +Then, ``CPUIdle`` device objects are allocated for all CPUs and the list of +available idle states is created as explained +`above <intel-idle-enumeration-of-states_>`_. + +Finally, ``intel_idle`` is registered with the help of cpuidle_register_driver() +as the ``CPUIdle`` driver for all CPUs in the system and a CPU online callback +for configuring individual CPUs is registered via cpuhp_setup_state(), which +(among other things) causes the callback routine to be invoked for all of the +CPUs present in the system at that time (each CPU executes its own instance of +the callback routine). That routine registers a ``CPUIdle`` device for the CPU +running it (which enables the ``CPUIdle`` subsystem to operate that CPU) and +optionally performs some CPU-specific initialization actions that may be +required for the given processor model. + + +.. _intel-idle-parameters: + +Kernel Command Line Options and Module Parameters +================================================= + +The *x86* architecture support code recognizes three kernel command line +options related to CPU idle time management: ``idle=poll``, ``idle=halt``, +and ``idle=nomwait``. If any of them is present in the kernel command line, the +``MWAIT`` instruction is not allowed to be used, so the initialization of +``intel_idle`` will fail. + +Apart from that there are two module parameters recognized by ``intel_idle`` +itself that can be set via the kernel command line (they cannot be updated via +sysfs, so that is the only way to change their values). + +The ``max_cstate`` parameter value is the maximum idle state index in the list +of idle states supplied to the ``CPUIdle`` core during the registration of the +driver. It is also the maximum number of regular (non-polling) idle states that +can be used by ``intel_idle``, so the enumeration of idle states is terminated +after finding that number of usable idle states (the other idle states that +potentially might have been used if ``max_cstate`` had been greater are not +taken into consideration at all). Setting ``max_cstate`` can prevent +``intel_idle`` from exposing idle states that are regarded as "too deep" for +some reason to the ``CPUIdle`` core, but it does so by making them effectively +invisible until the system is shut down and started again which may not always +be desirable. In practice, it is only really necessary to do that if the idle +states in question cannot be enabled during system startup, because in the +working state of the system the CPU power management quality of service (PM +QoS) feature can be used to prevent ``CPUIdle`` from touching those idle states +even if they have been enumerated (see :ref:`cpu-pm-qos` in :doc:`cpuidle`). +Setting ``max_cstate`` to 0 causes the ``intel_idle`` initialization to fail. + +The ``noacpi`` module parameter (which is recognized by ``intel_idle`` if the +kernel has been configured with ACPI support), can be set to make the driver +ignore the system's ACPI tables entirely (it is unset by default). + + +.. _intel-idle-core-and-package-idle-states: + +Core and Package Levels of Idle States +====================================== + +Typically, in a processor supporting the ``MWAIT`` instruction there are (at +least) two levels of idle states (or C-states). One level, referred to as +"core C-states", covers individual cores in the processor, whereas the other +level, referred to as "package C-states", covers the entire processor package +and it may also involve other components of the system (GPUs, memory +controllers, I/O hubs etc.). + +Some of the ``MWAIT`` hint values allow the processor to use core C-states only +(most importantly, that is the case for the ``MWAIT`` hint value corresponding +to the ``C1`` idle state), but the majority of them give it a license to put +the target core (i.e. the core containing the logical CPU executing ``MWAIT`` +with the given hint value) into a specific core C-state and then (if possible) +to enter a specific package C-state at the deeper level. For example, the +``MWAIT`` hint value representing the ``C3`` idle state allows the processor to +put the target core into the low-power state referred to as "core ``C3``" (or +``CC3``), which happens if all of the logical CPUs (SMT siblings) in that core +have executed ``MWAIT`` with the ``C3`` hint value (or with a hint value +representing a deeper idle state), and in addition to that (in the majority of +cases) it gives the processor a license to put the entire package (possibly +including some non-CPU components such as a GPU or a memory controller) into the +low-power state referred to as "package ``C3``" (or ``PC3``), which happens if +all of the cores have gone into the ``CC3`` state and (possibly) some additional +conditions are satisfied (for instance, if the GPU is covered by ``PC3``, it may +be required to be in a certain GPU-specific low-power state for ``PC3`` to be +reachable). + +As a rule, there is no simple way to make the processor use core C-states only +if the conditions for entering the corresponding package C-states are met, so +the logical CPU executing ``MWAIT`` with a hint value that is not core-level +only (like for ``C1``) must always assume that this may cause the processor to +enter a package C-state. [That is why the exit latency and target residency +values corresponding to the majority of ``MWAIT`` hint values in the "internal" +tables of idle states in ``intel_idle`` reflect the properties of package +C-states.] If using package C-states is not desirable at all, either +:ref:`PM QoS <cpu-pm-qos>` or the ``max_cstate`` module parameter of +``intel_idle`` described `above <intel-idle-parameters_>`_ must be used to +restrict the range of permissible idle states to the ones with core-level only +``MWAIT`` hint values (like ``C1``). + + +References +========== + +.. [1] *Intel® 64 and IA-32 Architectures Software Developer’s Manual Volume 2B*, + https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/architecture-and-technology/64-ia-32-architectures-software-developer-vol-2b-manual.html + +.. [2] *Advanced Configuration and Power Interface (ACPI) Specification*, + https://uefi.org/specifications diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst index fc298eb1234b..88f717e59a42 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/pm/working-state.rst @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Working-State Power Management :maxdepth: 2 cpuidle + intel_idle cpufreq intel_pstate intel_epb diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/thunderbolt.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/thunderbolt.rst index 898ad78f3cc7..10c4f0ce2ad0 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/thunderbolt.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/thunderbolt.rst @@ -1,6 +1,28 @@ -============= - Thunderbolt -============= +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +====================== + USB4 and Thunderbolt +====================== +USB4 is the public specification based on Thunderbolt 3 protocol with +some differences at the register level among other things. Connection +manager is an entity running on the host router (host controller) +responsible for enumerating routers and establishing tunnels. A +connection manager can be implemented either in firmware or software. +Typically PCs come with a firmware connection manager for Thunderbolt 3 +and early USB4 capable systems. Apple systems on the other hand use +software connection manager and the later USB4 compliant devices follow +the suit. + +The Linux Thunderbolt driver supports both and can detect at runtime which +connection manager implementation is to be used. To be on the safe side the +software connection manager in Linux also advertises security level +``user`` which means PCIe tunneling is disabled by default. The +documentation below applies to both implementations with the exception that +the software connection manager only supports ``user`` security level and +is expected to be accompanied with an IOMMU based DMA protection. + +Security levels and how to use them +----------------------------------- The interface presented here is not meant for end users. Instead there should be a userspace tool that handles all the low-level details, keeps a database of the authorized devices and prompts users for new connections. @@ -18,8 +40,6 @@ This will authorize all devices automatically when they appear. However, keep in mind that this bypasses the security levels and makes the system vulnerable to DMA attacks. -Security levels and how to use them ------------------------------------ Starting with Intel Falcon Ridge Thunderbolt controller there are 4 security levels available. Intel Titan Ridge added one more security level (usbonly). The reason for these is the fact that the connected devices can diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/xfs.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/xfs.rst index fb5b39f73059..ad911be5b5e9 100644 --- a/Documentation/admin-guide/xfs.rst +++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/xfs.rst @@ -253,7 +253,7 @@ The following sysctls are available for the XFS filesystem: pool. fs.xfs.speculative_prealloc_lifetime - (Units: seconds Min: 1 Default: 300 Max: 86400) + (Units: seconds Min: 1 Default: 300 Max: 86400) The interval at which the background scanning for inodes with unused speculative preallocation runs. The scan removes unused preallocation from clean inodes and releases diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.rst b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.rst index b6e44884e3ad..41937a8091aa 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.rst +++ b/Documentation/arm64/cpu-feature-registers.rst @@ -117,6 +117,8 @@ infrastructure: +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | Name | bits | visible | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | RNDR | [63-60] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | TS | [55-52] | y | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | FHM | [51-48] | y | @@ -200,6 +202,12 @@ infrastructure: +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | Name | bits | visible | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | I8MM | [55-52] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | DGH | [51-48] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | BF16 | [47-44] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | SB | [39-36] | y | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | FRINTTS | [35-32] | y | @@ -234,10 +242,18 @@ infrastructure: +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | Name | bits | visible | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | F64MM | [59-56] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | F32MM | [55-52] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | I8MM | [47-44] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | SM4 | [43-40] | y | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | SHA3 | [35-32] | y | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ + | BF16 | [23-20] | y | + +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | BitPerm | [19-16] | y | +------------------------------+---------+---------+ | AES | [7-4] | y | diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.rst b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.rst index 7fa3d215ae6a..7dfb97dfe416 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.rst +++ b/Documentation/arm64/elf_hwcaps.rst @@ -204,6 +204,37 @@ HWCAP2_FRINT Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.FRINTTS == 0b0001. +HWCAP2_SVEI8MM + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.I8MM == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_SVEF32MM + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.F32MM == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_SVEF64MM + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.F64MM == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_SVEBF16 + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ZFR0_EL1.BF16 == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_I8MM + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.I8MM == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_BF16 + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.BF16 == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_DGH + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR1_EL1.DGH == 0b0001. + +HWCAP2_RNG + + Functionality implied by ID_AA64ISAR0_EL1.RNDR == 0b0001. 4. Unused AT_HWCAP bits ----------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.rst b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.rst index 99b2545455ff..9120e59578dc 100644 --- a/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.rst +++ b/Documentation/arm64/silicon-errata.rst @@ -88,6 +88,8 @@ stable kernels. +----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+ | ARM | Cortex-A76 | #1463225 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1463225 | +----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+ +| ARM | Cortex-A55 | #1530923 | ARM64_ERRATUM_1530923 | ++----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+ | ARM | Neoverse-N1 | #1188873,1418040| ARM64_ERRATUM_1418040 | +----------------+-----------------+-----------------+-----------------------------+ | ARM | Neoverse-N1 | #1349291 | N/A | diff --git a/Documentation/asm-annotations.rst b/Documentation/asm-annotations.rst index f55c2bb74d00..32ea57483378 100644 --- a/Documentation/asm-annotations.rst +++ b/Documentation/asm-annotations.rst @@ -73,10 +73,11 @@ The new macros are prefixed with the ``SYM_`` prefix and can be divided into three main groups: 1. ``SYM_FUNC_*`` -- to annotate C-like functions. This means functions with - standard C calling conventions, i.e. the stack contains a return address at - the predefined place and a return from the function can happen in a - standard way. When frame pointers are enabled, save/restore of frame - pointer shall happen at the start/end of a function, respectively, too. + standard C calling conventions. For example, on x86, this means that the + stack contains a return address at the predefined place and a return from + the function can happen in a standard way. When frame pointers are enabled, + save/restore of frame pointer shall happen at the start/end of a function, + respectively, too. Checking tools like ``objtool`` should ensure such marked functions conform to these rules. The tools can also easily annotate these functions with diff --git a/Documentation/block/biovecs.rst b/Documentation/block/biovecs.rst index 86fa66c87172..ad303a2569d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/block/biovecs.rst +++ b/Documentation/block/biovecs.rst @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Having a real iterator, and making biovecs immutable, has a number of advantages: * Before, iterating over bios was very awkward when you weren't processing - exactly one bvec at a time - for example, bio_copy_data() in fs/bio.c, + exactly one bvec at a time - for example, bio_copy_data() in block/bio.c, which copies the contents of one bio into another. Because the biovecs wouldn't necessarily be the same size, the old code was tricky convoluted - it had to walk two different bios at the same time, keeping both bi_idx and diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst index ab0eae1c153a..bc0c727d7fd8 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/index.rst @@ -39,6 +39,8 @@ Core utilities ../RCU/index gcc-plugins symbol-namespaces + padata + ioctl Interfaces for kernel debugging diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/ioctl.rst b/Documentation/core-api/ioctl.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c455db0e1627 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/core-api/ioctl.rst @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ +====================== +ioctl based interfaces +====================== + +ioctl() is the most common way for applications to interface +with device drivers. It is flexible and easily extended by adding new +commands and can be passed through character devices, block devices as +well as sockets and other special file descriptors. + +However, it is also very easy to get ioctl command definitions wrong, +and hard to fix them later without breaking existing applications, +so this documentation tries to help developers get it right. + +Command number definitions +========================== + +The command number, or request number, is the second argument passed to +the ioctl system call. While this can be any 32-bit number that uniquely +identifies an action for a particular driver, there are a number of +conventions around defining them. + +``include/uapi/asm-generic/ioctl.h`` provides four macros for defining +ioctl commands that follow modern conventions: ``_IO``, ``_IOR``, +``_IOW``, and ``_IOWR``. These should be used for all new commands, +with the correct parameters: + +_IO/_IOR/_IOW/_IOWR + The macro name specifies how the argument will be used. It may be a + pointer to data to be passed into the kernel (_IOW), out of the kernel + (_IOR), or both (_IOWR). _IO can indicate either commands with no + argument or those passing an integer value instead of a pointer. + It is recommended to only use _IO for commands without arguments, + and use pointers for passing data. + +type + An 8-bit number, often a character literal, specific to a subsystem + or driver, and listed in :doc:`../userspace-api/ioctl/ioctl-number` + +nr + An 8-bit number identifying the specific command, unique for a give + value of 'type' + +data_type + The name of the data type pointed to by the argument, the command number + encodes the ``sizeof(data_type)`` value in a 13-bit or 14-bit integer, + leading to a limit of 8191 bytes for the maximum size of the argument. + Note: do not pass sizeof(data_type) type into _IOR/_IOW/IOWR, as that + will lead to encoding sizeof(sizeof(data_type)), i.e. sizeof(size_t). + _IO does not have a data_type parameter. + + +Interface versions +================== + +Some subsystems use version numbers in data structures to overload +commands with different interpretations of the argument. + +This is generally a bad idea, since changes to existing commands tend +to break existing applications. + +A better approach is to add a new ioctl command with a new number. The +old command still needs to be implemented in the kernel for compatibility, +but this can be a wrapper around the new implementation. + +Return code +=========== + +ioctl commands can return negative error codes as documented in errno(3); +these get turned into errno values in user space. On success, the return +code should be zero. It is also possible but not recommended to return +a positive 'long' value. + +When the ioctl callback is called with an unknown command number, the +handler returns either -ENOTTY or -ENOIOCTLCMD, which also results in +-ENOTTY being returned from the system call. Some subsystems return +-ENOSYS or -EINVAL here for historic reasons, but this is wrong. + +Prior to Linux 5.5, compat_ioctl handlers were required to return +-ENOIOCTLCMD in order to use the fallback conversion into native +commands. As all subsystems are now responsible for handling compat +mode themselves, this is no longer needed, but it may be important to +consider when backporting bug fixes to older kernels. + +Timestamps +========== + +Traditionally, timestamps and timeout values are passed as ``struct +timespec`` or ``struct timeval``, but these are problematic because of +incompatible definitions of these structures in user space after the +move to 64-bit time_t. + +The ``struct __kernel_timespec`` type can be used instead to be embedded +in other data structures when separate second/nanosecond values are +desired, or passed to user space directly. This is still not ideal though, +as the structure matches neither the kernel's timespec64 nor the user +space timespec exactly. The get_timespec64() and put_timespec64() helper +functions can be used to ensure that the layout remains compatible with +user space and the padding is treated correctly. + +As it is cheap to convert seconds to nanoseconds, but the opposite +requires an expensive 64-bit division, a simple __u64 nanosecond value +can be simpler and more efficient. + +Timeout values and timestamps should ideally use CLOCK_MONOTONIC time, +as returned by ktime_get_ns() or ktime_get_ts64(). Unlike +CLOCK_REALTIME, this makes the timestamps immune from jumping backwards +or forwards due to leap second adjustments and clock_settime() calls. + +ktime_get_real_ns() can be used for CLOCK_REALTIME timestamps that +need to be persistent across a reboot or between multiple machines. + +32-bit compat mode +================== + +In order to support 32-bit user space running on a 64-bit machine, each +subsystem or driver that implements an ioctl callback handler must also +implement the corresponding compat_ioctl handler. + +As long as all the rules for data structures are followed, this is as +easy as setting the .compat_ioctl pointer to a helper function such as +compat_ptr_ioctl() or blkdev_compat_ptr_ioctl(). + +compat_ptr() +------------ + +On the s390 architecture, 31-bit user space has ambiguous representations +for data pointers, with the upper bit being ignored. When running such +a process in compat mode, the compat_ptr() helper must be used to +clear the upper bit of a compat_uptr_t and turn it into a valid 64-bit +pointer. On other architectures, this macro only performs a cast to a +``void __user *`` pointer. + +In an compat_ioctl() callback, the last argument is an unsigned long, +which can be interpreted as either a pointer or a scalar depending on +the command. If it is a scalar, then compat_ptr() must not be used, to +ensure that the 64-bit kernel behaves the same way as a 32-bit kernel +for arguments with the upper bit set. + +The compat_ptr_ioctl() helper can be used in place of a custom +compat_ioctl file operation for drivers that only take arguments that +are pointers to compatible data structures. + +Structure layout +---------------- + +Compatible data structures have the same layout on all architectures, +avoiding all problematic members: + +* ``long`` and ``unsigned long`` are the size of a register, so + they can be either 32-bit or 64-bit wide and cannot be used in portable + data structures. Fixed-length replacements are ``__s32``, ``__u32``, + ``__s64`` and ``__u64``. + +* Pointers have the same problem, in addition to requiring the + use of compat_ptr(). The best workaround is to use ``__u64`` + in place of pointers, which requires a cast to ``uintptr_t`` in user + space, and the use of u64_to_user_ptr() in the kernel to convert + it back into a user pointer. + +* On the x86-32 (i386) architecture, the alignment of 64-bit variables + is only 32-bit, but they are naturally aligned on most other + architectures including x86-64. This means a structure like:: + + struct foo { + __u32 a; + __u64 b; + __u32 c; + }; + + has four bytes of padding between a and b on x86-64, plus another four + bytes of padding at the end, but no padding on i386, and it needs a + compat_ioctl conversion handler to translate between the two formats. + + To avoid this problem, all structures should have their members + naturally aligned, or explicit reserved fields added in place of the + implicit padding. The ``pahole`` tool can be used for checking the + alignment. + +* On ARM OABI user space, structures are padded to multiples of 32-bit, + making some structs incompatible with modern EABI kernels if they + do not end on a 32-bit boundary. + +* On the m68k architecture, struct members are not guaranteed to have an + alignment greater than 16-bit, which is a problem when relying on + implicit padding. + +* Bitfields and enums generally work as one would expect them to, + but some properties of them are implementation-defined, so it is better + to avoid them completely in ioctl interfaces. + +* ``char`` members can be either signed or unsigned, depending on + the architecture, so the __u8 and __s8 types should be used for 8-bit + integer values, though char arrays are clearer for fixed-length strings. + +Information leaks +================= + +Uninitialized data must not be copied back to user space, as this can +cause an information leak, which can be used to defeat kernel address +space layout randomization (KASLR), helping in an attack. + +For this reason (and for compat support) it is best to avoid any +implicit padding in data structures. Where there is implicit padding +in an existing structure, kernel drivers must be careful to fully +initialize an instance of the structure before copying it to user +space. This is usually done by calling memset() before assigning to +individual members. + +Subsystem abstractions +====================== + +While some device drivers implement their own ioctl function, most +subsystems implement the same command for multiple drivers. Ideally the +subsystem has an .ioctl() handler that copies the arguments from and +to user space, passing them into subsystem specific callback functions +through normal kernel pointers. + +This helps in various ways: + +* Applications written for one driver are more likely to work for + another one in the same subsystem if there are no subtle differences + in the user space ABI. + +* The complexity of user space access and data structure layout is done + in one place, reducing the potential for implementation bugs. + +* It is more likely to be reviewed by experienced developers + that can spot problems in the interface when the ioctl is shared + between multiple drivers than when it is only used in a single driver. + +Alternatives to ioctl +===================== + +There are many cases in which ioctl is not the best solution for a +problem. Alternatives include: + +* System calls are a better choice for a system-wide feature that + is not tied to a physical device or constrained by the file system + permissions of a character device node + +* netlink is the preferred way of configuring any network related + objects through sockets. + +* debugfs is used for ad-hoc interfaces for debugging functionality + that does not need to be exposed as a stable interface to applications. + +* sysfs is a good way to expose the state of an in-kernel object + that is not tied to a file descriptor. + +* configfs can be used for more complex configuration than sysfs + +* A custom file system can provide extra flexibility with a simple + user interface but adds a lot of complexity to the implementation. diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/padata.rst b/Documentation/core-api/padata.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9a24c111781d --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/core-api/padata.rst @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +======================================= +The padata parallel execution mechanism +======================================= + +:Date: December 2019 + +Padata is a mechanism by which the kernel can farm jobs out to be done in +parallel on multiple CPUs while retaining their ordering. It was developed for +use with the IPsec code, which needs to be able to perform encryption and +decryption on large numbers of packets without reordering those packets. The +crypto developers made a point of writing padata in a sufficiently general +fashion that it could be put to other uses as well. + +Usage +===== + +Initializing +------------ + +The first step in using padata is to set up a padata_instance structure for +overall control of how jobs are to be run:: + + #include <linux/padata.h> + + struct padata_instance *padata_alloc_possible(const char *name); + +'name' simply identifies the instance. + +There are functions for enabling and disabling the instance:: + + int padata_start(struct padata_instance *pinst); + void padata_stop(struct padata_instance *pinst); + +These functions are setting or clearing the "PADATA_INIT" flag; if that flag is +not set, other functions will refuse to work. padata_start() returns zero on +success (flag set) or -EINVAL if the padata cpumask contains no active CPU +(flag not set). padata_stop() clears the flag and blocks until the padata +instance is unused. + +Finally, complete padata initialization by allocating a padata_shell:: + + struct padata_shell *padata_alloc_shell(struct padata_instance *pinst); + +A padata_shell is used to submit a job to padata and allows a series of such +jobs to be serialized independently. A padata_instance may have one or more +padata_shells associated with it, each allowing a separate series of jobs. + +Modifying cpumasks +------------------ + +The CPUs used to run jobs can be changed in two ways, programatically with +padata_set_cpumask() or via sysfs. The former is defined:: + + int padata_set_cpumask(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpumask_type, + cpumask_var_t cpumask); + +Here cpumask_type is one of PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL or PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, where a +parallel cpumask describes which processors will be used to execute jobs +submitted to this instance in parallel and a serial cpumask defines which +processors are allowed to be used as the serialization callback processor. +cpumask specifies the new cpumask to use. + +There may be sysfs files for an instance's cpumasks. For example, pcrypt's +live in /sys/kernel/pcrypt/<instance-name>. Within an instance's directory +there are two files, parallel_cpumask and serial_cpumask, and either cpumask +may be changed by echoing a bitmask into the file, for example:: + + echo f > /sys/kernel/pcrypt/pencrypt/parallel_cpumask + +Reading one of these files shows the user-supplied cpumask, which may be +different from the 'usable' cpumask. + +Padata maintains two pairs of cpumasks internally, the user-supplied cpumasks +and the 'usable' cpumasks. (Each pair consists of a parallel and a serial +cpumask.) The user-supplied cpumasks default to all possible CPUs on instance +allocation and may be changed as above. The usable cpumasks are always a +subset of the user-supplied cpumasks and contain only the online CPUs in the +user-supplied masks; these are the cpumasks padata actually uses. So it is +legal to supply a cpumask to padata that contains offline CPUs. Once an +offline CPU in the user-supplied cpumask comes online, padata is going to use +it. + +Changing the CPU masks are expensive operations, so it should not be done with +great frequency. + +Running A Job +------------- + +Actually submitting work to the padata instance requires the creation of a +padata_priv structure, which represents one job:: + + struct padata_priv { + /* Other stuff here... */ + void (*parallel)(struct padata_priv *padata); + void (*serial)(struct padata_priv *padata); + }; + +This structure will almost certainly be embedded within some larger +structure specific to the work to be done. Most of its fields are private to +padata, but the structure should be zeroed at initialisation time, and the +parallel() and serial() functions should be provided. Those functions will +be called in the process of getting the work done as we will see +momentarily. + +The submission of the job is done with:: + + int padata_do_parallel(struct padata_shell *ps, + struct padata_priv *padata, int *cb_cpu); + +The ps and padata structures must be set up as described above; cb_cpu +points to the preferred CPU to be used for the final callback when the job is +done; it must be in the current instance's CPU mask (if not the cb_cpu pointer +is updated to point to the CPU actually chosen). The return value from +padata_do_parallel() is zero on success, indicating that the job is in +progress. -EBUSY means that somebody, somewhere else is messing with the +instance's CPU mask, while -EINVAL is a complaint about cb_cpu not being in the +serial cpumask, no online CPUs in the parallel or serial cpumasks, or a stopped +instance. + +Each job submitted to padata_do_parallel() will, in turn, be passed to +exactly one call to the above-mentioned parallel() function, on one CPU, so +true parallelism is achieved by submitting multiple jobs. parallel() runs with +software interrupts disabled and thus cannot sleep. The parallel() +function gets the padata_priv structure pointer as its lone parameter; +information about the actual work to be done is probably obtained by using +container_of() to find the enclosing structure. + +Note that parallel() has no return value; the padata subsystem assumes that +parallel() will take responsibility for the job from this point. The job +need not be completed during this call, but, if parallel() leaves work +outstanding, it should be prepared to be called again with a new job before +the previous one completes. + +Serializing Jobs +---------------- + +When a job does complete, parallel() (or whatever function actually finishes +the work) should inform padata of the fact with a call to:: + + void padata_do_serial(struct padata_priv *padata); + +At some point in the future, padata_do_serial() will trigger a call to the +serial() function in the padata_priv structure. That call will happen on +the CPU requested in the initial call to padata_do_parallel(); it, too, is +run with local software interrupts disabled. +Note that this call may be deferred for a while since the padata code takes +pains to ensure that jobs are completed in the order in which they were +submitted. + +Destroying +---------- + +Cleaning up a padata instance predictably involves calling the three free +functions that correspond to the allocation in reverse:: + + void padata_free_shell(struct padata_shell *ps); + void padata_stop(struct padata_instance *pinst); + void padata_free(struct padata_instance *pinst); + +It is the user's responsibility to ensure all outstanding jobs are complete +before any of the above are called. + +Interface +========= + +.. kernel-doc:: include/linux/padata.h +.. kernel-doc:: kernel/padata.c diff --git a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst index fcedc5349ace..640934b6f7b4 100644 --- a/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst +++ b/Documentation/core-api/xarray.rst @@ -25,10 +25,6 @@ good performance with large indices. If your index can be larger than ``ULONG_MAX`` then the XArray is not the data type for you. The most important user of the XArray is the page cache. -Each non-``NULL`` entry in the array has three bits associated with -it called marks. Each mark may be set or cleared independently of -the others. You can iterate over entries which are marked. - Normal pointers may be stored in the XArray directly. They must be 4-byte aligned, which is true for any pointer returned from kmalloc() and alloc_page(). It isn't true for arbitrary user-space pointers, @@ -41,12 +37,11 @@ When you retrieve an entry from the XArray, you can check whether it is a value entry by calling xa_is_value(), and convert it back to an integer by calling xa_to_value(). -Some users want to store tagged pointers instead of using the marks -described above. They can call xa_tag_pointer() to create an -entry with a tag, xa_untag_pointer() to turn a tagged entry -back into an untagged pointer and xa_pointer_tag() to retrieve -the tag of an entry. Tagged pointers use the same bits that are used -to distinguish value entries from normal pointers, so each user must +Some users want to tag the pointers they store in the XArray. You can +call xa_tag_pointer() to create an entry with a tag, xa_untag_pointer() +to turn a tagged entry back into an untagged pointer and xa_pointer_tag() +to retrieve the tag of an entry. Tagged pointers use the same bits that +are used to distinguish value entries from normal pointers, so you must decide whether they want to store value entries or tagged pointers in any particular XArray. @@ -56,10 +51,9 @@ conflict with value entries or internal entries. An unusual feature of the XArray is the ability to create entries which occupy a range of indices. Once stored to, looking up any index in the range will return the same entry as looking up any other index in -the range. Setting a mark on one index will set it on all of them. -Storing to any index will store to all of them. Multi-index entries can -be explicitly split into smaller entries, or storing ``NULL`` into any -entry will cause the XArray to forget about the range. +the range. Storing to any index will store to all of them. Multi-index +entries can be explicitly split into smaller entries, or storing ``NULL`` +into any entry will cause the XArray to forget about the range. Normal API ========== @@ -87,17 +81,11 @@ If you want to only store a new entry to an index if the current entry at that index is ``NULL``, you can use xa_insert() which returns ``-EBUSY`` if the entry is not empty. -You can enquire whether a mark is set on an entry by using -xa_get_mark(). If the entry is not ``NULL``, you can set a mark -on it by using xa_set_mark() and remove the mark from an entry by -calling xa_clear_mark(). You can ask whether any entry in the -XArray has a particular mark set by calling xa_marked(). - You can copy entries out of the XArray into a plain array by calling -xa_extract(). Or you can iterate over the present entries in -the XArray by calling xa_for_each(). You may prefer to use -xa_find() or xa_find_after() to move to the next present -entry in the XArray. +xa_extract(). Or you can iterate over the present entries in the XArray +by calling xa_for_each(), xa_for_each_start() or xa_for_each_range(). +You may prefer to use xa_find() or xa_find_after() to move to the next +present entry in the XArray. Calling xa_store_range() stores the same entry in a range of indices. If you do this, some of the other operations will behave @@ -124,6 +112,31 @@ xa_destroy(). If the XArray entries are pointers, you may wish to free the entries first. You can do this by iterating over all present entries in the XArray using the xa_for_each() iterator. +Search Marks +------------ + +Each entry in the array has three bits associated with it called marks. +Each mark may be set or cleared independently of the others. You can +iterate over marked entries by using the xa_for_each_marked() iterator. + +You can enquire whether a mark is set on an entry by using +xa_get_mark(). If the entry is not ``NULL``, you can set a mark on it +by using xa_set_mark() and remove the mark from an entry by calling +xa_clear_mark(). You can ask whether any entry in the XArray has a +particular mark set by calling xa_marked(). Erasing an entry from the +XArray causes all marks associated with that entry to be cleared. + +Setting or clearing a mark on any index of a multi-index entry will +affect all indices covered by that entry. Querying the mark on any +index will return the same result. + +There is no way to iterate over entries which are not marked; the data +structure does not allow this to be implemented efficiently. There are +not currently iterators to search for logical combinations of bits (eg +iterate over all entries which have both ``XA_MARK_1`` and ``XA_MARK_2`` +set, or iterate over all entries which have ``XA_MARK_0`` or ``XA_MARK_2`` +set). It would be possible to add these if a user arises. + Allocating XArrays ------------------ @@ -180,6 +193,8 @@ No lock needed: Takes RCU read lock: * xa_load() * xa_for_each() + * xa_for_each_start() + * xa_for_each_range() * xa_find() * xa_find_after() * xa_extract() @@ -419,10 +434,9 @@ you last processed. If you have interrupts disabled while iterating, then it is good manners to pause the iteration and reenable interrupts every ``XA_CHECK_SCHED`` entries. -The xas_get_mark(), xas_set_mark() and -xas_clear_mark() functions require the xa_state cursor to have -been moved to the appropriate location in the xarray; they will do -nothing if you have called xas_pause() or xas_set() +The xas_get_mark(), xas_set_mark() and xas_clear_mark() functions require +the xa_state cursor to have been moved to the appropriate location in the +XArray; they will do nothing if you have called xas_pause() or xas_set() immediately before. You can call xas_set_update() to have a callback function diff --git a/Documentation/crypto/devel-algos.rst b/Documentation/crypto/devel-algos.rst index f9d288015acc..f225a953ab4b 100644 --- a/Documentation/crypto/devel-algos.rst +++ b/Documentation/crypto/devel-algos.rst @@ -31,33 +31,23 @@ The counterparts to those functions are listed below. :: - int crypto_unregister_alg(struct crypto_alg *alg); - int crypto_unregister_algs(struct crypto_alg *algs, int count); + void crypto_unregister_alg(struct crypto_alg *alg); + void crypto_unregister_algs(struct crypto_alg *algs, int count); -Notice that both registration and unregistration functions do return a -value, so make sure to handle errors. A return code of zero implies -success. Any return code < 0 implies an error. +The registration functions return 0 on success, or a negative errno +value on failure. crypto_register_algs() succeeds only if it +successfully registered all the given algorithms; if it fails partway +through, then any changes are rolled back. -The bulk registration/unregistration functions register/unregister each -transformation in the given array of length count. They handle errors as -follows: - -- crypto_register_algs() succeeds if and only if it successfully - registers all the given transformations. If an error occurs partway - through, then it rolls back successful registrations before returning - the error code. Note that if a driver needs to handle registration - errors for individual transformations, then it will need to use the - non-bulk function crypto_register_alg() instead. - -- crypto_unregister_algs() tries to unregister all the given - transformations, continuing on error. It logs errors and always - returns zero. +The unregistration functions always succeed, so they don't have a +return value. Don't try to unregister algorithms that aren't +currently registered. Single-Block Symmetric Ciphers [CIPHER] --------------------------------------- -Example of transformations: aes, arc4, ... +Example of transformations: aes, serpent, ... This section describes the simplest of all transformation implementations, that being the CIPHER type used for symmetric ciphers. @@ -108,7 +98,7 @@ is also valid: Multi-Block Ciphers ------------------- -Example of transformations: cbc(aes), ecb(arc4), ... +Example of transformations: cbc(aes), chacha20, ... This section describes the multi-block cipher transformation implementations. The multi-block ciphers are used for transformations @@ -169,10 +159,10 @@ are as follows: :: - int crypto_unregister_ahash(struct ahash_alg *alg); + void crypto_unregister_ahash(struct ahash_alg *alg); - int crypto_unregister_shash(struct shash_alg *alg); - int crypto_unregister_shashes(struct shash_alg *algs, int count); + void crypto_unregister_shash(struct shash_alg *alg); + void crypto_unregister_shashes(struct shash_alg *algs, int count); Cipher Definition With struct shash_alg and ahash_alg diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst index 36890b026e77..1c4e1825d769 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kcov.rst @@ -251,11 +251,11 @@ selectively from different subsystems. .. code-block:: c struct kcov_remote_arg { - unsigned trace_mode; - unsigned area_size; - unsigned num_handles; - uint64_t common_handle; - uint64_t handles[0]; + __u32 trace_mode; + __u32 area_size; + __u32 num_handles; + __aligned_u64 common_handle; + __aligned_u64 handles[0]; }; #define KCOV_INIT_TRACE _IOR('c', 1, unsigned long) diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst index ecdfdc9d4b03..61ae13c44f91 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kselftest.rst @@ -203,12 +203,12 @@ Test Module Kselftest tests the kernel from userspace. Sometimes things need testing from within the kernel, one method of doing this is to create a test module. We can tie the module into the kselftest framework by -using a shell script test runner. ``kselftest_module.sh`` is designed +using a shell script test runner. ``kselftest/module.sh`` is designed to facilitate this process. There is also a header file provided to assist writing kernel modules that are for use with kselftest: - ``tools/testing/kselftest/kselftest_module.h`` -- ``tools/testing/kselftest/kselftest_module.sh`` +- ``tools/testing/kselftest/kselftest/module.sh`` How to use ---------- @@ -247,7 +247,7 @@ A bare bones test module might look like this: #define pr_fmt(fmt) KBUILD_MODNAME ": " fmt - #include "../tools/testing/selftests/kselftest_module.h" + #include "../tools/testing/selftests/kselftest/module.h" KSTM_MODULE_GLOBALS(); @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@ Example test script #!/bin/bash # SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ - $(dirname $0)/../kselftest_module.sh "foo" test_foo + $(dirname $0)/../kselftest/module.sh "foo" test_foo Test Harness diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/faq.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/faq.rst index bf2095112d89..ea55b2467653 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/faq.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/faq.rst @@ -29,7 +29,8 @@ Yes, well, mostly. For the most part, the KUnit core framework (what you use to write the tests) can compile to any architecture; it compiles like just another part of the -kernel and runs when the kernel boots. However, there is some infrastructure, +kernel and runs when the kernel boots, or when built as a module, when the +module is loaded. However, there is some infrastructure, like the KUnit Wrapper (``tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py``) that does not support other architectures. diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/index.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/index.rst index 26ffb46bdf99..d16a4d2c3a41 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/index.rst @@ -9,6 +9,7 @@ KUnit - Unit Testing for the Linux Kernel start usage + kunit-tool api/index faq @@ -48,6 +49,9 @@ to a standalone program that can be run like any other program directly inside of a host operating system; to be clear, it does not require any virtualization support; it is just a regular program. +Alternatively, kunit and kunit tests can be built as modules and tests will +run when the test module is loaded. + KUnit is fast. Excluding build time, from invocation to completion KUnit can run several dozen tests in only 10 to 20 seconds; this might not sound like a big deal to some people, but having such fast and easy to run tests fundamentally diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/kunit-tool.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/kunit-tool.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..50d46394e97e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/kunit-tool.rst @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================= +kunit_tool How-To +================= + +What is kunit_tool? +=================== + +kunit_tool is a script (``tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py``) that aids in building +the Linux kernel as UML (`User Mode Linux +<http://user-mode-linux.sourceforge.net/>`_), running KUnit tests, parsing +the test results and displaying them in a user friendly manner. + +What is a kunitconfig? +====================== + +It's just a defconfig that kunit_tool looks for in the base directory. +kunit_tool uses it to generate a .config as you might expect. In addition, it +verifies that the generated .config contains the CONFIG options in the +kunitconfig; the reason it does this is so that it is easy to be sure that a +CONFIG that enables a test actually ends up in the .config. + +How do I use kunit_tool? +======================== + +If a kunitconfig is present at the root directory, all you have to do is: + +.. code-block:: bash + + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run + +However, you most likely want to use it with the following options: + +.. code-block:: bash + + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run --timeout=30 --jobs=`nproc --all` + +- ``--timeout`` sets a maximum amount of time to allow tests to run. +- ``--jobs`` sets the number of threads to use to build the kernel. + +If you just want to use the defconfig that ships with the kernel, you can +append the ``--defconfig`` flag as well: + +.. code-block:: bash + + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run --timeout=30 --jobs=`nproc --all` --defconfig + +.. note:: + This command is particularly helpful for getting started because it + just works. No kunitconfig needs to be present. + +For a list of all the flags supported by kunit_tool, you can run: + +.. code-block:: bash + + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run --help diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/start.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/start.rst index aeeddfafeea2..4e1d24db6b13 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/start.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/start.rst @@ -19,21 +19,21 @@ The wrapper can be run with: .. code-block:: bash - ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run --defconfig -Creating a kunitconfig -====================== -The Python script is a thin wrapper around Kbuild as such, it needs to be -configured with a ``kunitconfig`` file. This file essentially contains the +For more information on this wrapper (also called kunit_tool) checkout the +:doc:`kunit-tool` page. + +Creating a .kunitconfig +======================= +The Python script is a thin wrapper around Kbuild. As such, it needs to be +configured with a ``.kunitconfig`` file. This file essentially contains the regular Kernel config, with the specific test targets as well. .. code-block:: bash - git clone -b master https://kunit.googlesource.com/kunitconfig $PATH_TO_KUNITCONFIG_REPO cd $PATH_TO_LINUX_REPO - ln -s $PATH_TO_KUNIT_CONFIG_REPO/kunitconfig kunitconfig - -You may want to add kunitconfig to your local gitignore. + cp arch/um/configs/kunit_defconfig .kunitconfig Verifying KUnit Works --------------------- @@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ If everything worked correctly, you should see the following: followed by a list of tests that are run. All of them should be passing. .. note:: - Because it is building a lot of sources for the first time, the ``Building - kunit kernel`` step may take a while. + Because it is building a lot of sources for the first time, the + ``Building KUnit kernel`` step may take a while. Writing your first test ======================= @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ and the following to ``drivers/misc/Makefile``: obj-$(CONFIG_MISC_EXAMPLE_TEST) += example-test.o -Now add it to your ``kunitconfig``: +Now add it to your ``.kunitconfig``: .. code-block:: none @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ Now you can run the test: .. code-block:: bash - ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py + ./tools/testing/kunit/kunit.py run You should see the following failure: diff --git a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/usage.rst b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/usage.rst index c6e69634e274..7cd56a1993b1 100644 --- a/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/usage.rst +++ b/Documentation/dev-tools/kunit/usage.rst @@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Organization of this document ============================= This document is organized into two main sections: Testing and Isolating -Behavior. The first covers what a unit test is and how to use KUnit to write +Behavior. The first covers what unit tests are and how to use KUnit to write them. The second covers how to use KUnit to isolate code and make it possible to unit test code that was otherwise un-unit-testable. @@ -174,13 +174,13 @@ Test Suites ~~~~~~~~~~~ Now obviously one unit test isn't very helpful; the power comes from having -many test cases covering all of your behaviors. Consequently it is common to -have many *similar* tests; in order to reduce duplication in these closely -related tests most unit testing frameworks provide the concept of a *test -suite*, in KUnit we call it a *test suite*; all it is is just a collection of -test cases for a unit of code with a set up function that gets invoked before -every test cases and then a tear down function that gets invoked after every -test case completes. +many test cases covering all of a unit's behaviors. Consequently it is common +to have many *similar* tests; in order to reduce duplication in these closely +related tests most unit testing frameworks - including KUnit - provide the +concept of a *test suite*. A *test suite* is just a collection of test cases +for a unit of code with a set up function that gets invoked before every test +case and then a tear down function that gets invoked after every test case +completes. Example: @@ -211,7 +211,7 @@ KUnit test framework. .. note:: A test case will only be run if it is associated with a test suite. -For a more information on these types of things see the :doc:`api/test`. +For more information on these types of things see the :doc:`api/test`. Isolating Behavior ================== @@ -338,7 +338,7 @@ We can easily test this code by *faking out* the underlying EEPROM: return count; } - ssize_t fake_eeprom_write(struct eeprom *this, size_t offset, const char *buffer, size_t count) + ssize_t fake_eeprom_write(struct eeprom *parent, size_t offset, const char *buffer, size_t count) { struct fake_eeprom *this = container_of(parent, struct fake_eeprom, parent); @@ -454,7 +454,7 @@ KUnit on non-UML architectures By default KUnit uses UML as a way to provide dependencies for code under test. Under most circumstances KUnit's usage of UML should be treated as an implementation detail of how KUnit works under the hood. Nevertheless, there -are instances where being able to run architecture specific code, or test +are instances where being able to run architecture specific code or test against real hardware is desirable. For these reasons KUnit supports running on other architectures. @@ -539,6 +539,22 @@ Interspersed in the kernel logs you might see the following: Congratulations, you just ran a KUnit test on the x86 architecture! +In a similar manner, kunit and kunit tests can also be built as modules, +so if you wanted to run tests in this way you might add the following config +options to your ``.config``: + +.. code-block:: none + + CONFIG_KUNIT=m + CONFIG_KUNIT_EXAMPLE_TEST=m + +Once the kernel is built and installed, a simple + +.. code-block:: bash + modprobe example-test + +...will run the tests. + Writing new tests for other architectures ----------------------------------------- @@ -557,7 +573,7 @@ run your tests on your hardware setup just by compiling for your architecture. .. important:: Always prefer tests that run on UML to tests that only run under a particular architecture, and always prefer tests that run under QEMU or another easy - (and monitarily free) to obtain software environment to a specific piece of + (and monetarily free) to obtain software environment to a specific piece of hardware. Nevertheless, there are still valid reasons to write an architecture or hardware diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt index 9fbde401a090..e003a553b986 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/atmel-sysregs.txt @@ -10,6 +10,12 @@ PIT Timer required properties: - interrupts: Should contain interrupt for the PIT which is the IRQ line shared across all System Controller members. +PIT64B Timer required properties: +- compatible: Should be "microchip,sam9x60-pit64b" +- reg: Should contain registers location and length +- interrupts: Should contain interrupt for PIT64B timer +- clocks: Should contain the available clock sources for PIT64B timer. + System Timer (ST) required properties: - compatible: Should be "atmel,at91rm9200-st", "syscon", "simple-mfd" - reg: Should contain registers location and length diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/brcm,sata-brcm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/brcm,sata-brcm.txt index 7713a413c6a7..b9ae4ce4a0a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/brcm,sata-brcm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ata/brcm,sata-brcm.txt @@ -5,6 +5,7 @@ Each SATA controller should have its own node. Required properties: - compatible : should be one or more of + "brcm,bcm7216-ahci" "brcm,bcm7425-ahci" "brcm,bcm7445-ahci" "brcm,bcm-nsp-ahci" @@ -14,6 +15,12 @@ Required properties: - reg-names : "ahci" and "top-ctrl" - interrupts : interrupt mapping for SATA IRQ +Optional properties: + +- reset: for "brcm,bcm7216-ahci" must be a valid reset phandle + pointing to the RESCAL reset controller provider node. +- reset-names: for "brcm,bcm7216-ahci", must be "rescal". + Also see ahci-platform.txt. Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt index d357987181ee..88578ac1a8a7 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ USB Connector ============= -USB connector node represents physical USB connector. It should be -a child of USB interface controller. +A USB connector node represents a physical USB connector. It should be +a child of a USB interface controller. Required properties: - compatible: describes type of the connector, must be one of: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-edma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-edma.txt index 29dd3ccb1235..e77b08ebcd06 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-edma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-edma.txt @@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible : - "fsl,vf610-edma" for eDMA used similar to that on Vybrid vf610 SoC - "fsl,imx7ulp-edma" for eDMA2 used similar to that on i.mx7ulp + - "fsl,fsl,ls1028a-edma" for eDMA used similar to that on Vybrid vf610 SoC - reg : Specifies base physical address(s) and size of the eDMA registers. The 1st region is eDMA control register's address and size. The 2nd and the 3rd regions are programmable channel multiplexing diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt index 9d8bbac27d8b..c9e97409e853 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/fsl-imx-sdma.txt @@ -10,6 +10,9 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx6q-sdma" "fsl,imx7d-sdma" "fsl,imx8mq-sdma" + "fsl,imx8mm-sdma" + "fsl,imx8mn-sdma" + "fsl,imx8mp-sdma" The -to variants should be preferred since they allow to determine the correct ROM script addresses needed for the driver to work without additional firmware. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt index ec89782d9498..3459e77be294 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/jz4780-dma.txt @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -* Ingenic JZ4780 DMA Controller +* Ingenic XBurst DMA Controller Required properties: @@ -8,10 +8,12 @@ Required properties: * ingenic,jz4770-dma * ingenic,jz4780-dma * ingenic,x1000-dma + * ingenic,x1830-dma - reg: Should contain the DMA channel registers location and length, followed by the DMA controller registers location and length. - interrupts: Should contain the interrupt specifier of the DMA controller. -- clocks: Should contain a clock specifier for the JZ4780/X1000 PDMA clock. +- clocks: Should contain a clock specifier for the JZ4780/X1000/X1830 PDMA + clock. - #dma-cells: Must be <2>. Number of integer cells in the dmas property of DMA clients (see below). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt index 5551e929fd99..b7f81c63be8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/renesas,rcar-dmac.txt @@ -30,6 +30,7 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,dmac-r8a7794" (R-Car E2) - "renesas,dmac-r8a7795" (R-Car H3) - "renesas,dmac-r8a7796" (R-Car M3-W) + - "renesas,dmac-r8a77961" (R-Car M3-W+) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77965" (R-Car M3-N) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77970" (R-Car V3M) - "renesas,dmac-r8a77980" (R-Car V3H) diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti/k3-udma.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti/k3-udma.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8b5c346f23f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/ti/k3-udma.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/dma/ti/k3-udma.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Texas Instruments K3 NAVSS Unified DMA Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Peter Ujfalusi <peter.ujfalusi@ti.com> + +description: | + The UDMA-P is intended to perform similar (but significantly upgraded) + functions as the packet-oriented DMA used on previous SoC devices. The UDMA-P + module supports the transmission and reception of various packet types. + The UDMA-P architecture facilitates the segmentation and reassembly of SoC DMA + data structure compliant packets to/from smaller data blocks that are natively + compatible with the specific requirements of each connected peripheral. + Multiple Tx and Rx channels are provided within the DMA which allow multiple + segmentation or reassembly operations to be ongoing. The DMA controller + maintains state information for each of the channels which allows packet + segmentation and reassembly operations to be time division multiplexed between + channels in order to share the underlying DMA hardware. An external DMA + scheduler is used to control the ordering and rate at which this multiplexing + occurs for Transmit operations. The ordering and rate of Receive operations + is indirectly controlled by the order in which blocks are pushed into the DMA + on the Rx PSI-L interface. + + The UDMA-P also supports acting as both a UTC and UDMA-C for its internal + channels. Channels in the UDMA-P can be configured to be either Packet-Based + or Third-Party channels on a channel by channel basis. + + All transfers within NAVSS is done between PSI-L source and destination + threads. + The peripherals serviced by UDMA can be PSI-L native (sa2ul, cpsw, etc) or + legacy, non PSI-L native peripherals. In the later case a special, small PDMA + is tasked to act as a bridge between the PSI-L fabric and the legacy + peripheral. + + PDMAs can be configured via UDMAP peer registers to match with the + configuration of the legacy peripheral. + +allOf: + - $ref: "../dma-controller.yaml#" + +properties: + "#dma-cells": + const: 1 + description: | + The cell is the PSI-L thread ID of the remote (to UDMAP) end. + Valid ranges for thread ID depends on the data movement direction: + for source thread IDs (rx): 0 - 0x7fff + for destination thread IDs (tx): 0x8000 - 0xffff + + Please refer to the device documentation for the PSI-L thread map and also + the PSI-L peripheral chapter for the correct thread ID. + + compatible: + enum: + - ti,am654-navss-main-udmap + - ti,am654-navss-mcu-udmap + - ti,j721e-navss-main-udmap + - ti,j721e-navss-mcu-udmap + + reg: + maxItems: 3 + + reg-names: + items: + - const: gcfg + - const: rchanrt + - const: tchanrt + + msi-parent: true + + ti,sci: + description: phandle to TI-SCI compatible System controller node + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle + + ti,sci-dev-id: + description: TI-SCI device id of UDMAP + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + + ti,ringacc: + description: phandle to the ring accelerator node + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle + + ti,sci-rm-range-tchan: + description: | + Array of UDMA tchan resource subtypes for resource allocation for this + host + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + minItems: 1 + # Should be enough + maxItems: 255 + + ti,sci-rm-range-rchan: + description: | + Array of UDMA rchan resource subtypes for resource allocation for this + host + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + minItems: 1 + # Should be enough + maxItems: 255 + + ti,sci-rm-range-rflow: + description: | + Array of UDMA rflow resource subtypes for resource allocation for this + host + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + minItems: 1 + # Should be enough + maxItems: 255 + +required: + - compatible + - "#dma-cells" + - reg + - reg-names + - msi-parent + - ti,sci + - ti,sci-dev-id + - ti,ringacc + - ti,sci-rm-range-tchan + - ti,sci-rm-range-rchan + - ti,sci-rm-range-rflow + +examples: + - |+ + cbass_main { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + + cbass_main_navss: navss@30800000 { + compatible = "simple-mfd"; + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <2>; + dma-coherent; + dma-ranges; + ranges; + + ti,sci-dev-id = <118>; + + main_udmap: dma-controller@31150000 { + compatible = "ti,am654-navss-main-udmap"; + reg = <0x0 0x31150000 0x0 0x100>, + <0x0 0x34000000 0x0 0x100000>, + <0x0 0x35000000 0x0 0x100000>; + reg-names = "gcfg", "rchanrt", "tchanrt"; + #dma-cells = <1>; + + ti,ringacc = <&ringacc>; + + msi-parent = <&inta_main_udmass>; + + ti,sci = <&dmsc>; + ti,sci-dev-id = <188>; + + ti,sci-rm-range-tchan = <0x1>, /* TX_HCHAN */ + <0x2>; /* TX_CHAN */ + ti,sci-rm-range-rchan = <0x4>, /* RX_HCHAN */ + <0x5>; /* RX_CHAN */ + ti,sci-rm-range-rflow = <0x6>; /* GP RFLOW */ + }; + }; + + mcasp0: mcasp@02B00000 { + dmas = <&main_udmap 0xc400>, <&main_udmap 0x4400>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; + }; + + crypto: crypto@4E00000 { + compatible = "ti,sa2ul-crypto"; + + dmas = <&main_udmap 0xc000>, <&main_udmap 0x4000>, <&main_udmap 0x4001>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx1", "rx2"; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/qcom,wcd934x-gpio.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/qcom,wcd934x-gpio.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..32a566ec3558 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/qcom,wcd934x-gpio.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/gpio/qcom,wcd934x-gpio.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: WCD9340/WCD9341 GPIO controller + +maintainers: + - Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org> + +description: | + Qualcomm Technologies Inc WCD9340/WCD9341 Audio Codec has integrated + gpio controller to control 5 gpios on the chip. + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - qcom,wcd9340-gpio + - qcom,wcd9341-gpio + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + gpio-controller: true + + '#gpio-cells': + const: 2 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - gpio-controller + - "#gpio-cells" + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + wcdgpio: gpio@42 { + compatible = "qcom,wcd9340-gpio"; + reg = <0x042 0x2>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt index 41e5fed0f842..10dce84b1545 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/renesas,gpio-rcar.txt @@ -18,7 +18,8 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,gpio-r8a7793": for R8A7793 (R-Car M2-N) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a7794": for R8A7794 (R-Car E2) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a7795": for R8A7795 (R-Car H3) compatible GPIO controller. - - "renesas,gpio-r8a7796": for R8A7796 (R-Car M3-W) compatible GPIO controller. + - "renesas,gpio-r8a7796": for R8A77960 (R-Car M3-W) compatible GPIO controller. + - "renesas,gpio-r8a77961": for R8A77961 (R-Car M3-W+) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77965": for R8A77965 (R-Car M3-N) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77970": for R8A77970 (R-Car V3M) compatible GPIO controller. - "renesas,gpio-r8a77980": for R8A77980 (R-Car V3H) compatible GPIO controller. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sifive,gpio.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sifive,gpio.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..418e8381e07c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/sifive,gpio.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/gpio/sifive,gpio.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: SiFive GPIO controller + +maintainers: + - Yash Shah <yash.shah@sifive.com> + - Paul Walmsley <paul.walmsley@sifive.com> + +properties: + compatible: + items: + - const: sifive,fu540-c000-gpio + - const: sifive,gpio0 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + description: + interrupt mapping one per GPIO. Maximum 16 GPIOs. + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 16 + + interrupt-controller: true + + "#interrupt-cells": + const: 2 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + "#gpio-cells": + const: 2 + + gpio-controller: true + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - interrupt-controller + - "#interrupt-cells" + - clocks + - "#gpio-cells" + - gpio-controller + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/sifive-fu540-prci.h> + gpio@10060000 { + compatible = "sifive,fu540-c000-gpio", "sifive,gpio0"; + interrupt-parent = <&plic>; + interrupts = <7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22>; + reg = <0x0 0x10060000 0x0 0x1000>; + clocks = <&tlclk PRCI_CLK_TLCLK>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/xylon,logicvc-gpio.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/xylon,logicvc-gpio.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d102888c1be7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/xylon,logicvc-gpio.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +# Copyright 2019 Bootlin +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/gpio/xylon,logicvc-gpio.yaml#" +$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#" + +title: Xylon LogiCVC GPIO controller + +maintainers: + - Paul Kocialkowski <paul.kocialkowski@bootlin.com> + +description: | + The LogiCVC GPIO describes the GPIO block included in the LogiCVC display + controller. These are meant to be used for controlling display-related + signals. + + The controller exposes GPIOs from the display and power control registers, + which are mapped by the driver as follows: + - GPIO[4:0] (display control) mapped to index 0-4 + - EN_BLIGHT (power control) mapped to index 5 + - EN_VDD (power control) mapped to index 6 + - EN_VEE (power control) mapped to index 7 + - V_EN (power control) mapped to index 8 + +properties: + $nodename: + pattern: "^gpio@[0-9a-f]+$" + + compatible: + enum: + - xylon,logicvc-3.02.a-gpio + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + "#gpio-cells": + const: 2 + + gpio-controller: true + + gpio-line-names: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 9 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - "#gpio-cells" + - gpio-controller + +examples: + - | + logicvc: logicvc@43c00000 { + compatible = "xylon,logicvc-3.02.a", "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x43c00000 0x6000>; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + logicvc_gpio: gpio@40 { + compatible = "xylon,logicvc-3.02.a-gpio"; + reg = <0x40 0x40>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + gpio-line-names = "GPIO0", "GPIO1", "GPIO2", "GPIO3", "GPIO4", + "EN_BLIGHT", "EN_VDD", "EN_VEE", "V_EN"; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adi,adm1177.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adi,adm1177.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2a9822075b36 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/adi,adm1177.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/hwmon/adi,adm1177.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Analog Devices ADM1177 Hot Swap Controller and Digital Power Monitor + +maintainers: + - Michael Hennerich <michael.hennerich@analog.com> + - Beniamin Bia <beniamin.bia@analog.com> + +description: | + Analog Devices ADM1177 Hot Swap Controller and Digital Power Monitor + https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/ADM1177.pdf + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - adi,adm1177 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + avcc-supply: + description: + Phandle to the Avcc power supply + + shunt-resistor-micro-ohms: + description: + The value of curent sense resistor in microohms. If not provided, + the current reading and overcurrent alert is disabled. + + adi,shutdown-threshold-microamp: + description: + Specifies the current level at which an over current alert occurs. + If not provided, the overcurrent alert is configured to max ADC range + based on shunt-resistor-micro-ohms. + + adi,vrange-high-enable: + description: + Specifies which internal voltage divider to be used. A 1 selects + a 7:2 voltage divider while a 0 selects a 14:1 voltage divider. + type: boolean + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + i2c0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + pwmon@5a { + compatible = "adi,adm1177"; + reg = <0x5a>; + shunt-resistor-micro-ohms = <50000>; /* 50 mOhm */ + adi,shutdown-threshold-microamp = <1059000>; /* 1.059 A */ + adi,vrange-high-enable; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pmbus/ti,ucd90320.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pmbus/ti,ucd90320.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..5d42e1304202 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/hwmon/pmbus/ti,ucd90320.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- + +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/hwmon/pmbus/ti,ucd90320.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: UCD90320 power sequencer + +maintainers: + - Jim Wright <wrightj@linux.vnet.ibm.com> + +description: | + The UCD90320 is a 32-rail PMBus/I2C addressable power-supply sequencer and + monitor. The 24 integrated ADC channels (AMONx) monitor the power supply + voltage, current, and temperature. Of the 84 GPIO pins, 8 can be used as + digital monitors (DMONx), 32 to enable the power supply (ENx), 24 for + margining (MARx), 16 for logical GPO, and 32 GPIs for cascading, and system + function. + + http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90320.pdf + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - ti,ucd90320 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +examples: + - | + i2c { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + ucd90320@11 { + compatible = "ti,ucd90320"; + reg = <0x11>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt index 2210f4359c45..8347b1e7c080 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/i2c/i2c-at91.txt @@ -18,8 +18,10 @@ Optional properties: - dma-names: should contain "tx" and "rx". - atmel,fifo-size: maximum number of data the RX and TX FIFOs can store for FIFO capable I2C controllers. -- i2c-sda-hold-time-ns: TWD hold time, only available for "atmel,sama5d4-i2c" - and "atmel,sama5d2-i2c". +- i2c-sda-hold-time-ns: TWD hold time, only available for: + "atmel,sama5d4-i2c", + "atmel,sama5d2-i2c", + "microchip,sam9x60-i2c". - Child nodes conforming to i2c bus binding Examples : diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adi,adis16240.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adi,adis16240.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4147f02b5e3c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/adi,adis16240.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/accel/adi,adis16240.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ADIS16240 Programmable Impact Sensor and Recorder driver + +maintainers: + - Alexandru Ardelean <alexandru.ardelean@analog.com> + +description: | + ADIS16240 Programmable Impact Sensor and Recorder driver that supports + SPI interface. + https://www.analog.com/en/products/adis16240.html + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - adi,adis16240 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + spi0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + /* Example for a SPI device node */ + accelerometer@0 { + compatible = "adi,adis16240"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <2500000>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; + interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt index 3b25b4c4d446..f53237270b32 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bma180.txt @@ -1,11 +1,14 @@ -* Bosch BMA180 / BMA250 triaxial acceleration sensor +* Bosch BMA180 / BMA25x triaxial acceleration sensor http://omapworld.com/BMA180_111_1002839.pdf http://ae-bst.resource.bosch.com/media/products/dokumente/bma250/bst-bma250-ds002-05.pdf Required properties: - - compatible : should be "bosch,bma180" or "bosch,bma250" + - compatible : should be one of: + "bosch,bma180" + "bosch,bma250" + "bosch,bma254" - reg : the I2C address of the sensor Optional properties: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bosch,bma400.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bosch,bma400.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c1c6d6f223cf --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/bosch,bma400.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/accel/bosch,bma400.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Bosch BMA400 triaxial acceleration sensor + +maintainers: + - Dan Robertson <dan@dlrobertson.com> + +description: | + Acceleration and temperature iio sensors with an i2c interface + + Specifications about the sensor can be found at: + https://ae-bst.resource.bosch.com/media/_tech/media/datasheets/BST-BMA400-DS000.pdf + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - bosch,bma400 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + vdd-supply: + description: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the accelerometer + + vddio-supply: + description: phandle to the regulator that provides power to the sensor's IO + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + i2c { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + accelerometer@14 { + compatible = "bosch,bma400"; + reg = <0x14>; + vdd-supply = <&vdd>; + vddio-supply = <&vddio>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; + interrupts = <0 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt index eb76a02e2a82..ce950e162d5d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/accel/kionix,kxcjk1013.txt @@ -9,9 +9,16 @@ Required properties: "kionix,kxtf9" - reg: i2c slave address +Optional properties: + + - mount-matrix: an optional 3x3 mounting rotation matrix + Example: kxtf9@f { compatible = "kionix,kxtf9"; reg = <0x0F>; + mount-matrix = "0", "1", "0", + "1", "0", "0", + "0", "0", "1"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7091r5.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7091r5.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..31ffa275f5fa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/adi,ad7091r5.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/adc/adi,ad7091r5.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Analog Devices AD7091R5 4-Channel 12-Bit ADC + +maintainers: + - Beniamin Bia <beniamin.bia@analog.com> + +description: | + Analog Devices AD7091R5 4-Channel 12-Bit ADC + https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/ad7091r-5.pdf + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - adi,ad7091r5 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + vref-supply: + description: + Phandle to the vref power supply + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + i2c { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + adc@2f { + compatible = "adi,ad7091r5"; + reg = <0x2f>; + + interrupts = <25 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_FALLING>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lltc,ltc2496.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lltc,ltc2496.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59009997dca0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/lltc,ltc2496.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/adc/lltc,ltc2496.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Linear Technology / Analog Devices LTC2496 ADC + +maintainers: + - Lars-Peter Clausen <lars@metafoo.de> + - Michael Hennerich <Michael.Hennerich@analog.com> + - Stefan Popa <stefan.popa@analog.com> + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - lltc,ltc2496 + + vref-supply: + description: phandle to an external regulator providing the reference voltage + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle + + reg: + description: spi chipselect number according to the usual spi bindings + + spi-max-frequency: + description: maximal spi bus frequency supported + +required: + - compatible + - vref-supply + - reg + +examples: + - | + spi { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + adc@0 { + compatible = "lltc,ltc2496"; + reg = <0>; + vref-supply = <<c2496_reg>; + spi-max-frequency = <2000000>; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 59b92cd32552..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,13 +0,0 @@ -Device-Tree bindings for sigma delta modulator - -Required properties: -- compatible: should be "ads1201", "sd-modulator". "sd-modulator" can be use - as a generic SD modulator if modulator not specified in compatible list. -- #io-channel-cells = <0>: See the IIO bindings section "IIO consumers". - -Example node: - - ads1202: adc { - compatible = "sd-modulator"; - #io-channel-cells = <0>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a390343d0c2a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/adc/sigma-delta-modulator.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Device-Tree bindings for sigma delta modulator + +maintainers: + - Arnaud Pouliquen <arnaud.pouliquen@st.com> + +properties: + compatible: + description: | + "sd-modulator" can be used as a generic SD modulator, + if the modulator is not specified in the compatible list. + enum: + - sd-modulator + - ads1201 + + '#io-channel-cells': + const: 0 + +required: + - compatible + - '#io-channel-cells' + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + ads1202: adc { + compatible = "sd-modulator"; + #io-channel-cells = <0>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt index ed7783f45233..cd903a1d880d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/imu/adi,adis16480.txt @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Required properties for the ADIS16480: * "adi,adis16480" * "adi,adis16485" * "adi,adis16488" + * "adi,adis16490" * "adi,adis16495-1" * "adi,adis16495-2" * "adi,adis16495-3" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/asc,dlhl60d.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/asc,dlhl60d.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..9f5ca9c42025 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/pressure/asc,dlhl60d.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/pressure/asc,dlhl60d.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: All Sensors DLH series low voltage digital pressure sensors + +maintainers: + - Tomislav Denis <tomislav.denis@avl.com> + +description: | + Bindings for the All Sensors DLH series pressure sensors. + + Specifications about the sensors can be found at: + http://www.allsensors.com/cad/DS-0355_Rev_B.PDF + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - asc,dlhl60d + - asc,dlhl60g + + reg: + description: I2C device address + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + description: interrupt mapping for EOC(data ready) pin + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + + i2c0 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + pressure@29 { + compatible = "asc,dlhl60d"; + reg = <0x29>; + interrupt-parent = <&gpio0>; + interrupts = <10 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/parallax-ping.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/parallax-ping.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a079c9921af6 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/proximity/parallax-ping.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-or-later OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/iio/proximity/parallax-ping.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Parallax PING))) and LaserPING range finder + +maintainers: + - Andreas Klinger <ak@it-klinger.de> + +description: | + Bit-banging driver using one GPIO: + - ping-gpios is raised by the driver to start measurement + - direction of ping-gpio is then switched into input with an interrupt + for receiving distance value as PWM signal + + Specifications about the devices can be found at: + http://parallax.com/sites/default/files/downloads/28041-LaserPING-2m-Rangefinder-Guide.pdf + http://parallax.com/sites/default/files/downloads/28015-PING-Documentation-v1.6.pdf + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - parallax,ping + - parallax,laserping + + ping-gpios: + description: + Definition of the GPIO for the triggering and echo (output and input) + This GPIO is set for about 5 us by the driver to tell the device it + should initiate the measurement cycle. Afterwards the GPIO is switched + to input direction with an interrupt. The device sets it and the + length of the input signal corresponds to the measured distance. + It needs to be an GPIO which is able to deliver an interrupt because + the time between two interrupts is measured in the driver. + See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/gpio/gpio.txt for information + on how to specify a consumer gpio. + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - compatible + - ping-gpios + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/gpio/gpio.h> + proximity { + compatible = "parallax,laserping"; + ping-gpios = <&gpio0 26 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/maxim_thermocouple.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/maxim_thermocouple.txt index 28bc5c4d965b..bb85cd0e039c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/maxim_thermocouple.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/iio/temperature/maxim_thermocouple.txt @@ -5,7 +5,10 @@ Maxim thermocouple support Required properties: - - compatible: must be "maxim,max31855" or "maxim,max6675" + - compatible: must be "maxim,max6675" or one of the following: + "maxim,max31855k", "maxim,max31855j", "maxim,max31855n", + "maxim,max31855s", "maxim,max31855t", "maxim,max31855e", + "maxim,max31855r"; the generic "max,max31855" is deprecated. - reg: SPI chip select number for the device - spi-max-frequency: must be 4300000 - spi-cpha: must be defined for max6675 to enable SPI mode 1 @@ -15,7 +18,7 @@ Required properties: Example: max31855@0 { - compatible = "maxim,max31855"; + compatible = "maxim,max31855k"; reg = <0>; spi-max-frequency = <4300000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,msm8916.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,msm8916.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4107e60cab12 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interconnect/qcom,msm8916.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interconnect/qcom,msm8916.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Qualcomm MSM8916 Network-On-Chip interconnect + +maintainers: + - Georgi Djakov <georgi.djakov@linaro.org> + +description: | + The Qualcomm MSM8916 interconnect providers support adjusting the + bandwidth requirements between the various NoC fabrics. + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - qcom,msm8916-bimc + - qcom,msm8916-pcnoc + - qcom,msm8916-snoc + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + '#interconnect-cells': + const: 1 + + clock-names: + items: + - const: bus + - const: bus_a + + clocks: + items: + - description: Bus Clock + - description: Bus A Clock + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - '#interconnect-cells' + - clock-names + - clocks + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/qcom,rpmcc.h> + + bimc: interconnect@400000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm8916-bimc"; + reg = <0x00400000 0x62000>; + #interconnect-cells = <1>; + clock-names = "bus", "bus_a"; + clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_BIMC_CLK>, + <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_BIMC_A_CLK>; + }; + + pcnoc: interconnect@500000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm8916-pcnoc"; + reg = <0x00500000 0x11000>; + #interconnect-cells = <1>; + clock-names = "bus", "bus_a"; + clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_PCNOC_CLK>, + <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_PCNOC_A_CLK>; + }; + + snoc: interconnect@580000 { + compatible = "qcom,msm8916-snoc"; + reg = <0x00580000 0x14000>; + #interconnect-cells = <1>; + clock-names = "bus", "bus_a"; + clocks = <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_CLK>, + <&rpmcc RPM_SMD_SNOC_A_CLK>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt index 684bb1cd75ec..23b18b92c558 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/amlogic,meson-gpio-intc.txt @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties: "amlogic,meson-axg-gpio-intc" for AXG SoCs (A113D, A113X) "amlogic,meson-g12a-gpio-intc" for G12A SoCs (S905D2, S905X2, S905Y2) "amlogic,meson-sm1-gpio-intc" for SM1 SoCs (S905D3, S905X3, S905Y3) + "amlogic,meson-a1-gpio-intc" for A1 SoCs (A113L) - reg : Specifies base physical address and size of the registers. - interrupt-controller : Identifies the node as an interrupt controller. - #interrupt-cells : Specifies the number of cells needed to encode an diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/aspeed,ast2xxx-scu-ic.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/aspeed,ast2xxx-scu-ic.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..251ed44171db --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/aspeed,ast2xxx-scu-ic.txt @@ -0,0 +1,23 @@ +Aspeed AST25XX and AST26XX SCU Interrupt Controller + +Required Properties: + - #interrupt-cells : must be 1 + - compatible : must be "aspeed,ast2500-scu-ic", + "aspeed,ast2600-scu-ic0" or + "aspeed,ast2600-scu-ic1" + - interrupts : interrupt from the parent controller + - interrupt-controller : indicates that the controller receives and + fires new interrupts for child busses + +Example: + + syscon@1e6e2000 { + ranges = <0 0x1e6e2000 0x1a8>; + + scu_ic: interrupt-controller@18 { + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + compatible = "aspeed,ast2500-scu-ic"; + interrupts = <21>; + interrupt-controller; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,intmux.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,intmux.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..43c6effbb5bd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/interrupt-controller/fsl,intmux.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/interrupt-controller/fsl,intmux.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Freescale INTMUX interrupt multiplexer + +maintainers: + - Joakim Zhang <qiangqing.zhang@nxp.com> + +properties: + compatible: + const: fsl,imx-intmux + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 8 + description: | + Should contain the parent interrupt lines (up to 8) used to multiplex + the input interrupts. + + interrupt-controller: true + + '#interrupt-cells': + const: 2 + description: | + The 1st cell is hw interrupt number, the 2nd cell is channel index. + + clocks: + description: ipg clock. + + clock-names: + const: ipg + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - interrupt-controller + - '#interrupt-cells' + - clocks + - clock-names + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + interrupt-controller@37400000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx-intmux"; + reg = <0x37400000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 16 4>, + <0 17 4>, + <0 18 4>, + <0 19 4>, + <0 20 4>, + <0 21 4>, + <0 22 4>, + <0 23 4>; + interrupt-controller; + interrupt-parent = <&gic>; + #interrupt-cells = <2>; + clocks = <&clk>; + clock-names = "ipg"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/imx8m-ddrc.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/imx8m-ddrc.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c9e6c22cb5be --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/memory-controllers/fsl/imx8m-ddrc.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/memory-controllers/fsl/imx8m-ddrc.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: i.MX8M DDR Controller + +maintainers: + - Leonard Crestez <leonard.crestez@nxp.com> + +description: + The DDRC block is integrated in i.MX8M for interfacing with DDR based + memories. + + It supports switching between different frequencies at runtime but during + this process RAM itself becomes briefly inaccessible so actual frequency + switching is implemented by TF-A code which runs from a SRAM area. + + The Linux driver for the DDRC doesn't even map registers (they're included + for the sake of "describing hardware"), it mostly just exposes firmware + capabilities through standard Linux mechanism like devfreq and OPP tables. + +properties: + compatible: + items: + - enum: + - fsl,imx8mn-ddrc + - fsl,imx8mm-ddrc + - fsl,imx8mq-ddrc + - const: fsl,imx8m-ddrc + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + description: + Base address and size of DDRC CTL area. + This is not currently mapped by the imx8m-ddrc driver. + + clocks: + maxItems: 4 + + clock-names: + items: + - const: core + - const: pll + - const: alt + - const: apb + + operating-points-v2: true + opp-table: true + +required: + - reg + - compatible + - clocks + - clock-names + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/imx8mm-clock.h> + ddrc: memory-controller@3d400000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mm-ddrc", "fsl,imx8m-ddrc"; + reg = <0x3d400000 0x400000>; + clock-names = "core", "pll", "alt", "apb"; + clocks = <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_DRAM_CORE>, + <&clk IMX8MM_DRAM_PLL>, + <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_DRAM_ALT>, + <&clk IMX8MM_CLK_DRAM_APB>; + operating-points-v2 = <&ddrc_opp_table>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/xylon,logicvc.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/xylon,logicvc.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..abc9937506e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/xylon,logicvc.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0 OR BSD-2-Clause) +# Copyright 2019 Bootlin +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/mfd/xylon,logicvc.yaml#" +$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#" + +title: Xylon LogiCVC multi-function device + +maintainers: + - Paul Kocialkowski <paul.kocialkowski@bootlin.com> + +description: | + The LogiCVC is a display controller that also contains a GPIO controller. + As a result, a multi-function device is exposed as parent of the display + and GPIO blocks. + +properties: + compatible: + items: + - enum: + - xylon,logicvc-3.02.a + - const: syscon + - const: simple-mfd + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + +select: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + enum: + - xylon,logicvc-3.02.a + + required: + - compatible + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +examples: + - | + logicvc: logicvc@43c00000 { + compatible = "xylon,logicvc-3.02.a", "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x43c00000 0x6000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,sdhci-brcmstb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,sdhci-brcmstb.txt index 733b64a4d8eb..ae2074184528 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,sdhci-brcmstb.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/brcm,sdhci-brcmstb.txt @@ -11,28 +11,43 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be one of the following - "brcm,bcm7425-sdhci" - "brcm,bcm7445-sdhci" + - "brcm,bcm7216-sdhci" Refer to clocks/clock-bindings.txt for generic clock consumer properties. Example: - sdhci@f03e0100 { - compatible = "brcm,bcm7425-sdhci"; - reg = <0xf03e0000 0x100>; - interrupts = <0x0 0x26 0x0>; - sdhci,auto-cmd12; - clocks = <&sw_sdio>; + sdhci@84b0000 { sd-uhs-sdr50; sd-uhs-ddr50; + sd-uhs-sdr104; + sdhci,auto-cmd12; + compatible = "brcm,bcm7216-sdhci", + "brcm,bcm7445-sdhci", + "brcm,sdhci-brcmstb"; + reg = <0x84b0000 0x260 0x84b0300 0x200>; + reg-names = "host", "cfg"; + interrupts = <0x0 0x26 0x4>; + interrupt-names = "sdio0_0"; + clocks = <&scmi_clk 245>; + clock-names = "sw_sdio"; }; - sdhci@f03e0300 { + sdhci@84b1000 { + mmc-ddr-1_8v; + mmc-hs200-1_8v; + mmc-hs400-1_8v; + mmc-hs400-enhanced-strobe; + supports-cqe; non-removable; bus-width = <0x8>; - compatible = "brcm,bcm7425-sdhci"; - reg = <0xf03e0200 0x100>; - interrupts = <0x0 0x27 0x0>; - sdhci,auto-cmd12; - clocks = <sw_sdio>; - mmc-hs200-1_8v; + compatible = "brcm,bcm7216-sdhci", + "brcm,bcm7445-sdhci", + "brcm,sdhci-brcmstb"; + reg = <0x84b1000 0x260 0x84b1300 0x200>; + reg-names = "host", "cfg"; + interrupts = <0x0 0x27 0x4>; + interrupt-names = "sdio1_0"; + clocks = <&scmi_clk 245>; + clock-names = "sw_sdio"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt index e1043f30de54..0f97d711444e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/fsl-imx-esdhc.txt @@ -21,6 +21,7 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx8mq-usdhc" "fsl,imx8mm-usdhc" "fsl,imx8mn-usdhc" + "fsl,imx8mp-usdhc" "fsl,imx8qm-usdhc" "fsl,imx8qxp-usdhc" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,sdhi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,sdhi.txt index bc08fc43a9be..e6cc47844207 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,sdhi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/renesas,sdhi.txt @@ -23,7 +23,8 @@ Required properties: "renesas,sdhi-r8a7793" - SDHI IP on R8A7793 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a7794" - SDHI IP on R8A7794 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a7795" - SDHI IP on R8A7795 SoC - "renesas,sdhi-r8a7796" - SDHI IP on R8A7796 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a7796" - SDHI IP on R8A77960 SoC + "renesas,sdhi-r8a77961" - SDHI IP on R8A77961 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77965" - SDHI IP on R8A77965 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77970" - SDHI IP on R8A77970 SoC "renesas,sdhi-r8a77980" - SDHI IP on R8A77980 SoC diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 6f629b12bd69..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,49 +0,0 @@ -* Rockchip specific extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile - Storage Host Controller - -The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface -a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents -differences between the core Synopsys dw mshc controller properties described -by synopsys-dw-mshc.txt and the properties used by the Rockchip specific -extensions to the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. - -Required Properties: - -* compatible: should be - - "rockchip,rk2928-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK2928 and following, - before RK3288 - - "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3288 - - "rockchip,rv1108-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RV1108 - - "rockchip,px30-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip PX30 - - "rockchip,rk3036-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3036 - - "rockchip,rk3228-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK322x - - "rockchip,rk3328-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3328 - - "rockchip,rk3368-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3368 - - "rockchip,rk3399-dw-mshc", "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc": for Rockchip RK3399 - -Optional Properties: -* clocks: from common clock binding: if ciu-drive and ciu-sample are - specified in clock-names, should contain handles to these clocks. - -* clock-names: Apart from the clock-names described in synopsys-dw-mshc.txt - two more clocks "ciu-drive" and "ciu-sample" are supported. They are used - to control the clock phases, "ciu-sample" is required for tuning high- - speed modes. - -* rockchip,default-sample-phase: The default phase to set ciu-sample at - probing, low speeds or in case where all phases work at tuning time. - If not specified 0 deg will be used. - -* rockchip,desired-num-phases: The desired number of times that the host - execute tuning when needed. If not specified, the host will do tuning - for 360 times, namely tuning for each degree. - -Example: - - rkdwmmc0@12200000 { - compatible = "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc"; - reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>; - interrupts = <0 75 0>; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..89c3edd6a728 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/mmc/rockchip-dw-mshc.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Rockchip designware mobile storage host controller device tree bindings + +description: + Rockchip uses the Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller + to interface a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. + This file documents the combined properties for the core Synopsys dw mshc + controller that are not already included in the synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml + file and the Rockchip specific extensions. + +allOf: + - $ref: "synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml#" + +maintainers: + - Heiko Stuebner <heiko@sntech.de> + +# Everything else is described in the common file +properties: + compatible: + oneOf: + # for Rockchip RK2928 and before RK3288 + - const: rockchip,rk2928-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3288 + - const: rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc + - items: + - enum: + # for Rockchip PX30 + - rockchip,px30-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3036 + - rockchip,rk3036-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK322x + - rockchip,rk3228-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3308 + - rockchip,rk3308-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3328 + - rockchip,rk3328-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3368 + - rockchip,rk3368-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RK3399 + - rockchip,rk3399-dw-mshc + # for Rockchip RV1108 + - rockchip,rv1108-dw-mshc + - const: rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 4 + description: + Handle to "biu" and "ciu" clocks for the bus interface unit clock and + the card interface unit clock. If "ciu-drive" and "ciu-sample" are + specified in clock-names, it should also contain + handles to these clocks. + + clock-names: + minItems: 2 + items: + - const: biu + - const: ciu + - const: ciu-drive + - const: ciu-sample + description: + Apart from the clock-names "biu" and "ciu" two more clocks + "ciu-drive" and "ciu-sample" are supported. They are used + to control the clock phases, "ciu-sample" is required for tuning + high speed modes. + + rockchip,default-sample-phase: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + minimum: 0 + maximum: 360 + default: 0 + description: + The default phase to set "ciu-sample" at probing, + low speeds or in case where all phases work at tuning time. + If not specified 0 deg will be used. + + rockchip,desired-num-phases: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + minimum: 0 + maximum: 360 + default: 360 + description: + The desired number of times that the host execute tuning when needed. + If not specified, the host will do tuning for 360 times, + namely tuning for each degree. + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - clocks + - clock-names + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/rk3288-cru.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/arm-gic.h> + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/irq.h> + sdmmc: mmc@ff0c0000 { + compatible = "rockchip,rk3288-dw-mshc"; + reg = <0x0 0xff0c0000 0x0 0x4000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 32 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&cru HCLK_SDMMC>, <&cru SCLK_SDMMC>, + <&cru SCLK_SDMMC_DRV>, <&cru SCLK_SDMMC_SAMPLE>; + clock-names = "biu", "ciu", "ciu-drive", "ciu-sample"; + resets = <&cru SRST_MMC0>; + reset-names = "reset"; + fifo-depth = <0x100>; + max-frequency = <150000000>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-atmel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-atmel.txt index 503c6dbac1b2..69edfd4d3922 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-atmel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-atmel.txt @@ -5,11 +5,16 @@ Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/mmc.txt and the properties used by the sdhci-of-at91 driver. Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "atmel,sama5d2-sdhci". +- compatible: Must be "atmel,sama5d2-sdhci" or "microchip,sam9x60-sdhci". - clocks: Phandlers to the clocks. -- clock-names: Must be "hclock", "multclk", "baseclk"; +- clock-names: Must be "hclock", "multclk", "baseclk" for + "atmel,sama5d2-sdhci". + Must be "hclock", "multclk" for "microchip,sam9x60-sdhci". Optional properties: +- assigned-clocks: The same with "multclk". +- assigned-clock-rates The rate of "multclk" in order to not rely on the + gck configuration set by previous components. - microchip,sdcal-inverted: when present, polarity on the SDCAL SoC pin is inverted. The default polarity for this signal is described in the datasheet. For instance on SAMA5D2, the pin is usually tied to the GND with a resistor @@ -17,10 +22,12 @@ Optional properties: Example: -sdmmc0: sdio-host@a0000000 { +mmc0: sdio-host@a0000000 { compatible = "atmel,sama5d2-sdhci"; reg = <0xa0000000 0x300>; interrupts = <31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH 0>; clocks = <&sdmmc0_hclk>, <&sdmmc0_gclk>, <&main>; clock-names = "hclock", "multclk", "baseclk"; + assigned-clocks = <&sdmmc0_gclk>; + assigned-clock-rates = <480000000>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt index da4edb146a98..7ee639b1af03 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-msm.txt @@ -19,6 +19,7 @@ Required properties: "qcom,msm8996-sdhci", "qcom,sdhci-msm-v4" "qcom,sdm845-sdhci", "qcom,sdhci-msm-v5" "qcom,qcs404-sdhci", "qcom,sdhci-msm-v5" + "qcom,sc7180-sdhci", "qcom,sdhci-msm-v5"; NOTE that some old device tree files may be floating around that only have the string "qcom,sdhci-msm-v4" without the SoC compatible string but doing that should be considered a deprecated practice. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-omap.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-omap.txt index 72c4dec7e1db..aeb615ef672a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-omap.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/sdhci-omap.txt @@ -7,6 +7,8 @@ For UHS devices which require tuning, the device tree should have a "cpu_thermal Required properties: - compatible: Should be "ti,dra7-sdhci" for DRA7 and DRA72 controllers Should be "ti,k2g-sdhci" for K2G + Should be "ti,am335-sdhci" for am335x controllers + Should be "ti,am437-sdhci" for am437x controllers - ti,hwmods: Must be "mmc<n>", <n> is controller instance starting 1 (Not required for K2G). - pinctrl-names: Should be subset of "default", "hs", "sdr12", "sdr25", "sdr50", @@ -15,6 +17,13 @@ Required properties: "hs200_1_8v", - pinctrl-<n> : Pinctrl states as described in bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt +Optional properties: +- dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format as described + in the generic DMA client binding. A tx and rx specifier is required. +- dma-names: List of DMA request names. These strings correspond 1:1 with the + DMA specifiers listed in dmas. The string naming is to be "tx" + and "rx" for TX and RX DMA requests, respectively. + Example: mmc1: mmc@4809c000 { compatible = "ti,dra7-sdhci"; @@ -22,4 +31,6 @@ Example: ti,hwmods = "mmc1"; bus-width = <4>; vmmc-supply = <&vmmc>; /* phandle to regulator node */ + dmas = <&sdma 61 &sdma 62>; + dma-names = "tx", "rx"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..890d47a87ac5 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller Common Properties + +allOf: + - $ref: "mmc-controller.yaml#" + +maintainers: + - Ulf Hansson <ulf.hansson@linaro.org> + +# Everything else is described in the common file +properties: + resets: + maxItems: 1 + + reset-names: + const: reset + + clock-frequency: + description: + Should be the frequency (in Hz) of the ciu clock. If this + is specified and the ciu clock is specified then we'll try to set the ciu + clock to this at probe time. + + fifo-depth: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + description: + The maximum size of the tx/rx fifo's. If this property is not + specified, the default value of the fifo size is determined from the + controller registers. + + card-detect-delay: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + - default: 0 + description: + Delay in milli-seconds before detecting card after card + insert event. The default value is 0. + + data-addr: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 + description: + Override fifo address with value provided by DT. The default FIFO reg + offset is assumed as 0x100 (version < 0x240A) and 0x200(version >= 0x240A) + by driver. If the controller does not follow this rule, please use + this property to set fifo address in device tree. + + fifo-watermark-aligned: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/flag + description: + Data done irq is expected if data length is less than + watermark in PIO mode. But fifo watermark is requested to be aligned + with data length in some SoC so that TX/RX irq can be generated with + data done irq. Add this watermark quirk to mark this requirement and + force fifo watermark setting accordingly. + + dmas: + maxItems: 1 + + dma-names: + const: rx-tx diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 7e5e427a22ce..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,141 +0,0 @@ -* Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller - -The Synopsys designware mobile storage host controller is used to interface -a SoC with storage medium such as eMMC or SD/MMC cards. This file documents -differences between the core mmc properties described by mmc.txt and the -properties used by the Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller. - -Required Properties: - -* compatible: should be - - snps,dw-mshc: for controllers compliant with synopsys dw-mshc. -* #address-cells: should be 1. -* #size-cells: should be 0. - -# Slots (DEPRECATED): The slot specific information are contained within - child-nodes with each child-node representing a supported slot. There should - be atleast one child node representing a card slot. The name of the child node - representing the slot is recommended to be slot@n where n is the unique number - of the slot connected to the controller. The following are optional properties - which can be included in the slot child node. - - * reg: specifies the physical slot number. The valid values of this - property is 0 to (num-slots -1), where num-slots is the value - specified by the num-slots property. - - * bus-width: as documented in mmc core bindings. - - * wp-gpios: specifies the write protect gpio line. The format of the - gpio specifier depends on the gpio controller. If a GPIO is not used - for write-protect, this property is optional. - - * disable-wp: If the wp-gpios property isn't present then (by default) - we'd assume that the write protect is hooked up directly to the - controller's special purpose write protect line (accessible via - the WRTPRT register). However, it's possible that we simply don't - want write protect. In that case specify 'disable-wp'. - NOTE: This property is not required for slots known to always - connect to eMMC or SDIO cards. - -Optional properties: - -* resets: phandle + reset specifier pair, intended to represent hardware - reset signal present internally in some host controller IC designs. - See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/reset.txt for details. - -* reset-names: request name for using "resets" property. Must be "reset". - (It will be used together with "resets" property.) - -* clocks: from common clock binding: handle to biu and ciu clocks for the - bus interface unit clock and the card interface unit clock. - -* clock-names: from common clock binding: Shall be "biu" and "ciu". - If the biu clock is missing we'll simply skip enabling it. If the - ciu clock is missing we'll just assume that the clock is running at - clock-frequency. It is an error to omit both the ciu clock and the - clock-frequency. - -* clock-frequency: should be the frequency (in Hz) of the ciu clock. If this - is specified and the ciu clock is specified then we'll try to set the ciu - clock to this at probe time. - -* fifo-depth: The maximum size of the tx/rx fifo's. If this property is not - specified, the default value of the fifo size is determined from the - controller registers. - -* card-detect-delay: Delay in milli-seconds before detecting card after card - insert event. The default value is 0. - -* data-addr: Override fifo address with value provided by DT. The default FIFO reg - offset is assumed as 0x100 (version < 0x240A) and 0x200(version >= 0x240A) by - driver. If the controller does not follow this rule, please use this property - to set fifo address in device tree. - -* fifo-watermark-aligned: Data done irq is expected if data length is less than - watermark in PIO mode. But fifo watermark is requested to be aligned with data - length in some SoC so that TX/RX irq can be generated with data done irq. Add this - watermark quirk to mark this requirement and force fifo watermark setting - accordingly. - -* vmmc-supply: The phandle to the regulator to use for vmmc. If this is - specified we'll defer probe until we can find this regulator. - -* dmas: List of DMA specifiers with the controller specific format as described - in the generic DMA client binding. Refer to dma.txt for details. - -* dma-names: request names for generic DMA client binding. Must be "rx-tx". - Refer to dma.txt for details. - -Aliases: - -- All the MSHC controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using - the following format 'mshc{n}' where n is a unique number for the alias. - -Example: - -The MSHC controller node can be split into two portions, SoC specific and -board specific portions as listed below. - - dwmmc0@12200000 { - compatible = "snps,dw-mshc"; - clocks = <&clock 351>, <&clock 132>; - clock-names = "biu", "ciu"; - reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>; - interrupts = <0 75 0>; - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; - data-addr = <0x200>; - fifo-watermark-aligned; - resets = <&rst 20>; - reset-names = "reset"; - }; - -[board specific internal DMA resources] - - dwmmc0@12200000 { - clock-frequency = <400000000>; - clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; - broken-cd; - fifo-depth = <0x80>; - card-detect-delay = <200>; - vmmc-supply = <&buck8>; - bus-width = <8>; - cap-mmc-highspeed; - cap-sd-highspeed; - }; - -[board specific generic DMA request binding] - - dwmmc0@12200000 { - clock-frequency = <400000000>; - clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; - broken-cd; - fifo-depth = <0x80>; - card-detect-delay = <200>; - vmmc-supply = <&buck8>; - bus-width = <8>; - cap-mmc-highspeed; - cap-sd-highspeed; - dmas = <&pdma 12>; - dma-names = "rx-tx"; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..05f9f36dcb75 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/mmc/synopsys-dw-mshc.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Synopsys Designware Mobile Storage Host Controller Binding + +allOf: + - $ref: "synopsys-dw-mshc-common.yaml#" + +maintainers: + - Ulf Hansson <ulf.hansson@linaro.org> + +# Everything else is described in the common file +properties: + compatible: + const: snps,dw-mshc + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + minItems: 2 + maxItems: 2 + description: + Handle to "biu" and "ciu" clocks for the + bus interface unit clock and the card interface unit clock. + + clock-names: + items: + - const: biu + - const: ciu + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - clocks + - clock-names + +examples: + - | + mmc@12200000 { + compatible = "snps,dw-mshc"; + reg = <0x12200000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 75 0>; + clocks = <&clock 351>, <&clock 132>; + clock-names = "biu", "ciu"; + dmas = <&pdma 12>; + dma-names = "rx-tx"; + resets = <&rst 20>; + reset-names = "reset"; + vmmc-supply = <&buck8>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + broken-cd; + bus-width = <8>; + cap-mmc-highspeed; + cap-sd-highspeed; + card-detect-delay = <200>; + clock-freq-min-max = <400000 200000000>; + clock-frequency = <400000000>; + data-addr = <0x200>; + fifo-depth = <0x80>; + fifo-watermark-aligned; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bluetooth.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bluetooth.txt index f16b99571af1..dd258674633c 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bluetooth.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/broadcom-bluetooth.txt @@ -11,6 +11,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should contain one of the following: * "brcm,bcm20702a1" + * "brcm,bcm4329-bt" * "brcm,bcm4330-bt" * "brcm,bcm43438-bt" * "brcm,bcm4345c5" @@ -22,7 +23,9 @@ Optional properties: - max-speed: see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/serial/slave-device.txt - shutdown-gpios: GPIO specifier, used to enable the BT module - device-wakeup-gpios: GPIO specifier, used to wakeup the controller - - host-wakeup-gpios: GPIO specifier, used to wakeup the host processor + - host-wakeup-gpios: GPIO specifier, used to wakeup the host processor. + deprecated, replaced by interrupts and + "host-wakeup" interrupt-names - clocks: 1 or 2 clocks as defined in clock-names below, in that order - clock-names: names for clock inputs, matching the clocks given - "extclk": deprecated, replaced by "txco" @@ -30,7 +33,14 @@ Optional properties: - "lpo": external low power 32.768 kHz clock - vbat-supply: phandle to regulator supply for VBAT - vddio-supply: phandle to regulator supply for VDDIO - + - brcm,bt-pcm-int-params: configure PCM parameters via a 5-byte array + - sco-routing: 0 = PCM, 1 = Transport, 2 = Codec, 3 = I2S + - pcm-interface-rate: 128KBps, 256KBps, 512KBps, 1024KBps, 2048KBps + - pcm-frame-type: short, long + - pcm-sync-mode: slave, master + - pcm-clock-mode: slave, master + - interrupts: must be one, used to wakeup the host processor + - interrupt-names: must be "host-wakeup" Example: @@ -41,5 +51,6 @@ Example: bluetooth { compatible = "brcm,bcm43438-bt"; max-speed = <921600>; + brcm,bt-pcm-int-params = [01 02 00 01 01]; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/tcan4x5x.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/tcan4x5x.txt index 27e1b4cebfbd..6bdcc3f84bd3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/tcan4x5x.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/can/tcan4x5x.txt @@ -10,7 +10,6 @@ Required properties: - #size-cells: 0 - spi-max-frequency: Maximum frequency of the SPI bus the chip can operate at should be less than or equal to 18 MHz. - - device-wake-gpios: Wake up GPIO to wake up the TCAN device. - interrupt-parent: the phandle to the interrupt controller which provides the interrupt. - interrupts: interrupt specification for data-ready. @@ -23,6 +22,7 @@ Optional properties: reset. - device-state-gpios: Input GPIO that indicates if the device is in a sleep state or if the device is active. + - device-wake-gpios: Wake up GPIO to wake up the TCAN device. Example: tcan4x5x: tcan4x5x@0 { @@ -36,5 +36,5 @@ tcan4x5x: tcan4x5x@0 { interrupts = <14 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; device-state-gpios = <&gpio3 21 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; device-wake-gpios = <&gpio1 15 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; - reset-gpios = <&gpio1 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; + reset-gpios = <&gpio1 27 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ar9331.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ar9331.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..320607cbbb17 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/ar9331.txt @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ +Atheros AR9331 built-in switch +============================= + +It is a switch built-in to Atheros AR9331 WiSoC and addressable over internal +MDIO bus. All PHYs are built-in as well. + +Required properties: + + - compatible: should be: "qca,ar9331-switch" + - reg: Address on the MII bus for the switch. + - resets : Must contain an entry for each entry in reset-names. + - reset-names : Must include the following entries: "switch" + - interrupt-parent: Phandle to the parent interrupt controller + - interrupts: IRQ line for the switch + - interrupt-controller: Indicates the switch is itself an interrupt + controller. This is used for the PHY interrupts. + - #interrupt-cells: must be 1 + - mdio: Container of PHY and devices on the switches MDIO bus. + +See Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/dsa/dsa.txt for a list of additional +required and optional properties. +Examples: + +eth0: ethernet@19000000 { + compatible = "qca,ar9330-eth"; + reg = <0x19000000 0x200>; + interrupts = <4>; + + resets = <&rst 9>, <&rst 22>; + reset-names = "mac", "mdio"; + clocks = <&pll ATH79_CLK_AHB>, <&pll ATH79_CLK_AHB>; + clock-names = "eth", "mdio"; + + phy-mode = "mii"; + phy-handle = <&phy_port4>; +}; + +eth1: ethernet@1a000000 { + compatible = "qca,ar9330-eth"; + reg = <0x1a000000 0x200>; + interrupts = <5>; + resets = <&rst 13>, <&rst 23>; + reset-names = "mac", "mdio"; + clocks = <&pll ATH79_CLK_AHB>, <&pll ATH79_CLK_AHB>; + clock-names = "eth", "mdio"; + + phy-mode = "gmii"; + + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + + mdio { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + switch10: switch@10 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + compatible = "qca,ar9331-switch"; + reg = <0x10>; + resets = <&rst 8>; + reset-names = "switch"; + + interrupt-parent = <&miscintc>; + interrupts = <12>; + + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + + ports { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + switch_port0: port@0 { + reg = <0x0>; + label = "cpu"; + ethernet = <ð1>; + + phy-mode = "gmii"; + + fixed-link { + speed = <1000>; + full-duplex; + }; + }; + + switch_port1: port@1 { + reg = <0x1>; + phy-handle = <&phy_port0>; + phy-mode = "internal"; + }; + + switch_port2: port@2 { + reg = <0x2>; + phy-handle = <&phy_port1>; + phy-mode = "internal"; + }; + + switch_port3: port@3 { + reg = <0x3>; + phy-handle = <&phy_port2>; + phy-mode = "internal"; + }; + + switch_port4: port@4 { + reg = <0x4>; + phy-handle = <&phy_port3>; + phy-mode = "internal"; + }; + }; + + mdio { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + interrupt-parent = <&switch10>; + + phy_port0: phy@0 { + reg = <0x0>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + + phy_port1: phy@1 { + reg = <0x1>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + + phy_port2: phy@2 { + reg = <0x2>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + + phy_port3: phy@3 { + reg = <0x3>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + + phy_port4: phy@4 { + reg = <0x4>; + interrupts = <0>; + }; + }; + }; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt index 299c0dcd67db..250f8d8cdce4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/fsl-fman.txt @@ -403,6 +403,19 @@ PROPERTIES The settings and programming routines for internal/external MDIO are different. Must be included for internal MDIO. +- fsl,erratum-a011043 + Usage: optional + Value type: <boolean> + Definition: Indicates the presence of the A011043 erratum + describing that the MDIO_CFG[MDIO_RD_ER] bit may be falsely + set when reading internal PCS registers. MDIO reads to + internal PCS registers may result in having the + MDIO_CFG[MDIO_RD_ER] bit set, even when there is no error and + read data (MDIO_DATA[MDIO_DATA]) is correct. + Software may get false read error when reading internal + PCS registers through MDIO. As a workaround, all internal + MDIO accesses should ignore the MDIO_CFG[MDIO_RD_ER] bit. + For internal PHY device on internal mdio bus, a PHY node should be created. See the definition of the PHY node in booting-without-of.txt for an example of how to define a PHY (Internal PHY has no interrupt line). diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-dwmac.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-dwmac.txt index 8a08621a5b54..afbcaebf062e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-dwmac.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/mediatek-dwmac.txt @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Required properties: Should be "macirq" for the main MAC IRQ - clocks: Must contain a phandle for each entry in clock-names. - clock-names: The name of the clock listed in the clocks property. These are - "axi", "apb", "mac_main", "ptp_ref" for MT2712 SoC + "axi", "apb", "mac_main", "ptp_ref", "rmii_internal" for MT2712 SoC. - mac-address: See ethernet.txt in the same directory - phy-mode: See ethernet.txt in the same directory - mediatek,pericfg: A phandle to the syscon node that control ethernet @@ -23,8 +23,10 @@ Required properties: Optional properties: - mediatek,tx-delay-ps: TX clock delay macro value. Default is 0. It should be defined for RGMII/MII interface. + It should be defined for RMII interface when the reference clock is from MT2712 SoC. - mediatek,rx-delay-ps: RX clock delay macro value. Default is 0. - It should be defined for RGMII/MII/RMII interface. + It should be defined for RGMII/MII interface. + It should be defined for RMII interface. Both delay properties need to be a multiple of 170 for RGMII interface, or will round down. Range 0~31*170. Both delay properties need to be a multiple of 550 for MII/RMII interface, @@ -34,13 +36,20 @@ or will round down. Range 0~31*550. reference clock, which is from external PHYs, is connected to RXC pin on MT2712 SoC. Otherwise, is connected to TXC pin. +- mediatek,rmii-clk-from-mac: boolean property, if present indicates that + MT2712 SoC provides the RMII reference clock, which outputs to TXC pin only. - mediatek,txc-inverse: boolean property, if present indicates that 1. tx clock will be inversed in MII/RGMII case, 2. tx clock inside MAC will be inversed relative to reference clock which is from external PHYs in RMII case, and it rarely happen. + 3. the reference clock, which outputs to TXC pin will be inversed in RMII case + when the reference clock is from MT2712 SoC. - mediatek,rxc-inverse: boolean property, if present indicates that 1. rx clock will be inversed in MII/RGMII case. - 2. reference clock will be inversed when arrived at MAC in RMII case. + 2. reference clock will be inversed when arrived at MAC in RMII case, when + the reference clock is from external PHYs. + 3. the inside clock, which be sent to MAC, will be inversed in RMII case when + the reference clock is from MT2712 SoC. - assigned-clocks: mac_main and ptp_ref clocks - assigned-clock-parents: parent clocks of the assigned clocks @@ -50,29 +59,33 @@ Example: reg = <0 0x1101c000 0 0x1300>; interrupts = <GIC_SPI 237 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; interrupt-names = "macirq"; - phy-mode ="rgmii"; + phy-mode ="rgmii-rxid"; mac-address = [00 55 7b b5 7d f7]; clock-names = "axi", "apb", "mac_main", "ptp_ref", - "ptp_top"; + "rmii_internal"; clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_GMAC>, <&pericfg CLK_PERI_GMAC_PCLK>, <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_125M_SEL>, - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_SEL>; + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_SEL>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_RMII_SEL>; assigned-clocks = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_125M_SEL>, - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_SEL>; + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_SEL>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHER_50M_RMII_SEL>; assigned-clock-parents = <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHERPLL_125M>, - <&topckgen CLK_TOP_APLL1_D3>; + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_APLL1_D3>, + <&topckgen CLK_TOP_ETHERPLL_50M>; + power-domains = <&scpsys MT2712_POWER_DOMAIN_AUDIO>; mediatek,pericfg = <&pericfg>; mediatek,tx-delay-ps = <1530>; mediatek,rx-delay-ps = <1530>; mediatek,rmii-rxc; mediatek,txc-inverse; mediatek,rxc-inverse; - snps,txpbl = <32>; - snps,rxpbl = <32>; + snps,txpbl = <1>; + snps,rxpbl = <1>; snps,reset-gpio = <&pio 87 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; snps,reset-active-low; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ti,dp83867.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ti,dp83867.txt index 388ff48f53ae..44e2a4fab29e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ti,dp83867.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/ti,dp83867.txt @@ -8,8 +8,6 @@ Required properties: - ti,tx-internal-delay - RGMII Transmit Clock Delay - see dt-bindings/net/ti-dp83867.h for applicable values. Required only if interface type is PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_ID or PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII_TXID - - ti,fifo-depth - Transmitt FIFO depth- see dt-bindings/net/ti-dp83867.h - for applicable values Note: If the interface type is PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_RGMII the TX/RX clock delays will be left at their default values, as set by the PHY's pin strapping. @@ -42,6 +40,14 @@ Optional property: Some MACs work with differential SGMII clock. See data manual for details. + - ti,fifo-depth - Transmitt FIFO depth- see dt-bindings/net/ti-dp83867.h + for applicable values (deprecated) + + -tx-fifo-depth - As defined in the ethernet-controller.yaml. Values for + the depth can be found in dt-bindings/net/ti-dp83867.h + -rx-fifo-depth - As defined in the ethernet-controller.yaml. Values for + the depth can be found in dt-bindings/net/ti-dp83867.h + Note: ti,min-output-impedance and ti,max-output-impedance are mutually exclusive. When both properties are present ti,max-output-impedance takes precedence. @@ -55,7 +61,7 @@ Example: reg = <0>; ti,rx-internal-delay = <DP83867_RGMIIDCTL_2_25_NS>; ti,tx-internal-delay = <DP83867_RGMIIDCTL_2_75_NS>; - ti,fifo-depth = <DP83867_PHYCR_FIFO_DEPTH_4_B_NIB>; + tx-fifo-depth = <DP83867_PHYCR_FIFO_DEPTH_4_B_NIB>; }; Datasheet can be found: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath10k.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath10k.txt index 017128394a3e..616c87746d6f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath10k.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath10k.txt @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Optional properties: entry in clock-names. - clock-names: Should contain the clock names "wifi_wcss_cmd", "wifi_wcss_ref", "wifi_wcss_rtc" for "qcom,ipq4019-wifi" compatible target and - "cxo_ref_clk_pin" for "qcom,wcn3990-wifi" + "cxo_ref_clk_pin" and optionally "qdss" for "qcom,wcn3990-wifi" compatible target. - qcom,msi_addr: MSI interrupt address. - qcom,msi_base: Base value to add before writing MSI data into @@ -88,6 +88,9 @@ Optional properties: of the host capability QMI request - qcom,xo-cal-data: xo cal offset to be configured in xo trim register. +- qcom,msa-fixed-perm: Boolean context flag to disable SCM call for statically + mapped msa region. + Example (to supply PCI based wifi block details): In this example, the node is defined as child node of the PCI controller. @@ -185,4 +188,5 @@ wifi@18000000 { vdd-3.3-ch0-supply = <&vreg_l25a_3p3>; memory-region = <&wifi_msa_mem>; iommus = <&apps_smmu 0x0040 0x1>; + qcom,msa-fixed-perm; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath11k.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath11k.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a1717db36dba --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/wireless/qcom,ath11k.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +# Copyright (c) 2018-2019 The Linux Foundation. All rights reserved. + +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/net/wireless/qcom,ath11k.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Qualcomm Technologies ath11k wireless devices Generic Binding + +maintainers: + - Kalle Valo <kvalo@codeaurora.org> + +description: | + These are dt entries for Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. IEEE 802.11ax + devices, for example like AHB based IPQ8074. + +properties: + compatible: + const: qcom,ipq8074-wifi + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + items: + - description: misc-pulse1 interrupt events + - description: misc-latch interrupt events + - description: sw exception interrupt events + - description: watchdog interrupt events + - description: interrupt event for ring CE0 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE1 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE2 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE3 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE4 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE5 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE6 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE7 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE8 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE9 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE10 + - description: interrupt event for ring CE11 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2wbm-desc-feed + - description: interrupt event for ring host2reo-re-injection + - description: interrupt event for ring host2reo-command + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-monitor-ring3 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-monitor-ring2 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-monitor-ring1 + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2ost-exception + - description: interrupt event for ring wbm2host-rx-release + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2host-status + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2host-destination-ring4 + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2host-destination-ring3 + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2host-destination-ring2 + - description: interrupt event for ring reo2host-destination-ring1 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac3 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac2 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac1 + - description: interrupt event for ring ppdu-end-interrupts-mac3 + - description: interrupt event for ring ppdu-end-interrupts-mac2 + - description: interrupt event for ring ppdu-end-interrupts-mac1 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac3 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac2 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac1 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac3 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac2 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac1 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac3 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac2 + - description: interrupt event for ring rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac1 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2tcl-input-ring4 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2tcl-input-ring3 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2tcl-input-ring2 + - description: interrupt event for ring host2tcl-input-ring1 + - description: interrupt event for ring wbm2host-tx-completions-ring3 + - description: interrupt event for ring wbm2host-tx-completions-ring2 + - description: interrupt event for ring wbm2host-tx-completions-ring1 + - description: interrupt event for ring tcl2host-status-ring + + + interrupt-names: + items: + - const: misc-pulse1 + - const: misc-latch + - const: sw-exception + - const: watchdog + - const: ce0 + - const: ce1 + - const: ce2 + - const: ce3 + - const: ce4 + - const: ce5 + - const: ce6 + - const: ce7 + - const: ce8 + - const: ce9 + - const: ce10 + - const: ce11 + - const: host2wbm-desc-feed + - const: host2reo-re-injection + - const: host2reo-command + - const: host2rxdma-monitor-ring3 + - const: host2rxdma-monitor-ring2 + - const: host2rxdma-monitor-ring1 + - const: reo2ost-exception + - const: wbm2host-rx-release + - const: reo2host-status + - const: reo2host-destination-ring4 + - const: reo2host-destination-ring3 + - const: reo2host-destination-ring2 + - const: reo2host-destination-ring1 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac3 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac2 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac1 + - const: ppdu-end-interrupts-mac3 + - const: ppdu-end-interrupts-mac2 + - const: ppdu-end-interrupts-mac1 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac3 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac2 + - const: rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac1 + - const: host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac3 + - const: host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac2 + - const: host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac1 + - const: rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac3 + - const: rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac2 + - const: rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac1 + - const: host2tcl-input-ring4 + - const: host2tcl-input-ring3 + - const: host2tcl-input-ring2 + - const: host2tcl-input-ring1 + - const: wbm2host-tx-completions-ring3 + - const: wbm2host-tx-completions-ring2 + - const: wbm2host-tx-completions-ring1 + - const: tcl2host-status-ring + + qcom,rproc: + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#definitions/phandle + description: + DT entry of q6v5-wcss remoteproc driver. + Phandle to a node that can contain the following properties + * compatible + * reg + * reg-names + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - interrupt-names + - qcom,rproc + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + + q6v5_wcss: q6v5_wcss@CD00000 { + compatible = "qcom,ipq8074-wcss-pil"; + reg = <0xCD00000 0x4040>, + <0x4AB000 0x20>; + reg-names = "qdsp6", + "rmb"; + }; + + wifi0: wifi@c000000 { + compatible = "qcom,ipq8074-wifi"; + reg = <0xc000000 0x2000000>; + interrupts = <0 320 1>, + <0 319 1>, + <0 318 1>, + <0 317 1>, + <0 316 1>, + <0 315 1>, + <0 314 1>, + <0 311 1>, + <0 310 1>, + <0 411 1>, + <0 410 1>, + <0 40 1>, + <0 39 1>, + <0 302 1>, + <0 301 1>, + <0 37 1>, + <0 36 1>, + <0 296 1>, + <0 295 1>, + <0 294 1>, + <0 293 1>, + <0 292 1>, + <0 291 1>, + <0 290 1>, + <0 289 1>, + <0 288 1>, + <0 239 1>, + <0 236 1>, + <0 235 1>, + <0 234 1>, + <0 233 1>, + <0 232 1>, + <0 231 1>, + <0 230 1>, + <0 229 1>, + <0 228 1>, + <0 224 1>, + <0 223 1>, + <0 203 1>, + <0 183 1>, + <0 180 1>, + <0 179 1>, + <0 178 1>, + <0 177 1>, + <0 176 1>, + <0 163 1>, + <0 162 1>, + <0 160 1>, + <0 159 1>, + <0 158 1>, + <0 157 1>, + <0 156 1>; + interrupt-names = "misc-pulse1", + "misc-latch", + "sw-exception", + "watchdog", + "ce0", + "ce1", + "ce2", + "ce3", + "ce4", + "ce5", + "ce6", + "ce7", + "ce8", + "ce9", + "ce10", + "ce11", + "host2wbm-desc-feed", + "host2reo-re-injection", + "host2reo-command", + "host2rxdma-monitor-ring3", + "host2rxdma-monitor-ring2", + "host2rxdma-monitor-ring1", + "reo2ost-exception", + "wbm2host-rx-release", + "reo2host-status", + "reo2host-destination-ring4", + "reo2host-destination-ring3", + "reo2host-destination-ring2", + "reo2host-destination-ring1", + "rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac3", + "rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac2", + "rxdma2host-monitor-destination-mac1", + "ppdu-end-interrupts-mac3", + "ppdu-end-interrupts-mac2", + "ppdu-end-interrupts-mac1", + "rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac3", + "rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac2", + "rxdma2host-monitor-status-ring-mac1", + "host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac3", + "host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac2", + "host2rxdma-host-buf-ring-mac1", + "rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac3", + "rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac2", + "rxdma2host-destination-ring-mac1", + "host2tcl-input-ring4", + "host2tcl-input-ring3", + "host2tcl-input-ring2", + "host2tcl-input-ring1", + "wbm2host-tx-completions-ring3", + "wbm2host-tx-completions-ring2", + "wbm2host-tx-completions-ring1", + "tcl2host-status-ring"; + qcom,rproc = <&q6v5_wcss>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt index 904dadf3d07b..6e346d5cddcf 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/imx-ocotp.txt @@ -2,7 +2,7 @@ Freescale i.MX6 On-Chip OTP Controller (OCOTP) device tree bindings This binding represents the on-chip eFuse OTP controller found on i.MX6Q/D, i.MX6DL/S, i.MX6SL, i.MX6SX, i.MX6UL, i.MX6ULL/ULZ, i.MX6SLL, -i.MX7D/S, i.MX7ULP, i.MX8MQ, i.MX8MM and i.MX8MN SoCs. +i.MX7D/S, i.MX7ULP, i.MX8MQ, i.MX8MM, i.MX8MN and i.MX8MP SoCs. Required properties: - compatible: should be one of @@ -17,6 +17,7 @@ Required properties: "fsl,imx8mq-ocotp" (i.MX8MQ), "fsl,imx8mm-ocotp" (i.MX8MM), "fsl,imx8mn-ocotp" (i.MX8MN), + "fsl,imx8mp-ocotp" (i.MX8MP), followed by "syscon". - #address-cells : Should be 1 - #size-cells : Should be 1 diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/qcom,spmi-sdam.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/qcom,spmi-sdam.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7bbd4e62044e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/nvmem/qcom,spmi-sdam.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/nvmem/qcom,spmi-sdam.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Qualcomm Technologies, Inc. SPMI SDAM DT bindings + +maintainers: + - Shyam Kumar Thella <sthella@codeaurora.org> + +description: | + The SDAM provides scratch register space for the PMIC clients. This + memory can be used by software to store information or communicate + to/from the PBUS. + +allOf: + - $ref: "nvmem.yaml#" + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - qcom,spmi-sdam + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + "#address-cells": + const: 1 + + "#size-cells": + const: 1 + + ranges: true + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - ranges + +patternProperties: + "^.*@[0-9a-f]+$": + type: object + + properties: + reg: + maxItems: 1 + description: + Offset and size in bytes within the storage device. + + bits: + $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + maxItems: 1 + items: + items: + - minimum: 0 + maximum: 7 + description: + Offset in bit within the address range specified by reg. + - minimum: 1 + description: + Size in bit within the address range specified by reg. + + required: + - reg + + additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + sdam_1: nvram@b000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + compatible = "qcom,spmi-sdam"; + reg = <0xb000 0x100>; + ranges = <0 0xb000 0x100>; + + /* Data cells */ + restart_reason: restart@50 { + reg = <0x50 0x1>; + bits = <6 2>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ded7d6f0a119 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/phy/allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Allwinner A80 USB PHY Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Chen-Yu Tsai <wens@csie.org> + - Maxime Ripard <mripard@kernel.org> + +properties: + "#phy-cells": + const: 0 + + compatible: + const: allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + anyOf: + - description: Main PHY Clock + + - items: + - description: Main PHY clock + - description: HSIC 12MHz clock + - description: HSIC 480MHz clock + + clock-names: + oneOf: + - const: phy + + - items: + - const: phy + - const: hsic_12M + - const: hsic_480M + + resets: + anyOf: + - description: Normal USB PHY reset + + - items: + - description: Normal USB PHY reset + - description: HSIC Reset + + reset-names: + oneOf: + - const: phy + + - items: + - const: phy + - const: hsic + + phy_type: + const: hsic + description: + When absent, the PHY type will be assumed to be normal USB. + + phy-supply: + description: + Regulator that powers VBUS + +required: + - "#phy-cells" + - compatible + - reg + - clocks + - clock-names + - resets + - reset-names + +additionalProperties: false + +if: + properties: + phy_type: + const: hsic + + required: + - phy_type + +then: + properties: + clocks: + maxItems: 3 + + clock-names: + maxItems: 3 + + resets: + maxItems: 2 + + reset-names: + maxItems: 2 + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/sun9i-a80-usb.h> + #include <dt-bindings/reset/sun9i-a80-usb.h> + + usbphy1: phy@a00800 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy"; + reg = <0x00a00800 0x4>; + clocks = <&usb_clocks CLK_USB0_PHY>; + clock-names = "phy"; + resets = <&usb_clocks RST_USB0_PHY>; + reset-names = "phy"; + phy-supply = <®_usb1_vbus>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; + + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/sun9i-a80-usb.h> + #include <dt-bindings/reset/sun9i-a80-usb.h> + + usbphy3: phy@a02800 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy"; + reg = <0x00a02800 0x4>; + clocks = <&usb_clocks CLK_USB2_PHY>, + <&usb_clocks CLK_USB_HSIC>, + <&usb_clocks CLK_USB2_HSIC>; + clock-names = "phy", + "hsic_12M", + "hsic_480M"; + resets = <&usb_clocks RST_USB2_PHY>, + <&usb_clocks RST_USB2_HSIC>; + reset-names = "phy", + "hsic"; + phy_type = "hsic"; + phy-supply = <®_usb3_vbus>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy.txt index 24a0d06acd1d..698aacbdcfc4 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy.txt @@ -1,30 +1,49 @@ Broadcom STB USB PHY Required properties: - - compatible: brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy - - reg: two offset and length pairs. - The first pair specifies a manditory set of memory mapped - registers used for general control of the PHY. - The second pair specifies optional registers used by some of - the SoCs that support USB 3.x - - #phy-cells: Shall be 1 as it expects one argument for setting - the type of the PHY. Possible values are: - - PHY_TYPE_USB2 for USB1.1/2.0 PHY - - PHY_TYPE_USB3 for USB3.x PHY +- compatible: should be one of + "brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy" + "brcm,bcm7216-usb-phy" + "brcm,bcm7211-usb-phy" + +- reg and reg-names properties requirements are specific to the + compatible string. + "brcm,brcmstb-usb-phy": + - reg: 1 or 2 offset and length pairs. One for the base CTRL registers + and an optional pair for systems with USB 3.x support + - reg-names: not specified + "brcm,bcm7216-usb-phy": + - reg: 3 offset and length pairs for CTRL, XHCI_EC and XHCI_GBL + registers + - reg-names: "ctrl", "xhci_ec", "xhci_gbl" + "brcm,bcm7211-usb-phy": + - reg: 5 offset and length pairs for CTRL, XHCI_EC, XHCI_GBL, + USB_PHY and USB_MDIO registers and an optional pair + for the BDC registers + - reg-names: "ctrl", "xhci_ec", "xhci_gbl", "usb_phy", "usb_mdio", "bdc_ec" + +- #phy-cells: Shall be 1 as it expects one argument for setting + the type of the PHY. Possible values are: + - PHY_TYPE_USB2 for USB1.1/2.0 PHY + - PHY_TYPE_USB3 for USB3.x PHY Optional Properties: - clocks : clock phandles. - clock-names: String, clock name. +- interrupts: wakeup interrupt +- interrupt-names: "wakeup" - brcm,ipp: Boolean, Invert Port Power. Possible values are: 0 (Don't invert), 1 (Invert) - brcm,ioc: Boolean, Invert Over Current detection. Possible values are: 0 (Don't invert), 1 (Invert) -NOTE: one or both of the following two properties must be set -- brcm,has-xhci: Boolean indicating the phy has an XHCI phy. -- brcm,has-eohci: Boolean indicating the phy has an EHCI/OHCI phy. - dr_mode: String, PHY Device mode. Possible values are: "host", "peripheral ", "drd" or "typec-pd" If this property is not defined, the phy will default to "host" mode. +- brcm,syscon-piarbctl: phandle to syscon for handling config registers +NOTE: one or both of the following two properties must be set +- brcm,has-xhci: Boolean indicating the phy has an XHCI phy. +- brcm,has-eohci: Boolean indicating the phy has an EHCI/OHCI phy. + Example: @@ -41,3 +60,27 @@ usbphy_0: usb-phy@f0470200 { clocks = <&usb20>, <&usb30>; clock-names = "sw_usb", "sw_usb3"; }; + +usb-phy@29f0200 { + reg = <0x29f0200 0x200>, + <0x29c0880 0x30>, + <0x29cc100 0x534>, + <0x2808000 0x24>, + <0x2980080 0x8>; + reg-names = "ctrl", + "xhci_ec", + "xhci_gbl", + "usb_phy", + "usb_mdio"; + brcm,ioc = <0x0>; + brcm,ipp = <0x0>; + compatible = "brcm,bcm7211-usb-phy"; + interrupts = <0x30>; + interrupt-parent = <&vpu_intr1_nosec_intc>; + interrupt-names = "wake"; + #phy-cells = <0x1>; + brcm,has-xhci; + syscon-piarbctl = <&syscon_piarbctl>; + clocks = <&scmi_clk 256>; + clock-names = "sw_usb"; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm-sata-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm-sata-phy.txt index b640845fec67..c03ad2198410 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm-sata-phy.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/brcm-sata-phy.txt @@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ Required properties: - compatible: should be one or more of + "brcm,bcm7216-sata-phy" "brcm,bcm7425-sata-phy" "brcm,bcm7445-sata-phy" "brcm,iproc-ns2-sata-phy" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/intel,lgm-emmc-phy.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/intel,lgm-emmc-phy.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ff7959c21af0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/intel,lgm-emmc-phy.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/phy/intel,lgm-emmc-phy.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Intel Lightning Mountain(LGM) eMMC PHY Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Ramuthevar Vadivel Murugan <vadivel.muruganx.ramuthevar@linux.intel.com> + +description: |+ + Bindings for eMMC PHY on Intel's Lightning Mountain SoC, syscon + node is used to reference the base address of eMMC phy registers. + + The eMMC PHY node should be the child of a syscon node with the + required property: + + - compatible: Should be one of the following: + "intel,lgm-syscon", "syscon" + - reg: + maxItems: 1 + +properties: + compatible: + const: intel,lgm-emmc-phy + + "#phy-cells": + const: 0 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + +required: + - "#phy-cells" + - compatible + - reg + - clocks + +examples: + - | + sysconf: chiptop@e0200000 { + compatible = "intel,lgm-syscon", "syscon"; + reg = <0xe0200000 0x100>; + + emmc-phy: emmc-phy@a8 { + compatible = "intel,lgm-emmc-phy"; + reg = <0x00a8 0x10>; + clocks = <&emmc>; + #phy-cells = <0>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-sierra.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-sierra.txt index 6e1b47bfce43..03f5939d3d19 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-sierra.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-sierra.txt @@ -2,21 +2,24 @@ Cadence Sierra PHY ----------------------- Required properties: -- compatible: cdns,sierra-phy-t0 -- clocks: Must contain an entry in clock-names. - See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. -- clock-names: Must be "phy_clk" +- compatible: Must be "cdns,sierra-phy-t0" for Sierra in Cadence platform + Must be "ti,sierra-phy-t0" for Sierra in TI's J721E SoC. - resets: Must contain an entry for each in reset-names. See ../reset/reset.txt for details. - reset-names: Must include "sierra_reset" and "sierra_apb". "sierra_reset" must control the reset line to the PHY. "sierra_apb" must control the reset line to the APB PHY - interface. + interface ("sierra_apb" is optional). - reg: register range for the PHY. - #address-cells: Must be 1 - #size-cells: Must be 0 Optional properties: +- clocks: Must contain an entry in clock-names. + See ../clocks/clock-bindings.txt for details. +- clock-names: Must contain "cmn_refclk_dig_div" and + "cmn_refclk1_dig_div" for configuring the frequency of + the clock to the lanes. "phy_clk" is deprecated. - cdns,autoconf: A boolean property whose presence indicates that the PHY registers will be configured by hardware. If not present, all sub-node optional properties must be diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip,px30-dsi-dphy.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip,px30-dsi-dphy.yaml index 6a2ed4ef5aac..72aca81e8959 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip,px30-dsi-dphy.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/rockchip,px30-dsi-dphy.yaml @@ -13,9 +13,6 @@ properties: "#phy-cells": const: 0 - "#clock-cells": - const: 0 - compatible: enum: - rockchip,px30-dsi-dphy @@ -49,7 +46,6 @@ properties: required: - "#phy-cells" - - "#clock-cells" - compatible - reg - clocks @@ -66,7 +62,6 @@ examples: reg = <0x0 0xff2e0000 0x0 0x10000>; clocks = <&pmucru 13>, <&cru 12>; clock-names = "ref", "pclk"; - #clock-cells = <0>; resets = <&cru 12>; reset-names = "apb"; #phy-cells = <0>; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun9i-usb-phy.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun9i-usb-phy.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 64f7109aea1f..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/sun9i-usb-phy.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,37 +0,0 @@ -Allwinner sun9i USB PHY ------------------------ - -Required properties: -- compatible : should be one of - * allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy -- reg : a list of offset + length pairs -- #phy-cells : from the generic phy bindings, must be 0 -- phy_type : "hsic" for HSIC usage; - other values or absence of this property indicates normal USB -- clocks : phandle + clock specifier for the phy clocks -- clock-names : depending on the "phy_type" property, - * "phy" for normal USB - * "hsic_480M", "hsic_12M" for HSIC -- resets : a list of phandle + reset specifier pairs -- reset-names : depending on the "phy_type" property, - * "phy" for normal USB - * "hsic" for HSIC - -Optional Properties: -- phy-supply : from the generic phy bindings, a phandle to a regulator that - provides power to VBUS. - -It is recommended to list all clocks and resets available. -The driver will only use those matching the phy_type. - -Example: - usbphy1: phy@a01800 { - compatible = "allwinner,sun9i-a80-usb-phy"; - reg = <0x00a01800 0x4>; - clocks = <&usb_phy_clk 2>, <&usb_phy_clk 10>, - <&usb_phy_clk 3>; - clock-names = "hsic_480M", "hsic_12M", "phy"; - resets = <&usb_phy_clk 18>, <&usb_phy_clk 19>; - reset-names = "hsic", "phy"; - #phy-cells = <0>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-j721e-wiz.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-j721e-wiz.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..452cee1aed32 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/ti,phy-j721e-wiz.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +# Copyright (C) 2019 Texas Instruments Incorporated - http://www.ti.com/ +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: "http://devicetree.org/schemas/phy/ti,phy-j721e-wiz.yaml#" +$schema: "http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml#" + +title: TI J721E WIZ (SERDES Wrapper) + +maintainers: + - Kishon Vijay Abraham I <kishon@ti.com> + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - ti,j721e-wiz-16g + - ti,j721e-wiz-10g + + power-domains: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + maxItems: 3 + description: clock-specifier to represent input to the WIZ + + clock-names: + items: + - const: fck + - const: core_ref_clk + - const: ext_ref_clk + + num-lanes: + minimum: 1 + maximum: 4 + + "#address-cells": + const: 1 + + "#size-cells": + const: 1 + + "#reset-cells": + const: 1 + + ranges: true + + assigned-clocks: + maxItems: 2 + + assigned-clock-parents: + maxItems: 2 + + typec-dir-gpios: + maxItems: 1 + description: + GPIO to signal Type-C cable orientation for lane swap. + If GPIO is active, lane 0 and lane 1 of SERDES will be swapped to + achieve the funtionality of an external type-C plug flip mux. + + typec-dir-debounce-ms: + minimum: 100 + maximum: 1000 + default: 100 + description: + Number of milliseconds to wait before sampling typec-dir-gpio. + If not specified, the default debounce of 100ms will be used. + Type-C spec states minimum CC pin debounce of 100 ms and maximum + of 200 ms. However, some solutions might need more than 200 ms. + +patternProperties: + "^pll[0|1]-refclk$": + type: object + description: | + WIZ node should have subnodes for each of the PLLs present in + the SERDES. + properties: + clocks: + maxItems: 2 + description: Phandle to clock nodes representing the two inputs to PLL. + + "#clock-cells": + const: 0 + + assigned-clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + assigned-clock-parents: + maxItems: 1 + + required: + - clocks + - "#clock-cells" + - assigned-clocks + - assigned-clock-parents + + "^cmn-refclk1?-dig-div$": + type: object + description: + WIZ node should have subnodes for each of the PMA common refclock + provided by the SERDES. + properties: + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + description: Phandle to the clock node representing the input to the + divider clock. + + "#clock-cells": + const: 0 + + required: + - clocks + - "#clock-cells" + + "^refclk-dig$": + type: object + description: | + WIZ node should have subnode for refclk_dig to select the reference + clock source for the reference clock used in the PHY and PMA digital + logic. + properties: + clocks: + maxItems: 4 + description: Phandle to four clock nodes representing the inputs to + refclk_dig + + "#clock-cells": + const: 0 + + assigned-clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + assigned-clock-parents: + maxItems: 1 + + required: + - clocks + - "#clock-cells" + - assigned-clocks + - assigned-clock-parents + + "^serdes@[0-9a-f]+$": + type: object + description: | + WIZ node should have '1' subnode for the SERDES. It could be either + Sierra SERDES or Torrent SERDES. Sierra SERDES should follow the + bindings specified in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-sierra.txt + Torrent SERDES should follow the bindings specified in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/phy-cadence-dp.txt + +required: + - compatible + - power-domains + - clocks + - clock-names + - num-lanes + - "#address-cells" + - "#size-cells" + - "#reset-cells" + - ranges + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/soc/ti,sci_pm_domain.h> + + wiz@5000000 { + compatible = "ti,j721e-wiz-16g"; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + power-domains = <&k3_pds 292 TI_SCI_PD_EXCLUSIVE>; + clocks = <&k3_clks 292 5>, <&k3_clks 292 11>, <&dummy_cmn_refclk>; + clock-names = "fck", "core_ref_clk", "ext_ref_clk"; + assigned-clocks = <&k3_clks 292 11>, <&k3_clks 292 0>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&k3_clks 292 15>, <&k3_clks 292 4>; + num-lanes = <2>; + #reset-cells = <1>; + ranges = <0x5000000 0x5000000 0x10000>; + + pll0-refclk { + clocks = <&k3_clks 293 13>, <&dummy_cmn_refclk>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + assigned-clocks = <&wiz1_pll0_refclk>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&k3_clks 293 13>; + }; + + pll1-refclk { + clocks = <&k3_clks 293 0>, <&dummy_cmn_refclk1>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + assigned-clocks = <&wiz1_pll1_refclk>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&k3_clks 293 0>; + }; + + cmn-refclk-dig-div { + clocks = <&wiz1_refclk_dig>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + }; + + cmn-refclk1-dig-div { + clocks = <&wiz1_pll1_refclk>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + }; + + refclk-dig { + clocks = <&k3_clks 292 11>, <&k3_clks 292 0>, <&dummy_cmn_refclk>, <&dummy_cmn_refclk1>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + assigned-clocks = <&wiz0_refclk_dig>; + assigned-clock-parents = <&k3_clks 292 11>; + }; + + serdes@5000000 { + compatible = "cdns,ti,sierra-phy-t0"; + reg-names = "serdes"; + reg = <0x5000000 0x10000>; + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + resets = <&serdes_wiz0 0>; + reset-names = "sierra_reset"; + clocks = <&wiz0_cmn_refclk_dig_div>, <&wiz0_cmn_refclk1_dig_div>; + clock-names = "cmn_refclk_dig_div", "cmn_refclk1_dig_div"; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/aspeed,ast2600-pinctrl.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/aspeed,ast2600-pinctrl.yaml index 064b7dfc4252..3749fa233e87 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/aspeed,ast2600-pinctrl.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/aspeed,ast2600-pinctrl.yaml @@ -54,8 +54,9 @@ patternProperties: TACH10, TACH11, TACH12, TACH13, TACH14, TACH15, TACH2, TACH3, TACH4, TACH5, TACH6, TACH7, TACH8, TACH9, THRU0, THRU1, THRU2, THRU3, TXD1, TXD2, TXD3, TXD4, UART10, UART11, UART12, UART13, - UART6, UART7, UART8, UART9, VB, VGAHS, VGAVS, WDTRST1, WDTRST2, - WDTRST3, WDTRST4, ] + UART6, UART7, UART8, UART9, USBAD, USBADP, USB2AH, USB2AHP, + USB2BD, USB2BH, VB, VGAHS, VGAVS, WDTRST1, WDTRST2, WDTRST3, + WDTRST4, ] groups: allOf: - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string" @@ -85,8 +86,8 @@ patternProperties: TACH10, TACH11, TACH12, TACH13, TACH14, TACH15, TACH2, TACH3, TACH4, TACH5, TACH6, TACH7, TACH8, TACH9, THRU0, THRU1, THRU2, THRU3, TXD1, TXD2, TXD3, TXD4, UART10, UART11, UART12G0, - UART12G1, UART13G0, UART13G1, UART6, UART7, UART8, UART9, VB, - VGAHS, VGAVS, WDTRST1, WDTRST2, WDTRST3, WDTRST4, ] + UART12G1, UART13G0, UART13G1, UART6, UART7, UART8, UART9, USBA, + USBB, VB, VGAHS, VGAVS, WDTRST1, WDTRST2, WDTRST3, WDTRST4, ] required: - compatible diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mp-pinctrl.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mp-pinctrl.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2e31e120395e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mp-pinctrl.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/pinctrl/fsl,imx8mp-pinctrl.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Freescale IMX8MP IOMUX Controller + +maintainers: + - Anson Huang <Anson.Huang@nxp.com> + +description: + Please refer to fsl,imx-pinctrl.txt and pinctrl-bindings.txt in this directory + for common binding part and usage. + +properties: + compatible: + const: fsl,imx8mp-iomuxc + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + +# Client device subnode's properties +patternProperties: + 'grp$': + type: object + description: + Pinctrl node's client devices use subnodes for desired pin configuration. + Client device subnodes use below standard properties. + + properties: + fsl,pins: + allOf: + - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array + description: + each entry consists of 6 integers and represents the mux and config + setting for one pin. The first 5 integers <mux_reg conf_reg input_reg + mux_val input_val> are specified using a PIN_FUNC_ID macro, which can + be found in <arch/arm64/boot/dts/freescale/imx8mp-pinfunc.h>. The last + integer CONFIG is the pad setting value like pull-up on this pin. Please + refer to i.MX8M Plus Reference Manual for detailed CONFIG settings. + + required: + - fsl,pins + + additionalProperties: false + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + # Pinmux controller node + - | + iomuxc: pinctrl@30330000 { + compatible = "fsl,imx8mp-iomuxc"; + reg = <0x30330000 0x10000>; + + pinctrl_uart2: uart2grp { + fsl,pins = < + 0x228 0x488 0x5F0 0x0 0x6 0x49 + 0x228 0x488 0x000 0x0 0x0 0x49 + >; + }; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ingenic,pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ingenic,pinctrl.txt index 0014d9899797..d9b2100c98e8 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ingenic,pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/ingenic,pinctrl.txt @@ -10,9 +10,9 @@ GPIO port configuration registers and it is typical to refer to pins using the naming scheme "PxN" where x is a character identifying the GPIO port with which the pin is associated and N is an integer from 0 to 31 identifying the pin within that GPIO port. For example PA0 is the first pin in GPIO port A, and -PB31 is the last pin in GPIO port B. The jz4740 and the x1000 contains 4 GPIO -ports, PA to PD, for a total of 128 pins. The jz4760, the jz4770 and the jz4780 -contains 6 GPIO ports, PA to PF, for a total of 192 pins. +PB31 is the last pin in GPIO port B. The jz4740, the x1000 and the x1830 +contains 4 GPIO ports, PA to PD, for a total of 128 pins. The jz4760, the +jz4770 and the jz4780 contains 6 GPIO ports, PA to PF, for a total of 192 pins. Required properties: @@ -28,6 +28,7 @@ Required properties: - "ingenic,x1000-pinctrl" - "ingenic,x1000e-pinctrl" - "ingenic,x1500-pinctrl" + - "ingenic,x1830-pinctrl" - reg: Address range of the pinctrl registers. @@ -40,6 +41,7 @@ Required properties for sub-nodes (GPIO chips): - "ingenic,jz4770-gpio" - "ingenic,jz4780-gpio" - "ingenic,x1000-gpio" + - "ingenic,x1830-gpio" - reg: The GPIO bank number. - interrupt-controller: Marks the device node as an interrupt controller. - interrupts: Interrupt specifier for the controllers interrupt. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-io.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-io.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cd2b436350ef --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-io.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/pinctrl/intel,lgm-io.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Intel Lightning Mountain SoC pinmux & GPIO controller binding + +maintainers: + - Rahul Tanwar <rahul.tanwar@linux.intel.com> + +description: | + Pinmux & GPIO controller controls pin multiplexing & configuration including + GPIO function selection & GPIO attributes configuration. + +properties: + compatible: + const: intel,lgm-io + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + +# Client device subnode's properties +patternProperties: + '-pins$': + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: pincfg-node.yaml# + - $ref: pinmux-node.yaml# + description: + Pinctrl node's client devices use subnodes for desired pin configuration. + Client device subnodes use below standard properties. + + properties: + function: true + groups: true + pins: true + pinmux: true + bias-pull-up: true + bias-pull-down: true + drive-strength: true + slew-rate: true + drive-open-drain: true + output-enable: true + + required: + - function + - groups + + additionalProperties: false + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + # Pinmux controller node + - | + pinctrl: pinctrl@e2880000 { + compatible = "intel,lgm-io"; + reg = <0xe2880000 0x100000>; + + uart0-pins { + pins = <64>, /* UART_RX0 */ + <65>; /* UART_TX0 */ + function = "CONSOLE_UART0"; + pinmux = <1>, + <1>; + groups = "CONSOLE_UART0"; + }; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-pinctrl.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-pinctrl.yaml deleted file mode 100644 index 240d429f773b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-pinctrl.yaml +++ /dev/null @@ -1,116 +0,0 @@ -# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) -%YAML 1.2 ---- -$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/bindings/pinctrl/intel,lgm-pinctrl.yaml# -$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# - -title: Intel Lightning Mountain SoC pinmux & GPIO controller binding - -maintainers: - - Rahul Tanwar <rahul.tanwar@linux.intel.com> - -description: | - Pinmux & GPIO controller controls pin multiplexing & configuration including - GPIO function selection & GPIO attributes configuration. - - Please refer to [1] for details of the common pinctrl bindings used by the - client devices. - - [1] Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinctrl-bindings.txt - -properties: - compatible: - const: intel,lgm-io - - reg: - maxItems: 1 - -# Client device subnode's properties -patternProperties: - '-pins$': - type: object - description: - Pinctrl node's client devices use subnodes for desired pin configuration. - Client device subnodes use below standard properties. - - properties: - function: - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string - description: - A string containing the name of the function to mux to the group. - - groups: - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string-array - description: - An array of strings identifying the list of groups. - - pins: - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array - description: - List of pins to select with this function. - - pinmux: - description: The applicable mux group. - allOf: - - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32-array" - - bias-pull-up: - type: boolean - - bias-pull-down: - type: boolean - - drive-strength: - description: | - Selects the drive strength for the specified pins in mA. - 0: 2 mA - 1: 4 mA - 2: 8 mA - 3: 12 mA - allOf: - - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 - - enum: [0, 1, 2, 3] - - slew-rate: - type: boolean - description: | - Sets slew rate for specified pins. - 0: slow slew - 1: fast slew - - drive-open-drain: - type: boolean - - output-enable: - type: boolean - - required: - - function - - groups - - additionalProperties: false - -required: - - compatible - - reg - -additionalProperties: false - -examples: - # Pinmux controller node - - | - pinctrl: pinctrl@e2880000 { - compatible = "intel,lgm-pinctrl"; - reg = <0xe2880000 0x100000>; - - uart0-pins { - pins = <64>, /* UART_RX0 */ - <65>; /* UART_TX0 */ - function = "CONSOLE_UART0"; - pinmux = <1>, - <1>; - groups = "CONSOLE_UART0"; - }; - }; - -... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinmux-node.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinmux-node.yaml index 777623a57fd5..732d9075560b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinmux-node.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/pinmux-node.yaml @@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ properties: specific binding for the hardware defines whether the entries are integers or strings, and their meaning. - group: + groups: $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/string-array description: the group to apply the properties to, if the driver supports diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,sc7180-pinctrl.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,sc7180-pinctrl.txt index b5767ee82ee6..6ffeac9801df 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,sc7180-pinctrl.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/pinctrl/qcom,sc7180-pinctrl.txt @@ -125,8 +125,9 @@ to specify in a pin configuration subnode: mi2s_1, mi2s_2, mss_lte, m_voc, pa_indicator, phase_flag, PLL_BIST, pll_bypassnl, pll_reset, prng_rosc, qdss, qdss_cti, qlink_enable, qlink_request, qspi_clk, qspi_cs, - qspi_data, qup00, qup01, qup02, qup03, qup04, qup05, - qup10, qup11, qup12, qup13, qup14, qup15, sdc1_tb, + qspi_data, qup00, qup01, qup02_i2c, qup02_uart, qup03, + qup04_i2c, qup04_uart, qup05, qup10, qup11_i2c, qup11_uart, + qup12, qup13_i2c, qup13_uart, qup14, qup15, sdc1_tb, sdc2_tb, sd_write, sp_cmu, tgu_ch0, tgu_ch1, tgu_ch2, tgu_ch3, tsense_pwm1, tsense_pwm2, uim1, uim2, uim_batt, usb_phy, vfr_1, _V_GPIO, _V_PPS_IN, _V_PPS_OUT, diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/avs/qcom,cpr.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/avs/qcom,cpr.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ab0d5ebbad4e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/avs/qcom,cpr.txt @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ +QCOM CPR (Core Power Reduction) + +CPR (Core Power Reduction) is a technology to reduce core power on a CPU +or other device. Each OPP of a device corresponds to a "corner" that has +a range of valid voltages for a particular frequency. While the device is +running at a particular frequency, CPR monitors dynamic factors such as +temperature, etc. and suggests adjustments to the voltage to save power +and meet silicon characteristic requirements. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <string> + Definition: should be "qcom,qcs404-cpr", "qcom,cpr" for qcs404 + +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: base address and size of the rbcpr register region + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should specify the CPR interrupt + +- clocks: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: phandle to the reference clock + +- clock-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "ref" + +- vdd-apc-supply: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: phandle to the vdd-apc-supply regulator + +- #power-domain-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: should be 0 + +- operating-points-v2: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: A phandle to the OPP table containing the + performance states supported by the CPR + power domain + +- acc-syscon: + Usage: optional + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: phandle to syscon for writing ACC settings + +- nvmem-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <phandle> + Definition: phandle to nvmem cells containing the data + that makes up a fuse corner, for each fuse corner. + As well as the CPR fuse revision. + +- nvmem-cell-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: should be "cpr_quotient_offset1", "cpr_quotient_offset2", + "cpr_quotient_offset3", "cpr_init_voltage1", + "cpr_init_voltage2", "cpr_init_voltage3", "cpr_quotient1", + "cpr_quotient2", "cpr_quotient3", "cpr_ring_osc1", + "cpr_ring_osc2", "cpr_ring_osc3", "cpr_fuse_revision" + for qcs404. + +Example: + + cpr_opp_table: cpr-opp-table { + compatible = "operating-points-v2-qcom-level"; + + cpr_opp1: opp1 { + opp-level = <1>; + qcom,opp-fuse-level = <1>; + }; + cpr_opp2: opp2 { + opp-level = <2>; + qcom,opp-fuse-level = <2>; + }; + cpr_opp3: opp3 { + opp-level = <3>; + qcom,opp-fuse-level = <3>; + }; + }; + + power-controller@b018000 { + compatible = "qcom,qcs404-cpr", "qcom,cpr"; + reg = <0x0b018000 0x1000>; + interrupts = <0 15 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + clocks = <&xo_board>; + clock-names = "ref"; + vdd-apc-supply = <&pms405_s3>; + #power-domain-cells = <0>; + operating-points-v2 = <&cpr_opp_table>; + acc-syscon = <&tcsr>; + + nvmem-cells = <&cpr_efuse_quot_offset1>, + <&cpr_efuse_quot_offset2>, + <&cpr_efuse_quot_offset3>, + <&cpr_efuse_init_voltage1>, + <&cpr_efuse_init_voltage2>, + <&cpr_efuse_init_voltage3>, + <&cpr_efuse_quot1>, + <&cpr_efuse_quot2>, + <&cpr_efuse_quot3>, + <&cpr_efuse_ring1>, + <&cpr_efuse_ring2>, + <&cpr_efuse_ring3>, + <&cpr_efuse_revision>; + nvmem-cell-names = "cpr_quotient_offset1", + "cpr_quotient_offset2", + "cpr_quotient_offset3", + "cpr_init_voltage1", + "cpr_init_voltage2", + "cpr_init_voltage3", + "cpr_quotient1", + "cpr_quotient2", + "cpr_quotient3", + "cpr_ring_osc1", + "cpr_ring_osc2", + "cpr_ring_osc3", + "cpr_fuse_revision"; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-ines.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-ines.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..4c242bd1ce9c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/ptp-ines.txt @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +ZHAW InES PTP time stamping IP core + +The IP core needs two different kinds of nodes. The control node +lives somewhere in the memory map and specifies the address of the +control registers. There can be up to three port handles placed as +attributes of PHY nodes. These associate a particular MII bus with a +port index within the IP core. + +Required properties of the control node: + +- compatible: "ines,ptp-ctrl" +- reg: physical address and size of the register bank + +Required format of the port handle within the PHY node: + +- timestamper: provides control node reference and + the port channel within the IP core + +Example: + + tstamper: timestamper@60000000 { + compatible = "ines,ptp-ctrl"; + reg = <0x60000000 0x80>; + }; + + ethernet@80000000 { + ... + mdio { + ... + ethernet-phy@3 { + ... + timestamper = <&tstamper 0>; + }; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/timestamper.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/timestamper.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fc550ce4d4ea --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/ptp/timestamper.txt @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +Time stamps from MII bus snooping devices + +This binding supports non-PHY devices that snoop the MII bus and +provide time stamps. In contrast to PHY time stamping drivers (which +can simply attach their interface directly to the PHY instance), stand +alone MII time stamping drivers use this binding to specify the +connection between the snooping device and a given network interface. + +Non-PHY MII time stamping drivers typically talk to the control +interface over another bus like I2C, SPI, UART, or via a memory mapped +peripheral. This controller device is associated with one or more +time stamping channels, each of which snoops on a MII bus. + +The "timestamper" property lives in a phy node and links a time +stamping channel from the controller device to that phy's MII bus. + +Example: + + tstamper: timestamper@10000000 { + compatible = "ines,ptp-ctrl"; + reg = <0x10000000 0x80>; + }; + + ethernet@20000000 { + mdio { + ethernet-phy@1 { + timestamper = <&tstamper 0>; + }; + }; + }; + + ethernet@30000000 { + mdio { + ethernet-phy@2 { + timestamper = <&tstamper 1>; + }; + }; + }; + +In this example, time stamps from the MII bus attached to phy@1 will +appear on time stamp channel 0 (zero), and those from phy@2 appear on +channel 1. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mp8859.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mp8859.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..74ad69730989 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mp8859.txt @@ -0,0 +1,22 @@ +Monolithic Power Systems MP8859 voltage regulator + +Required properties: +- compatible: "mps,mp8859"; +- reg: I2C slave address. + +Optional subnode for regulator: "mp8859_dcdc", using common regulator +bindings given in <Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt>. + +Example: + + mp8859: regulator@66 { + compatible = "mps,mp8859"; + reg = <0x66>; + dc_12v: mp8859_dcdc { + regulator-name = "dc_12v"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <12000000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <12000000>; + regulator-boot-on; + regulator-always-on; + }; + }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mps,mpq7920.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mps,mpq7920.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a682af0dc67e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/mps,mpq7920.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/mps,mpq7920.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Monolithic Power System MPQ7920 PMIC + +maintainers: + - Saravanan Sekar <sravanhome@gmail.com> + +properties: + $nodename: + pattern: "pmic@[0-9a-f]{1,2}" + compatible: + enum: + - mps,mpq7920 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + regulators: + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + description: | + list of regulators provided by this controller, must be named + after their hardware counterparts BUCK[1-4], one LDORTC, and LDO[2-5] + + properties: + mps,switch-freq: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint8" + enum: [ 0, 1, 2, 3 ] + default: 2 + description: | + switching frequency must be one of following corresponding value + 1.1MHz, 1.65MHz, 2.2MHz, 2.75MHz + + patternProperties: + "^ldo[1-4]$": + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + + "^ldortc$": + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + + "^buck[1-4]$": + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + + properties: + mps,buck-softstart: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint8" + enum: [ 0, 1, 2, 3 ] + description: | + defines the soft start time of this buck, must be one of the following + corresponding values 150us, 300us, 610us, 920us + + mps,buck-phase-delay: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint8" + enum: [ 0, 1, 2, 3 ] + description: | + defines the phase delay of this buck, must be one of the following + corresponding values 0deg, 90deg, 180deg, 270deg + + mps,buck-ovp-disable: + type: boolean + description: | + disables over voltage protection of this buck + + additionalProperties: false + additionalProperties: false + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - regulators + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + i2c { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + + pmic@69 { + compatible = "mps,mpq7920"; + reg = <0x69>; + + regulators { + mps,switch-freq = /bits/ 8 <1>; + + buck1 { + regulator-name = "buck1"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <400000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3587500>; + regulator-min-microamp = <460000>; + regulator-max-microamp = <7600000>; + regulator-boot-on; + mps,buck-ovp-disable; + mps,buck-phase-delay = /bits/ 8 <2>; + mps,buck-softstart = /bits/ 8 <1>; + }; + + ldo2 { + regulator-name = "ldo2"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <650000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3587500>; + }; + }; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71828-regulator.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71828-regulator.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..71ce032b8cf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/rohm,bd71828-regulator.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/rohm,bd71828-regulator.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: ROHM BD71828 Power Management Integrated Circuit regulators + +maintainers: + - Matti Vaittinen <matti.vaittinen@fi.rohmeurope.com> + +description: | + This module is part of the ROHM BD71828 MFD device. For more details + see Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/rohm,bd71828-pmic.yaml. + + The regulator controller is represented as a sub-node of the PMIC node + on the device tree. + + Regulator nodes should be named to BUCK_<number> and LDO_<number>. + The valid names for BD71828 regulator nodes are + BUCK1, BUCK2, BUCK3, BUCK4, BUCK5, BUCK6, BUCK7 + LDO1, LDO2, LDO3, LDO4, LDO5, LDO6, LDO7 + +patternProperties: + "^LDO[1-7]$": + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + description: + Properties for single LDO regulator. + + properties: + regulator-name: + pattern: "^ldo[1-7]$" + description: + should be "ldo1", ..., "ldo7" + + "^BUCK[1-7]$": + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: regulator.yaml# + description: + Properties for single BUCK regulator. + + properties: + regulator-name: + pattern: "^buck[1-7]$" + description: + should be "buck1", ..., "buck7" + + rohm,dvs-run-voltage: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32" + - minimum: 0 + maximum: 3300000 + description: + PMIC default "RUN" state voltage in uV. See below table for + bucks which support this. 0 means disabled. + + rohm,dvs-idle-voltage: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32" + - minimum: 0 + maximum: 3300000 + description: + PMIC default "IDLE" state voltage in uV. See below table for + bucks which support this. 0 means disabled. + + rohm,dvs-suspend-voltage: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32" + - minimum: 0 + maximum: 3300000 + description: + PMIC default "SUSPEND" state voltage in uV. See below table for + bucks which support this. 0 means disabled. + + rohm,dvs-lpsr-voltage: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32" + - minimum: 0 + maximum: 3300000 + description: + PMIC default "LPSR" state voltage in uV. See below table for + bucks which support this. 0 means disabled. + + # Supported default DVS states: + # buck | run | idle | suspend | lpsr + #-------------------------------------------------------------- + # 1, 2, 6, and 7 | supported | supported | supported (*) + #-------------------------------------------------------------- + # 3, 4, and 5 | supported (**) + #-------------------------------------------------------------- + # + #(*) LPSR and SUSPEND states use same voltage but both states have own + # enable / + # disable settings. Voltage 0 can be specified for a state to make + # regulator disabled on that state. + # + #(**) All states use same voltage but have own enable / disable + # settings. Voltage 0 can be specified for a state to make + # regulator disabled on that state. + + required: + - regulator-name + additionalProperties: false +additionalProperties: false diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 479ad4c8758e..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -STM32 BOOSTER - Booster for ADC analog input switches - -Some STM32 devices embed a 3.3V booster supplied by Vdda, that can be used -to supply ADC analog input switches. - -Required properties: -- compatible: Should be one of: - "st,stm32h7-booster" - "st,stm32mp1-booster" -- st,syscfg: Phandle to system configuration controller. -- vdda-supply: Phandle to the vdda input analog voltage. - -Example: - booster: regulator-booster { - compatible = "st,stm32mp1-booster"; - st,syscfg = <&syscfg>; - vdda-supply = <&vdda>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..64f1183ce841 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-booster.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/st,stm32-booster.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: STMicroelectronics STM32 booster for ADC analog input switches bindings + +maintainers: + - Fabrice Gasnier <fabrice.gasnier@st.com> + +description: | + Some STM32 devices embed a 3.3V booster supplied by Vdda, that can be used + to supply ADC analog input switches. + +allOf: + - $ref: "regulator.yaml#" + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - st,stm32h7-booster + - st,stm32mp1-booster + + st,syscfg: + allOf: + - $ref: "/schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/phandle-array" + description: phandle to system configuration controller. + + vdda-supply: + description: phandle to the vdda input analog voltage. + +required: + - compatible + - st,syscfg + - vdda-supply + +examples: + - | + regulator-booster { + compatible = "st,stm32mp1-booster"; + st,syscfg = <&syscfg>; + vdda-supply = <&vdda>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 5ddb8500a929..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -STM32 VREFBUF - Voltage reference buffer - -Some STM32 devices embed a voltage reference buffer which can be used as -voltage reference for ADCs, DACs and also as voltage reference for external -components through the dedicated VREF+ pin. - -Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "st,stm32-vrefbuf". -- reg: Offset and length of VREFBUF register set. -- clocks: Must contain an entry for peripheral clock. - -Example: - vrefbuf: regulator@58003c00 { - compatible = "st,stm32-vrefbuf"; - reg = <0x58003C00 0x8>; - clocks = <&rcc VREF_CK>; - regulator-min-microvolt = <1500000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <2500000>; - vdda-supply = <&vdda>; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..33cdaeb25aee --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/st,stm32-vrefbuf.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: STMicroelectronics STM32 Voltage reference buffer bindings + +description: | + Some STM32 devices embed a voltage reference buffer which can be used as + voltage reference for ADCs, DACs and also as voltage reference for external + components through the dedicated VREF+ pin. + +maintainers: + - Fabrice Gasnier <fabrice.gasnier@st.com> + +allOf: + - $ref: "regulator.yaml#" + +properties: + compatible: + const: st,stm32-vrefbuf + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + vdda-supply: + description: phandle to the vdda input analog voltage. + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - clocks + - vdda-supply + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/stm32mp1-clks.h> + vrefbuf@50025000 { + compatible = "st,stm32-vrefbuf"; + reg = <0x50025000 0x8>; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1500000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <2500000>; + clocks = <&rcc VREF>; + vdda-supply = <&vdda>; + }; + +... + diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt deleted file mode 100644 index e372dd3f0c8a..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,43 +0,0 @@ -STM32MP1 PWR Regulators ------------------------ - -Available Regulators in STM32MP1 PWR block are: - - reg11 for regulator 1V1 - - reg18 for regulator 1V8 - - usb33 for the swtich USB3V3 - -Required properties: -- compatible: Must be "st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg" -- list of child nodes that specify the regulator reg11, reg18 or usb33 - initialization data for defined regulators. The definition for each of - these nodes is defined using the standard binding for regulators found at - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/regulator.txt. -- vdd-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node for vdd input -- vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply: phandle to the parent supply/regulator node for usb33 - -Example: - -pwr_regulators: pwr@50001000 { - compatible = "st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg"; - reg = <0x50001000 0x10>; - vdd-supply = <&vdd>; - vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply = <&vdd_usb>; - - reg11: reg11 { - regulator-name = "reg11"; - regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>; - }; - - reg18: reg18 { - regulator-name = "reg18"; - regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; - }; - - usb33: usb33 { - regulator-name = "usb33"; - regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; - regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; - }; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..8d8f38fe85dc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/regulator/st,stm32mp1-pwr-reg.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: STM32MP1 PWR voltage regulators + +maintainers: + - Pascal Paillet <p.paillet@st.com> + +properties: + compatible: + const: st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + vdd-supply: + description: Input supply phandle(s) for vdd input + + vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply: + description: Input supply phandle(s) for vdd_3v3_usbfs input + +patternProperties: + "^(reg11|reg18|usb33)$": + type: object + + allOf: + - $ref: "regulator.yaml#" + +required: + - compatible + - reg + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + pwr@50001000 { + compatible = "st,stm32mp1,pwr-reg"; + reg = <0x50001000 0x10>; + vdd-supply = <&vdd>; + vdd_3v3_usbfs-supply = <&vdd_usb>; + + reg11 { + regulator-name = "reg11"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1100000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1100000>; + }; + + reg18 { + regulator-name = "reg18"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <1800000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <1800000>; + }; + + usb33 { + regulator-name = "usb33"; + regulator-min-microvolt = <3300000>; + regulator-max-microvolt = <3300000>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt index 6e5341b4f891..ee59409640f2 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/reset/brcm,brcmstb-reset.txt @@ -22,6 +22,6 @@ Example: }; ðernet_switch { - resets = <&reset>; + resets = <&reset 26>; reset-names = "switch"; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,iproc-rng200.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,iproc-rng200.txt index c223e54452da..802523196ee5 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,iproc-rng200.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/rng/brcm,iproc-rng200.txt @@ -2,6 +2,7 @@ HWRNG support for the iproc-rng200 driver Required properties: - compatible : Must be one of: + "brcm,bcm2711-rng200" "brcm,bcm7211-rng200" "brcm,bcm7278-rng200" "brcm,iproc-rng200" diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/bus.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/bus.txt index 52fa6426388c..bbe871f82a8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/bus.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/slimbus/bus.txt @@ -32,6 +32,10 @@ Required property for SLIMbus child node if it is present: Product Code, shall be in lower case hexadecimal with leading zeroes suppressed +Optional property for SLIMbus child node if it is present: +- slim-ifc-dev - Should be phandle to SLIMBus Interface device. + Required for devices which deal with streams. + SLIMbus example for Qualcomm's slimbus manager component: slim@28080000 { @@ -43,8 +47,14 @@ SLIMbus example for Qualcomm's slimbus manager component: #address-cells = <2>; #size-cell = <0>; + codec_ifd: ifd@0,0{ + compatible = "slim217,60"; + reg = <0 0>; + }; + codec: wcd9310@1,0{ compatible = "slim217,60"; reg = <1 0>; + slim-ifc-dev = <&codec_ifd>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/ti/k3-ringacc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/ti/k3-ringacc.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..59758ccce809 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soc/ti/k3-ringacc.txt @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +* Texas Instruments K3 NavigatorSS Ring Accelerator + +The Ring Accelerator (RA) is a machine which converts read/write accesses +from/to a constant address into corresponding read/write accesses from/to a +circular data structure in memory. The RA eliminates the need for each DMA +controller which needs to access ring elements from having to know the current +state of the ring (base address, current offset). The DMA controller +performs a read or write access to a specific address range (which maps to the +source interface on the RA) and the RA replaces the address for the transaction +with a new address which corresponds to the head or tail element of the ring +(head for reads, tail for writes). + +The Ring Accelerator is a hardware module that is responsible for accelerating +management of the packet queues. The K3 SoCs can have more than one RA instances + +Required properties: +- compatible : Must be "ti,am654-navss-ringacc"; +- reg : Should contain register location and length of the following + named register regions. +- reg-names : should be + "rt" - The RA Ring Real-time Control/Status Registers + "fifos" - The RA Queues Registers + "proxy_gcfg" - The RA Proxy Global Config Registers + "proxy_target" - The RA Proxy Datapath Registers +- ti,num-rings : Number of rings supported by RA +- ti,sci-rm-range-gp-rings : TI-SCI RM subtype for GP ring range +- ti,sci : phandle on TI-SCI compatible System controller node +- ti,sci-dev-id : TI-SCI device id of the ring accelerator +- msi-parent : phandle for "ti,sci-inta" interrupt controller + +Optional properties: + -- ti,dma-ring-reset-quirk : enable ringacc / udma ring state interoperability + issue software w/a + +Example: + +ringacc: ringacc@3c000000 { + compatible = "ti,am654-navss-ringacc"; + reg = <0x0 0x3c000000 0x0 0x400000>, + <0x0 0x38000000 0x0 0x400000>, + <0x0 0x31120000 0x0 0x100>, + <0x0 0x33000000 0x0 0x40000>; + reg-names = "rt", "fifos", + "proxy_gcfg", "proxy_target"; + ti,num-rings = <818>; + ti,sci-rm-range-gp-rings = <0x2>; /* GP ring range */ + ti,dma-ring-reset-quirk; + ti,sci = <&dmsc>; + ti,sci-dev-id = <187>; + msi-parent = <&inta_main_udmass>; +}; + +client: + +dma_ipx: dma_ipx@<addr> { + ... + ti,ringacc = <&ringacc>; + ... +} diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt index 3080979350a0..fa4545ed81ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/amlogic,axg-fifo.txt @@ -17,6 +17,9 @@ Required properties: * "arb" : memory ARB line (required) * "rst" : dedicated device reset line (optional) - #sound-dai-cells: must be 0. +- amlogic,fifo-depth: The size of the controller's fifo in bytes. This + is useful for determining certain configuration such + as the flush threshold of the fifo Example of FRDDR A on the A113 SoC: @@ -27,4 +30,5 @@ frddr_a: audio-controller@1c0 { interrupts = <GIC_SPI 88 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; clocks = <&clkc_audio AUD_CLKID_FRDDR_A>; resets = <&arb AXG_ARB_FRDDR_A>; + fifo-depth = <512>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,asrc.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,asrc.txt index 1d4d9f938689..cb9a25165503 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,asrc.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/fsl,asrc.txt @@ -8,7 +8,12 @@ three substreams within totally 10 channels. Required properties: - - compatible : Contains "fsl,imx35-asrc" or "fsl,imx53-asrc". + - compatible : Compatible list, should contain one of the following + compatibles: + "fsl,imx35-asrc", + "fsl,imx53-asrc", + "fsl,imx8qm-asrc", + "fsl,imx8qxp-asrc", - reg : Offset and length of the register set for the device. @@ -35,6 +40,11 @@ Required properties: - fsl,asrc-width : Defines a mutual sample width used by DPCM Back Ends. + - fsl,asrc-clk-map : Defines clock map used in driver. which is required + by imx8qm/imx8qxp platform + <0> - select the map for asrc0 in imx8qm/imx8qxp + <1> - select the map for asrc1 in imx8qm/imx8qxp + Optional properties: - big-endian : If this property is absent, the little endian mode diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/gtm601.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/gtm601.txt index 5efc8c068de0..efa32a486c4a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/gtm601.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/gtm601.txt @@ -1,10 +1,16 @@ GTM601 UMTS modem audio interface CODEC -This device has no configuration interface. Sample rate is fixed - 8kHz. +This device has no configuration interface. The sample rate and channels are +based on the compatible string + "option,gtm601" = 8kHz mono + "broadmobi,bm818" = 48KHz stereo Required properties: - - compatible : "option,gtm601" + - compatible : one of + "option,gtm601" + "broadmobi,bm818" + Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,codec.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,codec.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..eb4be86464bb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,codec.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/sound/ingenic,codec.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Ingenic JZ47xx internal codec DT bindings + +maintainers: + - Paul Cercueil <paul@crapouillou.net> + +properties: + $nodename: + pattern: '^audio-codec@.*' + + compatible: + oneOf: + - const: ingenic,jz4770-codec + - const: ingenic,jz4725b-codec + - const: ingenic,jz4740-codec + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + clock-names: + items: + - const: aic + + '#sound-dai-cells': + const: 0 + +additionalProperties: false + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - clocks + - clock-names + - '#sound-dai-cells' + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/clock/jz4740-cgu.h> + codec: audio-codec@10020080 { + compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-codec"; + reg = <0x10020080 0x8>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_AIC>; + clock-names = "aic"; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 05adc0d47b13..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4725b-codec.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -Ingenic JZ4725B codec controller - -Required properties: -- compatible : "ingenic,jz4725b-codec" -- reg : codec registers location and length -- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock. -- clock-names: must be set to "aic". -- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0. - -Example: - -codec: audio-codec@100200a4 { - compatible = "ingenic,jz4725b-codec"; - reg = <0x100200a4 0x8>; - - #sound-dai-cells = <0>; - - clocks = <&cgu JZ4725B_CLK_AIC>; - clock-names = "aic"; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1ffcade87e7b..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/ingenic,jz4740-codec.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -Ingenic JZ4740 codec controller - -Required properties: -- compatible : "ingenic,jz4740-codec" -- reg : codec registers location and length -- clocks : phandle to the AIC clock. -- clock-names: must be set to "aic". -- #sound-dai-cells: Must be set to 0. - -Example: - -codec: audio-codec@10020080 { - compatible = "ingenic,jz4740-codec"; - reg = <0x10020080 0x8>; - - #sound-dai-cells = <0>; - - clocks = <&cgu JZ4740_CLK_AIC>; - clock-names = "aic"; -}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt index 408c4837e6d5..ca8c89e88bfa 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,sdm845.txt @@ -5,7 +5,10 @@ This binding describes the SDM845 sound card, which uses qdsp for audio. - compatible: Usage: required Value type: <stringlist> - Definition: must be "qcom,sdm845-sndcard" + Definition: must be one of this + "qcom,sdm845-sndcard" + "qcom,db845c-sndcard" + "lenovo,yoga-c630-sndcard" - audio-routing: Usage: Optional diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd934x.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd934x.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..38eaf0c028f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wcd934x.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/sound/qcom,wcd934x.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Bindings for Qualcomm WCD9340/WCD9341 Audio Codec + +maintainers: + - Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org> + +description: | + Qualcomm WCD9340/WCD9341 Codec is a standalone Hi-Fi audio codec IC. + It has in-built Soundwire controller, pin controller, interrupt mux and + supports both I2S/I2C and SLIMbus audio interfaces. + +properties: + compatible: + const: slim217,250 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + reset-gpios: + description: GPIO spec for reset line to use + maxItems: 1 + + slim-ifc-dev: true + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + clock-names: + const: extclk + + vdd-buck-supply: + description: A reference to the 1.8V buck supply + + vdd-buck-sido-supply: + description: A reference to the 1.8V SIDO buck supply + + vdd-rx-supply: + description: A reference to the 1.8V rx supply + + vdd-tx-supply: + description: A reference to the 1.8V tx supply + + vdd-vbat-supply: + description: A reference to the vbat supply + + vdd-io-supply: + description: A reference to the 1.8V I/O supply + + vdd-micbias-supply: + description: A reference to the micbias supply + + qcom,micbias1-microvolt: + description: micbias1 voltage + minimum: 1800000 + maximum: 2850000 + + qcom,micbias2-microvolt: + description: micbias2 voltage + minimum: 1800000 + maximum: 2850000 + + qcom,micbias3-microvolt: + description: micbias3 voltage + minimum: 1800000 + maximum: 2850000 + + qcom,micbias4-microvolt: + description: micbias4 voltage + minimum: 1800000 + maximum: 2850000 + + clock-output-names: + const: mclk + + clock-frequency: + description: Clock frequency of output clk in Hz + + interrupt-controller: true + + '#interrupt-cells': + const: 1 + + '#clock-cells': + const: 0 + + '#sound-dai-cells': + const: 1 + + "#address-cells": + const: 1 + + "#size-cells": + const: 1 + + gpio@42: + type: object + allOf: + - $ref: ../gpio/qcom,wcd934x-gpio.yaml# + +patternProperties: + "^.*@[0-9a-f]+$": + type: object + description: | + WCD934x subnode for each slave devices. Bindings of each subnodes + depends on the specific driver providing the functionality and + documented in their respective bindings. + + properties: + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + required: + - reg + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - reset-gpios + - slim-ifc-dev + - interrupts + - interrupt-controller + - clock-frequency + - clock-output-names + - qcom,micbias1-microvolt + - qcom,micbias2-microvolt + - qcom,micbias3-microvolt + - qcom,micbias4-microvolt + - "#interrupt-cells" + - "#clock-cells" + - "#sound-dai-cells" + - "#address-cells" + - "#size-cells" + +examples: + - | + codec@1,0{ + compatible = "slim217,250"; + reg = <1 0>; + reset-gpios = <&tlmm 64 0>; + slim-ifc-dev = <&wcd9340_ifd>; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + interrupt-parent = <&tlmm>; + interrupts = <54 4>; + interrupt-controller; + #interrupt-cells = <1>; + #clock-cells = <0>; + clock-frequency = <9600000>; + clock-output-names = "mclk"; + qcom,micbias1-microvolt = <1800000>; + qcom,micbias2-microvolt = <1800000>; + qcom,micbias3-microvolt = <1800000>; + qcom,micbias4-microvolt = <1800000>; + clock-names = "extclk"; + clocks = <&rpmhcc 2>; + + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <1>; + + gpio@42 { + compatible = "qcom,wcd9340-gpio"; + reg = <0x42 0x2>; + gpio-controller; + #gpio-cells = <2>; + }; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wsa881x.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wsa881x.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..ea44d03e58ca --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/qcom,wsa881x.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/sound/qcom,wsa881x.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Bindings for Qualcomm WSA8810/WSA8815 Class-D Smart Speaker Amplifier + +maintainers: + - Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org> + +description: | + WSA8810 is a class-D smart speaker amplifier and WSA8815 + is a high-output power class-D smart speaker amplifier. + Their primary operating mode uses a SoundWire digital audio + interface. This binding is for SoundWire interface. + +properties: + compatible: + const: sdw10217201000 + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + powerdown-gpios: + description: GPIO spec for Powerdown/Shutdown line to use + maxItems: 1 + + '#thermal-sensor-cells': + const: 0 + + '#sound-dai-cells': + const: 0 + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - powerdown-gpios + - "#thermal-sensor-cells" + - "#sound-dai-cells" + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + soundwire@c2d0000 { + #address-cells = <2>; + #size-cells = <0>; + reg = <0x0c2d0000 0x2000>; + + speaker@0,1 { + compatible = "sdw10217201000"; + reg = <0 1>; + powerdown-gpios = <&wcdpinctrl 2 0>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + }; + + speaker@0,2 { + compatible = "sdw10217201000"; + reg = <0 2>; + powerdown-gpios = <&wcdpinctrl 2 0>; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; + }; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt1015.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt1015.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..fcfd02d8d32f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt1015.txt @@ -0,0 +1,17 @@ +RT1015 Mono Class D Audio Amplifier + +This device supports I2C only. + +Required properties: + +- compatible : "realtek,rt1015". + +- reg : The I2C address of the device. + + +Example: + +rt1015: codec@28 { + compatible = "realtek,rt1015"; + reg = <0x28>; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5645.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5645.txt index a03f9a872a71..41a62fd2ae1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5645.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sound/rt5645.txt @@ -10,6 +10,10 @@ Required properties: - interrupts : The CODEC's interrupt output. +- avdd-supply: Power supply for AVDD, providing 1.8V. + +- cpvdd-supply: Power supply for CPVDD, providing 3.5V. + Optional properties: - hp-detect-gpios: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/qcom,sdw.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/qcom,sdw.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..436547f3b155 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/qcom,sdw.txt @@ -0,0 +1,167 @@ +Qualcomm SoundWire Controller Bindings + + +This binding describes the Qualcomm SoundWire Controller along with its +board specific bus parameters. + +- compatible: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: must be "qcom,soundwire-v<MAJOR>.<MINOR>.<STEP>", + Example: + "qcom,soundwire-v1.3.0" + "qcom,soundwire-v1.5.0" + "qcom,soundwire-v1.6.0" +- reg: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: the base address and size of SoundWire controller + address space. + +- interrupts: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should specify the SoundWire Controller IRQ + +- clock-names: + Usage: required + Value type: <stringlist> + Definition: should be "iface" for SoundWire Controller interface clock + +- clocks: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should specify the SoundWire Controller interface clock + +- #sound-dai-cells: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: must be 1 for digital audio interfaces on the controller. + +- qcom,dout-ports: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: must be count of data out ports + +- qcom,din-ports: + Usage: required + Value type: <u32> + Definition: must be count of data in ports + +- qcom,ports-offset1: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should specify payload transport window offset1 of each + data port. Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-offset2: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should specify payload transport window offset2 of each + data port. Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-sinterval-low: + Usage: required + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be sample interval low of each data port. + Out ports followed by In ports. Used for Sample Interval + calculation. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-word-length: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be size of payload channel sample. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-block-pack-mode: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be 0 or 1 to indicate the block packing mode. + 0 to indicate Blocks are per Channel + 1 to indicate Blocks are per Port. + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-block-group-count: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be in range 1 to 4 to indicate how many sample + intervals are combined into a payload. + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-lane-control: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be in range 0 to 7 to identify which data lane + the data port uses. + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-hstart: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be number identifying lowerst numbered coloum in + SoundWire Frame, i.e. left edge of the Transport sub-frame + for each port. Values between 0 and 15 are valid. + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,ports-hstop: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be number identifying highest numbered coloum in + SoundWire Frame, i.e. the right edge of the Transport + sub-frame for each port. Values between 0 and 15 are valid. + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +- qcom,dports-type: + Usage: optional + Value type: <prop-encoded-array> + Definition: should be one of the following types + 0 for reduced port + 1 for simple ports + 2 for full port + Out ports followed by In ports. + More info in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + +Note: + More Information on detail of encoding of these fields can be +found in MIPI Alliance SoundWire 1.0 Specifications. + += SoundWire devices +Each subnode of the bus represents SoundWire device attached to it. +The properties of these nodes are defined by the individual bindings. + += EXAMPLE +The following example represents a SoundWire controller on DB845c board +which has controller integrated inside WCD934x codec on SDM845 SoC. + +soundwire: soundwire@c85 { + compatible = "qcom,soundwire-v1.3.0"; + reg = <0xc85 0x20>; + interrupts = <20 IRQ_TYPE_EDGE_RISING>; + clocks = <&wcc>; + clock-names = "iface"; + #sound-dai-cells = <1>; + qcom,dports-type = <0>; + qcom,dout-ports = <6>; + qcom,din-ports = <2>; + qcom,ports-sinterval-low = /bits/ 8 <0x07 0x1F 0x3F 0x7 0x1F 0x3F 0x0F 0x0F>; + qcom,ports-offset1 = /bits/ 8 <0x01 0x02 0x0C 0x6 0x12 0x0D 0x07 0x0A >; + qcom,ports-offset2 = /bits/ 8 <0x00 0x00 0x1F 0x00 0x00 0x1F 0x00 0x00>; + + /* Left Speaker */ + left{ + .... + }; + + /* Right Speaker */ + right{ + .... + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/soundwire-controller.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/soundwire-controller.yaml index 1b43993bccdb..330924b8618e 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/soundwire-controller.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/soundwire/soundwire-controller.yaml @@ -69,6 +69,7 @@ examples: reg = <0 1>; powerdown-gpios = <&wcdpinctrl 2 0>; #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; }; speaker@0,2 { @@ -76,6 +77,7 @@ examples: reg = <0 2>; powerdown-gpios = <&wcdpinctrl 2 0>; #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + #sound-dai-cells = <0>; }; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nuvoton,npcm-pspi.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nuvoton,npcm-pspi.txt index 1fd9a4406a1d..b98203ca656d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nuvoton,npcm-pspi.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/nuvoton,npcm-pspi.txt @@ -12,6 +12,7 @@ Required properties: - clock-names: Should be "clk_apb5". - pinctrl-names : a pinctrl state named "default" must be defined. - pinctrl-0 : phandle referencing pin configuration of the device. + - resets : phandle to the reset control for this device. - cs-gpios: Specifies the gpio pins to be used for chipselects. See: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt @@ -19,16 +20,6 @@ Optional properties: - clock-frequency : Input clock frequency to the PSPI block in Hz. Default is 25000000 Hz. -Aliases: -- All the SPI controller nodes should be represented in the aliases node using - the following format 'spi{n}' withe the correct numbered in "aliases" node. - -Example: - -aliases { - spi0 = &spi0; -}; - spi0: spi@f0200000 { compatible = "nuvoton,npcm750-pspi"; reg = <0xf0200000 0x1000>; @@ -39,5 +30,6 @@ spi0: spi@f0200000 { interrupts = <GIC_SPI 31 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; clocks = <&clk NPCM7XX_CLK_APB5>; clock-names = "clk_apb5"; + resets = <&rstc NPCM7XX_RESET_IPSRST2 NPCM7XX_RESET_PSPI1> cs-gpios = <&gpio6 11 GPIO_ACTIVE_LOW>; }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-controller.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-controller.yaml index 732339275848..1e0ca6ccf64b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-controller.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-controller.yaml @@ -111,7 +111,7 @@ patternProperties: spi-rx-bus-width: allOf: - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 - - enum: [ 1, 2, 4 ] + - enum: [ 1, 2, 4, 8 ] - default: 1 description: Bus width to the SPI bus used for MISO. @@ -123,7 +123,7 @@ patternProperties: spi-tx-bus-width: allOf: - $ref: /schemas/types.yaml#/definitions/uint32 - - enum: [ 1, 2, 4 ] + - enum: [ 1, 2, 4, 8 ] - default: 1 description: Bus width to the SPI bus used for MOSI. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt deleted file mode 100644 index d82755c63eaf..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-stm32.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,62 +0,0 @@ -STMicroelectronics STM32 SPI Controller - -The STM32 SPI controller is used to communicate with external devices using -the Serial Peripheral Interface. It supports full-duplex, half-duplex and -simplex synchronous serial communication with external devices. It supports -from 4 to 32-bit data size. Although it can be configured as master or slave, -only master is supported by the driver. - -Required properties: -- compatible: Should be one of: - "st,stm32h7-spi" - "st,stm32f4-spi" -- reg: Offset and length of the device's register set. -- interrupts: Must contain the interrupt id. -- clocks: Must contain an entry for spiclk (which feeds the internal clock - generator). -- #address-cells: Number of cells required to define a chip select address. -- #size-cells: Should be zero. - -Optional properties: -- resets: Must contain the phandle to the reset controller. -- A pinctrl state named "default" may be defined to set pins in mode of - operation for SPI transfer. -- dmas: DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. DMA fifo mode must be used. See the - STM32 DMA bindings, Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/stm32-dma.txt. -- dma-names: DMA request names should include "tx" and "rx" if present. -- cs-gpios: list of GPIO chip selects. See the SPI bus bindings, - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi-bus.txt - - -Child nodes represent devices on the SPI bus - See ../spi/spi-bus.txt - -Optional properties: -- st,spi-midi-ns: Only for STM32H7, (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time - delay in nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data - frames. - - -Example: - spi2: spi@40003800 { - #address-cells = <1>; - #size-cells = <0>; - compatible = "st,stm32h7-spi"; - reg = <0x40003800 0x400>; - interrupts = <36>; - clocks = <&rcc SPI2_CK>; - resets = <&rcc 1166>; - dmas = <&dmamux1 0 39 0x400 0x01>, - <&dmamux1 1 40 0x400 0x01>; - dma-names = "rx", "tx"; - pinctrl-0 = <&spi2_pins_b>; - pinctrl-names = "default"; - cs-gpios = <&gpioa 11 0>; - - aardvark@0 { - compatible = "totalphase,aardvark"; - reg = <0>; - spi-max-frequency = <4000000>; - st,spi-midi-ns = <4000>; - }; - }; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt index f99c733d75c1..5bb4a8f1df7a 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/spi_atmel.txt @@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ Atmel SPI device Required properties: -- compatible : should be "atmel,at91rm9200-spi". +- compatible : should be "atmel,at91rm9200-spi" or "microchip,sam9x60-spi". - reg: Address and length of the register set for the device - interrupts: Should contain spi interrupt - cs-gpios: chipselects (optional for SPI controller version >= 2 with the diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/st,stm32-spi.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/st,stm32-spi.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f0d979664f07 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/spi/st,stm32-spi.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/spi/st,stm32-spi.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: STMicroelectronics STM32 SPI Controller bindings + +description: | + The STM32 SPI controller is used to communicate with external devices using + the Serial Peripheral Interface. It supports full-duplex, half-duplex and + simplex synchronous serial communication with external devices. It supports + from 4 to 32-bit data size. + +maintainers: + - Erwan Leray <erwan.leray@st.com> + - Fabrice Gasnier <fabrice.gasnier@st.com> + +allOf: + - $ref: "spi-controller.yaml#" + - if: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + const: st,stm32f4-spi + + then: + properties: + st,spi-midi-ns: false + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - st,stm32f4-spi + - st,stm32h7-spi + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + resets: + maxItems: 1 + + dmas: + description: | + DMA specifiers for tx and rx dma. DMA fifo mode must be used. See + the STM32 DMA bindings Documentation/devicetree/bindings/dma/stm32-dma.txt. + items: + - description: rx DMA channel + - description: tx DMA channel + + dma-names: + items: + - const: rx + - const: tx + +patternProperties: + "^[a-zA-Z][a-zA-Z0-9,+\\-._]{0,63}@[0-9a-f]+$": + type: object + # SPI slave nodes must be children of the SPI master node and can + # contain the following properties. + properties: + st,spi-midi-ns: + description: | + Only for STM32H7, (Master Inter-Data Idleness) minimum time + delay in nanoseconds inserted between two consecutive data frames. + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - clocks + - interrupts + +examples: + - | + #include <dt-bindings/interrupt-controller/arm-gic.h> + #include <dt-bindings/clock/stm32mp1-clks.h> + #include <dt-bindings/reset/stm32mp1-resets.h> + spi@4000b000 { + #address-cells = <1>; + #size-cells = <0>; + compatible = "st,stm32h7-spi"; + reg = <0x4000b000 0x400>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 36 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_HIGH>; + clocks = <&rcc SPI2_K>; + resets = <&rcc SPI2_R>; + dmas = <&dmamux1 0 39 0x400 0x05>, + <&dmamux1 1 40 0x400 0x05>; + dma-names = "rx", "tx"; + cs-gpios = <&gpioa 11 0>; + + aardvark@0 { + compatible = "totalphase,aardvark"; + reg = <0>; + spi-max-frequency = <4000000>; + st,spi-midi-ns = <4000>; + }; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..87369264feb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/thermal/allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Allwinner SUN8I Thermal Controller Device Tree Bindings + +maintainers: + - Vasily Khoruzhick <anarsoul@gmail.com> + - Yangtao Li <tiny.windzz@gmail.com> + +properties: + compatible: + enum: + - allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths + - allwinner,sun8i-h3-ths + - allwinner,sun8i-r40-ths + - allwinner,sun50i-a64-ths + - allwinner,sun50i-h5-ths + - allwinner,sun50i-h6-ths + + clocks: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + items: + - description: Bus Clock + - description: Module Clock + + clock-names: + minItems: 1 + maxItems: 2 + items: + - const: bus + - const: mod + + reg: + maxItems: 1 + + interrupts: + maxItems: 1 + + resets: + maxItems: 1 + + nvmem-cells: + maxItems: 1 + description: Calibration data for thermal sensors + + nvmem-cell-names: + const: calibration + + # See ./thermal.txt for details + "#thermal-sensor-cells": + enum: + - 0 + - 1 + +allOf: + - if: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + const: allwinner,sun50i-h6-ths + + then: + properties: + clocks: + maxItems: 1 + + clock-names: + maxItems: 1 + + else: + properties: + clocks: + minItems: 2 + + clock-names: + minItems: 2 + + - if: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + const: allwinner,sun8i-h3-ths + + then: + properties: + "#thermal-sensor-cells": + const: 0 + + else: + properties: + "#thermal-sensor-cells": + const: 1 + + - if: + properties: + compatible: + contains: + enum: + - const: allwinner,sun8i-h3-ths + - const: allwinner,sun8i-r40-ths + - const: allwinner,sun50i-a64-ths + - const: allwinner,sun50i-h5-ths + - const: allwinner,sun50i-h6-ths + + then: + required: + - clocks + - clock-names + - resets + +required: + - compatible + - reg + - interrupts + - '#thermal-sensor-cells' + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + thermal-sensor@1f04000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun8i-a83t-ths"; + reg = <0x01f04000 0x100>; + interrupts = <0 31 0>; + nvmem-cells = <&ths_calibration>; + nvmem-cell-names = "calibration"; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; + + - | + thermal-sensor@1c25000 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun8i-h3-ths"; + reg = <0x01c25000 0x400>; + clocks = <&ccu 0>, <&ccu 1>; + clock-names = "bus", "mod"; + resets = <&ccu 2>; + interrupts = <0 31 0>; + nvmem-cells = <&ths_calibration>; + nvmem-cell-names = "calibration"; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + }; + + - | + thermal-sensor@5070400 { + compatible = "allwinner,sun50i-h6-ths"; + reg = <0x05070400 0x100>; + clocks = <&ccu 0>; + clock-names = "bus"; + resets = <&ccu 2>; + interrupts = <0 15 0>; + nvmem-cells = <&ths_calibration>; + nvmem-cell-names = "calibration"; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <1>; + }; + +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-ro-thermal.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-ro-thermal.yaml new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..d9fdf4809a49 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-ro-thermal.yaml @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ +# SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) +%YAML 1.2 +--- +$id: http://devicetree.org/schemas/thermal/brcm,avs-ro-thermal.yaml# +$schema: http://devicetree.org/meta-schemas/core.yaml# + +title: Broadcom AVS ring oscillator thermal + +maintainers: + - Stefan Wahren <wahrenst@gmx.net> + +description: |+ + The thermal node should be the child of a syscon node with the + required property: + + - compatible: Should be one of the following: + "brcm,bcm2711-avs-monitor", "syscon", "simple-mfd" + + Refer to the the bindings described in + Documentation/devicetree/bindings/mfd/syscon.txt + +properties: + compatible: + const: brcm,bcm2711-thermal + + # See ./thermal.txt for details + "#thermal-sensor-cells": + const: 0 + +required: + - compatible + - '#thermal-sensor-cells' + +additionalProperties: false + +examples: + - | + avs-monitor@7d5d2000 { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2711-avs-monitor", + "syscon", "simple-mfd"; + reg = <0x7d5d2000 0xf00>; + + thermal: thermal { + compatible = "brcm,bcm2711-thermal"; + #thermal-sensor-cells = <0>; + }; + }; +... diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt index 43a9ed545944..74a9ef09db8b 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/thermal/brcm,avs-tmon.txt @@ -3,9 +3,13 @@ Thermal management core, provided by the AVS TMON hardware block. Required properties: -- compatible: must be "brcm,avs-tmon" and/or "brcm,avs-tmon-bcm7445" +- compatible: must be one of: + "brcm,avs-tmon-bcm7216" + "brcm,avs-tmon-bcm7445" + "brcm,avs-tmon" - reg: address range for the AVS TMON registers -- interrupts: temperature monitor interrupt, for high/low threshold triggers +- interrupts: temperature monitor interrupt, for high/low threshold triggers, + required except for "brcm,avs-tmon-bcm7216" - interrupt-names: should be "tmon" Example: diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt index a444cfc5852a..a747fabab7d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/timer/renesas,cmt.txt @@ -29,6 +29,8 @@ Required Properties: - "renesas,r8a77470-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT1 device included in r8a77470. - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774a1. - "renesas,r8a774a1-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT devices included in r8a774a1. + - "renesas,r8a774b1-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774b1. + - "renesas,r8a774b1-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT devices included in r8a774b1. - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a774c0. - "renesas,r8a774c0-cmt1" for the 48-bit CMT devices included in r8a774c0. - "renesas,r8a7790-cmt0" for the 32-bit CMT0 device included in r8a7790. diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt index cfc9f40ab641..51376cbe5f3d 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/ci-hdrc-usb2.txt @@ -15,6 +15,10 @@ Required properties: "qcom,ci-hdrc" "chipidea,usb2" "xlnx,zynq-usb-2.20a" + "nvidia,tegra20-udc" + "nvidia,tegra30-udc" + "nvidia,tegra114-udc" + "nvidia,tegra124-udc" - reg: base address and length of the registers - interrupts: interrupt for the USB controller diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mediatek,musb.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mediatek,musb.txt new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b8a87c90d9e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/usb/mediatek,musb.txt @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +MediaTek musb DRD/OTG controller +------------------------------------------- + +Required properties: + - compatible : should be one of: + "mediatek,mt2701-musb" + ... + followed by "mediatek,mtk-musb" + - reg : specifies physical base address and size of + the registers + - interrupts : interrupt used by musb controller + - interrupt-names : must be "mc" + - phys : PHY specifier for the OTG phy + - dr_mode : should be one of "host", "peripheral" or "otg", + refer to usb/generic.txt + - clocks : a list of phandle + clock-specifier pairs, one for + each entry in clock-names + - clock-names : must contain "main", "mcu", "univpll" + for clocks of controller + +Optional properties: + - power-domains : a phandle to USB power domain node to control USB's + MTCMOS + +Required child nodes: + usb connector node as defined in bindings/connector/usb-connector.txt +Optional properties: + - id-gpios : input GPIO for USB ID pin. + - vbus-gpios : input GPIO for USB VBUS pin. + - vbus-supply : reference to the VBUS regulator, needed when supports + dual-role mode + - usb-role-switch : use USB Role Switch to support dual-role switch, see + usb/generic.txt. + +Example: + +usb2: usb@11200000 { + compatible = "mediatek,mt2701-musb", + "mediatek,mtk-musb"; + reg = <0 0x11200000 0 0x1000>; + interrupts = <GIC_SPI 32 IRQ_TYPE_LEVEL_LOW>; + interrupt-names = "mc"; + phys = <&u2port2 PHY_TYPE_USB2>; + dr_mode = "otg"; + clocks = <&pericfg CLK_PERI_USB0>, + <&pericfg CLK_PERI_USB0_MCU>, + <&pericfg CLK_PERI_USB_SLV>; + clock-names = "main","mcu","univpll"; + power-domains = <&scpsys MT2701_POWER_DOMAIN_IFR_MSC>; + usb-role-switch; + connector{ + compatible = "gpio-usb-b-connector", "usb-b-connector"; + type = "micro"; + id-gpios = <&pio 44 GPIO_ACTIVE_HIGH>; + vbus-supply = <&usb_vbus>; + }; +}; diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml index a6f6433260dd..146fbb688cda 100644 --- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml +++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/vendor-prefixes.yaml @@ -109,6 +109,8 @@ patternProperties: description: Artesyn Embedded Technologies Inc. "^asahi-kasei,.*": description: Asahi Kasei Corp. + "^asc,.*": + description: All Sensors Corporation "^aspeed,.*": description: ASPEED Technology Inc. "^asus,.*": @@ -725,6 +727,8 @@ patternProperties: description: Panasonic Corporation "^parade,.*": description: Parade Technologies Inc. + "^parallax,.*": + description: Parallax Inc. "^pda,.*": description: Precision Design Associates, Inc. "^pericom,.*": @@ -1072,6 +1076,8 @@ patternProperties: description: Xilinx "^xunlong,.*": description: Shenzhen Xunlong Software CO.,Limited + "^xylon,.*": + description: Xylon "^yones-toptech,.*": description: Yones Toptech Co., Ltd. "^ysoft,.*": diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/contributing.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/contributing.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..10956583d22e --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/contributing.rst @@ -0,0 +1,294 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +How to help improve kernel documentation +======================================== + +Documentation is an important part of any software-development project. +Good documentation helps to bring new developers in and helps established +developers work more effectively. Without top-quality documentation, a lot +of time is wasted in reverse-engineering the code and making avoidable +mistakes. + +Unfortunately, the kernel's documentation currently falls far short of what +it needs to be to support a project of this size and importance. + +This guide is for contributors who would like to improve that situation. +Kernel documentation improvements can be made by developers at a variety of +skill levels; they are a relatively easy way to learn the kernel process in +general and find a place in the community. The bulk of what follows is the +documentation maintainer's list of tasks that most urgently need to be +done. + +The documentation TODO list +--------------------------- + +There is an endless list of tasks that need to be carried out to get our +documentation to where it should be. This list contains a number of +important items, but is far from exhaustive; if you see a different way to +improve the documentation, please do not hold back! + +Addressing warnings +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The documentation build currently spews out an unbelievable number of +warnings. When you have that many, you might as well have none at all; +people ignore them, and they will never notice when their work adds new +ones. For this reason, eliminating warnings is one of the highest-priority +tasks on the documentation TODO list. The task itself is reasonably +straightforward, but it must be approached in the right way to be +successful. + +Warnings issued by a compiler for C code can often be dismissed as false +positives, leading to patches aimed at simply shutting the compiler up. +Warnings from the documentation build almost always point at a real +problem; making those warnings go away requires understanding the problem +and fixing it at its source. For this reason, patches fixing documentation +warnings should probably not say "fix a warning" in the changelog title; +they should indicate the real problem that has been fixed. + +Another important point is that documentation warnings are often created by +problems in kerneldoc comments in C code. While the documentation +maintainer appreciates being copied on fixes for these warnings, the +documentation tree is often not the right one to actually carry those +fixes; they should go to the maintainer of the subsystem in question. + +For example, in a documentation build I grabbed a pair of warnings nearly +at random:: + + ./drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c:1818: warning: bad line: + - Resource-managed devfreq_register_notifier() + ./drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c:1854: warning: bad line: + - Resource-managed devfreq_unregister_notifier() + +(The lines were split for readability). + +A quick look at the source file named above turned up a couple of kerneldoc +comments that look like this:: + + /** + * devm_devfreq_register_notifier() + - Resource-managed devfreq_register_notifier() + * @dev: The devfreq user device. (parent of devfreq) + * @devfreq: The devfreq object. + * @nb: The notifier block to be unregistered. + * @list: DEVFREQ_TRANSITION_NOTIFIER. + */ + +The problem is the missing "*", which confuses the build system's +simplistic idea of what C comment blocks look like. This problem had been +present since that comment was added in 2016 — a full four years. Fixing +it was a matter of adding the missing asterisks. A quick look at the +history for that file showed what the normal format for subject lines is, +and ``scripts/get_maintainer.pl`` told me who should receive it. The +resulting patch looked like this:: + + [PATCH] PM / devfreq: Fix two malformed kerneldoc comments + + Two kerneldoc comments in devfreq.c fail to adhere to the required format, + resulting in these doc-build warnings: + + ./drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c:1818: warning: bad line: + - Resource-managed devfreq_register_notifier() + ./drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c:1854: warning: bad line: + - Resource-managed devfreq_unregister_notifier() + + Add a couple of missing asterisks and make kerneldoc a little happier. + + Signed-off-by: Jonathan Corbet <corbet@lwn.net> + --- + drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c | 4 ++-- + 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) + + diff --git a/drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c b/drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c + index 57f6944d65a6..00c9b80b3d33 100644 + --- a/drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c + +++ b/drivers/devfreq/devfreq.c + @@ -1814,7 +1814,7 @@ static void devm_devfreq_notifier_release(struct device *dev, void *res) + + /** + * devm_devfreq_register_notifier() + - - Resource-managed devfreq_register_notifier() + + * - Resource-managed devfreq_register_notifier() + * @dev: The devfreq user device. (parent of devfreq) + * @devfreq: The devfreq object. + * @nb: The notifier block to be unregistered. + @@ -1850,7 +1850,7 @@ EXPORT_SYMBOL(devm_devfreq_register_notifier); + + /** + * devm_devfreq_unregister_notifier() + - - Resource-managed devfreq_unregister_notifier() + + * - Resource-managed devfreq_unregister_notifier() + * @dev: The devfreq user device. (parent of devfreq) + * @devfreq: The devfreq object. + * @nb: The notifier block to be unregistered. + -- + 2.24.1 + +The entire process only took a few minutes. Of course, I then found that +somebody else had fixed it in a separate tree, highlighting another lesson: +always check linux-next to see if a problem has been fixed before you dig +into it. + +Other fixes will take longer, especially those relating to structure +members or function parameters that lack documentation. In such cases, it +is necessary to work out what the role of those members or parameters is +and describe them correctly. Overall, this task gets a little tedious at +times, but it's highly important. If we can actually eliminate warnings +from the documentation build, then we can start expecting developers to +avoid adding new ones. + +Languishing kerneldoc comments +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Developers are encouraged to write kerneldoc comments for their code, but +many of those comments are never pulled into the docs build. That makes +this information harder to find and, for example, makes Sphinx unable to +generate links to that documentation. Adding ``kernel-doc`` directives to +the documentation to bring those comments in can help the community derive +the full value of the work that has gone into creating them. + +The ``scripts/find-unused-docs.sh`` tool can be used to find these +overlooked comments. + +Note that the most value comes from pulling in the documentation for +exported functions and data structures. Many subsystems also have +kerneldoc comments for internal use; those should not be pulled into the +documentation build unless they are placed in a document that is +specifically aimed at developers working within the relevant subsystem. + + +Typo fixes +~~~~~~~~~~ + +Fixing typographical or formatting errors in the documentation is a quick +way to figure out how to create and send patches, and it is a useful +service. I am always willing to accept such patches. That said, once you +have fixed a few, please consider moving on to more advanced tasks, leaving +some typos for the next beginner to address. + +Please note that some things are *not* typos and should not be "fixed": + + - Both American and British English spellings are allowed within the + kernel documentation. There is no need to fix one by replacing it with + the other. + + - The question of whether a period should be followed by one or two spaces + is not to be debated in the context of kernel documentation. Other + areas of rational disagreement, such as the "Oxford comma", are also + off-topic here. + +As with any patch to any project, please consider whether your change is +really making things better. + +Ancient documentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Some kernel documentation is current, maintained, and useful. Some +documentation is ... not. Dusty, old, and inaccurate documentation can +mislead readers and casts doubt on our documentation as a whole. Anything +that can be done to address such problems is more than welcome. + +Whenever you are working with a document, please consider whether it is +current, whether it needs updating, or whether it should perhaps be removed +altogether. There are a number of warning signs that you can pay attention +to here: + + - References to 2.x kernels + - Pointers to SourceForge repositories + - Nothing but typo fixes in the history for several years + - Discussion of pre-Git workflows + +The best thing to do, of course, would be to bring the documentation +current, adding whatever information is needed. Such work often requires +the cooperation of developers familiar with the subsystem in question, of +course. Developers are often more than willing to cooperate with people +working to improve the documentation when asked nicely, and when their +answers are listened to and acted upon. + +Some documentation is beyond hope; we occasionally find documents that +refer to code that was removed from the kernel long ago, for example. +There is surprising resistance to removing obsolete documentation, but we +should do that anyway. Extra cruft in our documentation helps nobody. + +In cases where there is perhaps some useful information in a badly outdated +document, and you are unable to update it, the best thing to do may be to +add a warning at the beginning. The following text is recommended:: + + .. warning :: + This document is outdated and in need of attention. Please use + this information with caution, and please consider sending patches + to update it. + +That way, at least our long-suffering readers have been warned that the +document may lead them astray. + +Documentation coherency +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +The old-timers around here will remember the Linux books that showed up on +the shelves in the 1990s. They were simply collections of documentation +files scrounged from various locations on the net. The books have (mostly) +improved since then, but the kernel's documentation is still mostly built +on that model. It is thousands of files, almost each of which was written +in isolation from all of the others. We don't have a coherent body of +kernel documentation; we have thousands of individual documents. + +We have been trying to improve the situation through the creation of +a set of "books" that group documentation for specific readers. These +include: + + - :doc:`../admin-guide/index` + - :doc:`../core-api/index` + - :doc:`../driver-api/index` + - :doc:`../userspace-api/index` + +As well as this book on documentation itself. + +Moving documents into the appropriate books is an important task and needs +to continue. There are a couple of challenges associated with this work, +though. Moving documentation files creates short-term pain for the people +who work with those files; they are understandably unenthusiastic about +such changes. Usually the case can be made to move a document once; we +really don't want to keep shifting them around, though. + +Even when all documents are in the right place, though, we have only +managed to turn a big pile into a group of smaller piles. The work of +trying to knit all of those documents together into a single whole has not +yet begun. If you have bright ideas on how we could proceed on that front, +we would be more than happy to hear them. + +Stylesheet improvements +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +With the adoption of Sphinx we have much nicer-looking HTML output than we +once did. But it could still use a lot of improvement; Donald Knuth and +Edward Tufte would be unimpressed. That requires tweaking our stylesheets +to create more typographically sound, accessible, and readable output. + +Be warned: if you take on this task you are heading into classic bikeshed +territory. Expect a lot of opinions and discussion for even relatively +obvious changes. That is, alas, the nature of the world we live in. + +Non-LaTeX PDF build +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +This is a decidedly nontrivial task for somebody with a lot of time and +Python skills. The Sphinx toolchain is relatively small and well +contained; it is easy to add to a development system. But building PDF or +EPUB output requires installing LaTeX, which is anything but small or well +contained. That would be a nice thing to eliminate. + +The original hope had been to use the rst2pdf tool (https://rst2pdf.org/) +for PDF generation, but it turned out to not be up to the task. +Development work on rst2pdf seems to have picked up again in recent times, +though, which is a hopeful sign. If a suitably motivated developer were to +work with that project to make rst2pdf work with the kernel documentation +build, the world would be eternally grateful. + +Write more documentation +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +Naturally, there are massive parts of the kernel that are severely +underdocumented. If you have the knowledge to document a specific kernel +subsystem and the desire to do so, please do not hesitate to do some +writing and contribute the result to the kernel. Untold numbers of kernel +developers and users will thank you. diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst index 603f3ff55d5a..7c7d97784626 100644 --- a/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/index.rst @@ -10,6 +10,8 @@ How to write kernel documentation sphinx kernel-doc parse-headers + contributing + maintainer-profile .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/doc-guide/maintainer-profile.rst b/Documentation/doc-guide/maintainer-profile.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..aee2f508cc89 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/doc-guide/maintainer-profile.rst @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 +Documentation subsystem maintainer entry profile +================================================ + +The documentation "subsystem" is the central coordinating point for the +kernel's documentation and associated infrastructure. It covers the +hierarchy under Documentation/ (with the exception of +Documentation/device-tree), various utilities under scripts/ and, at least +some of the time, LICENSES/. + +It's worth noting, though, that the boundaries of this subsystem are rather +fuzzier than normal. Many other subsystem maintainers like to keep control +of portions of Documentation/, and many more freely apply changes there +when it is convenient. Beyond that, much of the kernel's documentation is +found in the source as kerneldoc comments; those are usually (but not +always) maintained by the relevant subsystem maintainer. + +The mailing list for documentation is linux-doc@vger.kernel.org. Patches +should be made against the docs-next tree whenever possible. + +Submit checklist addendum +------------------------- + +When making documentation changes, you should actually build the +documentation and ensure that no new errors or warnings have been +introduced. Generating HTML documents and looking at the result will help +to avoid unsightly misunderstandings about how things will be rendered. + +Key cycle dates +--------------- + +Patches can be sent anytime, but response will be slower than usual during +the merge window. The docs tree tends to close late before the merge +window opens, since the risk of regressions from documentation patches is +low. + +Review cadence +-------------- + +I am the sole maintainer for the documentation subsystem, and I am doing +the work on my own time, so the response to patches will occasionally be +slow. I try to always send out a notification when a patch is merged (or +when I decide that one cannot be). Do not hesitate to send a ping if you +have not heard back within a week of sending a patch. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst index 45953f171500..a9a7a3c84c63 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/client.rst @@ -151,6 +151,93 @@ The details of these operations are: Note that callbacks will always be invoked from the DMA engines tasklet, never from interrupt context. + Optional: per descriptor metadata + --------------------------------- + DMAengine provides two ways for metadata support. + + DESC_METADATA_CLIENT + + The metadata buffer is allocated/provided by the client driver and it is + attached to the descriptor. + + .. code-block:: c + + int dmaengine_desc_attach_metadata(struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *desc, + void *data, size_t len); + + DESC_METADATA_ENGINE + + The metadata buffer is allocated/managed by the DMA driver. The client + driver can ask for the pointer, maximum size and the currently used size of + the metadata and can directly update or read it. + + Becasue the DMA driver manages the memory area containing the metadata, + clients must make sure that they do not try to access or get the pointer + after their transfer completion callback has run for the descriptor. + If no completion callback has been defined for the transfer, then the + metadata must not be accessed after issue_pending. + In other words: if the aim is to read back metadata after the transfer is + completed, then the client must use completion callback. + + .. code-block:: c + + void *dmaengine_desc_get_metadata_ptr(struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *desc, + size_t *payload_len, size_t *max_len); + + int dmaengine_desc_set_metadata_len(struct dma_async_tx_descriptor *desc, + size_t payload_len); + + Client drivers can query if a given mode is supported with: + + .. code-block:: c + + bool dmaengine_is_metadata_mode_supported(struct dma_chan *chan, + enum dma_desc_metadata_mode mode); + + Depending on the used mode client drivers must follow different flow. + + DESC_METADATA_CLIENT + + - DMA_MEM_TO_DEV / DEV_MEM_TO_MEM: + 1. prepare the descriptor (dmaengine_prep_*) + construct the metadata in the client's buffer + 2. use dmaengine_desc_attach_metadata() to attach the buffer to the + descriptor + 3. submit the transfer + - DMA_DEV_TO_MEM: + 1. prepare the descriptor (dmaengine_prep_*) + 2. use dmaengine_desc_attach_metadata() to attach the buffer to the + descriptor + 3. submit the transfer + 4. when the transfer is completed, the metadata should be available in the + attached buffer + + DESC_METADATA_ENGINE + + - DMA_MEM_TO_DEV / DEV_MEM_TO_MEM: + 1. prepare the descriptor (dmaengine_prep_*) + 2. use dmaengine_desc_get_metadata_ptr() to get the pointer to the + engine's metadata area + 3. update the metadata at the pointer + 4. use dmaengine_desc_set_metadata_len() to tell the DMA engine the + amount of data the client has placed into the metadata buffer + 5. submit the transfer + - DMA_DEV_TO_MEM: + 1. prepare the descriptor (dmaengine_prep_*) + 2. submit the transfer + 3. on transfer completion, use dmaengine_desc_get_metadata_ptr() to get + the pointer to the engine's metadata area + 4. read out the metadata from the pointer + + .. note:: + + When DESC_METADATA_ENGINE mode is used the metadata area for the descriptor + is no longer valid after the transfer has been completed (valid up to the + point when the completion callback returns if used). + + Mixed use of DESC_METADATA_CLIENT / DESC_METADATA_ENGINE is not allowed, + client drivers must use either of the modes per descriptor. + 4. Submit the transaction Once the descriptor has been prepared and the callback information diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/provider.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/provider.rst index dfc4486b5743..790a15089f1f 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/provider.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/dmaengine/provider.rst @@ -247,6 +247,54 @@ after each transfer. In case of a ring buffer, they may loop (DMA_CYCLIC). Addresses pointing to a device's register (e.g. a FIFO) are typically fixed. +Per descriptor metadata support +------------------------------- +Some data movement architecture (DMA controller and peripherals) uses metadata +associated with a transaction. The DMA controller role is to transfer the +payload and the metadata alongside. +The metadata itself is not used by the DMA engine itself, but it contains +parameters, keys, vectors, etc for peripheral or from the peripheral. + +The DMAengine framework provides a generic ways to facilitate the metadata for +descriptors. Depending on the architecture the DMA driver can implement either +or both of the methods and it is up to the client driver to choose which one +to use. + +- DESC_METADATA_CLIENT + + The metadata buffer is allocated/provided by the client driver and it is + attached (via the dmaengine_desc_attach_metadata() helper to the descriptor. + + From the DMA driver the following is expected for this mode: + - DMA_MEM_TO_DEV / DEV_MEM_TO_MEM + The data from the provided metadata buffer should be prepared for the DMA + controller to be sent alongside of the payload data. Either by copying to a + hardware descriptor, or highly coupled packet. + - DMA_DEV_TO_MEM + On transfer completion the DMA driver must copy the metadata to the client + provided metadata buffer before notifying the client about the completion. + After the transfer completion, DMA drivers must not touch the metadata + buffer provided by the client. + +- DESC_METADATA_ENGINE + + The metadata buffer is allocated/managed by the DMA driver. The client driver + can ask for the pointer, maximum size and the currently used size of the + metadata and can directly update or read it. dmaengine_desc_get_metadata_ptr() + and dmaengine_desc_set_metadata_len() is provided as helper functions. + + From the DMA driver the following is expected for this mode: + - get_metadata_ptr + Should return a pointer for the metadata buffer, the maximum size of the + metadata buffer and the currently used / valid (if any) bytes in the buffer. + - set_metadata_len + It is called by the clients after it have placed the metadata to the buffer + to let the DMA driver know the number of valid bytes provided. + + Note: since the client will ask for the metadata pointer in the completion + callback (in DMA_DEV_TO_MEM case) the DMA driver must ensure that the + descriptor is not freed up prior the callback is called. + Device operations ----------------- diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst index 13046fcf0a5d..46c13780994c 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/driver-model/devres.rst @@ -267,6 +267,8 @@ DRM GPIO devm_gpiod_get() + devm_gpiod_get_array() + devm_gpiod_get_array_optional() devm_gpiod_get_index() devm_gpiod_get_index_optional() devm_gpiod_get_optional() @@ -313,7 +315,6 @@ IOMAP devm_ioport_map() devm_ioport_unmap() devm_ioremap() - devm_ioremap_nocache() devm_ioremap_uc() devm_ioremap_wc() devm_ioremap_resource() : checks resource, requests memory region, ioremaps diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst index 2ff743105927..871922529332 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst @@ -507,11 +507,6 @@ available but we try to move away from this: cascaded irq has to be handled by a threaded interrupt handler. Apart from that it works exactly like the chained irqchip. -- DEPRECATED: gpiochip_set_chained_irqchip(): sets up a chained cascaded irq - handler for a gpio_chip from a parent IRQ and passes the struct gpio_chip* - as handler data. Notice that we pass is as the handler data, since the - irqchip data is likely used by the parent irqchip. - - gpiochip_set_nested_irqchip(): sets up a nested cascaded irq handler for a gpio_chip from a parent IRQ. As the parent IRQ has usually been explicitly requested by the driver, this does very little more than diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/drivers-on-gpio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/drivers-on-gpio.rst index f3a189320e11..820b403d50f6 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/drivers-on-gpio.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/drivers-on-gpio.rst @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ to emulate MCTRL (modem control) signals CTS/RTS by using two GPIO lines. The MTD NOR flash has add-ons for extra GPIO lines too, though the address bus is usually connected directly to the flash. -Use those instead of talking directly to the GPIOs using sysfs; they integrate -with kernel frameworks better than your userspace code could. Needless to say, -just using the appropriate kernel drivers will simplify and speed up your -embedded hacking in particular by providing ready-made components. +Use those instead of talking directly to the GPIOs from userspace; they +integrate with kernel frameworks better than your userspace code could. +Needless to say, just using the appropriate kernel drivers will simplify and +speed up your embedded hacking in particular by providing ready-made components. diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/index.rst index 5b61032aa4ea..1d48fe248f05 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/index.rst @@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ Contents: :maxdepth: 2 intro + using-gpio driver consumer board diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/using-gpio.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/using-gpio.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dda069444032 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/using-gpio.rst @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +========================= +Using GPIO Lines in Linux +========================= + +The Linux kernel exists to abstract and present hardware to users. GPIO lines +as such are normally not user facing abstractions. The most obvious, natural +and preferred way to use GPIO lines is to let kernel hardware drivers deal +with them. + +For examples of already existing generic drivers that will also be good +examples for any other kernel drivers you want to author, refer to +:doc:`drivers-on-gpio` + +For any kind of mass produced system you want to support, such as servers, +laptops, phones, tablets, routers, and any consumer or office or business goods +using appropriate kernel drivers is paramount. Submit your code for inclusion +in the upstream Linux kernel when you feel it is mature enough and you will get +help to refine it, see :doc:`../../process/submitting-patches`. + +In Linux GPIO lines also have a userspace ABI. + +The userspace ABI is intended for one-off deployments. Examples are prototypes, +factory lines, maker community projects, workshop specimen, production tools, +industrial automation, PLC-type use cases, door controllers, in short a piece +of specialized equipment that is not produced by the numbers, requiring +operators to have a deep knowledge of the equipment and knows about the +software-hardware interface to be set up. They should not have a natural fit +to any existing kernel subsystem and not be a good fit for an operating system, +because of not being reusable or abstract enough, or involving a lot of non +computer hardware related policy. + +Applications that have a good reason to use the industrial I/O (IIO) subsystem +from userspace will likely be a good fit for using GPIO lines from userspace as +well. + +Do not under any circumstances abuse the GPIO userspace ABI to cut corners in +any product development projects. If you use it for prototyping, then do not +productify the prototype: rewrite it using proper kernel drivers. Do not under +any circumstances deploy any uniform products using GPIO from userspace. + +The userspace ABI is a character device for each GPIO hardware unit (GPIO chip). +These devices will appear on the system as ``/dev/gpiochip0`` thru +``/dev/gpiochipN``. Examples of how to directly use the userspace ABI can be +found in the kernel tree ``tools/gpio`` subdirectory. + +For structured and managed applications, we recommend that you make use of the +libgpiod_ library. This provides helper abstractions, command line utlities +and arbitration for multiple simultaneous consumers on the same GPIO chip. + +.. _libgpiod: https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/libs/libgpiod/libgpiod.git/ diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst index cdeb5825f314..5ed4f57a6bac 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/interconnect.rst @@ -91,3 +91,25 @@ Interconnect consumers are the clients which use the interconnect APIs to get paths between endpoints and set their bandwidth/latency/QoS requirements for these interconnect paths. These interfaces are not currently documented. + +Interconnect debugfs interfaces +------------------------------- + +Like several other subsystems interconnect will create some files for debugging +and introspection. Files in debugfs are not considered ABI so application +software shouldn't rely on format details change between kernel versions. + +``/sys/kernel/debug/interconnect/interconnect_summary``: + +Show all interconnect nodes in the system with their aggregated bandwidth +request. Indented under each node show bandwidth requests from each device. + +``/sys/kernel/debug/interconnect/interconnect_graph``: + +Show the interconnect graph in the graphviz dot format. It shows all +interconnect nodes and links in the system and groups together nodes from the +same provider as subgraphs. The format is human-readable and can also be piped +through dot to generate diagrams in many graphical formats:: + + $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/interconnect/interconnect_graph | \ + dot -Tsvg > interconnect_graph.svg diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/cpu-idle-cooling.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/cpu-idle-cooling.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e4f0859486c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/cpu-idle-cooling.rst @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + +Situation: +---------- + +Under certain circumstances a SoC can reach a critical temperature +limit and is unable to stabilize the temperature around a temperature +control. When the SoC has to stabilize the temperature, the kernel can +act on a cooling device to mitigate the dissipated power. When the +critical temperature is reached, a decision must be taken to reduce +the temperature, that, in turn impacts performance. + +Another situation is when the silicon temperature continues to +increase even after the dynamic leakage is reduced to its minimum by +clock gating the component. This runaway phenomenon can continue due +to the static leakage. The only solution is to power down the +component, thus dropping the dynamic and static leakage that will +allow the component to cool down. + +Last but not least, the system can ask for a specific power budget but +because of the OPP density, we can only choose an OPP with a power +budget lower than the requested one and under-utilize the CPU, thus +losing performance. In other words, one OPP under-utilizes the CPU +with a power less than the requested power budget and the next OPP +exceeds the power budget. An intermediate OPP could have been used if +it were present. + +Solutions: +---------- + +If we can remove the static and the dynamic leakage for a specific +duration in a controlled period, the SoC temperature will +decrease. Acting on the idle state duration or the idle cycle +injection period, we can mitigate the temperature by modulating the +power budget. + +The Operating Performance Point (OPP) density has a great influence on +the control precision of cpufreq, however different vendors have a +plethora of OPP density, and some have large power gap between OPPs, +that will result in loss of performance during thermal control and +loss of power in other scenarios. + +At a specific OPP, we can assume that injecting idle cycle on all CPUs +belong to the same cluster, with a duration greater than the cluster +idle state target residency, we lead to dropping the static and the +dynamic leakage for this period (modulo the energy needed to enter +this state). So the sustainable power with idle cycles has a linear +relation with the OPP’s sustainable power and can be computed with a +coefficient similar to: + + Power(IdleCycle) = Coef x Power(OPP) + +Idle Injection: +--------------- + +The base concept of the idle injection is to force the CPU to go to an +idle state for a specified time each control cycle, it provides +another way to control CPU power and heat in addition to +cpufreq. Ideally, if all CPUs belonging to the same cluster, inject +their idle cycles synchronously, the cluster can reach its power down +state with a minimum power consumption and reduce the static leakage +to almost zero. However, these idle cycles injection will add extra +latencies as the CPUs will have to wakeup from a deep sleep state. + +We use a fixed duration of idle injection that gives an acceptable +performance penalty and a fixed latency. Mitigation can be increased +or decreased by modulating the duty cycle of the idle injection. + + ^ + | + | + |------- ------- + |_______|_______________________|_______|___________ + + <------> + idle <----------------------> + running + + <-----------------------------> + duty cycle 25% + + +The implementation of the cooling device bases the number of states on +the duty cycle percentage. When no mitigation is happening the cooling +device state is zero, meaning the duty cycle is 0%. + +When the mitigation begins, depending on the governor's policy, a +starting state is selected. With a fixed idle duration and the duty +cycle (aka the cooling device state), the running duration can be +computed. + +The governor will change the cooling device state thus the duty cycle +and this variation will modulate the cooling effect. + + ^ + | + | + |------- ------- + |_______|_______________|_______|___________ + + <------> + idle <--------------> + running + + <-----------------------------> + duty cycle 33% + + + ^ + | + | + |------- ------- + |_______|_______|_______|___________ + + <------> + idle <------> + running + + <-------------> + duty cycle 50% + +The idle injection duration value must comply with the constraints: + +- It is less than or equal to the latency we tolerate when the + mitigation begins. It is platform dependent and will depend on the + user experience, reactivity vs performance trade off we want. This + value should be specified. + +- It is greater than the idle state’s target residency we want to go + for thermal mitigation, otherwise we end up consuming more energy. + +Power considerations +-------------------- + +When we reach the thermal trip point, we have to sustain a specified +power for a specific temperature but at this time we consume: + + Power = Capacitance x Voltage^2 x Frequency x Utilisation + +... which is more than the sustainable power (or there is something +wrong in the system setup). The ‘Capacitance’ and ‘Utilisation’ are a +fixed value, ‘Voltage’ and the ‘Frequency’ are fixed artificially +because we don’t want to change the OPP. We can group the +‘Capacitance’ and the ‘Utilisation’ into a single term which is the +‘Dynamic Power Coefficient (Cdyn)’ Simplifying the above, we have: + + Pdyn = Cdyn x Voltage^2 x Frequency + +The power allocator governor will ask us somehow to reduce our power +in order to target the sustainable power defined in the device +tree. So with the idle injection mechanism, we want an average power +(Ptarget) resulting in an amount of time running at full power on a +specific OPP and idle another amount of time. That could be put in a +equation: + + P(opp)target = ((Trunning x (P(opp)running) + (Tidle x P(opp)idle)) / + (Trunning + Tidle) + ... + + Tidle = Trunning x ((P(opp)running / P(opp)target) - 1) + +At this point if we know the running period for the CPU, that gives us +the idle injection we need. Alternatively if we have the idle +injection duration, we can compute the running duration with: + + Trunning = Tidle / ((P(opp)running / P(opp)target) - 1) + +Practically, if the running power is less than the targeted power, we +end up with a negative time value, so obviously the equation usage is +bound to a power reduction, hence a higher OPP is needed to have the +running power greater than the targeted power. + +However, in this demonstration we ignore three aspects: + + * The static leakage is not defined here, we can introduce it in the + equation but assuming it will be zero most of the time as it is + difficult to get the values from the SoC vendors + + * The idle state wake up latency (or entry + exit latency) is not + taken into account, it must be added in the equation in order to + rigorously compute the idle injection + + * The injected idle duration must be greater than the idle state + target residency, otherwise we end up consuming more energy and + potentially invert the mitigation effect + +So the final equation is: + + Trunning = (Tidle - Twakeup ) x + (((P(opp)dyn + P(opp)static ) - P(opp)target) / P(opp)target ) diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst index 5bd556566c70..764df4ab584d 100644 --- a/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst +++ b/Documentation/driver-api/thermal/exynos_thermal.rst @@ -4,7 +4,7 @@ Kernel driver exynos_tmu Supported chips: -* ARM SAMSUNG EXYNOS4, EXYNOS5 series of SoC +* ARM Samsung Exynos4, Exynos5 series of SoC Datasheet: Not publicly available @@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Authors: Amit Daniel <amit.daniel@samsung.com> TMU controller Description: --------------------------- -This driver allows to read temperature inside SAMSUNG EXYNOS4/5 series of SoC. +This driver allows to read temperature inside Samsung Exynos4/5 series of SoC. The chip only exposes the measured 8-bit temperature code value through a register. @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ The three equations are: Trimming info for 85 degree Celsius (stored at TRIMINFO register) Temperature code measured at 85 degree Celsius which is unchanged -TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in EXYNOS4/5 generates interrupt +TMU(Thermal Management Unit) in Exynos4/5 generates interrupt when temperature exceeds pre-defined levels. The maximum number of configurable threshold is five. The threshold levels are defined as follows:: @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ TMU driver description: The exynos thermal driver is structured as:: Kernel Core thermal framework - (thermal_core.c, step_wise.c, cpu_cooling.c) + (thermal_core.c, step_wise.c, cpufreq_cooling.c) ^ | | diff --git a/Documentation/features/debug/gcov-profile-all/arch-support.txt b/Documentation/features/debug/gcov-profile-all/arch-support.txt index 059d58a549c7..6fb2b0671994 100644 --- a/Documentation/features/debug/gcov-profile-all/arch-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/features/debug/gcov-profile-all/arch-support.txt @@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ | openrisc: | TODO | | parisc: | TODO | | powerpc: | ok | - | riscv: | TODO | + | riscv: | ok | | s390: | ok | | sh: | ok | | sparc: | TODO | diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt index 5949766353f7..0baa8e8c1fc1 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/adfs.txt @@ -1,3 +1,27 @@ +Filesystems supported by ADFS +----------------------------- + +The ADFS module supports the following Filecore formats which have: + +- new maps +- new directories or big directories + +In terms of the named formats, this means we support: + +- E and E+, with or without boot block +- F and F+ + +We fully support reading files from these filesystems, and writing to +existing files within their existing allocation. Essentially, we do +not support changing any of the filesystem metadata. + +This is intended to support loopback mounted Linux native filesystems +on a RISC OS Filecore filesystem, but will allow the data within files +to be changed. + +If write support (ADFS_FS_RW) is configured, we allow rudimentary +directory updates, specifically updating the access mode and timestamp. + Mount options for ADFS ---------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt index b0afd3d55eaf..7d9f82607562 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/automount-support.txt @@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ also be requested by userspace. IN-KERNEL AUTOMOUNTING ====================== -See section "Mount Traps" of Documentation/filesystems/autofs.txt +See section "Mount Traps" of Documentation/filesystems/autofs.rst Then from userspace, you can just do something like: diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst index 68c2bc8275cf..01e909245fcd 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/fscrypt.rst @@ -234,8 +234,8 @@ HKDF is more flexible, is nonreversible, and evenly distributes entropy from the master key. HKDF is also standardized and widely used by other software, whereas the AES-128-ECB based KDF is ad-hoc. -Per-file keys -------------- +Per-file encryption keys +------------------------ Since each master key can protect many files, it is necessary to "tweak" the encryption of each file so that the same plaintext in two @@ -268,9 +268,9 @@ is greater than that of an AES-256-XTS key. Therefore, to improve performance and save memory, for Adiantum a "direct key" configuration is supported. When the user has enabled this by setting FSCRYPT_POLICY_FLAG_DIRECT_KEY in the fscrypt policy, -per-file keys are not used. Instead, whenever any data (contents or -filenames) is encrypted, the file's 16-byte nonce is included in the -IV. Moreover: +per-file encryption keys are not used. Instead, whenever any data +(contents or filenames) is encrypted, the file's 16-byte nonce is +included in the IV. Moreover: - For v1 encryption policies, the encryption is done directly with the master key. Because of this, users **must not** use the same master @@ -302,6 +302,16 @@ For master keys used for v2 encryption policies, a unique 16-byte "key identifier" is also derived using the KDF. This value is stored in the clear, since it is needed to reliably identify the key itself. +Dirhash keys +------------ + +For directories that are indexed using a secret-keyed dirhash over the +plaintext filenames, the KDF is also used to derive a 128-bit +SipHash-2-4 key per directory in order to hash filenames. This works +just like deriving a per-file encryption key, except that a different +KDF context is used. Currently, only casefolded ("case-insensitive") +encrypted directories use this style of hashing. + Encryption modes and usage ========================== @@ -325,11 +335,11 @@ used. Adiantum is a (primarily) stream cipher-based mode that is fast even on CPUs without dedicated crypto instructions. It's also a true wide-block mode, unlike XTS. It can also eliminate the need to derive -per-file keys. However, it depends on the security of two primitives, -XChaCha12 and AES-256, rather than just one. See the paper -"Adiantum: length-preserving encryption for entry-level processors" -(https://eprint.iacr.org/2018/720.pdf) for more details. To use -Adiantum, CONFIG_CRYPTO_ADIANTUM must be enabled. Also, fast +per-file encryption keys. However, it depends on the security of two +primitives, XChaCha12 and AES-256, rather than just one. See the +paper "Adiantum: length-preserving encryption for entry-level +processors" (https://eprint.iacr.org/2018/720.pdf) for more details. +To use Adiantum, CONFIG_CRYPTO_ADIANTUM must be enabled. Also, fast implementations of ChaCha and NHPoly1305 should be enabled, e.g. CONFIG_CRYPTO_CHACHA20_NEON and CONFIG_CRYPTO_NHPOLY1305_NEON for ARM. @@ -513,7 +523,9 @@ FS_IOC_SET_ENCRYPTION_POLICY can fail with the following errors: - ``EEXIST``: the file is already encrypted with an encryption policy different from the one specified - ``EINVAL``: an invalid encryption policy was specified (invalid - version, mode(s), or flags; or reserved bits were set) + version, mode(s), or flags; or reserved bits were set); or a v1 + encryption policy was specified but the directory has the casefold + flag enabled (casefolding is incompatible with v1 policies). - ``ENOKEY``: a v2 encryption policy was specified, but the key with the specified ``master_key_identifier`` has not been added, nor does the process have the CAP_FOWNER capability in the initial user @@ -638,7 +650,8 @@ follows:: struct fscrypt_add_key_arg { struct fscrypt_key_specifier key_spec; __u32 raw_size; - __u32 __reserved[9]; + __u32 key_id; + __u32 __reserved[8]; __u8 raw[]; }; @@ -655,6 +668,12 @@ follows:: } u; }; + struct fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload { + __u32 type; + __u32 __reserved; + __u8 raw[]; + }; + :c:type:`struct fscrypt_add_key_arg` must be zeroed, then initialized as follows: @@ -677,9 +696,26 @@ as follows: ``Documentation/security/keys/core.rst``). - ``raw_size`` must be the size of the ``raw`` key provided, in bytes. + Alternatively, if ``key_id`` is nonzero, this field must be 0, since + in that case the size is implied by the specified Linux keyring key. + +- ``key_id`` is 0 if the raw key is given directly in the ``raw`` + field. Otherwise ``key_id`` is the ID of a Linux keyring key of + type "fscrypt-provisioning" whose payload is a :c:type:`struct + fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload` whose ``raw`` field contains the + raw key and whose ``type`` field matches ``key_spec.type``. Since + ``raw`` is variable-length, the total size of this key's payload + must be ``sizeof(struct fscrypt_provisioning_key_payload)`` plus the + raw key size. The process must have Search permission on this key. + + Most users should leave this 0 and specify the raw key directly. + The support for specifying a Linux keyring key is intended mainly to + allow re-adding keys after a filesystem is unmounted and re-mounted, + without having to store the raw keys in userspace memory. - ``raw`` is a variable-length field which must contain the actual - key, ``raw_size`` bytes long. + key, ``raw_size`` bytes long. Alternatively, if ``key_id`` is + nonzero, then this field is unused. For v2 policy keys, the kernel keeps track of which user (identified by effective user ID) added the key, and only allows the key to be @@ -701,11 +737,16 @@ FS_IOC_ADD_ENCRYPTION_KEY can fail with the following errors: - ``EACCES``: FSCRYPT_KEY_SPEC_TYPE_DESCRIPTOR was specified, but the caller does not have the CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability in the initial - user namespace + user namespace; or the raw key was specified by Linux key ID but the + process lacks Search permission on the key. - ``EDQUOT``: the key quota for this user would be exceeded by adding the key - ``EINVAL``: invalid key size or key specifier type, or reserved bits were set +- ``EKEYREJECTED``: the raw key was specified by Linux key ID, but the + key has the wrong type +- ``ENOKEY``: the raw key was specified by Linux key ID, but no key + exists with that ID - ``ENOTTY``: this type of filesystem does not implement encryption - ``EOPNOTSUPP``: the kernel was not configured with encryption support for this filesystem, or the filesystem superblock has not @@ -1108,8 +1149,8 @@ The context structs contain the same information as the corresponding policy structs (see `Setting an encryption policy`_), except that the context structs also contain a nonce. The nonce is randomly generated by the kernel and is used as KDF input or as a tweak to cause -different files to be encrypted differently; see `Per-file keys`_ and -`DIRECT_KEY policies`_. +different files to be encrypted differently; see `Per-file encryption +keys`_ and `DIRECT_KEY policies`_. Data path changes ----------------- @@ -1161,7 +1202,7 @@ filesystem-specific hash(es) needed for directory lookups. This allows the filesystem to still, with a high degree of confidence, map the filename given in ->lookup() back to a particular directory entry that was previously listed by readdir(). See :c:type:`struct -fscrypt_digested_name` in the source for more details. +fscrypt_nokey_name` in the source for more details. Note that the precise way that filenames are presented to userspace without the key is subject to change in the future. It is only meant diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst index ad6315a48d14..824a3ecbb0ca 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/index.rst @@ -47,4 +47,6 @@ Documentation for filesystem implementations. :maxdepth: 2 autofs + overlayfs virtiofs + vfat diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs-rdma.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs-rdma.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 22dc0dd6889c..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfs-rdma.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,274 +0,0 @@ -################################################################################ -# # -# NFS/RDMA README # -# # -################################################################################ - - Author: NetApp and Open Grid Computing - Date: May 29, 2008 - -Table of Contents -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - Overview - - Getting Help - - Installation - - Check RDMA and NFS Setup - - NFS/RDMA Setup - -Overview -~~~~~~~~ - - This document describes how to install and setup the Linux NFS/RDMA client - and server software. - - The NFS/RDMA client was first included in Linux 2.6.24. The NFS/RDMA server - was first included in the following release, Linux 2.6.25. - - In our testing, we have obtained excellent performance results (full 10Gbit - wire bandwidth at minimal client CPU) under many workloads. The code passes - the full Connectathon test suite and operates over both Infiniband and iWARP - RDMA adapters. - -Getting Help -~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - If you get stuck, you can ask questions on the - - nfs-rdma-devel@lists.sourceforge.net - - mailing list. - -Installation -~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - These instructions are a step by step guide to building a machine for - use with NFS/RDMA. - - - Install an RDMA device - - Any device supported by the drivers in drivers/infiniband/hw is acceptable. - - Testing has been performed using several Mellanox-based IB cards, the - Ammasso AMS1100 iWARP adapter, and the Chelsio cxgb3 iWARP adapter. - - - Install a Linux distribution and tools - - The first kernel release to contain both the NFS/RDMA client and server was - Linux 2.6.25 Therefore, a distribution compatible with this and subsequent - Linux kernel release should be installed. - - The procedures described in this document have been tested with - distributions from Red Hat's Fedora Project (http://fedora.redhat.com/). - - - Install nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater on the client - - An NFS/RDMA mount point can be obtained by using the mount.nfs command in - nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater (nfs-utils-1.1.1 was the first nfs-utils - version with support for NFS/RDMA mounts, but for various reasons we - recommend using nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater). To see which version of - mount.nfs you are using, type: - - $ /sbin/mount.nfs -V - - If the version is less than 1.1.2 or the command does not exist, - you should install the latest version of nfs-utils. - - Download the latest package from: - - http://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/nfs - - Uncompress the package and follow the installation instructions. - - If you will not need the idmapper and gssd executables (you do not need - these to create an NFS/RDMA enabled mount command), the installation - process can be simplified by disabling these features when running - configure: - - $ ./configure --disable-gss --disable-nfsv4 - - To build nfs-utils you will need the tcp_wrappers package installed. For - more information on this see the package's README and INSTALL files. - - After building the nfs-utils package, there will be a mount.nfs binary in - the utils/mount directory. This binary can be used to initiate NFS v2, v3, - or v4 mounts. To initiate a v4 mount, the binary must be called - mount.nfs4. The standard technique is to create a symlink called - mount.nfs4 to mount.nfs. - - This mount.nfs binary should be installed at /sbin/mount.nfs as follows: - - $ sudo cp utils/mount/mount.nfs /sbin/mount.nfs - - In this location, mount.nfs will be invoked automatically for NFS mounts - by the system mount command. - - NOTE: mount.nfs and therefore nfs-utils-1.1.2 or greater is only needed - on the NFS client machine. You do not need this specific version of - nfs-utils on the server. Furthermore, only the mount.nfs command from - nfs-utils-1.1.2 is needed on the client. - - - Install a Linux kernel with NFS/RDMA - - The NFS/RDMA client and server are both included in the mainline Linux - kernel version 2.6.25 and later. This and other versions of the Linux - kernel can be found at: - - https://www.kernel.org/pub/linux/kernel/ - - Download the sources and place them in an appropriate location. - - - Configure the RDMA stack - - Make sure your kernel configuration has RDMA support enabled. Under - Device Drivers -> InfiniBand support, update the kernel configuration - to enable InfiniBand support [NOTE: the option name is misleading. Enabling - InfiniBand support is required for all RDMA devices (IB, iWARP, etc.)]. - - Enable the appropriate IB HCA support (mlx4, mthca, ehca, ipath, etc.) or - iWARP adapter support (amso, cxgb3, etc.). - - If you are using InfiniBand, be sure to enable IP-over-InfiniBand support. - - - Configure the NFS client and server - - Your kernel configuration must also have NFS file system support and/or - NFS server support enabled. These and other NFS related configuration - options can be found under File Systems -> Network File Systems. - - - Build, install, reboot - - The NFS/RDMA code will be enabled automatically if NFS and RDMA - are turned on. The NFS/RDMA client and server are configured via the hidden - SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA config option that depends on SUNRPC and INFINIBAND. The - value of SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA will be: - - - N if either SUNRPC or INFINIBAND are N, in this case the NFS/RDMA client - and server will not be built - - M if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are on (M or Y) and at least one is M, - in this case the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built as modules - - Y if both SUNRPC and INFINIBAND are Y, in this case the NFS/RDMA client - and server will be built into the kernel - - Therefore, if you have followed the steps above and turned no NFS and RDMA, - the NFS/RDMA client and server will be built. - - Build a new kernel, install it, boot it. - -Check RDMA and NFS Setup -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - Before configuring the NFS/RDMA software, it is a good idea to test - your new kernel to ensure that the kernel is working correctly. - In particular, it is a good idea to verify that the RDMA stack - is functioning as expected and standard NFS over TCP/IP and/or UDP/IP - is working properly. - - - Check RDMA Setup - - If you built the RDMA components as modules, load them at - this time. For example, if you are using a Mellanox Tavor/Sinai/Arbel - card: - - $ modprobe ib_mthca - $ modprobe ib_ipoib - - If you are using InfiniBand, make sure there is a Subnet Manager (SM) - running on the network. If your IB switch has an embedded SM, you can - use it. Otherwise, you will need to run an SM, such as OpenSM, on one - of your end nodes. - - If an SM is running on your network, you should see the following: - - $ cat /sys/class/infiniband/driverX/ports/1/state - 4: ACTIVE - - where driverX is mthca0, ipath5, ehca3, etc. - - To further test the InfiniBand software stack, use IPoIB (this - assumes you have two IB hosts named host1 and host2): - - host1$ ip link set dev ib0 up - host1$ ip address add dev ib0 a.b.c.x - host2$ ip link set dev ib0 up - host2$ ip address add dev ib0 a.b.c.y - host1$ ping a.b.c.y - host2$ ping a.b.c.x - - For other device types, follow the appropriate procedures. - - - Check NFS Setup - - For the NFS components enabled above (client and/or server), - test their functionality over standard Ethernet using TCP/IP or UDP/IP. - -NFS/RDMA Setup -~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ - - We recommend that you use two machines, one to act as the client and - one to act as the server. - - One time configuration: - - - On the server system, configure the /etc/exports file and - start the NFS/RDMA server. - - Exports entries with the following formats have been tested: - - /vol0 192.168.0.47(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) - /vol0 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(fsid=0,rw,async,insecure,no_root_squash) - - The IP address(es) is(are) the client's IPoIB address for an InfiniBand - HCA or the client's iWARP address(es) for an RNIC. - - NOTE: The "insecure" option must be used because the NFS/RDMA client does - not use a reserved port. - - Each time a machine boots: - - - Load and configure the RDMA drivers - - For InfiniBand using a Mellanox adapter: - - $ modprobe ib_mthca - $ modprobe ib_ipoib - $ ip li set dev ib0 up - $ ip addr add dev ib0 a.b.c.d - - NOTE: use unique addresses for the client and server - - - Start the NFS server - - If the NFS/RDMA server was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in - kernel config), load the RDMA transport module: - - $ modprobe svcrdma - - Regardless of how the server was built (module or built-in), start the - server: - - $ /etc/init.d/nfs start - - or - - $ service nfs start - - Instruct the server to listen on the RDMA transport: - - $ echo rdma 20049 > /proc/fs/nfsd/portlist - - - On the client system - - If the NFS/RDMA client was built as a module (CONFIG_SUNRPC_XPRT_RDMA=m in - kernel config), load the RDMA client module: - - $ modprobe xprtrdma.ko - - Regardless of how the client was built (module or built-in), use this - command to mount the NFS/RDMA server: - - $ mount -o rdma,port=20049 <IPoIB-server-name-or-address>:/<export> /mnt - - To verify that the mount is using RDMA, run "cat /proc/mounts" and check - the "proto" field for the given mount. - - Congratulations! You're using NFS/RDMA! diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst index 434a07b0002b..a3216979298b 100644 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/path-lookup.rst @@ -13,6 +13,7 @@ It has subsequently been updated to reflect changes in the kernel including: - per-directory parallel name lookup. +- ``openat2()`` resolution restriction flags. Introduction to pathname lookup =============================== @@ -235,6 +236,13 @@ renamed. If ``d_lookup`` finds that a rename happened while it unsuccessfully scanned a chain in the hash table, it simply tries again. +``rename_lock`` is also used to detect and defend against potential attacks +against ``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` and ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` when resolving ".." (where +the parent directory is moved outside the root, bypassing the ``path_equal()`` +check). If ``rename_lock`` is updated during the lookup and the path encounters +a "..", a potential attack occurred and ``handle_dots()`` will bail out with +``-EAGAIN``. + inode->i_rwsem ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ @@ -348,6 +356,13 @@ any changes to any mount points while stepping up. This locking is needed to stabilize the link to the mounted-on dentry, which the refcount on the mount itself doesn't ensure. +``mount_lock`` is also used to detect and defend against potential attacks +against ``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` and ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` when resolving ".." (where +the parent directory is moved outside the root, bypassing the ``path_equal()`` +check). If ``mount_lock`` is updated during the lookup and the path encounters +a "..", a potential attack occurred and ``handle_dots()`` will bail out with +``-EAGAIN``. + RCU ~~~ @@ -405,6 +420,10 @@ is requested. Keeping a reference in the ``nameidata`` ensures that only one root is in effect for the entire path walk, even if it races with a ``chroot()`` system call. +It should be noted that in the case of ``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` or +``LOOKUP_BENEATH``, the effective root becomes the directory file descriptor +passed to ``openat2()`` (which exposes these ``LOOKUP_`` flags). + The root is needed when either of two conditions holds: (1) either the pathname or a symbolic link starts with a "'/'", or (2) a "``..``" component is being handled, since "``..``" from the root must always stay @@ -1149,7 +1168,7 @@ so ``NULL`` is returned to indicate that the symlink can be released and the stack frame discarded. The other case involves things in ``/proc`` that look like symlinks but -aren't really:: +aren't really (and are therefore commonly referred to as "magic-links"):: $ ls -l /proc/self/fd/1 lrwx------ 1 neilb neilb 64 Jun 13 10:19 /proc/self/fd/1 -> /dev/pts/4 @@ -1286,7 +1305,9 @@ A few flags A suitable way to wrap up this tour of pathname walking is to list the various flags that can be stored in the ``nameidata`` to guide the lookup process. Many of these are only meaningful on the final -component, others reflect the current state of the pathname lookup. +component, others reflect the current state of the pathname lookup, and some +apply restrictions to all path components encountered in the path lookup. + And then there is ``LOOKUP_EMPTY``, which doesn't fit conceptually with the others. If this is not set, an empty pathname causes an error very early on. If it is set, empty pathnames are not considered to be @@ -1310,13 +1331,48 @@ longer needed. ``LOOKUP_JUMPED`` means that the current dentry was chosen not because it had the right name but for some other reason. This happens when following "``..``", following a symlink to ``/``, crossing a mount point -or accessing a "``/proc/$PID/fd/$FD``" symlink. In this case the -filesystem has not been asked to revalidate the name (with -``d_revalidate()``). In such cases the inode may still need to be -revalidated, so ``d_op->d_weak_revalidate()`` is called if +or accessing a "``/proc/$PID/fd/$FD``" symlink (also known as a "magic +link"). In this case the filesystem has not been asked to revalidate the +name (with ``d_revalidate()``). In such cases the inode may still need +to be revalidated, so ``d_op->d_weak_revalidate()`` is called if ``LOOKUP_JUMPED`` is set when the look completes - which may be at the final component or, when creating, unlinking, or renaming, at the penultimate component. +Resolution-restriction flags +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + +In order to allow userspace to protect itself against certain race conditions +and attack scenarios involving changing path components, a series of flags are +available which apply restrictions to all path components encountered during +path lookup. These flags are exposed through ``openat2()``'s ``resolve`` field. + +``LOOKUP_NO_SYMLINKS`` blocks all symlink traversals (including magic-links). +This is distinctly different from ``LOOKUP_FOLLOW``, because the latter only +relates to restricting the following of trailing symlinks. + +``LOOKUP_NO_MAGICLINKS`` blocks all magic-link traversals. Filesystems must +ensure that they return errors from ``nd_jump_link()``, because that is how +``LOOKUP_NO_MAGICLINKS`` and other magic-link restrictions are implemented. + +``LOOKUP_NO_XDEV`` blocks all ``vfsmount`` traversals (this includes both +bind-mounts and ordinary mounts). Note that the ``vfsmount`` which contains the +lookup is determined by the first mountpoint the path lookup reaches -- +absolute paths start with the ``vfsmount`` of ``/``, and relative paths start +with the ``dfd``'s ``vfsmount``. Magic-links are only permitted if the +``vfsmount`` of the path is unchanged. + +``LOOKUP_BENEATH`` blocks any path components which resolve outside the +starting point of the resolution. This is done by blocking ``nd_jump_root()`` +as well as blocking ".." if it would jump outside the starting point. +``rename_lock`` and ``mount_lock`` are used to detect attacks against the +resolution of "..". Magic-links are also blocked. + +``LOOKUP_IN_ROOT`` resolves all path components as though the starting point +were the filesystem root. ``nd_jump_root()`` brings the resolution back to to +the starting point, and ".." at the starting point will act as a no-op. As with +``LOOKUP_BENEATH``, ``rename_lock`` and ``mount_lock`` are used to detect +attacks against ".." resolution. Magic-links are also blocked. + Final-component flags ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..e85d74e91295 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.rst @@ -0,0 +1,387 @@ +==== +VFAT +==== + +USING VFAT +========== + +To use the vfat filesystem, use the filesystem type 'vfat'. i.e.:: + + mount -t vfat /dev/fd0 /mnt + + +No special partition formatter is required, +'mkdosfs' will work fine if you want to format from within Linux. + +VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS +================== + +**uid=###** + Set the owner of all files on this filesystem. + The default is the uid of current process. + +**gid=###** + Set the group of all files on this filesystem. + The default is the gid of current process. + +**umask=###** + The permission mask (for files and directories, see *umask(1)*). + The default is the umask of current process. + +**dmask=###** + The permission mask for the directory. + The default is the umask of current process. + +**fmask=###** + The permission mask for files. + The default is the umask of current process. + +**allow_utime=###** + This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime. + + **-20**: If current process is in group of file's group ID, + you can change timestamp. + + **-2**: Other users can change timestamp. + + The default is set from dmask option. If the directory is + writable, utime(2) is also allowed. i.e. ~dmask & 022. + + Normally utime(2) checks current process is owner of + the file, or it has CAP_FOWNER capability. But FAT + filesystem doesn't have uid/gid on disk, so normal + check is too unflexible. With this option you can + relax it. + +**codepage=###** + Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname + characters on FAT filesystem. + By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used. + +**iocharset=<name>** + Character set to use for converting between the + encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit + Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk + in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't + know how to deal with Unicode. + By default, FAT_DEFAULT_IOCHARSET setting is used. + + There is also an option of doing UTF-8 translations + with the utf8 option. + +.. note:: ``iocharset=utf8`` is not recommended. If unsure, you should consider + the utf8 option instead. + +**utf8=<bool>** + UTF-8 is the filesystem safe version of Unicode that + is used by the console. It can be enabled or disabled + for the filesystem with this option. + If 'uni_xlate' gets set, UTF-8 gets disabled. + By default, FAT_DEFAULT_UTF8 setting is used. + +**uni_xlate=<bool>** + Translate unhandled Unicode characters to special + escaped sequences. This would let you backup and + restore filenames that are created with any Unicode + characters. Until Linux supports Unicode for real, + this gives you an alternative. Without this option, + a '?' is used when no translation is possible. The + escape character is ':' because it is otherwise + illegal on the vfat filesystem. The escape sequence + that gets used is ':' and the four digits of hexadecimal + unicode. + +**nonumtail=<bool>** + When creating 8.3 aliases, normally the alias will + end in '~1' or tilde followed by some number. If this + option is set, then if the filename is + "longfilename.txt" and "longfile.txt" does not + currently exist in the directory, longfile.txt will + be the short alias instead of longfi~1.txt. + +**usefree** + Use the "free clusters" value stored on FSINFO. It will + be used to determine number of free clusters without + scanning disk. But it's not used by default, because + recent Windows don't update it correctly in some + case. If you are sure the "free clusters" on FSINFO is + correct, by this option you can avoid scanning disk. + +**quiet** + Stops printing certain warning messages. + +**check=s|r|n** + Case sensitivity checking setting. + + **s**: strict, case sensitive + + **r**: relaxed, case insensitive + + **n**: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive + +**nocase** + This was deprecated for vfat. Use ``shortname=win95`` instead. + +**shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed** + Shortname display/create setting. + + **lower**: convert to lowercase for display, + emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. + + **win95**: emulate the Windows 95 rule for display/create. + + **winnt**: emulate the Windows NT rule for display/create. + + **mixed**: emulate the Windows NT rule for display, + emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. + + Default setting is `mixed`. + +**tz=UTC** + Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time. + This option disables the conversion of timestamps + between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC + (which Linux uses internally). This is particularly + useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) + that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of + local time. + +**time_offset=minutes** + Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time + used by FAT to UTC. I.e. <minutes> minutes will be subtracted + from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by + Linux. This is useful when time zone set in ``sys_tz`` is + not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this + option still does not provide correct time stamps in all + cases in presence of DST - time stamps in a different DST + setting will be off by one hour. + +**showexec** + If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be + allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE, + .COM, or .BAT. Not set by default. + +**debug** + Can be set, but unused by the current implementation. + +**sys_immutable** + If set, ATTR_SYS attribute on FAT is handled as + IMMUTABLE flag on Linux. Not set by default. + +**flush** + If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more + early than normal. Not set by default. + +**rodir** + FAT has the ATTR_RO (read-only) attribute. On Windows, + the ATTR_RO of the directory will just be ignored, + and is used only by applications as a flag (e.g. it's set + for the customized folder). + + If you want to use ATTR_RO as read-only flag even for + the directory, set this option. + +**errors=panic|continue|remount-ro** + specify FAT behavior on critical errors: panic, continue + without doing anything or remount the partition in + read-only mode (default behavior). + +**discard** + If set, issues discard/TRIM commands to the block + device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices + and sparse/thinly-provisoned LUNs. + +**nfs=stale_rw|nostale_ro** + Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem + over NFS. + + **stale_rw**: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory + *inodes* by *i_logstart* which is used by the nfs-related code to + improve look-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS is + supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could + result in ESTALE issues. + + **nostale_ro**: This option bases the *inode* number and filehandle + on the on-disk location of a file in the MS-DOS directory entry. + This ensures that ESTALE will not be returned after a file is + evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations + such as rename, create and unlink could cause filehandles that + previously pointed at one file to point at a different file, + potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this + option also mounts the filesystem readonly. + + To maintain backward compatibility, ``'-o nfs'`` is also accepted, + defaulting to "stale_rw". + +**dos1xfloppy <bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false** + If set, use a fallback default BIOS Parameter Block + configuration, determined by backing device size. These static + parameters match defaults assumed by DOS 1.x for 160 kiB, + 180 kiB, 320 kiB, and 360 kiB floppies and floppy images. + + + +LIMITATION +========== + +The fallocated region of file is discarded at umount/evict time +when using fallocate with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE. +So, User should assume that fallocated region can be discarded at +last close if there is memory pressure resulting in eviction of +the inode from the memory. As a result, for any dependency on +the fallocated region, user should make sure to recheck fallocate +after reopening the file. + +TODO +==== +Need to get rid of the raw scanning stuff. Instead, always use +a get next directory entry approach. The only thing left that uses +raw scanning is the directory renaming code. + + +POSSIBLE PROBLEMS +================= + +- vfat_valid_longname does not properly checked reserved names. +- When a volume name is the same as a directory name in the root + directory of the filesystem, the directory name sometimes shows + up as an empty file. +- autoconv option does not work correctly. + + +TEST SUITE +========== +If you plan to make any modifications to the vfat filesystem, please +get the test suite that comes with the vfat distribution at + +`<http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://bmrc.berkeley.edu/people/chaffee/vfat.html>`_ + +This tests quite a few parts of the vfat filesystem and additional +tests for new features or untested features would be appreciated. + +NOTES ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE VFAT FILESYSTEM +============================================= +This documentation was provided by Galen C. Hunt gchunt@cs.rochester.edu and +lightly annotated by Gordon Chaffee. + +This document presents a very rough, technical overview of my +knowledge of the extended FAT file system used in Windows NT 3.5 and +Windows 95. I don't guarantee that any of the following is correct, +but it appears to be so. + +The extended FAT file system is almost identical to the FAT +file system used in DOS versions up to and including *6.223410239847* +:-). The significant change has been the addition of long file names. +These names support up to 255 characters including spaces and lower +case characters as opposed to the traditional 8.3 short names. + +Here is the description of the traditional FAT entry in the current +Windows 95 filesystem:: + + struct directory { // Short 8.3 names + unsigned char name[8]; // file name + unsigned char ext[3]; // file extension + unsigned char attr; // attribute byte + unsigned char lcase; // Case for base and extension + unsigned char ctime_ms; // Creation time, milliseconds + unsigned char ctime[2]; // Creation time + unsigned char cdate[2]; // Creation date + unsigned char adate[2]; // Last access date + unsigned char reserved[2]; // reserved values (ignored) + unsigned char time[2]; // time stamp + unsigned char date[2]; // date stamp + unsigned char start[2]; // starting cluster number + unsigned char size[4]; // size of the file + }; + + +The lcase field specifies if the base and/or the extension of an 8.3 +name should be capitalized. This field does not seem to be used by +Windows 95 but it is used by Windows NT. The case of filenames is not +completely compatible from Windows NT to Windows 95. It is not completely +compatible in the reverse direction, however. Filenames that fit in +the 8.3 namespace and are written on Windows NT to be lowercase will +show up as uppercase on Windows 95. + +.. note:: Note that the ``start`` and ``size`` values are actually little + endian integer values. The descriptions of the fields in this + structure are public knowledge and can be found elsewhere. + +With the extended FAT system, Microsoft has inserted extra +directory entries for any files with extended names. (Any name which +legally fits within the old 8.3 encoding scheme does not have extra +entries.) I call these extra entries slots. Basically, a slot is a +specially formatted directory entry which holds up to 13 characters of +a file's extended name. Think of slots as additional labeling for the +directory entry of the file to which they correspond. Microsoft +prefers to refer to the 8.3 entry for a file as its alias and the +extended slot directory entries as the file name. + +The C structure for a slot directory entry follows:: + + struct slot { // Up to 13 characters of a long name + unsigned char id; // sequence number for slot + unsigned char name0_4[10]; // first 5 characters in name + unsigned char attr; // attribute byte + unsigned char reserved; // always 0 + unsigned char alias_checksum; // checksum for 8.3 alias + unsigned char name5_10[12]; // 6 more characters in name + unsigned char start[2]; // starting cluster number + unsigned char name11_12[4]; // last 2 characters in name + }; + + +If the layout of the slots looks a little odd, it's only +because of Microsoft's efforts to maintain compatibility with old +software. The slots must be disguised to prevent old software from +panicking. To this end, a number of measures are taken: + + 1) The attribute byte for a slot directory entry is always set + to 0x0f. This corresponds to an old directory entry with + attributes of "hidden", "system", "read-only", and "volume + label". Most old software will ignore any directory + entries with the "volume label" bit set. Real volume label + entries don't have the other three bits set. + + 2) The starting cluster is always set to 0, an impossible + value for a DOS file. + +Because the extended FAT system is backward compatible, it is +possible for old software to modify directory entries. Measures must +be taken to ensure the validity of slots. An extended FAT system can +verify that a slot does in fact belong to an 8.3 directory entry by +the following: + + 1) Positioning. Slots for a file always immediately proceed + their corresponding 8.3 directory entry. In addition, each + slot has an id which marks its order in the extended file + name. Here is a very abbreviated view of an 8.3 directory + entry and its corresponding long name slots for the file + "My Big File.Extension which is long":: + + <proceeding files...> + <slot #3, id = 0x43, characters = "h is long"> + <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension whic"> + <slot #1, id = 0x01, characters = "My Big File.E"> + <directory entry, name = "MYBIGFIL.EXT"> + + + .. note:: Note that the slots are stored from last to first. Slots + are numbered from 1 to N. The Nth slot is ``or'ed`` with + 0x40 to mark it as the last one. + + 2) Checksum. Each slot has an alias_checksum value. The + checksum is calculated from the 8.3 name using the + following algorithm:: + + for (sum = i = 0; i < 11; i++) { + sum = (((sum&1)<<7)|((sum&0xfe)>>1)) + name[i] + } + + + 3) If there is free space in the final slot, a Unicode ``NULL (0x0000)`` + is stored after the final character. After that, all unused + characters in the final slot are set to Unicode 0xFFFF. + +Finally, note that the extended name is stored in Unicode. Each Unicode +character takes either two or four bytes, UTF-16LE encoded. diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 91031298beb1..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/filesystems/vfat.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,347 +0,0 @@ -USING VFAT ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -To use the vfat filesystem, use the filesystem type 'vfat'. i.e. - mount -t vfat /dev/fd0 /mnt - -No special partition formatter is required. mkdosfs will work fine -if you want to format from within Linux. - -VFAT MOUNT OPTIONS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -uid=### -- Set the owner of all files on this filesystem. - The default is the uid of current process. - -gid=### -- Set the group of all files on this filesystem. - The default is the gid of current process. - -umask=### -- The permission mask (for files and directories, see umask(1)). - The default is the umask of current process. - -dmask=### -- The permission mask for the directory. - The default is the umask of current process. - -fmask=### -- The permission mask for files. - The default is the umask of current process. - -allow_utime=### -- This option controls the permission check of mtime/atime. - - 20 - If current process is in group of file's group ID, - you can change timestamp. - 2 - Other users can change timestamp. - - The default is set from `dmask' option. (If the directory is - writable, utime(2) is also allowed. I.e. ~dmask & 022) - - Normally utime(2) checks current process is owner of - the file, or it has CAP_FOWNER capability. But FAT - filesystem doesn't have uid/gid on disk, so normal - check is too unflexible. With this option you can - relax it. - -codepage=### -- Sets the codepage number for converting to shortname - characters on FAT filesystem. - By default, FAT_DEFAULT_CODEPAGE setting is used. - -iocharset=<name> -- Character set to use for converting between the - encoding is used for user visible filename and 16 bit - Unicode characters. Long filenames are stored on disk - in Unicode format, but Unix for the most part doesn't - know how to deal with Unicode. - By default, FAT_DEFAULT_IOCHARSET setting is used. - - There is also an option of doing UTF-8 translations - with the utf8 option. - - NOTE: "iocharset=utf8" is not recommended. If unsure, - you should consider the following option instead. - -utf8=<bool> -- UTF-8 is the filesystem safe version of Unicode that - is used by the console. It can be enabled or disabled - for the filesystem with this option. - If 'uni_xlate' gets set, UTF-8 gets disabled. - By default, FAT_DEFAULT_UTF8 setting is used. - -uni_xlate=<bool> -- Translate unhandled Unicode characters to special - escaped sequences. This would let you backup and - restore filenames that are created with any Unicode - characters. Until Linux supports Unicode for real, - this gives you an alternative. Without this option, - a '?' is used when no translation is possible. The - escape character is ':' because it is otherwise - illegal on the vfat filesystem. The escape sequence - that gets used is ':' and the four digits of hexadecimal - unicode. - -nonumtail=<bool> -- When creating 8.3 aliases, normally the alias will - end in '~1' or tilde followed by some number. If this - option is set, then if the filename is - "longfilename.txt" and "longfile.txt" does not - currently exist in the directory, 'longfile.txt' will - be the short alias instead of 'longfi~1.txt'. - -usefree -- Use the "free clusters" value stored on FSINFO. It'll - be used to determine number of free clusters without - scanning disk. But it's not used by default, because - recent Windows don't update it correctly in some - case. If you are sure the "free clusters" on FSINFO is - correct, by this option you can avoid scanning disk. - -quiet -- Stops printing certain warning messages. - -check=s|r|n -- Case sensitivity checking setting. - s: strict, case sensitive - r: relaxed, case insensitive - n: normal, default setting, currently case insensitive - -nocase -- This was deprecated for vfat. Use shortname=win95 instead. - -shortname=lower|win95|winnt|mixed - -- Shortname display/create setting. - lower: convert to lowercase for display, - emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. - win95: emulate the Windows 95 rule for display/create. - winnt: emulate the Windows NT rule for display/create. - mixed: emulate the Windows NT rule for display, - emulate the Windows 95 rule for create. - Default setting is `mixed'. - -tz=UTC -- Interpret timestamps as UTC rather than local time. - This option disables the conversion of timestamps - between local time (as used by Windows on FAT) and UTC - (which Linux uses internally). This is particularly - useful when mounting devices (like digital cameras) - that are set to UTC in order to avoid the pitfalls of - local time. -time_offset=minutes - -- Set offset for conversion of timestamps from local time - used by FAT to UTC. I.e. <minutes> minutes will be subtracted - from each timestamp to convert it to UTC used internally by - Linux. This is useful when time zone set in sys_tz is - not the time zone used by the filesystem. Note that this - option still does not provide correct time stamps in all - cases in presence of DST - time stamps in a different DST - setting will be off by one hour. - -showexec -- If set, the execute permission bits of the file will be - allowed only if the extension part of the name is .EXE, - .COM, or .BAT. Not set by default. - -debug -- Can be set, but unused by the current implementation. - -sys_immutable -- If set, ATTR_SYS attribute on FAT is handled as - IMMUTABLE flag on Linux. Not set by default. - -flush -- If set, the filesystem will try to flush to disk more - early than normal. Not set by default. - -rodir -- FAT has the ATTR_RO (read-only) attribute. On Windows, - the ATTR_RO of the directory will just be ignored, - and is used only by applications as a flag (e.g. it's set - for the customized folder). - - If you want to use ATTR_RO as read-only flag even for - the directory, set this option. - -errors=panic|continue|remount-ro - -- specify FAT behavior on critical errors: panic, continue - without doing anything or remount the partition in - read-only mode (default behavior). - -discard -- If set, issues discard/TRIM commands to the block - device when blocks are freed. This is useful for SSD devices - and sparse/thinly-provisoned LUNs. - -nfs=stale_rw|nostale_ro - Enable this only if you want to export the FAT filesystem - over NFS. - - stale_rw: This option maintains an index (cache) of directory - inodes by i_logstart which is used by the nfs-related code to - improve look-ups. Full file operations (read/write) over NFS is - supported but with cache eviction at NFS server, this could - result in ESTALE issues. - - nostale_ro: This option bases the inode number and filehandle - on the on-disk location of a file in the MS-DOS directory entry. - This ensures that ESTALE will not be returned after a file is - evicted from the inode cache. However, it means that operations - such as rename, create and unlink could cause filehandles that - previously pointed at one file to point at a different file, - potentially causing data corruption. For this reason, this - option also mounts the filesystem readonly. - - To maintain backward compatibility, '-o nfs' is also accepted, - defaulting to stale_rw - -dos1xfloppy -- If set, use a fallback default BIOS Parameter Block - configuration, determined by backing device size. These static - parameters match defaults assumed by DOS 1.x for 160 kiB, - 180 kiB, 320 kiB, and 360 kiB floppies and floppy images. - - -<bool>: 0,1,yes,no,true,false - -LIMITATION ---------------------------------------------------------------------- -* The fallocated region of file is discarded at umount/evict time - when using fallocate with FALLOC_FL_KEEP_SIZE. - So, User should assume that fallocated region can be discarded at - last close if there is memory pressure resulting in eviction of - the inode from the memory. As a result, for any dependency on - the fallocated region, user should make sure to recheck fallocate - after reopening the file. - -TODO ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -* Need to get rid of the raw scanning stuff. Instead, always use - a get next directory entry approach. The only thing left that uses - raw scanning is the directory renaming code. - - -POSSIBLE PROBLEMS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -* vfat_valid_longname does not properly checked reserved names. -* When a volume name is the same as a directory name in the root - directory of the filesystem, the directory name sometimes shows - up as an empty file. -* autoconv option does not work correctly. - -BUG REPORTS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -If you have trouble with the VFAT filesystem, mail bug reports to -chaffee@bmrc.cs.berkeley.edu. Please specify the filename -and the operation that gave you trouble. - -TEST SUITE ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -If you plan to make any modifications to the vfat filesystem, please -get the test suite that comes with the vfat distribution at - - http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://bmrc.berkeley.edu/ - people/chaffee/vfat.html - -This tests quite a few parts of the vfat filesystem and additional -tests for new features or untested features would be appreciated. - -NOTES ON THE STRUCTURE OF THE VFAT FILESYSTEM ----------------------------------------------------------------------- -(This documentation was provided by Galen C. Hunt <gchunt@cs.rochester.edu> - and lightly annotated by Gordon Chaffee). - -This document presents a very rough, technical overview of my -knowledge of the extended FAT file system used in Windows NT 3.5 and -Windows 95. I don't guarantee that any of the following is correct, -but it appears to be so. - -The extended FAT file system is almost identical to the FAT -file system used in DOS versions up to and including 6.223410239847 -:-). The significant change has been the addition of long file names. -These names support up to 255 characters including spaces and lower -case characters as opposed to the traditional 8.3 short names. - -Here is the description of the traditional FAT entry in the current -Windows 95 filesystem: - - struct directory { // Short 8.3 names - unsigned char name[8]; // file name - unsigned char ext[3]; // file extension - unsigned char attr; // attribute byte - unsigned char lcase; // Case for base and extension - unsigned char ctime_ms; // Creation time, milliseconds - unsigned char ctime[2]; // Creation time - unsigned char cdate[2]; // Creation date - unsigned char adate[2]; // Last access date - unsigned char reserved[2]; // reserved values (ignored) - unsigned char time[2]; // time stamp - unsigned char date[2]; // date stamp - unsigned char start[2]; // starting cluster number - unsigned char size[4]; // size of the file - }; - -The lcase field specifies if the base and/or the extension of an 8.3 -name should be capitalized. This field does not seem to be used by -Windows 95 but it is used by Windows NT. The case of filenames is not -completely compatible from Windows NT to Windows 95. It is not completely -compatible in the reverse direction, however. Filenames that fit in -the 8.3 namespace and are written on Windows NT to be lowercase will -show up as uppercase on Windows 95. - -Note that the "start" and "size" values are actually little -endian integer values. The descriptions of the fields in this -structure are public knowledge and can be found elsewhere. - -With the extended FAT system, Microsoft has inserted extra -directory entries for any files with extended names. (Any name which -legally fits within the old 8.3 encoding scheme does not have extra -entries.) I call these extra entries slots. Basically, a slot is a -specially formatted directory entry which holds up to 13 characters of -a file's extended name. Think of slots as additional labeling for the -directory entry of the file to which they correspond. Microsoft -prefers to refer to the 8.3 entry for a file as its alias and the -extended slot directory entries as the file name. - -The C structure for a slot directory entry follows: - - struct slot { // Up to 13 characters of a long name - unsigned char id; // sequence number for slot - unsigned char name0_4[10]; // first 5 characters in name - unsigned char attr; // attribute byte - unsigned char reserved; // always 0 - unsigned char alias_checksum; // checksum for 8.3 alias - unsigned char name5_10[12]; // 6 more characters in name - unsigned char start[2]; // starting cluster number - unsigned char name11_12[4]; // last 2 characters in name - }; - -If the layout of the slots looks a little odd, it's only -because of Microsoft's efforts to maintain compatibility with old -software. The slots must be disguised to prevent old software from -panicking. To this end, a number of measures are taken: - - 1) The attribute byte for a slot directory entry is always set - to 0x0f. This corresponds to an old directory entry with - attributes of "hidden", "system", "read-only", and "volume - label". Most old software will ignore any directory - entries with the "volume label" bit set. Real volume label - entries don't have the other three bits set. - - 2) The starting cluster is always set to 0, an impossible - value for a DOS file. - -Because the extended FAT system is backward compatible, it is -possible for old software to modify directory entries. Measures must -be taken to ensure the validity of slots. An extended FAT system can -verify that a slot does in fact belong to an 8.3 directory entry by -the following: - - 1) Positioning. Slots for a file always immediately proceed - their corresponding 8.3 directory entry. In addition, each - slot has an id which marks its order in the extended file - name. Here is a very abbreviated view of an 8.3 directory - entry and its corresponding long name slots for the file - "My Big File.Extension which is long": - - <proceeding files...> - <slot #3, id = 0x43, characters = "h is long"> - <slot #2, id = 0x02, characters = "xtension whic"> - <slot #1, id = 0x01, characters = "My Big File.E"> - <directory entry, name = "MYBIGFIL.EXT"> - - Note that the slots are stored from last to first. Slots - are numbered from 1 to N. The Nth slot is or'ed with 0x40 - to mark it as the last one. - - 2) Checksum. Each slot has an "alias_checksum" value. The - checksum is calculated from the 8.3 name using the - following algorithm: - - for (sum = i = 0; i < 11; i++) { - sum = (((sum&1)<<7)|((sum&0xfe)>>1)) + name[i] - } - - 3) If there is free space in the final slot, a Unicode NULL (0x0000) - is stored after the final character. After that, all unused - characters in the final slot are set to Unicode 0xFFFF. - -Finally, note that the extended name is stored in Unicode. Each Unicode -character takes either two or four bytes, UTF-16LE encoded. diff --git a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst index 0a72b6321f5f..c13fee8b02ba 100644 --- a/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst +++ b/Documentation/firmware-guide/acpi/enumeration.rst @@ -71,8 +71,8 @@ DMA support DMA controllers enumerated via ACPI should be registered in the system to provide generic access to their resources. For example, a driver that would like to be accessible to slave devices via generic API call -dma_request_slave_channel() must register itself at the end of the probe -function like this:: +dma_request_chan() must register itself at the end of the probe function like +this:: err = devm_acpi_dma_controller_register(dev, xlate_func, dw); /* Handle the error if it's not a case of !CONFIG_ACPI */ @@ -112,15 +112,15 @@ could look like:: } #endif -dma_request_slave_channel() will call xlate_func() for each registered DMA -controller. In the xlate function the proper channel must be chosen based on +dma_request_chan() will call xlate_func() for each registered DMA controller. +In the xlate function the proper channel must be chosen based on information in struct acpi_dma_spec and the properties of the controller provided by struct acpi_dma. -Clients must call dma_request_slave_channel() with the string parameter that -corresponds to a specific FixedDMA resource. By default "tx" means the first -entry of the FixedDMA resource array, "rx" means the second entry. The table -below shows a layout:: +Clients must call dma_request_chan() with the string parameter that corresponds +to a specific FixedDMA resource. By default "tx" means the first entry of the +FixedDMA resource array, "rx" means the second entry. The table below shows a +layout:: Device (I2C0) { diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/adm1177.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1177.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c81e0b4abd28 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/adm1177.rst @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ +Kernel driver adm1177 +===================== + +Supported chips: + * Analog Devices ADM1177 + Prefix: 'adm1177' + Datasheet: https://www.analog.com/media/en/technical-documentation/data-sheets/ADM1177.pdf + +Author: Beniamin Bia <beniamin.bia@analog.com> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports hardware monitoring for Analog Devices ADM1177 +Hot-Swap Controller and Digital Power Monitors with Soft Start Pin. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices for +details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +The following attributes are supported. Current maxim attribute +is read-write, all other attributes are read-only. + +in0_input Measured voltage in microvolts. + +curr1_input Measured current in microamperes. +curr1_max_alarm Overcurrent alarm in microamperes. diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/drivetemp.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/drivetemp.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2d37d049247f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/drivetemp.rst @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Kernel driver drivetemp +======================= + + +References +---------- + +ANS T13/1699-D +Information technology - AT Attachment 8 - ATA/ATAPI Command Set (ATA8-ACS) + +ANS Project T10/BSR INCITS 513 +Information technology - SCSI Primary Commands - 4 (SPC-4) + +ANS Project INCITS 557 +Information technology - SCSI / ATA Translation - 5 (SAT-5) + + +Description +----------- + +This driver supports reporting the temperature of disk and solid state +drives with temperature sensors. + +If supported, it uses the ATA SCT Command Transport feature to read +the current drive temperature and, if available, temperature limits +as well as historic minimum and maximum temperatures. If SCT Command +Transport is not supported, the driver uses SMART attributes to read +the drive temperature. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +Only the temp1_input attribute is always available. Other attributes are +available only if reported by the drive. All temperatures are reported in +milli-degrees Celsius. + +======================= ===================================================== +temp1_input Current drive temperature +temp1_lcrit Minimum temperature limit. Operating the device below + this temperature may cause physical damage to the + device. +temp1_min Minimum recommended continuous operating limit +temp1_max Maximum recommended continuous operating temperature +temp1_crit Maximum temperature limit. Operating the device above + this temperature may cause physical damage to the + device. +temp1_lowest Minimum temperature seen this power cycle +temp1_highest Maximum temperature seen this power cycle +======================= ===================================================== diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst index 43cc605741ea..b24adb67ddca 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/index.rst @@ -29,6 +29,7 @@ Hardware Monitoring Kernel Drivers adm1025 adm1026 adm1031 + adm1177 adm1275 adm9240 ads7828 @@ -47,6 +48,7 @@ Hardware Monitoring Kernel Drivers da9055 dell-smm-hwmon dme1737 + drivetemp ds1621 ds620 emc1403 @@ -106,8 +108,10 @@ Hardware Monitoring Kernel Drivers max1619 max1668 max197 + max20730 max20751 max31722 + max31730 max31785 max31790 max34440 @@ -177,6 +181,7 @@ Hardware Monitoring Kernel Drivers wm831x wm8350 xgene-hwmon + xdpe12284 zl6100 .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max20730.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/max20730.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cea7ae58c2f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max20730.rst @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-or-later + +Kernel driver max20730 +====================== + +Supported chips: + + * Maxim MAX20730 + + Prefix: 'max20730' + + Addresses scanned: - + + Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX20730.pdf + + * Maxim MAX20734 + + Prefix: 'max20734' + + Addresses scanned: - + + Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX20734.pdf + + * Maxim MAX20743 + + Prefix: 'max20743' + + Addresses scanned: - + + Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX20743.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for Maxim MAX20730, MAX20734, and MAX20743 +Integrated, Step-Down Switching Regulators with PMBus support. + +The driver is a client driver to the core PMBus driver. +Please see Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst for details on PMBus client drivers. + + +Usage Notes +----------- + +This driver does not auto-detect devices. You will have to instantiate the +devices explicitly. Please see Documentation/i2c/instantiating-devices.rst for +details. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +=================== ===== ======================================================= +curr1_crit RW/RO Critical output current. Please see datasheet for + supported limits. Read-only if the chip is + write protected; read-write otherwise. +curr1_crit_alarm RO Output current critical alarm +curr1_input RO Output current +curr1_label RO 'iout1' +in1_alarm RO Input voltage alarm +in1_input RO Input voltage +in1_label RO 'vin' +in2_alarm RO Output voltage alarm +in2_input RO Output voltage +in2_label RO 'vout1' +temp1_crit RW/RO Critical temeperature. Supported values are 130 or 150 + degrees C. Read-only if the chip is write protected; + read-write otherwise. +temp1_crit_alarm RO Temperature critical alarm +temp1_input RO Chip temperature +=================== ===== ======================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/max31730.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/max31730.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..def0de19dbd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/max31730.rst @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ +Kernel driver max31790 +====================== + +Supported chips: + + * Maxim MAX31730 + + Prefix: 'max31730' + + Addresses scanned: 0x1c, 0x1d, 0x1e, 0x1f, 0x4c, 0x4d, 0x4e, 0x4f + + Datasheet: https://datasheets.maximintegrated.com/en/ds/MAX31730.pdf + +Author: Guenter Roeck <linux@roeck-us.net> + + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for Maxim MAX31730. + +The MAX31730 temperature sensor monitors its own temperature and the +temperatures of three external diode-connected transistors. The operating +supply voltage is from 3.0V to 3.6V. Resistance cancellation compensates +for high series resistance in circuit-board traces and the external thermal +diode, while beta compensation corrects for temperature-measurement +errors due to low-beta sensing transistors. + + +Sysfs entries +------------- + +=================== == ======================================================= +temp[1-4]_enable RW Temperature enable/disable + Set to 0 to enable channel, 0 to disable +temp[1-4]_input RO Temperature input +temp[2-4]_fault RO Fault indicator for remote channels +temp[1-4]_max RW Maximum temperature +temp[1-4]_max_alarm RW Maximum temperature alarm +temp[1-4]_min RW Minimum temperature. Common for all channels. + Only temp1_min is writeable. +temp[1-4]_min_alarm RO Minimum temperature alarm +temp[2-4]_offset RW Temperature offset for remote channels +=================== == ======================================================= diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst index abfb9dd4857d..f787984e88a9 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/pmbus.rst @@ -63,6 +63,16 @@ Supported chips: http://www.ti.com/lit/gpn/tps544c25 + * Maxim MAX20796 + + Prefix: 'max20796' + + Addresses scanned: - + + Datasheet: + + Not published + * Generic PMBus devices Prefix: 'pmbus' diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst index 746f21fcb48c..704f0cbd95d3 100644 --- a/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/ucd9000.rst @@ -3,9 +3,10 @@ Kernel driver ucd9000 Supported chips: - * TI UCD90120, UCD90124, UCD90160, UCD9090, and UCD90910 + * TI UCD90120, UCD90124, UCD90160, UCD90320, UCD9090, and UCD90910 - Prefixes: 'ucd90120', 'ucd90124', 'ucd90160', 'ucd9090', 'ucd90910' + Prefixes: 'ucd90120', 'ucd90124', 'ucd90160', 'ucd90320', 'ucd9090', + 'ucd90910' Addresses scanned: - @@ -14,6 +15,7 @@ Supported chips: - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90120.pdf - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90124.pdf - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90160.pdf + - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90320.pdf - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd9090.pdf - http://focus.ti.com/lit/ds/symlink/ucd90910.pdf @@ -45,6 +47,12 @@ power-on reset signals, external interrupts, cascading, or other system functions. Twelve of these pins offer PWM functionality. Using these pins, the UCD90160 offers support for margining, and general-purpose PWM functions. +The UCD90320 is a 32-rail PMBus/I2C addressable power-supply sequencer and +monitor. The 24 integrated ADC channels (AMONx) monitor the power supply +voltage, current, and temperature. Of the 84 GPIO pins, 8 can be used as +digital monitors (DMONx), 32 to enable the power supply (ENx), 24 for margining +(MARx), 16 for logical GPO, and 32 GPIs for cascading, and system function. + The UCD9090 is a 10-rail PMBus/I2C addressable power-supply sequencer and monitor. The device integrates a 12-bit ADC for monitoring up to 10 power-supply voltage inputs. Twenty-three GPIO pins can be used for power supply enables, diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/xdpe12284.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/xdpe12284.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..6b7ae98cc536 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/hwmon/xdpe12284.rst @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +Kernel driver xdpe122 +===================== + +Supported chips: + + * Infineon XDPE12254 + + Prefix: 'xdpe12254' + + * Infineon XDPE12284 + + Prefix: 'xdpe12284' + +Authors: + + Vadim Pasternak <vadimp@mellanox.com> + +Description +----------- + +This driver implements support for Infineon Multi-phase XDPE122 family +dual loop voltage regulators. +The family includes XDPE12284 and XDPE12254 devices. +The devices from this family complaint with: +- Intel VR13 and VR13HC rev 1.3, IMVP8 rev 1.2 and IMPVP9 rev 1.3 DC-DC + converter specification. +- Intel SVID rev 1.9. protocol. +- PMBus rev 1.3 interface. + +Devices support linear format for reading input voltage, input and output current, +input and output power and temperature. +Device supports VID format for reading output voltage. The below modes are +supported: +- VR12.0 mode, 5-mV DAC - 0x01. +- VR12.5 mode, 10-mV DAC - 0x02. +- IMVP9 mode, 5-mV DAC - 0x03. +- AMD mode 6.25mV - 0x10. + +Devices support two pages for telemetry. + +The driver provides for current: input, maximum and critical thresholds +and maximum and critical alarms. Critical thresholds and critical alarm are +supported only for current output. +The driver exports the following attributes for via the sysfs files, where +indexes 1, 2 are for "iin" and 3, 4 for "iout": + +**curr[3-4]_crit** + +**curr[3-4]_crit_alarm** + +**curr[1-4]_input** + +**curr[1-4]_label** + +**curr[1-4]_max** + +**curr[1-4]_max_alarm** + +The driver provides for voltage: input, critical and low critical thresholds +and critical and low critical alarms. +The driver exports the following attributes for via the sysfs files, where +indexes 1, 2 are for "vin" and 3, 4 for "vout": + +**in[1-4]_crit** + +**in[1-4_crit_alarm** + +**in[1-4]_input** + +**in[1-4_label** + +**in[1-4]_lcrit** + +**in[1-41_lcrit_alarm** + +The driver provides for power: input and alarms. Power alarm is supported only +for power input. +The driver exports the following attributes for via the sysfs files, where +indexes 1, 2 are for "pin" and 3, 4 for "pout": + +**power[1-2]_alarm** + +**power[1-4]_input** + +**power[1-4]_label** + +The driver provides for temperature: input, maximum and critical thresholds +and maximum and critical alarms. +The driver exports the following attributes for via the sysfs files: + +**temp[1-2]_crit** + +**temp[1-2]_crit_alarm** + +**temp[1-2]_input** + +**temp[1-2]_max** + +**temp[1-2]_max_alarm** diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/avmb1.rst b/Documentation/isdn/avmb1.rst deleted file mode 100644 index de3961e67553..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/isdn/avmb1.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,246 +0,0 @@ -================================ -Driver for active AVM Controller -================================ - -The driver provides a kernel capi2.0 Interface (kernelcapi) and -on top of this a User-Level-CAPI2.0-interface (capi) -and a driver to connect isdn4linux with CAPI2.0 (capidrv). -The lowlevel interface can be used to implement a CAPI2.0 -also for passive cards since July 1999. - -The author can be reached at calle@calle.in-berlin.de. -The command avmcapictrl is part of the isdn4k-utils. -t4-files can be found at ftp://ftp.avm.de/cardware/b1/linux/firmware - -Currently supported cards: - - - B1 ISA (all versions) - - B1 PCI - - T1/T1B (HEMA card) - - M1 - - M2 - - B1 PCMCIA - -Installing ----------- - -You need at least /dev/capi20 to load the firmware. - -:: - - mknod /dev/capi20 c 68 0 - mknod /dev/capi20.00 c 68 1 - mknod /dev/capi20.01 c 68 2 - . - . - . - mknod /dev/capi20.19 c 68 20 - -Running -------- - -To use the card you need the t4-files to download the firmware. -AVM GmbH provides several t4-files for the different D-channel -protocols (b1.t4 for Euro-ISDN). Install these file in /lib/isdn. - -if you configure as modules load the modules this way:: - - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/capiutil.o - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/b1.o - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/kernelcapi.o - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/capidrv.o - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/capi.o - -if you have an B1-PCI card load the module b1pci.o:: - - insmod /lib/modules/current/misc/b1pci.o - -and load the firmware with:: - - avmcapictrl load /lib/isdn/b1.t4 1 - -if you have an B1-ISA card load the module b1isa.o -and add the card by calling:: - - avmcapictrl add 0x150 15 - -and load the firmware by calling:: - - avmcapictrl load /lib/isdn/b1.t4 1 - -if you have an T1-ISA card load the module t1isa.o -and add the card by calling:: - - avmcapictrl add 0x450 15 T1 0 - -and load the firmware by calling:: - - avmcapictrl load /lib/isdn/t1.t4 1 - -if you have an PCMCIA card (B1/M1/M2) load the module b1pcmcia.o -before you insert the card. - -Leased Lines with B1 --------------------- - -Init card and load firmware. - -For an D64S use "FV: 1" as phone number - -For an D64S2 use "FV: 1" and "FV: 2" for multilink -or "FV: 1,2" to use CAPI channel bundling. - -/proc-Interface ------------------ - -/proc/capi:: - - dr-xr-xr-x 2 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 . - dr-xr-xr-x 82 root root 0 Jun 30 19:08 .. - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 applications - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 applstats - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 capi20 - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 capidrv - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 controller - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 contrstats - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 driver - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 ncci - -r--r--r-- 1 root root 0 Jul 1 14:03 users - -/proc/capi/applications: - applid level3cnt datablkcnt datablklen ncci-cnt recvqueuelen - level3cnt: - capi_register parameter - datablkcnt: - capi_register parameter - ncci-cnt: - current number of nccis (connections) - recvqueuelen: - number of messages on receive queue - - for example:: - - 1 -2 16 2048 1 0 - 2 2 7 2048 1 0 - -/proc/capi/applstats: - applid recvctlmsg nrecvdatamsg nsentctlmsg nsentdatamsg - recvctlmsg: - capi messages received without DATA_B3_IND - recvdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_IND received - sentctlmsg: - capi messages sent without DATA_B3_REQ - sentdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_REQ sent - - for example:: - - 1 2057 1699 1721 1699 - -/proc/capi/capi20: statistics of capi.o (/dev/capi20) - minor nopen nrecvdropmsg nrecvctlmsg nrecvdatamsg sentctlmsg sentdatamsg - minor: - minor device number of capi device - nopen: - number of calls to devices open - nrecvdropmsg: - capi messages dropped (messages in recvqueue in close) - nrecvctlmsg: - capi messages received without DATA_B3_IND - nrecvdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_IND received - nsentctlmsg: - capi messages sent without DATA_B3_REQ - nsentdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_REQ sent - - for example:: - - 1 2 18 0 16 2 - -/proc/capi/capidrv: statistics of capidrv.o (capi messages) - nrecvctlmsg nrecvdatamsg sentctlmsg sentdatamsg - nrecvctlmsg: - capi messages received without DATA_B3_IND - nrecvdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_IND received - nsentctlmsg: - capi messages sent without DATA_B3_REQ - nsentdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_REQ sent - - for example: - 2780 2226 2256 2226 - -/proc/capi/controller: - controller drivername state cardname controllerinfo - - for example:: - - 1 b1pci running b1pci-e000 B1 3.07-01 0xe000 19 - 2 t1isa running t1isa-450 B1 3.07-01 0x450 11 0 - 3 b1pcmcia running m2-150 B1 3.07-01 0x150 5 - -/proc/capi/contrstats: - controller nrecvctlmsg nrecvdatamsg sentctlmsg sentdatamsg - nrecvctlmsg: - capi messages received without DATA_B3_IND - nrecvdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_IND received - nsentctlmsg: - capi messages sent without DATA_B3_REQ - nsentdatamsg: - capi DATA_B3_REQ sent - - for example:: - - 1 2845 2272 2310 2274 - 2 2 0 2 0 - 3 2 0 2 0 - -/proc/capi/driver: - drivername ncontroller - - for example:: - - b1pci 1 - t1isa 1 - b1pcmcia 1 - b1isa 0 - -/proc/capi/ncci: - apllid ncci winsize sendwindow - - for example:: - - 1 0x10101 8 0 - -/proc/capi/users: kernelmodules that use the kernelcapi. - name - - for example:: - - capidrv - capi20 - -Questions ---------- - -Check out the FAQ (ftp.isdn4linux.de) or subscribe to the -linux-avmb1@calle.in-berlin.de mailing list by sending -a mail to majordomo@calle.in-berlin.de with -subscribe linux-avmb1 -in the body. - -German documentation and several scripts can be found at -ftp://ftp.avm.de/cardware/b1/linux/ - -Bugs ----- - -If you find any please let me know. - -Enjoy, - -Carsten Paeth (calle@calle.in-berlin.de) diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/gigaset.rst b/Documentation/isdn/gigaset.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 98b4ec521c51..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/isdn/gigaset.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,465 +0,0 @@ -========================== -GigaSet 307x Device Driver -========================== - -1. Requirements -================= - -1.1. Hardware -------------- - - This driver supports the connection of the Gigaset 307x/417x family of - ISDN DECT bases via Gigaset M101 Data, Gigaset M105 Data or direct USB - connection. The following devices are reported to be compatible: - - Bases: - - Siemens Gigaset 3070/3075 isdn - - Siemens Gigaset 4170/4175 isdn - - Siemens Gigaset SX205/255 - - Siemens Gigaset SX353 - - T-Com Sinus 45 [AB] isdn - - T-Com Sinus 721X[A] [SE] - - Vox Chicago 390 ISDN (KPN Telecom) - - RS232 data boxes: - - Siemens Gigaset M101 Data - - T-Com Sinus 45 Data 1 - - USB data boxes: - - Siemens Gigaset M105 Data - - Siemens Gigaset USB Adapter DECT - - T-Com Sinus 45 Data 2 - - T-Com Sinus 721 data - - Chicago 390 USB (KPN) - - See also http://www.erbze.info/sinus_gigaset.htm - (archived at https://web.archive.org/web/20100717020421/http://www.erbze.info:80/sinus_gigaset.htm ) and - http://gigaset307x.sourceforge.net/ - - We had also reports from users of Gigaset M105 who could use the drivers - with SX 100 and CX 100 ISDN bases (only in unimodem mode, see section 2.5.) - If you have another device that works with our driver, please let us know. - - Chances of getting an USB device to work are good if the output of:: - - lsusb - - at the command line contains one of the following:: - - ID 0681:0001 - ID 0681:0002 - ID 0681:0009 - ID 0681:0021 - ID 0681:0022 - -1.2. Software -------------- - - The driver works with the Kernel CAPI subsystem and can be used with any - software which is able to use CAPI 2.0 for ISDN connections (voice or data). - - There are some user space tools available at - https://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x/ - which provide access to additional device specific functions like SMS, - phonebook or call journal. - - -2. How to use the driver -========================== - -2.1. Modules ------------- - - For the devices to work, the proper kernel modules have to be loaded. - This normally happens automatically when the system detects the USB - device (base, M105) or when the line discipline is attached (M101). It - can also be triggered manually using the modprobe(8) command, for example - for troubleshooting or to pass module parameters. - - The module ser_gigaset provides a serial line discipline N_GIGASET_M101 - which uses the regular serial port driver to access the device, and must - therefore be attached to the serial device to which the M101 is connected. - The ldattach(8) command (included in util-linux-ng release 2.14 or later) - can be used for that purpose, for example:: - - ldattach GIGASET_M101 /dev/ttyS1 - - This will open the device file, attach the line discipline to it, and - then sleep in the background, keeping the device open so that the line - discipline remains active. To deactivate it, kill the daemon, for example - with:: - - killall ldattach - - before disconnecting the device. To have this happen automatically at - system startup/shutdown on an LSB compatible system, create and activate - an appropriate LSB startup script /etc/init.d/gigaset. (The init name - 'gigaset' is officially assigned to this project by LANANA.) - Alternatively, just add the 'ldattach' command line to /etc/rc.local. - - The modules accept the following parameters: - - =============== ========== ========================================== - Module Parameter Meaning - - gigaset debug debug level (see section 3.2.) - - startmode initial operation mode (see section 2.5.): - bas_gigaset ) 1=CAPI (default), 0=Unimodem - ser_gigaset ) - usb_gigaset ) cidmode initial Call-ID mode setting (see section - 2.5.): 1=on (default), 0=off - - =============== ========== ========================================== - - Depending on your distribution you may want to create a separate module - configuration file like /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf for these. - -2.2. Device nodes for user space programs ------------------------------------------ - - The device can be accessed from user space (eg. by the user space tools - mentioned in 1.2.) through the device nodes: - - - /dev/ttyGS0 for M101 (RS232 data boxes) - - /dev/ttyGU0 for M105 (USB data boxes) - - /dev/ttyGB0 for the base driver (direct USB connection) - - If you connect more than one device of a type, they will get consecutive - device nodes, eg. /dev/ttyGU1 for a second M105. - - You can also set a "default device" for the user space tools to use when - no device node is given as parameter, by creating a symlink /dev/ttyG to - one of them, eg.:: - - ln -s /dev/ttyGB0 /dev/ttyG - - The devices accept the following device specific ioctl calls - (defined in gigaset_dev.h): - - ``ioctl(int fd, GIGASET_REDIR, int *cmd);`` - - If cmd==1, the device is set to be controlled exclusively through the - character device node; access from the ISDN subsystem is blocked. - - If cmd==0, the device is set to be used from the ISDN subsystem and does - not communicate through the character device node. - - ``ioctl(int fd, GIGASET_CONFIG, int *cmd);`` - - (ser_gigaset and usb_gigaset only) - - If cmd==1, the device is set to adapter configuration mode where commands - are interpreted by the M10x DECT adapter itself instead of being - forwarded to the base station. In this mode, the device accepts the - commands described in Siemens document "AT-Kommando Alignment M10x Data" - for setting the operation mode, associating with a base station and - querying parameters like field strengh and signal quality. - - Note that there is no ioctl command for leaving adapter configuration - mode and returning to regular operation. In order to leave adapter - configuration mode, write the command ATO to the device. - - ``ioctl(int fd, GIGASET_BRKCHARS, unsigned char brkchars[6]);`` - - (usb_gigaset only) - - Set the break characters on an M105's internal serial adapter to the six - bytes stored in brkchars[]. Unused bytes should be set to zero. - - ioctl(int fd, GIGASET_VERSION, unsigned version[4]); - Retrieve version information from the driver. version[0] must be set to - one of: - - - GIGVER_DRIVER: retrieve driver version - - GIGVER_COMPAT: retrieve interface compatibility version - - GIGVER_FWBASE: retrieve the firmware version of the base - - Upon return, version[] is filled with the requested version information. - -2.3. CAPI ---------- - - The devices will show up as CAPI controllers as soon as the - corresponding driver module is loaded, and can then be used with - CAPI 2.0 kernel and user space applications. For user space access, - the module capi.ko must be loaded. - - Most distributions handle loading and unloading of the various CAPI - modules automatically via the command capiinit(1) from the capi4k-utils - package or a similar mechanism. Note that capiinit(1) cannot unload the - Gigaset drivers because it doesn't support more than one module per - driver. - -2.5. Unimodem mode ------------------- - - In this mode the device works like a modem connected to a serial port - (the /dev/ttyGU0, ... mentioned above) which understands the commands:: - - ATZ init, reset - => OK or ERROR - ATD - ATDT dial - => OK, CONNECT, - BUSY, - NO DIAL TONE, - NO CARRIER, - NO ANSWER - <pause>+++<pause> change to command mode when connected - ATH hangup - - You can use some configuration tool of your distribution to configure this - "modem" or configure pppd/wvdial manually. There are some example ppp - configuration files and chat scripts in the gigaset-VERSION/ppp directory - in the driver packages from https://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x/. - Please note that the USB drivers are not able to change the state of the - control lines. This means you must use "Stupid Mode" if you are using - wvdial or you should use the nocrtscts option of pppd. - You must also assure that the ppp_async module is loaded with the parameter - flag_time=0. You can do this e.g. by adding a line like:: - - options ppp_async flag_time=0 - - to an appropriate module configuration file, like:: - - /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf. - - Unimodem mode is needed for making some devices [e.g. SX100] work which - do not support the regular Gigaset command set. If debug output (see - section 3.2.) shows something like this when dialing:: - - CMD Received: ERROR - Available Params: 0 - Connection State: 0, Response: -1 - gigaset_process_response: resp_code -1 in ConState 0 ! - Timeout occurred - - then switching to unimodem mode may help. - - If you have installed the command line tool gigacontr, you can enter - unimodem mode using:: - - gigacontr --mode unimodem - - You can switch back using:: - - gigacontr --mode isdn - - You can also put the driver directly into Unimodem mode when it's loaded, - by passing the module parameter startmode=0 to the hardware specific - module, e.g.:: - - modprobe usb_gigaset startmode=0 - - or by adding a line like:: - - options usb_gigaset startmode=0 - - to an appropriate module configuration file, like:: - - /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf - -2.6. Call-ID (CID) mode ------------------------ - - Call-IDs are numbers used to tag commands to, and responses from, the - Gigaset base in order to support the simultaneous handling of multiple - ISDN calls. Their use can be enabled ("CID mode") or disabled ("Unimodem - mode"). Without Call-IDs (in Unimodem mode), only a very limited set of - functions is available. It allows outgoing data connections only, but - does not signal incoming calls or other base events. - - DECT cordless data devices (M10x) permanently occupy the cordless - connection to the base while Call-IDs are activated. As the Gigaset - bases only support one DECT data connection at a time, this prevents - other DECT cordless data devices from accessing the base. - - During active operation, the driver switches to the necessary mode - automatically. However, for the reasons above, the mode chosen when - the device is not in use (idle) can be selected by the user. - - - If you want to receive incoming calls, you can use the default - settings (CID mode). - - If you have several DECT data devices (M10x) which you want to use - in turn, select Unimodem mode by passing the parameter "cidmode=0" to - the appropriate driver module (ser_gigaset or usb_gigaset). - - If you want both of these at once, you are out of luck. - - You can also use the tty class parameter "cidmode" of the device to - change its CID mode while the driver is loaded, eg.:: - - echo 0 > /sys/class/tty/ttyGU0/cidmode - -2.7. Dialing Numbers --------------------- -provided by an application for dialing out must - be a public network number according to the local dialing plan, without - any dial prefix for getting an outside line. - - Internal calls can be made by providing an internal extension number - prefixed with ``**`` (two asterisks) as the called party number. So to dial - eg. the first registered DECT handset, give ``**11`` as the called party - number. Dialing ``***`` (three asterisks) calls all extensions - simultaneously (global call). - - Unimodem mode does not support internal calls. - -2.8. Unregistered Wireless Devices (M101/M105) ----------------------------------------------- - - The main purpose of the ser_gigaset and usb_gigaset drivers is to allow - the M101 and M105 wireless devices to be used as ISDN devices for ISDN - connections through a Gigaset base. Therefore they assume that the device - is registered to a DECT base. - - If the M101/M105 device is not registered to a base, initialization of - the device fails, and a corresponding error message is logged by the - driver. In that situation, a restricted set of functions is available - which includes, in particular, those necessary for registering the device - to a base or for switching it between Fixed Part and Portable Part - modes. See the gigacontr(8) manpage for details. - -3. Troubleshooting -==================== - -3.1. Solutions to frequently reported problems ----------------------------------------------- - - Problem: - You have a slow provider and isdn4linux gives up dialing too early. - Solution: - Load the isdn module using the dialtimeout option. You can do this e.g. - by adding a line like:: - - options isdn dialtimeout=15 - - to /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf or a similar file. - - Problem: - The isdnlog program emits error messages or just doesn't work. - Solution: - Isdnlog supports only the HiSax driver. Do not attempt to use it with - other drivers such as Gigaset. - - Problem: - You have two or more DECT data adapters (M101/M105) and only the - first one you turn on works. - Solution: - Select Unimodem mode for all DECT data adapters. (see section 2.5.) - - Problem: - Messages like this:: - - usb_gigaset 3-2:1.0: Could not initialize the device. - - appear in your syslog. - Solution: - Check whether your M10x wireless device is correctly registered to the - Gigaset base. (see section 2.7.) - -3.2. Telling the driver to provide more information ---------------------------------------------------- - Building the driver with the "Gigaset debugging" kernel configuration - option (CONFIG_GIGASET_DEBUG) gives it the ability to produce additional - information useful for debugging. - - You can control the amount of debugging information the driver produces by - writing an appropriate value to /sys/module/gigaset/parameters/debug, - e.g.:: - - echo 0 > /sys/module/gigaset/parameters/debug - - switches off debugging output completely, - - :: - - echo 0x302020 > /sys/module/gigaset/parameters/debug - - enables a reasonable set of debugging output messages. These values are - bit patterns where every bit controls a certain type of debugging output. - See the constants DEBUG_* in the source file gigaset.h for details. - - The initial value can be set using the debug parameter when loading the - module "gigaset", e.g. by adding a line:: - - options gigaset debug=0 - - to your module configuration file, eg. /etc/modprobe.d/gigaset.conf - - Generated debugging information can be found - - as output of the command:: - - dmesg - - - in system log files written by your syslog daemon, usually - in /var/log/, e.g. /var/log/messages. - -3.3. Reporting problems and bugs --------------------------------- - If you can't solve problems with the driver on your own, feel free to - use one of the forums, bug trackers, or mailing lists on - - https://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x - - or write an electronic mail to the maintainers. - - Try to provide as much information as possible, such as - - - distribution - - kernel version (uname -r) - - gcc version (gcc --version) - - hardware architecture (uname -m, ...) - - type and firmware version of your device (base and wireless module, - if any) - - output of "lsusb -v" (if using an USB device) - - error messages - - relevant system log messages (it would help if you activate debug - output as described in 3.2.) - - For help with general configuration problems not specific to our driver, - such as isdn4linux and network configuration issues, please refer to the - appropriate forums and newsgroups. - -3.4. Reporting problem solutions --------------------------------- - If you solved a problem with our drivers, wrote startup scripts for your - distribution, ... feel free to contact us (using one of the places - mentioned in 3.3.). We'd like to add scripts, hints, documentation - to the driver and/or the project web page. - - -4. Links, other software -========================== - - - Sourceforge project developing this driver and associated tools - https://sourceforge.net/projects/gigaset307x - - Yahoo! Group on the Siemens Gigaset family of devices - https://de.groups.yahoo.com/group/Siemens-Gigaset - - Siemens Gigaset/T-Sinus compatibility table - http://www.erbze.info/sinus_gigaset.htm - (archived at https://web.archive.org/web/20100717020421/http://www.erbze.info:80/sinus_gigaset.htm ) - - -5. Credits -============ - - Thanks to - - Karsten Keil - for his help with isdn4linux - Deti Fliegl - for his base driver code - Dennis Dietrich - for his kernel 2.6 patches - Andreas Rummel - for his work and logs to get unimodem mode working - Andreas Degert - for his logs and patches to get cx 100 working - Dietrich Feist - for his generous donation of one M105 and two M101 cordless adapters - Christoph Schweers - for his generous donation of a M34 device - - and all the other people who sent logs and other information. diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/hysdn.rst b/Documentation/isdn/hysdn.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 0a168d1cbffc..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/isdn/hysdn.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,196 +0,0 @@ -============ -Hysdn Driver -============ - -The hysdn driver has been written by -Werner Cornelius (werner@isdn4linux.de or werner@titro.de) -for Hypercope GmbH Aachen Germany. Hypercope agreed to publish this driver -under the GNU General Public License. - -The CAPI 2.0-support was added by Ulrich Albrecht (ualbrecht@hypercope.de) -for Hypercope GmbH Aachen, Germany. - - - This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify - it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by - the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or - (at your option) any later version. - - This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, - but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of - MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the - GNU General Public License for more details. - - You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License - along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software - Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA. - -.. Table of contents - - 1. About the driver - - 2. Loading/Unloading the driver - - 3. Entries in the /proc filesystem - - 4. The /proc/net/hysdn/cardconfX file - - 5. The /proc/net/hysdn/cardlogX file - - 6. Where to get additional info and help - - -1. About the driver -=================== - - The drivers/isdn/hysdn subdir contains a driver for HYPERCOPEs active - PCI isdn cards Champ, Ergo and Metro. To enable support for this cards - enable ISDN support in the kernel config and support for HYSDN cards in - the active cards submenu. The driver may only be compiled and used if - support for loadable modules and the process filesystem have been enabled. - - These cards provide two different interfaces to the kernel. Without the - optional CAPI 2.0 support, they register as ethernet card. IP-routing - to a ISDN-destination is performed on the card itself. All necessary - handlers for various protocols like ppp and others as well as config info - and firmware may be fetched from Hypercopes WWW-Site www.hypercope.de. - - With CAPI 2.0 support enabled, the card can also be used as a CAPI 2.0 - compliant devices with either CAPI 2.0 applications - (check isdn4k-utils) or -using the capidrv module- as a regular - isdn4linux device. This is done via the same mechanism as with the - active AVM cards and in fact uses the same module. - - -2. Loading/Unloading the driver -=============================== - - The module has no command line parameters and auto detects up to 10 cards - in the id-range 0-9. - If a loaded driver shall be unloaded all open files in the /proc/net/hysdn - subdir need to be closed and all ethernet interfaces allocated by this - driver must be shut down. Otherwise the module counter will avoid a module - unload. - - If you are using the CAPI 2.0-interface, make sure to load/modprobe the - kernelcapi-module first. - - If you plan to use the capidrv-link to isdn4linux, make sure to load - capidrv.o after all modules using this driver (i.e. after hysdn and - any avm-specific modules). - -3. Entries in the /proc filesystem -================================== - - When the module has been loaded it adds the directory hysdn in the - /proc/net tree. This directory contains exactly 2 file entries for each - card. One is called cardconfX and the other cardlogX, where X is the - card id number from 0 to 9. - The cards are numbered in the order found in the PCI config data. - -4. The /proc/net/hysdn/cardconfX file -===================================== - - This file may be read to get by everyone to get info about the cards type, - actual state, available features and used resources. - The first 3 entries (id, bus and slot) are PCI info fields, the following - type field gives the information about the cards type: - - - 4 -> Ergo card (server card with 2 b-chans) - - 5 -> Metro card (server card with 4 or 8 b-chans) - - 6 -> Champ card (client card with 2 b-chans) - - The following 3 fields show the hardware assignments for irq, iobase and the - dual ported memory (dp-mem). - - The fields b-chans and fax-chans announce the available card resources of - this types for the user. - - The state variable indicates the actual drivers state for this card with the - following assignments. - - - 0 -> card has not been booted since driver load - - 1 -> card booting is actually in progess - - 2 -> card is in an error state due to a previous boot failure - - 3 -> card is booted and active - - And the last field (device) shows the name of the ethernet device assigned - to this card. Up to the first successful boot this field only shows a - - to tell that no net device has been allocated up to now. Once a net device - has been allocated it remains assigned to this card, even if a card is - rebooted and an boot error occurs. - - Writing to the cardconfX file boots the card or transfers config lines to - the cards firmware. The type of data is automatically detected when the - first data is written. Only root has write access to this file. - The firmware boot files are normally called hyclient.pof for client cards - and hyserver.pof for server cards. - After successfully writing the boot file, complete config files or single - config lines may be copied to this file. - If an error occurs the return value given to the writing process has the - following additional codes (decimal): - - ==== ============================================ - 1000 Another process is currently bootng the card - 1001 Invalid firmware header - 1002 Boards dual-port RAM test failed - 1003 Internal firmware handler error - 1004 Boot image size invalid - 1005 First boot stage (bootstrap loader) failed - 1006 Second boot stage failure - 1007 Timeout waiting for card ready during boot - 1008 Operation only allowed in booted state - 1009 Config line too long - 1010 Invalid channel number - 1011 Timeout sending config data - ==== ============================================ - - Additional info about error reasons may be fetched from the log output. - -5. The /proc/net/hysdn/cardlogX file -==================================== - - The cardlogX file entry may be opened multiple for reading by everyone to - get the cards and drivers log data. Card messages always start with the - keyword LOG. All other lines are output from the driver. - The driver log data may be redirected to the syslog by selecting the - appropriate bitmask. The cards log messages will always be send to this - interface but never to the syslog. - - A root user may write a decimal or hex (with 0x) value t this file to select - desired output options. As mentioned above the cards log dat is always - written to the cardlog file independent of the following options only used - to check and debug the driver itself: - - For example:: - - echo "0x34560078" > /proc/net/hysdn/cardlog0 - - to output the hex log mask 34560078 for card 0. - - The written value is regarded as an unsigned 32-Bit value, bit ored for - desired output. The following bits are already assigned: - - ========== ============================================================ - 0x80000000 All driver log data is alternatively via syslog - 0x00000001 Log memory allocation errors - 0x00000010 Firmware load start and close are logged - 0x00000020 Log firmware record parser - 0x00000040 Log every firmware write actions - 0x00000080 Log all card related boot messages - 0x00000100 Output all config data sent for debugging purposes - 0x00000200 Only non comment config lines are shown wth channel - 0x00000400 Additional conf log output - 0x00001000 Log the asynchronous scheduler actions (config and log) - 0x00100000 Log all open and close actions to /proc/net/hysdn/card files - 0x00200000 Log all actions from /proc file entries - 0x00010000 Log network interface init and deinit - ========== ============================================================ - -6. Where to get additional info and help -======================================== - - If you have any problems concerning the driver or configuration contact - the Hypercope support team (support@hypercope.de) and or the authors - Werner Cornelius (werner@isdn4linux or cornelius@titro.de) or - Ulrich Albrecht (ualbrecht@hypercope.de). diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/index.rst b/Documentation/isdn/index.rst index 407e74b78372..9622939fa526 100644 --- a/Documentation/isdn/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/isdn/index.rst @@ -9,9 +9,6 @@ ISDN interface_capi - avmb1 - gigaset - hysdn m_isdn credits diff --git a/Documentation/isdn/interface_capi.rst b/Documentation/isdn/interface_capi.rst index 01a4b5ade9a4..fe2421444b76 100644 --- a/Documentation/isdn/interface_capi.rst +++ b/Documentation/isdn/interface_capi.rst @@ -26,13 +26,6 @@ This standard is freely available from https://www.capi.org. 2. Driver and Device Registration ================================= -CAPI drivers optionally register themselves with Kernel CAPI by calling the -Kernel CAPI function register_capi_driver() with a pointer to a struct -capi_driver. This structure must be filled with the name and revision of the -driver, and optionally a pointer to a callback function, add_card(). The -registration can be revoked by calling the function unregister_capi_driver() -with a pointer to the same struct capi_driver. - CAPI drivers must register each of the ISDN devices they control with Kernel CAPI by calling the Kernel CAPI function attach_capi_ctr() with a pointer to a struct capi_ctr before they can be used. This structure must be filled with @@ -89,9 +82,6 @@ register_capi_driver(): the name of the driver, as a zero-terminated ASCII string ``char revision[32]`` the revision number of the driver, as a zero-terminated ASCII string -``int (*add_card)(struct capi_driver *driver, capicardparams *data)`` - a callback function pointer (may be NULL) - 4.2 struct capi_ctr ------------------- @@ -178,12 +168,6 @@ to be set by the driver before calling attach_capi_ctr(): pointer to a callback function returning the entry for the device in the CAPI controller info table, /proc/capi/controller -``const struct file_operations *proc_fops`` - pointers to callback functions for the device's proc file - system entry, /proc/capi/controllers/<n>; pointer to the device's - capi_ctr structure is available from struct proc_dir_entry::data - which is available from struct inode. - Note: Callback functions except send_message() are never called in interrupt context. @@ -267,25 +251,10 @@ _cmstruct alternative representation for CAPI parameters of type 'struct' _cmsg structure members. =========== ================================================================= -Functions capi_cmsg2message() and capi_message2cmsg() are provided to convert -messages between their transport encoding described in the CAPI 2.0 standard -and their _cmsg structure representation. Note that capi_cmsg2message() does -not know or check the size of its destination buffer. The caller must make -sure it is big enough to accommodate the resulting CAPI message. - 5. Lower Layer Interface Functions ================================== -(declared in <linux/isdn/capilli.h>) - -:: - - void register_capi_driver(struct capi_driver *drvr) - void unregister_capi_driver(struct capi_driver *drvr) - -register/unregister a driver with Kernel CAPI - :: int attach_capi_ctr(struct capi_ctr *ctrlr) @@ -302,13 +271,6 @@ signal controller ready/not ready :: - void capi_ctr_suspend_output(struct capi_ctr *ctrlr) - void capi_ctr_resume_output(struct capi_ctr *ctrlr) - -signal suspend/resume - -:: - void capi_ctr_handle_message(struct capi_ctr * ctrlr, u16 applid, struct sk_buff *skb) @@ -319,21 +281,6 @@ for forwarding to the specified application 6. Helper Functions and Macros ============================== -Library functions (from <linux/isdn/capilli.h>): - -:: - - void capilib_new_ncci(struct list_head *head, u16 applid, - u32 ncci, u32 winsize) - void capilib_free_ncci(struct list_head *head, u16 applid, u32 ncci) - void capilib_release_appl(struct list_head *head, u16 applid) - void capilib_release(struct list_head *head) - void capilib_data_b3_conf(struct list_head *head, u16 applid, - u32 ncci, u16 msgid) - u16 capilib_data_b3_req(struct list_head *head, u16 applid, - u32 ncci, u16 msgid) - - Macros to extract/set element values from/in a CAPI message header (from <linux/isdn/capiutil.h>): @@ -357,24 +304,6 @@ CAPIMSG_DATALEN(m) CAPIMSG_SETDATALEN(m, len) Data Length (u16) Library functions for working with _cmsg structures (from <linux/isdn/capiutil.h>): -``unsigned capi_cmsg2message(_cmsg *cmsg, u8 *msg)`` - Assembles a CAPI 2.0 message from the parameters in ``*cmsg``, - storing the result in ``*msg``. - -``unsigned capi_message2cmsg(_cmsg *cmsg, u8 *msg)`` - Disassembles the CAPI 2.0 message in ``*msg``, storing the parameters - in ``*cmsg``. - -``unsigned capi_cmsg_header(_cmsg *cmsg, u16 ApplId, u8 Command, u8 Subcommand, u16 Messagenumber, u32 Controller)`` - Fills the header part and address field of the _cmsg structure ``*cmsg`` - with the given values, zeroing the remainder of the structure so only - parameters with non-default values need to be changed before sending - the message. - -``void capi_cmsg_answer(_cmsg *cmsg)`` - Sets the low bit of the Subcommand field in ``*cmsg``, thereby - converting ``_REQ`` to ``_CONF`` and ``_IND`` to ``_RESP``. - ``char *capi_cmd2str(u8 Command, u8 Subcommand)`` Returns the CAPI 2.0 message name corresponding to the given command and subcommand values, as a static ASCII string. The return value may diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.rst b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.rst index 74bef19f69f0..231e6a64957f 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.rst +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/kconfig-language.rst @@ -196,14 +196,11 @@ applicable everywhere (see syntax). or equal to the first symbol and smaller than or equal to the second symbol. -- help text: "help" or "---help---" +- help text: "help" This defines a help text. The end of the help text is determined by the indentation level, this means it ends at the first line which has a smaller indentation than the first line of the help text. - "---help---" and "help" do not differ in behaviour, "---help---" is - used to help visually separate configuration logic from help within - the file as an aid to developers. - misc options: "option" <symbol>[=<value>] diff --git a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.rst b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.rst index b9b50553bfc5..d7e6534a8505 100644 --- a/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.rst +++ b/Documentation/kbuild/makefiles.rst @@ -297,9 +297,19 @@ more details, with real examples. If CONFIG_EXT2_FS is set to either 'y' (built-in) or 'm' (modular) the corresponding obj- variable will be set, and kbuild will descend down in the ext2 directory. - Kbuild only uses this information to decide that it needs to visit - the directory, it is the Makefile in the subdirectory that - specifies what is modular and what is built-in. + + Kbuild uses this information not only to decide that it needs to visit + the directory, but also to decide whether or not to link objects from + the directory into vmlinux. + + When Kbuild descends into the directory with 'y', all built-in objects + from that directory are combined into the built-in.a, which will be + eventually linked into vmlinux. + + When Kbuild descends into the directory with 'm', in contrast, nothing + from that directory will be linked into vmlinux. If the Makefile in + that directory specifies obj-y, those objects will be left orphan. + It is very likely a bug of the Makefile or of dependencies in Kconfig. It is good practice to use a `CONFIG_` variable when assigning directory names. This allows kbuild to totally skip the directory if the diff --git a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst index a3ddb213a5e1..d62aacb2822a 100644 --- a/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst +++ b/Documentation/kernel-hacking/hacking.rst @@ -601,7 +601,7 @@ Defined in ``include/linux/export.h`` This is the variant of `EXPORT_SYMBOL()` that allows specifying a symbol namespace. Symbol Namespaces are documented in -``Documentation/kbuild/namespaces.rst``. +``Documentation/core-api/symbol-namespaces.rst``. :c:func:`EXPORT_SYMBOL_NS_GPL()` -------------------------------- @@ -610,7 +610,7 @@ Defined in ``include/linux/export.h`` This is the variant of `EXPORT_SYMBOL_GPL()` that allows specifying a symbol namespace. Symbol Namespaces are documented in -``Documentation/kbuild/namespaces.rst``. +``Documentation/core-api/symbol-namespaces.rst``. Routines and Conventions ======================== diff --git a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst index e79eeeca3ac6..5bcb99ba7bd9 100644 --- a/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst +++ b/Documentation/locking/locktorture.rst @@ -103,8 +103,7 @@ stat_interval Number of seconds between statistics-related printk()s. By default, locktorture will report stats every 60 seconds. Setting the interval to zero causes the statistics to - be printed -only- when the module is unloaded, and this - is the default. + be printed -only- when the module is unloaded. stutter The length of time to run the test before pausing for this diff --git a/Documentation/maintainer/maintainer-entry-profile.rst b/Documentation/maintainer/maintainer-entry-profile.rst index 3eaddc8ac56d..11ebe3682771 100644 --- a/Documentation/maintainer/maintainer-entry-profile.rst +++ b/Documentation/maintainer/maintainer-entry-profile.rst @@ -99,4 +99,5 @@ to do something different in the near future. .. toctree:: :maxdepth: 1 + ../doc-guide/maintainer-profile ../nvdimm/maintainer-entry-profile diff --git a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/meye.rst b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/meye.rst index a572996cdbf6..dc57a6a91b43 100644 --- a/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/meye.rst +++ b/Documentation/media/v4l-drivers/meye.rst @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ so all video4linux tools (like xawtv) should work with this driver. Besides the video4linux interface, the driver has a private interface for accessing the Motion Eye extended parameters (camera sharpness, -agc, video framerate), the shapshot and the MJPEG capture facilities. +agc, video framerate), the snapshot and the MJPEG capture facilities. This interface consists of several ioctls (prototypes and structures can be found in include/linux/meye.h): diff --git a/Documentation/misc-devices/xilinx_sdfec.rst b/Documentation/misc-devices/xilinx_sdfec.rst index 2245fcfa224d..7a47075c171c 100644 --- a/Documentation/misc-devices/xilinx_sdfec.rst +++ b/Documentation/misc-devices/xilinx_sdfec.rst @@ -1,4 +1,5 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + ==================== Xilinx SD-FEC Driver ==================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst index c1f7f75e5fd9..a191faaf97de 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst @@ -22,9 +22,11 @@ Contents: intel/iavf intel/ice google/gve + marvell/octeontx2 mellanox/mlx5 netronome/nfp pensando/ionic + stmicro/stmmac .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..88f508338c5f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/marvell/octeontx2.rst @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +==================================== +Marvell OcteonTx2 RVU Kernel Drivers +==================================== + +Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd. + +Contents +======== + +- `Overview`_ +- `Drivers`_ +- `Basic packet flow`_ + +Overview +======== + +Resource virtualization unit (RVU) on Marvell's OcteonTX2 SOC maps HW +resources from the network, crypto and other functional blocks into +PCI-compatible physical and virtual functions. Each functional block +again has multiple local functions (LFs) for provisioning to PCI devices. +RVU supports multiple PCIe SRIOV physical functions (PFs) and virtual +functions (VFs). PF0 is called the administrative / admin function (AF) +and has privileges to provision RVU functional block's LFs to each of the +PF/VF. + +RVU managed networking functional blocks + - Network pool or buffer allocator (NPA) + - Network interface controller (NIX) + - Network parser CAM (NPC) + - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) + - Loopback interface (LBK) + +RVU managed non-networking functional blocks + - Crypto accelerator (CPT) + - Scheduled timers unit (TIM) + - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO) + Used for both networking and non networking usecases + +Resource provisioning examples + - A PF/VF with NIX-LF & NPA-LF resources works as a pure network device + - A PF/VF with CPT-LF resource works as a pure crypto offload device. + +RVU functional blocks are highly configurable as per software requirements. + +Firmware setups following stuff before kernel boots + - Enables required number of RVU PFs based on number of physical links. + - Number of VFs per PF are either static or configurable at compile time. + Based on config, firmware assigns VFs to each of the PFs. + - Also assigns MSIX vectors to each of PF and VFs. + - These are not changed after kernel boot. + +Drivers +======= + +Linux kernel will have multiple drivers registering to different PF and VFs +of RVU. Wrt networking there will be 3 flavours of drivers. + +Admin Function driver +--------------------- + +As mentioned above RVU PF0 is called the admin function (AF), this driver +supports resource provisioning and configuration of functional blocks. +Doesn't handle any I/O. It sets up few basic stuff but most of the +funcionality is achieved via configuration requests from PFs and VFs. + +PF/VFs communicates with AF via a shared memory region (mailbox). Upon +receiving requests AF does resource provisioning and other HW configuration. +AF is always attached to host kernel, but PFs and their VFs may be used by host +kernel itself, or attached to VMs or to userspace applications like +DPDK etc. So AF has to handle provisioning/configuration requests sent +by any device from any domain. + +AF driver also interacts with underlying firmware to + - Manage physical ethernet links ie CGX LMACs. + - Retrieve information like speed, duplex, autoneg etc + - Retrieve PHY EEPROM and stats. + - Configure FEC, PAM modes + - etc + +From pure networking side AF driver supports following functionality. + - Map a physical link to a RVU PF to which a netdev is registered. + - Attach NIX and NPA block LFs to RVU PF/VF which provide buffer pools, RQs, SQs + for regular networking functionality. + - Flow control (pause frames) enable/disable/config. + - HW PTP timestamping related config. + - NPC parser profile config, basically how to parse pkt and what info to extract. + - NPC extract profile config, what to extract from the pkt to match data in MCAM entries. + - Manage NPC MCAM entries, upon request can frame and install requested packet forwarding rules. + - Defines receive side scaling (RSS) algorithms. + - Defines segmentation offload algorithms (eg TSO) + - VLAN stripping, capture and insertion config. + - SSO and TIM blocks config which provide packet scheduling support. + - Debugfs support, to check current resource provising, current status of + NPA pools, NIX RQ, SQ and CQs, various stats etc which helps in debugging issues. + - And many more. + +Physical Function driver +------------------------ + +This RVU PF handles IO, is mapped to a physical ethernet link and this +driver registers a netdev. This supports SR-IOV. As said above this driver +communicates with AF with a mailbox. To retrieve information from physical +links this driver talks to AF and AF gets that info from firmware and responds +back ie cannot talk to firmware directly. + +Supports ethtool for configuring links, RSS, queue count, queue size, +flow control, ntuple filters, dump PHY EEPROM, config FEC etc. + +Virtual Function driver +----------------------- + +There are two types VFs, VFs that share the physical link with their parent +SR-IOV PF and the VFs which work in pairs using internal HW loopback channels (LBK). + +Type1: + - These VFs and their parent PF share a physical link and used for outside communication. + - VFs cannot communicate with AF directly, they send mbox message to PF and PF + forwards that to AF. AF after processing, responds back to PF and PF forwards + the reply to VF. + - From functionality point of view there is no difference between PF and VF as same type + HW resources are attached to both. But user would be able to configure few stuff only + from PF as PF is treated as owner/admin of the link. + +Type2: + - RVU PF0 ie admin function creates these VFs and maps them to loopback block's channels. + - A set of two VFs (VF0 & VF1, VF2 & VF3 .. so on) works as a pair ie pkts sent out of + VF0 will be received by VF1 and viceversa. + - These VFs can be used by applications or virtual machines to communicate between them + without sending traffic outside. There is no switch present in HW, hence the support + for loopback VFs. + - These communicate directly with AF (PF0) via mbox. + +Except for the IO channels or links used for packet reception and transmission there is +no other difference between these VF types. AF driver takes care of IO channel mapping, +hence same VF driver works for both types of devices. + +Basic packet flow +================= + +Ingress +------- + +1. CGX LMAC receives packet. +2. Forwards the packet to the NIX block. +3. Then submitted to NPC block for parsing and then MCAM lookup to get the destination RVU device. +4. NIX LF attached to the destination RVU device allocates a buffer from RQ mapped buffer pool of NPA block LF. +5. RQ may be selected by RSS or by configuring MCAM rule with a RQ number. +6. Packet is DMA'ed and driver is notified. + +Egress +------ + +1. Driver prepares a send descriptor and submits to SQ for transmission. +2. The SQ is already configured (by AF) to transmit on a specific link/channel. +3. The SQ descriptor ring is maintained in buffers allocated from SQ mapped pool of NPA block LF. +4. NIX block transmits the pkt on the designated channel. +5. NPC MCAM entries can be installed to divert pkt onto a different channel. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt index 3bfa635bbbd5..cd63556b27a0 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/microsoft/netvsc.txt @@ -82,3 +82,24 @@ Features contain one or more packets. The send buffer is an optimization, the driver will use slower method to handle very large packets or if the send buffer area is exhausted. + + XDP support + ----------- + XDP (eXpress Data Path) is a feature that runs eBPF bytecode at the early + stage when packets arrive at a NIC card. The goal is to increase performance + for packet processing, reducing the overhead of SKB allocation and other + upper network layers. + + hv_netvsc supports XDP in native mode, and transparently sets the XDP + program on the associated VF NIC as well. + + Setting / unsetting XDP program on synthetic NIC (netvsc) propagates to + VF NIC automatically. Setting / unsetting XDP program on VF NIC directly + is not recommended, also not propagated to synthetic NIC, and may be + overwritten by setting of synthetic NIC. + + XDP program cannot run with LRO (RSC) enabled, so you need to disable LRO + before running XDP: + ethtool -K eth0 lro off + + XDP_REDIRECT action is not yet supported. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst index 6c08ac8b5147..ada611fb427c 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/netronome/nfp.rst @@ -131,3 +131,119 @@ abi_drv_reset abi_drv_load_ifc Defines a list of PF devices allowed to load FW on the device. This variable is not currently user configurable. + +Statistics +========== + +Following device statistics are available through the ``ethtool -S`` interface: + +.. flat-table:: NFP device statistics + :header-rows: 1 + :widths: 3 1 11 + + * - Name + - ID + - Meaning + + * - dev_rx_discards + - 1 + - Packet can be discarded on the RX path for one of the following reasons: + + * The NIC is not in promisc mode, and the destination MAC address + doesn't match the interfaces' MAC address. + * The received packet is larger than the max buffer size on the host. + I.e. it exceeds the Layer 3 MRU. + * There is no freelist descriptor available on the host for the packet. + It is likely that the NIC couldn't cache one in time. + * A BPF program discarded the packet. + * The datapath drop action was executed. + * The MAC discarded the packet due to lack of ingress buffer space + on the NIC. + + * - dev_rx_errors + - 2 + - A packet can be counted (and dropped) as RX error for the following + reasons: + + * A problem with the VEB lookup (only when SR-IOV is used). + * A physical layer problem that causes Ethernet errors, like FCS or + alignment errors. The cause is usually faulty cables or SFPs. + + * - dev_rx_bytes + - 3 + - Total number of bytes received. + + * - dev_rx_uc_bytes + - 4 + - Unicast bytes received. + + * - dev_rx_mc_bytes + - 5 + - Multicast bytes received. + + * - dev_rx_bc_bytes + - 6 + - Broadcast bytes received. + + * - dev_rx_pkts + - 7 + - Total number of packets received. + + * - dev_rx_mc_pkts + - 8 + - Multicast packets received. + + * - dev_rx_bc_pkts + - 9 + - Broadcast packets received. + + * - dev_tx_discards + - 10 + - A packet can be discarded in the TX direction if the MAC is + being flow controlled and the NIC runs out of TX queue space. + + * - dev_tx_errors + - 11 + - A packet can be counted as TX error (and dropped) for one for the + following reasons: + + * The packet is an LSO segment, but the Layer 3 or Layer 4 offset + could not be determined. Therefore LSO could not continue. + * An invalid packet descriptor was received over PCIe. + * The packet Layer 3 length exceeds the device MTU. + * An error on the MAC/physical layer. Usually due to faulty cables or + SFPs. + * A CTM buffer could not be allocated. + * The packet offset was incorrect and could not be fixed by the NIC. + + * - dev_tx_bytes + - 12 + - Total number of bytes transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_uc_bytes + - 13 + - Unicast bytes transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_mc_bytes + - 14 + - Multicast bytes transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_bc_bytes + - 15 + - Broadcast bytes transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_pkts + - 16 + - Total number of packets transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_mc_pkts + - 17 + - Multicast packets transmitted. + + * - dev_tx_bc_pkts + - 18 + - Broadcast packets transmitted. + +Note that statistics unknown to the driver will be displayed as +``dev_unknown_stat$ID``, where ``$ID`` refers to the second column +above. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c34bab3d2df0 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.rst @@ -0,0 +1,697 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+ + +============================================================== +Linux Driver for the Synopsys(R) Ethernet Controllers "stmmac" +============================================================== + +Authors: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com>, +Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>, Jose Abreu <joabreu@synopsys.com> + +Contents +======== + +- In This Release +- Feature List +- Kernel Configuration +- Command Line Parameters +- Driver Information and Notes +- Debug Information +- Support + +In This Release +=============== + +This file describes the stmmac Linux Driver for all the Synopsys(R) Ethernet +Controllers. + +Currently, this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC +(i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XILINX XC2V3000 +FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. The Synopsys Ethernet QoS 5.0 IPK +is also supported. + +DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a +(and older) and DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet Quality-of-Service version 4.0 +(and upper) have been used for developing this driver as well as +DesignWare(R) Cores XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC. + +This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI. + +This driver includes support for the following Synopsys(R) DesignWare(R) +Cores Ethernet Controllers and corresponding minimum and maximum versions: + ++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ +| Controller Name | Min. Version | Max. Version | Abbrev. Name | ++===============================+==============+==============+==============+ +| Ethernet MAC Universal | N/A | 3.73a | GMAC | ++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ +| Ethernet Quality-of-Service | 4.00a | N/A | GMAC4+ | ++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ +| XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC | 2.10a | N/A | XGMAC2+ | ++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+ + +For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation +supplied with your Ethernet adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply +to use with Linux. + +Feature List +============ + +The following features are available in this driver: + - GMII/MII/RGMII/SGMII/RMII/XGMII Interface + - Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex Operation + - Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) + - IEEE 802.3x PAUSE Packets (Flow Control) + - RMON/MIB Counters + - IEEE 1588 Timestamping (PTP) + - Pulse-Per-Second Output (PPS) + - MDIO Clause 22 / Clause 45 Interface + - MAC Loopback + - ARP Offloading + - Automatic CRC / PAD Insertion and Checking + - Checksum Offload for Received and Transmitted Packets + - Standard or Jumbo Ethernet Packets + - Source Address Insertion / Replacement + - VLAN TAG Insertion / Replacement / Deletion / Filtering (HASH and PERFECT) + - Programmable TX and RX Watchdog and Coalesce Settings + - Destination Address Filtering (PERFECT) + - HASH Filtering (Multicast) + - Layer 3 / Layer 4 Filtering + - Remote Wake-Up Detection + - Receive Side Scaling (RSS) + - Frame Preemption for TX and RX + - Programmable Burst Length, Threshold, Queue Size + - Multiple Queues (up to 8) + - Multiple Scheduling Algorithms (TX: WRR, DWRR, WFQ, SP, CBS, EST, TBS; + RX: WRR, SP) + - Flexible RX Parser + - TCP / UDP Segmentation Offload (TSO, USO) + - Split Header (SPH) + - Safety Features (ECC Protection, Data Parity Protection) + - Selftests using Ethtool + +Kernel Configuration +==================== + +The kernel configuration option is ``CONFIG_STMMAC_ETH``: + - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM``: is to enable the platform driver. + - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI``: is to enable the pci driver. + +Command Line Parameters +======================= + +If the driver is built as a module the following optional parameters are used +by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this +syntax (e.g. for PCI module):: + + modprobe stmmac_pci [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...] + +Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using:: + + stmmaceth=watchdog:100,chain_mode=1 + +The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting, +unless otherwise noted. + +watchdog +-------- +:Valid Range: 5000-None +:Default Value: 5000 + +This parameter overrides the transmit timeout in milliseconds. + +debug +----- +:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all) +:Default Value: 0 + +This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system +logs. + +phyaddr +------- +:Valid Range: 0-31 +:Default Value: -1 + +This parameter overrides the physical address of the PHY device. + +flow_ctrl +--------- +:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=off,1=rx,2=tx,3=rx/tx) +:Default Value: 3 + +This parameter changes the default Flow Control ability. + +pause +----- +:Valid Range: 0-65535 +:Default Value: 65535 + +This parameter changes the default Flow Control Pause time. + +tc +-- +:Valid Range: 64-256 +:Default Value: 64 + +This parameter changes the default HW FIFO Threshold control value. + +buf_sz +------ +:Valid Range: 1536-16384 +:Default Value: 1536 + +This parameter changes the default RX DMA packet buffer size. + +eee_timer +--------- +:Valid Range: 0-None +:Default Value: 1000 + +This parameter changes the default LPI TX Expiration time in milliseconds. + +chain_mode +---------- +:Valid Range: 0-1 (0=off,1=on) +:Default Value: 0 + +This parameter changes the default mode of operation from Ring Mode to +Chain Mode. + +Driver Information and Notes +============================ + +Transmit Process +---------------- + +The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets +the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine that there is a packet +ready to be transmitted. + +By default, the driver sets the ``NETIF_F_SG`` bit in the features field of +the ``net_device`` structure, enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is +true on chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware. + +Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, timer will be +scheduled to release the transmit resources. + +Receive Process +--------------- + +When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts +are not queued, so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring +during the receive process. + +This is based on NAPI, so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work +to be done, and it exits. Then the poll method will be scheduled at some +future point. + +The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket +buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy). + +Interrupt Mitigation +-------------------- + +The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts using NAPI for +the reception on chips older than the 3.50. New chips have an HW RX Watchdog +used for this mitigation. + +Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool. + +WoL +--- + +Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the +GMAC, GMAC4/5 and XGMAC core. + +DMA Descriptors +--------------- + +Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only +tested on DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC Universal version 3.41a and later. + +stmmac supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) and +linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two data buffer +pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data buffer pointer. +RING mode is the default. + +In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in the +list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, whereas +such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. + +Extended Descriptors +-------------------- + +The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload when +it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. These are not available on +GMAC Synopsys(R) chips older than the 3.50. At probe time the driver will +decide if these can be actually used. This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 +because the extra descriptors are used for saving the hardware timestamps and +Extended Status. + +Ethtool Support +--------------- + +Ethtool is supported. For example, driver statistics (including RMON), +internal errors can be taken using:: + + ethtool -S ethX + +Ethtool selftests are also supported. This allows to do some early sanity +checks to the HW using MAC and PHY loopback mechanisms:: + + ethtool -t ethX + +Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading +--------------------------------- + +Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. The GSO has been also +added but it's performed in software. LRO is not supported. + +TSO Support +----------- + +TSO (TCP Segmentation Offload) feature is supported by GMAC > 4.x and XGMAC +chip family. When a packet is sent through TCP protocol, the TCP stack ensures +that the SKB provided to the low level driver (stmmac in our case) matches +with the maximum frame len (IP header + TCP header + payload <= 1500 bytes +(for MTU set to 1500)). It means that if an application using TCP want to send +a packet which will have a length (after adding headers) > 1514 the packet +will be split in several TCP packets: The data payload is split and headers +(TCP/IP ..) are added. It is done by software. + +When TSO is enabled, the TCP stack doesn't care about the maximum frame length +and provide SKB packet to stmmac as it is. The GMAC IP will have to perform +the segmentation by it self to match with maximum frame length. + +This feature can be enabled in device tree through ``snps,tso`` entry. + +Energy Efficient Ethernet +------------------------- + +Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along with a +family of Physical layer to operate in the Low Power Idle (LPI) mode. The EEE +mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and 1Gbps. + +The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the communication +device functionality when there is no data to be transmitted & received. +The system on both the side of the link can disable some functionalities and +save power during the period of low-link utilization. The MAC controls whether +the system should enter or exit the LPI mode and communicate this to PHY. + +As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can be +supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability register and +the PHY devices MCD registers. + +To enter in TX LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer that enable +and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be transmitted. + +Precision Time Protocol (PTP) +----------------------------- + +The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which +enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems +implemented with technologies such as network communication. + +In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002 +Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features. +IEEE 1588-2008 can be enabled when configuring the Kernel. + +SGMII/RGMII Support +------------------- + +New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. This information is +available at run-time by looking at the HW capability register. This means +that the stmmac can manage auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the +PHYLIB stuff. In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to +restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. Thanks to these +registers, it is possible to look at the Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability. + +Physical +-------- + +The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with +PHY and GPHY devices. + +Platform Information +-------------------- + +Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree. + +:: + + struct plat_stmmacenet_data { + +1) Bus identifier:: + + int bus_id; + +2) PHY Physical Address. If set to -1 the driver will pick the first PHY it +finds:: + + int phy_addr; + +3) PHY Device Interface:: + + int interface; + +4) Specific platform fields for the MDIO bus:: + + struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data; + +5) Internal DMA parameters:: + + struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg; + +6) Fixed CSR Clock Range selection:: + + int clk_csr; + +7) HW uses the GMAC core:: + + int has_gmac; + +8) If set the MAC will use Enhanced Descriptors:: + + int enh_desc; + +9) Core is able to perform TX Checksum and/or RX Checksum in HW:: + + int tx_coe; + int rx_coe; + +11) Some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for over-sized frames due +to limited buffer sizes. Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on +JUMBO frames:: + + int bugged_jumbo; + +12) Core has the embedded power module:: + + int pmt; + +13) Force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode or Threshold mode:: + + int force_sf_dma_mode; + int force_thresh_dma_mode; + +15) Force to disable the RX Watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode:: + + int riwt_off; + +16) Limit the maximum operating speed and MTU:: + + int max_speed; + int maxmtu; + +18) Number of Multicast/Unicast filters:: + + int multicast_filter_bins; + int unicast_filter_entries; + +20) Limit the maximum TX and RX FIFO size:: + + int tx_fifo_size; + int rx_fifo_size; + +21) Use the specified number of TX and RX Queues:: + + u32 rx_queues_to_use; + u32 tx_queues_to_use; + +22) Use the specified TX and RX scheduling algorithm:: + + u8 rx_sched_algorithm; + u8 tx_sched_algorithm; + +23) Internal TX and RX Queue parameters:: + + struct stmmac_rxq_cfg rx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_RX_QUEUES]; + struct stmmac_txq_cfg tx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_TX_QUEUES]; + +24) This callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers (on ST SoCs) +according to the link speed negotiated by the physical layer:: + + void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); + +25) Callbacks used for calling a custom initialization; This is sometimes +necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes) where the HW needs to have set +some PIO lines or system cfg registers. init/exit callbacks should not use +or modify platform data:: + + int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); + void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); + +26) Perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms this field +is used to configure the AMBA bridge to generate more efficient STBus traffic:: + + struct mac_device_info *(*setup)(void *priv); + void *bsp_priv; + +27) Internal clocks and rates:: + + struct clk *stmmac_clk; + struct clk *pclk; + struct clk *clk_ptp_ref; + unsigned int clk_ptp_rate; + unsigned int clk_ref_rate; + s32 ptp_max_adj; + +28) Main reset:: + + struct reset_control *stmmac_rst; + +29) AXI Internal Parameters:: + + struct stmmac_axi *axi; + +30) HW uses GMAC>4 cores:: + + int has_gmac4; + +31) HW is sun8i based:: + + bool has_sun8i; + +32) Enables TSO feature:: + + bool tso_en; + +33) Enables Receive Side Scaling (RSS) feature:: + + int rss_en; + +34) MAC Port selection:: + + int mac_port_sel_speed; + +35) Enables TX LPI Clock Gating:: + + bool en_tx_lpi_clockgating; + +36) HW uses XGMAC>2.10 cores:: + + int has_xgmac; + +:: + + } + +For MDIO bus data, we have: + +:: + + struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data { + +1) PHY mask passed when MDIO bus is registered:: + + unsigned int phy_mask; + +2) List of IRQs, one per PHY:: + + int *irqs; + +3) If IRQs is NULL, use this for probed PHY:: + + int probed_phy_irq; + +4) Set to true if PHY needs reset:: + + bool needs_reset; + +:: + + } + +For DMA engine configuration, we have: + +:: + + struct stmmac_dma_cfg { + +1) Programmable Burst Length (TX and RX):: + + int pbl; + +2) If set, DMA TX / RX will use this value rather than pbl:: + + int txpbl; + int rxpbl; + +3) Enable 8xPBL:: + + bool pblx8; + +4) Enable Fixed or Mixed burst:: + + int fixed_burst; + int mixed_burst; + +5) Enable Address Aligned Beats:: + + bool aal; + +6) Enable Enhanced Addressing (> 32 bits):: + + bool eame; + +:: + + } + +For DMA AXI parameters, we have: + +:: + + struct stmmac_axi { + +1) Enable AXI LPI:: + + bool axi_lpi_en; + bool axi_xit_frm; + +2) Set AXI Write / Read maximum outstanding requests:: + + u32 axi_wr_osr_lmt; + u32 axi_rd_osr_lmt; + +3) Set AXI 4KB bursts:: + + bool axi_kbbe; + +4) Set AXI maximum burst length map:: + + u32 axi_blen[AXI_BLEN]; + +5) Set AXI Fixed burst / mixed burst:: + + bool axi_fb; + bool axi_mb; + +6) Set AXI rebuild incrx mode:: + + bool axi_rb; + +:: + + } + +For the RX Queues configuration, we have: + +:: + + struct stmmac_rxq_cfg { + +1) Mode to use (DCB or AVB):: + + u8 mode_to_use; + +2) DMA channel to use:: + + u32 chan; + +3) Packet routing, if applicable:: + + u8 pkt_route; + +4) Use priority routing, and priority to route:: + + bool use_prio; + u32 prio; + +:: + + } + +For the TX Queues configuration, we have: + +:: + + struct stmmac_txq_cfg { + +1) Queue weight in scheduler:: + + u32 weight; + +2) Mode to use (DCB or AVB):: + + u8 mode_to_use; + +3) Credit Base Shaper Parameters:: + + u32 send_slope; + u32 idle_slope; + u32 high_credit; + u32 low_credit; + +4) Use priority scheduling, and priority:: + + bool use_prio; + u32 prio; + +:: + + } + +Device Tree Information +----------------------- + +Please refer to the following document: +Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwmac.yaml + +HW Capabilities +--------------- + +Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability +register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to +understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually +available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW +capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform. + +Debug Information +================= + +The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, debug +information, MAC and DMA registers etc. + +These can be read in several ways depending on the type of the information +actually needed. + +For example a user can be use the ethtool support to get statistics: e.g. +using: ``ethtool -S ethX`` (that shows the Management counters (MMC) if +supported) or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ``ethtool -d ethX`` + +Compiling the Kernel with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_FS`` the driver will export the +following debugfs entries: + + - ``descriptors_status``: To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings + - ``dma_cap``: To show the HW Capabilities + +Developer can also use the ``debug`` module parameter to get further debug +information (please see: NETIF Msg Level). + +Support +======= + +If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel +with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the +issue to netdev@vger.kernel.org diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1ae979fd90d2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/stmicro/stmmac.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,401 +0,0 @@ - STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Synopsys Ethernet driver - -Copyright (C) 2007-2015 STMicroelectronics Ltd -Author: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com> - -This is the driver for the MAC 10/100/1000 on-chip Ethernet controllers -(Synopsys IP blocks). - -Currently this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC -(i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XLINX XC2V3000 -FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. - -DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a (and older) and DWC Ether -MAC 10/100 Universal version 4.0 have been used for developing this driver. - -This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI. - -Please, for more information also visit: www.stlinux.com - -1) Kernel Configuration -The kernel configuration option is STMMAC_ETH: - Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet (1000 Mbit) ---> - STMicroelectronics 10/100/1000 Ethernet driver (STMMAC_ETH) - -CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM: is to enable the platform driver. -CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI: is to enable the pci driver. - -2) Driver parameters list: - debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all); - phyaddr: to manually provide the physical address to the PHY device; - buf_sz: DMA buffer size; - tc: control the HW FIFO threshold; - watchdog: transmit timeout (in milliseconds); - flow_ctrl: Flow control ability [on/off]; - pause: Flow Control Pause Time; - eee_timer: tx EEE timer; - chain_mode: select chain mode instead of ring. - -3) Command line options -Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using: - stmmaceth=watchdog:100,chain_mode=1 - -4) Driver information and notes - -4.1) Transmit process -The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets -the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine, that there is a packet -ready to be transmitted. -By default, the driver sets the NETIF_F_SG bit in the features field of the -net_device structure, enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is true on -chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware. -Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, timer will be -scheduled to release the transmit resources. - -4.2) Receive process -When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts -are not queued, so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring during -the receive process. -This is based on NAPI, so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work -to be done, and it exits. -Then the poll method will be scheduled at some future point. -The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket -buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy). - -4.3) Interrupt mitigation -The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts -using NAPI for the reception on chips older than the 3.50. -New chips have an HW RX-Watchdog used for this mitigation. -Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool. - -4.4) WOL -Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the -GMAC core. - -4.5) DMA descriptors -Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only -tested on DWC Ether MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.41a and later. - -STMMAC supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) -and linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two -data buffer pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data -buffer pointer. RING mode is the default. - -In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in -the list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, -whereas such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode. - -4.5.1) Extended descriptors -The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload -when it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. -These are not available on GMAC Synopsys chips older than the 3.50. -At probe time the driver will decide if these can be actually used. -This support also is mandatory for PTPv2 because the extra descriptors -are used for saving the hardware timestamps and Extended Status. - -4.6) Ethtool support -Ethtool is supported. - -For example, driver statistics (including RMON), internal errors can be taken -using: - # ethtool -S ethX -command - -4.7) Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading -Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. -The GSO has been also added but it's performed in software. -LRO is not supported. - -4.8) Physical -The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with -PHY and GPHY devices. - -4.9) Platform information -Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree. - -struct plat_stmmacenet_data { - char *phy_bus_name; - int bus_id; - int phy_addr; - int interface; - struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data; - struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg; - int clk_csr; - int has_gmac; - int enh_desc; - int tx_coe; - int rx_coe; - int bugged_jumbo; - int pmt; - int force_sf_dma_mode; - int force_thresh_dma_mode; - int riwt_off; - int max_speed; - int maxmtu; - void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed); - void (*bus_setup)(void __iomem *ioaddr); - int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); - void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv); - void *bsp_priv; - int has_gmac4; - bool tso_en; -}; - -Where: - o phy_bus_name: phy bus name to attach to the stmmac. - o bus_id: bus identifier. - o phy_addr: the physical address can be passed from the platform. - If it is set to -1 the driver will automatically - detect it at run-time by probing all the 32 addresses. - o interface: PHY device's interface. - o mdio_bus_data: specific platform fields for the MDIO bus. - o dma_cfg: internal DMA parameters - o pbl: the Programmable Burst Length is maximum number of beats to - be transferred in one DMA transaction. - GMAC also enables the 4xPBL by default. (8xPBL for GMAC 3.50 and newer) - o txpbl/rxpbl: GMAC and newer supports independent DMA pbl for tx/rx. - o pblx8: Enable 8xPBL (4xPBL for core rev < 3.50). Enabled by default. - o fixed_burst/mixed_burst/aal - o clk_csr: fixed CSR Clock range selection. - o has_gmac: uses the GMAC core. - o enh_desc: if sets the MAC will use the enhanced descriptor structure. - o tx_coe: core is able to perform the tx csum in HW. - o rx_coe: the supports three check sum offloading engine types: - type_1, type_2 (full csum) and no RX coe. - o bugged_jumbo: some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for - over-sized frames due to limited buffer sizes. - Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on - JUMBO frames. - o pmt: core has the embedded power module (optional). - o force_sf_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode - instead of the Threshold. - o force_thresh_dma_mode: force DMA to use the Threshold mode other than - the Store and Forward mode. - o riwt_off: force to disable the RX watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode. - o fix_mac_speed: this callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers - (on ST SoCs) according to the link speed negotiated by the - physical layer . - o bus_setup: perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms - this field is used to configure the AMBA bridge to generate more - efficient STBus traffic. - o init/exit: callbacks used for calling a custom initialization; - this is sometime necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes) - where the HW needs to have set some PIO lines or system cfg - registers. init/exit callbacks should not use or modify - platform data. - o bsp_priv: another private pointer. - o has_gmac4: uses GMAC4 core. - o tso_en: Enables TSO (TCP Segmentation Offload) feature. - -For MDIO bus The we have: - - struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data { - int (*phy_reset)(void *priv); - unsigned int phy_mask; - int *irqs; - int probed_phy_irq; - }; - -Where: - o phy_reset: hook to reset the phy device attached to the bus. - o phy_mask: phy mask passed when register the MDIO bus within the driver. - o irqs: list of IRQs, one per PHY. - o probed_phy_irq: if irqs is NULL, use this for probed PHY. - -For DMA engine we have the following internal fields that should be -tuned according to the HW capabilities. - -struct stmmac_dma_cfg { - int pbl; - int txpbl; - int rxpbl; - bool pblx8; - int fixed_burst; - int mixed_burst; - bool aal; -}; - -Where: - o pbl: Programmable Burst Length (tx and rx) - o txpbl: Transmit Programmable Burst Length. Only for GMAC and newer. - If set, DMA tx will use this value rather than pbl. - o rxpbl: Receive Programmable Burst Length. Only for GMAC and newer. - If set, DMA rx will use this value rather than pbl. - o pblx8: Enable 8xPBL (4xPBL for core rev < 3.50). Enabled by default. - o fixed_burst: program the DMA to use the fixed burst mode - o mixed_burst: program the DMA to use the mixed burst mode - o aal: Address-Aligned Beats - ---- - -Below an example how the structures above are using on ST platforms. - - static struct plat_stmmacenet_data stxYYY_ethernet_platform_data = { - .has_gmac = 0, - .enh_desc = 0, - .fix_mac_speed = stxYYY_ethernet_fix_mac_speed, - | - |-> to write an internal syscfg - | on this platform when the - | link speed changes from 10 to - | 100 and viceversa - .init = &stmmac_claim_resource, - | - |-> On ST SoC this calls own "PAD" - | manager framework to claim - | all the resources necessary - | (GPIO ...). The .custom_cfg field - | is used to pass a custom config. -}; - -Below the usage of the stmmac_mdio_bus_data: on this SoC, in fact, -there are two MAC cores: one MAC is for MDIO Bus/PHY emulation -with fixed_link support. - -static struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data stmmac1_mdio_bus = { - .phy_reset = phy_reset; - | - |-> function to provide the phy_reset on this board - .phy_mask = 0, -}; - -static struct fixed_phy_status stmmac0_fixed_phy_status = { - .link = 1, - .speed = 100, - .duplex = 1, -}; - -During the board's device_init we can configure the first -MAC for fixed_link by calling: - fixed_phy_add(PHY_POLL, 1, &stmmac0_fixed_phy_status); -and the second one, with a real PHY device attached to the bus, -by using the stmmac_mdio_bus_data structure (to provide the id, the -reset procedure etc). - -Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability -register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to -understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually -available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW -capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform. - -4.10) Device-tree support. - -Please see the following document: - Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/stmmac.txt - -4.11) This is a summary of the content of some relevant files: - o stmmac_main.c: implements the main network device driver; - o stmmac_mdio.c: provides MDIO functions; - o stmmac_pci: this is the PCI driver; - o stmmac_platform.c: this the platform driver (OF supported); - o stmmac_ethtool.c: implements the ethtool support; - o stmmac.h: private driver structure; - o common.h: common definitions and VFTs; - o mmc_core.c/mmc.h: Management MAC Counters; - o stmmac_hwtstamp.c: HW timestamp support for PTP; - o stmmac_ptp.c: PTP 1588 clock; - o stmmac_pcs.h: Physical Coding Sublayer common implementation; - o dwmac-<XXX>.c: these are for the platform glue-logic file; e.g. dwmac-sti.c - for STMicroelectronics SoCs. - -- GMAC 3.x - o descs.h: descriptor structure definitions; - o dwmac1000_core.c: dwmac GiGa core functions; - o dwmac1000_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC chip; - o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the dwmac GiGa; - o dwmac100_core: dwmac 100 core code; - o dwmac100_dma.c: dma functions for the dwmac 100 chip; - o dwmac1000.h: specific header file for the MAC; - o dwmac_lib.c: generic DMA functions; - o enh_desc.c: functions for handling enhanced descriptors; - o norm_desc.c: functions for handling normal descriptors; - o chain_mode.c/ring_mode.c:: functions to manage RING/CHAINED modes; - -- GMAC4.x generation - o dwmac4_core.c: dwmac GMAC4.x core functions; - o dwmac4_desc.c: functions for handling GMAC4.x descriptors; - o dwmac4_descs.h: descriptor definitions; - o dwmac4_dma.c: dma functions for the GMAC4.x chip; - o dwmac4_dma.h: dma definitions for the GMAC4.x chip; - o dwmac4.h: core definitions for the GMAC4.x chip; - o dwmac4_lib.c: generic GMAC4.x functions; - -4.12) TSO support (GMAC4.x) - -TSO (Tcp Segmentation Offload) feature is supported by GMAC 4.x chip family. -When a packet is sent through TCP protocol, the TCP stack ensures that -the SKB provided to the low level driver (stmmac in our case) matches with -the maximum frame len (IP header + TCP header + payload <= 1500 bytes (for -MTU set to 1500)). It means that if an application using TCP want to send a -packet which will have a length (after adding headers) > 1514 the packet -will be split in several TCP packets: The data payload is split and headers -(TCP/IP ..) are added. It is done by software. - -When TSO is enabled, the TCP stack doesn't care about the maximum frame -length and provide SKB packet to stmmac as it is. The GMAC IP will have to -perform the segmentation by it self to match with maximum frame length. - -This feature can be enabled in device tree through "snps,tso" entry. - -5) Debug Information - -The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, -debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc. - -These can be read in several ways depending on the -type of the information actually needed. - -For example a user can be use the ethtool support -to get statistics: e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX -(that shows the Management counters (MMC) if supported) -or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX - -Compiling the Kernel with CONFIG_DEBUG_FS the driver will export the following -debugfs entries: - -/sys/kernel/debug/stmmaceth/descriptors_status - To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings - -Developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get further debug -information (please see: NETIF Msg Level). - -6) Energy Efficient Ethernet - -Energy Efficient Ethernet(EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along -with a family of Physical layer to operate in the Low power Idle(LPI) -mode. The EEE mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps, -1000Mbps & 10Gbps. - -The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the -communication device functionality when there is no data to be -transmitted & received. The system on both the side of the link can -disable some functionalities & save power during the period of low-link -utilization. The MAC controls whether the system should enter or exit -the LPI mode & communicate this to PHY. - -As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can -be supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability -register and the PHY devices MCD registers. -To enter in Tx LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer -that enable and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be -transmitted. - -7) Precision Time Protocol (PTP) -The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), -which enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and -control systems implemented with technologies such as network -communication. - -In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002 -Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features. -IEEE 1588-2008 that can be enabled when configure the Kernel. - -8) SGMII/RGMII support -New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. -This information is available at run-time by looking at the -HW capability register. This means that the stmmac can manage -auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the PHYLIB stuff. -In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to -restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. -Thanks to these registers, it is possible to look at the -Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt index 5c8cee17fca9..12855ab268b8 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ti/cpsw_switchdev.txt @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ but without enabling "switch" mode, or to different bridges. Devlink configuration parameters ==================== -See Documentation/networking/devlink-params-ti-cpsw-switch.txt +See Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst ==================== # Bridging in dual mac mode diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 1db3fbea0831..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-health.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,86 +0,0 @@ -The health mechanism is targeted for Real Time Alerting, in order to know when -something bad had happened to a PCI device -- Provide alert debug information -- Self healing -- If problem needs vendor support, provide a way to gather all needed debugging - information. - -The main idea is to unify and centralize driver health reports in the -generic devlink instance and allow the user to set different -attributes of the health reporting and recovery procedures. - -The devlink health reporter: -Device driver creates a "health reporter" per each error/health type. -Error/Health type can be a known/generic (eg pci error, fw error, rx/tx error) -or unknown (driver specific). -For each registered health reporter a driver can issue error/health reports -asynchronously. All health reports handling is done by devlink. -Device driver can provide specific callbacks for each "health reporter", e.g. - - Recovery procedures - - Diagnostics and object dump procedures - - OOB initial parameters -Different parts of the driver can register different types of health reporters -with different handlers. - -Once an error is reported, devlink health will do the following actions: - * A log is being send to the kernel trace events buffer - * Health status and statistics are being updated for the reporter instance - * Object dump is being taken and saved at the reporter instance (as long as - there is no other dump which is already stored) - * Auto recovery attempt is being done. Depends on: - - Auto-recovery configuration - - Grace period vs. time passed since last recover - -The user interface: -User can access/change each reporter's parameters and driver specific callbacks -via devlink, e.g per error type (per health reporter) - - Configure reporter's generic parameters (like: disable/enable auto recovery) - - Invoke recovery procedure - - Run diagnostics - - Object dump - -The devlink health interface (via netlink): -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_GET - Retrieves status and configuration info per DEV and reporter. -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_SET - Allows reporter-related configuration setting. -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_RECOVER - Triggers a reporter's recovery procedure. -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DIAGNOSE - Retrieves diagnostics data from a reporter on a device. -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_GET - Retrieves the last stored dump. Devlink health - saves a single dump. If an dump is not already stored by the devlink - for this reporter, devlink generates a new dump. - dump output is defined by the reporter. -DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_CLEAR - Clears the last saved dump file for the specified reporter. - - - netlink - +--------------------------+ - | | - | + | - | | | - +--------------------------+ - |request for ops - |(diagnose, - mlx5_core devlink |recover, - |dump) -+--------+ +--------------------------+ -| | | reporter| | -| | | +---------v----------+ | -| | ops execution | | | | -| <----------------------------------+ | | -| | | | | | -| | | + ^------------------+ | -| | | | request for ops | -| | | | (recover, dump) | -| | | | | -| | | +-+------------------+ | -| | health report | | health handler | | -| +-------------------------------> | | -| | | +--------------------+ | -| | health reporter create | | -| +----------------------------> | -+--------+ +--------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst deleted file mode 100644 index 4914f581b1fd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-info-versions.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,64 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) - -===================== -Devlink info versions -===================== - -board.id -======== - -Unique identifier of the board design. - -board.rev -========= - -Board design revision. - -asic.id -======= - -ASIC design identifier. - -asic.rev -======== - -ASIC design revision. - -board.manufacture -================= - -An identifier of the company or the facility which produced the part. - -fw -== - -Overall firmware version, often representing the collection of -fw.mgmt, fw.app, etc. - -fw.mgmt -======= - -Control unit firmware version. This firmware is responsible for house -keeping tasks, PHY control etc. but not the packet-by-packet data path -operation. - -fw.app -====== - -Data path microcode controlling high-speed packet processing. - -fw.undi -======= - -UNDI software, may include the UEFI driver, firmware or both. - -fw.ncsi -======= - -Version of the software responsible for supporting/handling the -Network Controller Sideband Interface. - -fw.psid -======= - -Unique identifier of the firmware parameter set. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-bnxt.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-bnxt.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 481aa303d5b4..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-bnxt.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,18 +0,0 @@ -enable_sriov [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: Permanent - -ignore_ari [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: Permanent - -msix_vec_per_pf_max [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: Permanent - -msix_vec_per_pf_min [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: Permanent - -gre_ver_check [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) version check will - be enabled in the device. If disabled, device skips - version checking for incoming packets. - Type: Boolean - Configuration mode: Permanent diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlx5.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlx5.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 5071467118bd..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlx5.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,17 +0,0 @@ -flow_steering_mode [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Controls the flow steering mode of the driver. - Two modes are supported: - 1. 'dmfs' - Device managed flow steering. - 2. 'smfs - Software/Driver managed flow steering. - In DMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and - managed through the Firmware. - In SMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and - managed though by the driver directly into Hardware - without firmware intervention. - Type: String - Configuration mode: runtime - -enable_roce [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Enable handling of RoCE traffic in the device. - Defaultly enabled. - Configuration mode: driverinit diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt deleted file mode 100644 index c63ea9fc7009..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mlxsw.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -fw_load_policy [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: driverinit - -acl_region_rehash_interval [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Sets an interval for periodic ACL region rehashes. - The value is in milliseconds, minimal value is "3000". - Value "0" disables the periodic work. - The first rehash will be run right after value is set. - Type: u32 - Configuration mode: runtime diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mv88e6xxx.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mv88e6xxx.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 21c4b3556ef2..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-mv88e6xxx.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,7 +0,0 @@ -ATU_hash [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Select one of four possible hashing algorithms for - MAC addresses in the Address Translation Unit. - A value of 3 seems to work better than the default of - 1 when many MAC addresses have the same OUI. - Configuration mode: runtime - Type: u8. 0-3 valid. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-nfp.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-nfp.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 43e4d4034865..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-nfp.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,5 +0,0 @@ -fw_load_policy [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: permanent - -reset_dev_on_drv_probe [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Configuration mode: permanent diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-ti-cpsw-switch.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-ti-cpsw-switch.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 4037458499f7..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params-ti-cpsw-switch.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10 +0,0 @@ -ale_bypass [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Allows to enable ALE_CONTROL(4).BYPASS mode for debug purposes. - All packets will be sent to the Host port only if enabled. - Type: bool - Configuration mode: runtime - -switch_mode [DEVICE, DRIVER-SPECIFIC] - Enable switch mode - Type: bool - Configuration mode: runtime diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params.txt b/Documentation/networking/devlink-params.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 04e234e9acc9..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-params.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,71 +0,0 @@ -Devlink configuration parameters -================================ -Following is the list of configuration parameters via devlink interface. -Each parameter can be generic or driver specific and are device level -parameters. - -Note that the driver-specific files should contain the generic params -they support to, with supported config modes. - -Each parameter can be set in different configuration modes: - runtime - set while driver is running, no reset required. - driverinit - applied while driver initializes, requires restart - driver by devlink reload command. - permanent - written to device's non-volatile memory, hard reset - required. - -Following is the list of parameters: -==================================== -enable_sriov [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Enable Single Root I/O Virtualisation (SRIOV) in - the device. - Type: Boolean - -ignore_ari [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Ignore Alternative Routing-ID Interpretation (ARI) - capability. If enabled, adapter will ignore ARI - capability even when platforms has the support - enabled and creates same number of partitions when - platform does not support ARI. - Type: Boolean - -msix_vec_per_pf_max [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Provides the maximum number of MSIX interrupts that - a device can create. Value is same across all - physical functions (PFs) in the device. - Type: u32 - -msix_vec_per_pf_min [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Provides the minimum number of MSIX interrupts required - for the device initialization. Value is same across all - physical functions (PFs) in the device. - Type: u32 - -fw_load_policy [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Controls the device's firmware loading policy. - Valid values: - * DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_DRIVER (0) - Load firmware version preferred by the driver. - * DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_FLASH (1) - Load firmware currently stored in flash. - * DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_DISK (2) - Load firmware currently available on host's disk. - Type: u8 - -reset_dev_on_drv_probe [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Controls the device's reset policy on driver probe. - Valid values: - * DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_UNKNOWN (0) - Unknown or invalid value. - * DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_ALWAYS (1) - Always reset device on driver probe. - * DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_NEVER (2) - Never reset device on driver probe. - * DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_DISK (3) - Reset only if device firmware can be found in the - filesystem. - Type: u8 - -enable_roce [DEVICE, GENERIC] - Enable handling of RoCE traffic in the device. - Type: Boolean diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-trap-netdevsim.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink-trap-netdevsim.rst deleted file mode 100644 index b721c9415473..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-trap-netdevsim.rst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,20 +0,0 @@ -.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 - -====================== -Devlink Trap netdevsim -====================== - -Driver-specific Traps -===================== - -.. list-table:: List of Driver-specific Traps Registered by ``netdevsim`` - :widths: 5 5 90 - - * - Name - - Type - - Description - * - ``fid_miss`` - - ``exception`` - - When a packet enters the device it is classified to a filtering - indentifier (FID) based on the ingress port and VLAN. This trap is used - to trap packets for which a FID could not be found diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/bnxt.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/bnxt.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..82ef9ec46707 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/bnxt.rst @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==================== +bnxt devlink support +==================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``bnxt`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``enable_sriov`` + - Permanent + * - ``ignore_ari`` + - Permanent + * - ``msix_vec_per_pf_max`` + - Permanent + * - ``msix_vec_per_pf_min`` + - Permanent + +The ``bnxt`` driver also implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``gre_ver_check`` + - Boolean + - Permanent + - Generic Routing Encapsulation (GRE) version check will be enabled in + the device. If disabled, the device will skip the version check for + incoming packets. + +Info versions +============= + +The ``bnxt_en`` driver reports the following versions + +.. list-table:: devlink info versions implemented + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``asic.id`` + - fixed + - ASIC design identifier + * - ``asic.rev`` + - fixed + - ASIC design revision + * - ``fw.psid`` + - stored, running + - Firmware parameter set version of the board + * - ``fw`` + - stored, running + - Overall board firmware version + * - ``fw.app`` + - stored, running + - Data path firmware version + * - ``fw.mgmt`` + - stored, running + - Management firmware version + * - ``fw.roce`` + - stored, running + - RoCE management firmware version diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-dpipe.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-dpipe.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..468fe1001b74 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-dpipe.rst @@ -0,0 +1,252 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============= +Devlink DPIPE +============= + +Background +========== + +While performing the hardware offloading process, much of the hardware +specifics cannot be presented. These details are useful for debugging, and +``devlink-dpipe`` provides a standardized way to provide visibility into the +offloading process. + +For example, the routing longest prefix match (LPM) algorithm used by the +Linux kernel may differ from the hardware implementation. The pipeline debug +API (DPIPE) is aimed at providing the user visibility into the ASIC's +pipeline in a generic way. + +The hardware offload process is expected to be done in a way that the user +should not be able to distinguish between the hardware vs. software +implementation. In this process, hardware specifics are neglected. In +reality those details can have lots of meaning and should be exposed in some +standard way. + +This problem is made even more complex when one wishes to offload the +control path of the whole networking stack to a switch ASIC. Due to +differences in the hardware and software models some processes cannot be +represented correctly. + +One example is the kernel's LPM algorithm which in many cases differs +greatly to the hardware implementation. The configuration API is the same, +but one cannot rely on the Forward Information Base (FIB) to look like the +Level Path Compression trie (LPC-trie) in hardware. + +In many situations trying to analyze systems failure solely based on the +kernel's dump may not be enough. By combining this data with complementary +information about the underlying hardware, this debugging can be made +easier; additionally, the information can be useful when debugging +performance issues. + +Overview +======== + +The ``devlink-dpipe`` interface closes this gap. The hardware's pipeline is +modeled as a graph of match/action tables. Each table represents a specific +hardware block. This model is not new, first being used by the P4 language. + +Traditionally it has been used as an alternative model for hardware +configuration, but the ``devlink-dpipe`` interface uses it for visibility +purposes as a standard complementary tool. The system's view from +``devlink-dpipe`` should change according to the changes done by the +standard configuration tools. + +For example, it’s quiet common to implement Access Control Lists (ACL) +using Ternary Content Addressable Memory (TCAM). The TCAM memory can be +divided into TCAM regions. Complex TC filters can have multiple rules with +different priorities and different lookup keys. On the other hand hardware +TCAM regions have a predefined lookup key. Offloading the TC filter rules +using TCAM engine can result in multiple TCAM regions being interconnected +in a chain (which may affect the data path latency). In response to a new TC +filter new tables should be created describing those regions. + +Model +===== + +The ``DPIPE`` model introduces several objects: + + * headers + * tables + * entries + +A ``header`` describes packet formats and provides names for fields within +the packet. A ``table`` describes hardware blocks. An ``entry`` describes +the actual content of a specific table. + +The hardware pipeline is not port specific, but rather describes the whole +ASIC. Thus it is tied to the top of the ``devlink`` infrastructure. + +Drivers can register and unregister tables at run time, in order to support +dynamic behavior. This dynamic behavior is mandatory for describing hardware +blocks like TCAM regions which can be allocated and freed dynamically. + +``devlink-dpipe`` generally is not intended for configuration. The exception +is hardware counting for a specific table. + +The following commands are used to obtain the ``dpipe`` objects from +userspace: + + * ``table_get``: Receive a table's description. + * ``headers_get``: Receive a device's supported headers. + * ``entries_get``: Receive a table's current entries. + * ``counters_set``: Enable or disable counters on a table. + +Table +----- + +The driver should implement the following operations for each table: + + * ``matches_dump``: Dump the supported matches. + * ``actions_dump``: Dump the supported actions. + * ``entries_dump``: Dump the actual content of the table. + * ``counters_set_update``: Synchronize hardware with counters enabled or + disabled. + +Header/Field +------------ + +In a similar way to P4 headers and fields are used to describe a table's +behavior. There is a slight difference between the standard protocol headers +and specific ASIC metadata. The protocol headers should be declared in the +``devlink`` core API. On the other hand ASIC meta data is driver specific +and should be defined in the driver. Additionally, each driver-specific +devlink documentation file should document the driver-specific ``dpipe`` +headers it implements. The headers and fields are identified by enumeration. + +In order to provide further visibility some ASIC metadata fields could be +mapped to kernel objects. For example, internal router interface indexes can +be directly mapped to the net device ifindex. FIB table indexes used by +different Virtual Routing and Forwarding (VRF) tables can be mapped to +internal routing table indexes. + +Match +----- + +Matches are kept primitive and close to hardware operation. Match types like +LPM are not supported due to the fact that this is exactly a process we wish +to describe in full detail. Example of matches: + + * ``field_exact``: Exact match on a specific field. + * ``field_exact_mask``: Exact match on a specific field after masking. + * ``field_range``: Match on a specific range. + +The id's of the header and the field should be specified in order to +identify the specific field. Furthermore, the header index should be +specified in order to distinguish multiple headers of the same type in a +packet (tunneling). + +Action +------ + +Similar to match, the actions are kept primitive and close to hardware +operation. For example: + + * ``field_modify``: Modify the field value. + * ``field_inc``: Increment the field value. + * ``push_header``: Add a header. + * ``pop_header``: Remove a header. + +Entry +----- + +Entries of a specific table can be dumped on demand. Each eentry is +identified with an index and its properties are described by a list of +match/action values and specific counter. By dumping the tables content the +interactions between tables can be resolved. + +Abstraction Example +=================== + +The following is an example of the abstraction model of the L3 part of +Mellanox Spectrum ASIC. The blocks are described in the order they appear in +the pipeline. The table sizes in the following examples are not real +hardware sizes and are provided for demonstration purposes. + +LPM +--- + +The LPM algorithm can be implemented as a list of hash tables. Each hash +table contains routes with the same prefix length. The root of the list is +/32, and in case of a miss the hardware will continue to the next hash +table. The depth of the search will affect the data path latency. + +In case of a hit the entry contains information about the next stage of the +pipeline which resolves the MAC address. The next stage can be either local +host table for directly connected routes, or adjacency table for next-hops. +The ``meta.lpm_prefix`` field is used to connect two LPM tables. + +.. code:: + + table lpm_prefix_16 { + size: 4096, + counters_enabled: true, + match: { meta.vr_id: exact, + ipv4.dst_addr: exact_mask, + ipv6.dst_addr: exact_mask, + meta.lpm_prefix: exact }, + action: { meta.adj_index: set, + meta.adj_group_size: set, + meta.rif_port: set, + meta.lpm_prefix: set }, + } + +Local Host +---------- + +In the case of local routes the LPM lookup already resolves the egress +router interface (RIF), yet the exact MAC address is not known. The local +host table is a hash table combining the output interface id with +destination IP address as a key. The result is the MAC address. + +.. code:: + + table local_host { + size: 4096, + counters_enabled: true, + match: { meta.rif_port: exact, + ipv4.dst_addr: exact}, + action: { ethernet.daddr: set } + } + +Adjacency +--------- + +In case of remote routes this table does the ECMP. The LPM lookup results in +ECMP group size and index that serves as a global offset into this table. +Concurrently a hash of the packet is generated. Based on the ECMP group size +and the packet's hash a local offset is generated. Multiple LPM entries can +point to the same adjacency group. + +.. code:: + + table adjacency { + size: 4096, + counters_enabled: true, + match: { meta.adj_index: exact, + meta.adj_group_size: exact, + meta.packet_hash_index: exact }, + action: { ethernet.daddr: set, + meta.erif: set } + } + +ERIF +---- + +In case the egress RIF and destination MAC have been resolved by previous +tables this table does multiple operations like TTL decrease and MTU check. +Then the decision of forward/drop is taken and the port L3 statistics are +updated based on the packet's type (broadcast, unicast, multicast). + +.. code:: + + table erif { + size: 800, + counters_enabled: true, + match: { meta.rif_port: exact, + meta.is_l3_unicast: exact, + meta.is_l3_broadcast: exact, + meta.is_l3_multicast, exact }, + action: { meta.l3_drop: set, + meta.l3_forward: set } + } diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-health.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-health.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..0c99b11f05f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-health.rst @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============== +Devlink Health +============== + +Background +========== + +The ``devlink`` health mechanism is targeted for Real Time Alerting, in +order to know when something bad happened to a PCI device. + + * Provide alert debug information. + * Self healing. + * If problem needs vendor support, provide a way to gather all needed + debugging information. + +Overview +======== + +The main idea is to unify and centralize driver health reports in the +generic ``devlink`` instance and allow the user to set different +attributes of the health reporting and recovery procedures. + +The ``devlink`` health reporter: +Device driver creates a "health reporter" per each error/health type. +Error/Health type can be a known/generic (eg pci error, fw error, rx/tx error) +or unknown (driver specific). +For each registered health reporter a driver can issue error/health reports +asynchronously. All health reports handling is done by ``devlink``. +Device driver can provide specific callbacks for each "health reporter", e.g.: + + * Recovery procedures + * Diagnostics procedures + * Object dump procedures + * OOB initial parameters + +Different parts of the driver can register different types of health reporters +with different handlers. + +Actions +======= + +Once an error is reported, devlink health will perform the following actions: + + * A log is being send to the kernel trace events buffer + * Health status and statistics are being updated for the reporter instance + * Object dump is being taken and saved at the reporter instance (as long as + there is no other dump which is already stored) + * Auto recovery attempt is being done. Depends on: + - Auto-recovery configuration + - Grace period vs. time passed since last recover + +User Interface +============== + +User can access/change each reporter's parameters and driver specific callbacks +via ``devlink``, e.g per error type (per health reporter): + + * Configure reporter's generic parameters (like: disable/enable auto recovery) + * Invoke recovery procedure + * Run diagnostics + * Object dump + +.. list-table:: List of devlink health interfaces + :widths: 10 90 + + * - Name + - Description + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_GET`` + - Retrieves status and configuration info per DEV and reporter. + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_SET`` + - Allows reporter-related configuration setting. + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_RECOVER`` + - Triggers a reporter's recovery procedure. + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DIAGNOSE`` + - Retrieves diagnostics data from a reporter on a device. + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_GET`` + - Retrieves the last stored dump. Devlink health + saves a single dump. If an dump is not already stored by the devlink + for this reporter, devlink generates a new dump. + dump output is defined by the reporter. + * - ``DEVLINK_CMD_HEALTH_REPORTER_DUMP_CLEAR`` + - Clears the last saved dump file for the specified reporter. + +The following diagram provides a general overview of ``devlink-health``:: + + netlink + +--------------------------+ + | | + | + | + | | | + +--------------------------+ + |request for ops + |(diagnose, + mlx5_core devlink |recover, + |dump) + +--------+ +--------------------------+ + | | | reporter| | + | | | +---------v----------+ | + | | ops execution | | | | + | <----------------------------------+ | | + | | | | | | + | | | + ^------------------+ | + | | | | request for ops | + | | | | (recover, dump) | + | | | | | + | | | +-+------------------+ | + | | health report | | health handler | | + | +-------------------------------> | | + | | | +--------------------+ | + | | health reporter create | | + | +----------------------------> | + +--------+ +--------------------------+ diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-info.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-info.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..70981dd1b981 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-info.rst @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause) + +============ +Devlink Info +============ + +The ``devlink-info`` mechanism enables device drivers to report device +information in a generic fashion. It is extensible, and enables exporting +even device or driver specific information. + +devlink supports representing the following types of versions + +.. list-table:: List of version types + :widths: 5 95 + + * - Type + - Description + * - ``fixed`` + - Represents fixed versions, which cannot change. For example, + component identifiers or the board version reported in the PCI VPD. + * - ``running`` + - Represents the version of the currently running component. For + example the running version of firmware. These versions generally + only update after a reboot. + * - ``stored`` + - Represents the version of a component as stored, such as after a + flash update. Stored values should update to reflect changes in the + flash even if a reboot has not yet occurred. + +Generic Versions +================ + +It is expected that drivers use the following generic names for exporting +version information. Other information may be exposed using driver-specific +names, but these should be documented in the driver-specific file. + +board.id +-------- + +Unique identifier of the board design. + +board.rev +--------- + +Board design revision. + +asic.id +------- + +ASIC design identifier. + +asic.rev +-------- + +ASIC design revision. + +board.manufacture +----------------- + +An identifier of the company or the facility which produced the part. + +fw +-- + +Overall firmware version, often representing the collection of +fw.mgmt, fw.app, etc. + +fw.mgmt +------- + +Control unit firmware version. This firmware is responsible for house +keeping tasks, PHY control etc. but not the packet-by-packet data path +operation. + +fw.app +------ + +Data path microcode controlling high-speed packet processing. + +fw.undi +------- + +UNDI software, may include the UEFI driver, firmware or both. + +fw.ncsi +------- + +Version of the software responsible for supporting/handling the +Network Controller Sideband Interface. + +fw.psid +------- + +Unique identifier of the firmware parameter set. + +fw.roce +------- + +RoCE firmware version which is responsible for handling roce +management. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-params.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-params.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..da2f85c0fa21 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-params.rst @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============== +Devlink Params +============== + +``devlink`` provides capability for a driver to expose device parameters for low +level device functionality. Since devlink can operate at the device-wide +level, it can be used to provide configuration that may affect multiple +ports on a single device. + +This document describes a number of generic parameters that are supported +across multiple drivers. Each driver is also free to add their own +parameters. Each driver must document the specific parameters they support, +whether generic or not. + +Configuration modes +=================== + +Parameters may be set in different configuration modes. + +.. list-table:: Possible configuration modes + :widths: 5 90 + + * - Name + - Description + * - ``runtime`` + - set while the driver is running, and takes effect immediately. No + reset is required. + * - ``driverinit`` + - applied while the driver initializes. Requires the user to restart + the driver using the ``devlink`` reload command. + * - ``permanent`` + - written to the device's non-volatile memory. A hard reset is required + for it to take effect. + +Reloading +--------- + +In order for ``driverinit`` parameters to take effect, the driver must +support reloading via the ``devlink-reload`` command. This command will +request a reload of the device driver. + +Generic configuration parameters +================================ +The following is a list of generic configuration parameters that drivers may +add. Use of generic parameters is preferred over each driver creating their +own name. + +.. list-table:: List of generic parameters + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``enable_sriov`` + - Boolean + - Enable Single Root I/O Virtualization (SRIOV) in the device. + * - ``ignore_ari`` + - Boolean + - Ignore Alternative Routing-ID Interpretation (ARI) capability. If + enabled, the adapter will ignore ARI capability even when the + platform has support enabled. The device will create the same number + of partitions as when the platform does not support ARI. + * - ``msix_vec_per_pf_max`` + - u32 + - Provides the maximum number of MSI-X interrupts that a device can + create. Value is the same across all physical functions (PFs) in the + device. + * - ``msix_vec_per_pf_min`` + - u32 + - Provides the minimum number of MSI-X interrupts required for the + device to initialize. Value is the same across all physical functions + (PFs) in the device. + * - ``fw_load_policy`` + - u8 + - Control the device's firmware loading policy. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_DRIVER`` (0) + Load firmware version preferred by the driver. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_FLASH`` (1) + Load firmware currently stored in flash. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_FW_LOAD_POLICY_VALUE_DISK`` (2) + Load firmware currently available on host's disk. + * - ``reset_dev_on_drv_probe`` + - u8 + - Controls the device's reset policy on driver probe. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_UNKNOWN`` (0) + Unknown or invalid value. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_ALWAYS`` (1) + Always reset device on driver probe. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_NEVER`` (2) + Never reset device on driver probe. + - ``DEVLINK_PARAM_RESET_DEV_ON_DRV_PROBE_VALUE_DISK`` (3) + Reset the device only if firmware can be found in the filesystem. + * - ``enable_roce`` + - Boolean + - Enable handling of RoCE traffic in the device. + * - ``internal_err_reset`` + - Boolean + - When enabled, the device driver will reset the device on internal + errors. + * - ``max_macs`` + - u32 + - Specifies the maximum number of MAC addresses per ethernet port of + this device. + * - ``region_snapshot_enable`` + - Boolean + - Enable capture of ``devlink-region`` snapshots. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-region.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-region.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..1a7683e7acb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-region.rst @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============== +Devlink Region +============== + +``devlink`` regions enable access to driver defined address regions using +devlink. + +Each device can create and register its own supported address regions. The +region can then be accessed via the devlink region interface. + +Region snapshots are collected by the driver, and can be accessed via read +or dump commands. This allows future analysis on the created snapshots. +Regions may optionally support triggering snapshots on demand. + +The major benefit to creating a region is to provide access to internal +address regions that are otherwise inaccessible to the user. + +Regions may also be used to provide an additional way to debug complex error +states, but see also :doc:`devlink-health` + +example usage +------------- + +.. code:: shell + + $ devlink region help + $ devlink region show [ DEV/REGION ] + $ devlink region del DEV/REGION snapshot SNAPSHOT_ID + $ devlink region dump DEV/REGION [ snapshot SNAPSHOT_ID ] + $ devlink region read DEV/REGION [ snapshot SNAPSHOT_ID ] + address ADDRESS length length + + # Show all of the exposed regions with region sizes: + $ devlink region show + pci/0000:00:05.0/cr-space: size 1048576 snapshot [1 2] + pci/0000:00:05.0/fw-health: size 64 snapshot [1 2] + + # Delete a snapshot using: + $ devlink region del pci/0000:00:05.0/cr-space snapshot 1 + + # Trigger (request) a snapshot be taken: + $ devlink region trigger pci/0000:00:05.0/cr-space + + # Dump a snapshot: + $ devlink region dump pci/0000:00:05.0/fw-health snapshot 1 + 0000000000000000 0014 95dc 0014 9514 0035 1670 0034 db30 + 0000000000000010 0000 0000 ffff ff04 0029 8c00 0028 8cc8 + 0000000000000020 0016 0bb8 0016 1720 0000 0000 c00f 3ffc + 0000000000000030 bada cce5 bada cce5 bada cce5 bada cce5 + + # Read a specific part of a snapshot: + $ devlink region read pci/0000:00:05.0/fw-health snapshot 1 address 0 + length 16 + 0000000000000000 0014 95dc 0014 9514 0035 1670 0034 db30 + +As regions are likely very device or driver specific, no generic regions are +defined. See the driver-specific documentation files for information on the +specific regions a driver supports. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-resource.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-resource.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..93e92d2f0752 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-resource.rst @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +================ +Devlink Resource +================ + +``devlink`` provides the ability for drivers to register resources, which +can allow administrators to see the device restrictions for a given +resource, as well as how much of the given resource is currently +in use. Additionally, these resources can optionally have configurable size. +This could enable the administrator to limit the number of resources that +are used. + +For example, the ``netdevsim`` driver enables ``/IPv4/fib`` and +``/IPv4/fib-rules`` as resources to limit the number of IPv4 FIB entries and +rules for a given device. + +Resource Ids +============ + +Each resource is represented by an id, and contains information about its +current size and related sub resources. To access a sub resource, you +specify the path of the resource. For example ``/IPv4/fib`` is the id for +the ``fib`` sub-resource under the ``IPv4`` resource. + +example usage +------------- + +The resources exposed by the driver can be observed, for example: + +.. code:: shell + + $devlink resource show pci/0000:03:00.0 + pci/0000:03:00.0: + name kvd size 245760 unit entry + resources: + name linear size 98304 occ 0 unit entry size_min 0 size_max 147456 size_gran 128 + name hash_double size 60416 unit entry size_min 32768 size_max 180224 size_gran 128 + name hash_single size 87040 unit entry size_min 65536 size_max 212992 size_gran 128 + +Some resource's size can be changed. Examples: + +.. code:: shell + + $devlink resource set pci/0000:03:00.0 path /kvd/hash_single size 73088 + $devlink resource set pci/0000:03:00.0 path /kvd/hash_double size 74368 + +The changes do not apply immediately, this can be validated by the 'size_new' +attribute, which represents the pending change in size. For example: + +.. code:: shell + + $devlink resource show pci/0000:03:00.0 + pci/0000:03:00.0: + name kvd size 245760 unit entry size_valid false + resources: + name linear size 98304 size_new 147456 occ 0 unit entry size_min 0 size_max 147456 size_gran 128 + name hash_double size 60416 unit entry size_min 32768 size_max 180224 size_gran 128 + name hash_single size 87040 unit entry size_min 65536 size_max 212992 size_gran 128 + +Note that changes in resource size may require a device reload to properly +take effect. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink-trap.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-trap.rst index 03311849bfb1..47a429bb8658 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/devlink-trap.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/devlink-trap.rst @@ -223,6 +223,21 @@ be added to the following table: * - ``ipv6_lpm_miss`` - ``exception`` - Traps unicast IPv6 packets that did not match any route + * - ``non_routable_packet`` + - ``drop`` + - Traps packets that the device decided to drop because they are not + supposed to be routed. For example, IGMP queries can be flooded by the + device in layer 2 and reach the router. Such packets should not be + routed and instead dropped + * - ``decap_error`` + - ``exception`` + - Traps NVE and IPinIP packets that the device decided to drop because of + failure during decapsulation (e.g., packet being too short, reserved + bits set in VXLAN header) + * - ``overlay_smac_is_mc`` + - ``drop`` + - Traps NVE packets that the device decided to drop because their overlay + source MAC is multicast Driver-specific Packet Traps ============================ @@ -233,7 +248,8 @@ help debug packet drops caused by these exceptions. The following list includes links to the description of driver-specific traps registered by various device drivers: - * :doc:`devlink-trap-netdevsim` + * :doc:`netdevsim` + * :doc:`mlxsw` Generic Packet Trap Groups ========================== @@ -258,6 +274,9 @@ narrow. The description of these groups must be added to the following table: * - ``buffer_drops`` - Contains packet traps for packets that were dropped by the device due to an enqueue decision + * - ``tunnel_drops`` + - Contains packet traps for packets that were dropped by the device during + tunnel encapsulation / decapsulation Testing ======= diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..087ff54d53fc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ +Linux Devlink Documentation +=========================== + +devlink is an API to expose device information and resources not directly +related to any device class, such as chip-wide/switch-ASIC-wide configuration. + +Interface documentation +----------------------- + +The following pages describe various interfaces available through devlink in +general. + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + devlink-dpipe + devlink-health + devlink-info + devlink-params + devlink-region + devlink-resource + devlink-trap + +Driver-specific documentation +----------------------------- + +Each driver that implements ``devlink`` is expected to document what +parameters, info versions, and other features it supports. + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 1 + + bnxt + ionic + mlx4 + mlx5 + mlxsw + mv88e6xxx + netdevsim + nfp + qed + ti-cpsw-switch diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..48da9c92d584 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +ionic devlink support +===================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``ionic`` +device driver. + +Info versions +============= + +The ``ionic`` driver reports the following versions + +.. list-table:: devlink info versions implemented + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``fw`` + - running + - Version of firmware running on the device + * - ``asic.id`` + - fixed + - The ASIC type for this device + * - ``asic.rev`` + - fixed + - The revision of the ASIC for this device diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx4.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx4.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..7b2d17ea5471 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx4.rst @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==================== +mlx4 devlink support +==================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``mlx4`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``internal_err_reset`` + - driverinit, runtime + * - ``max_macs`` + - driverinit + * - ``region_snapshot_enable`` + - driverinit, runtime + +The ``mlx4`` driver also implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``enable_64b_cqe_eqe`` + - Boolean + - driverinit + - Enable 64 byte CQEs/EQEs, if the FW supports it. + * - ``enable_4k_uar`` + - Boolean + - driverinit + - Enable using the 4k UAR. + +The ``mlx4`` driver supports reloading via ``DEVLINK_CMD_RELOAD`` + +Regions +======= + +The ``mlx4`` driver supports dumping the firmware PCI crspace and health +buffer during a critical firmware issue. + +In case a firmware command times out, firmware getting stuck, or a non zero +value on the catastrophic buffer, a snapshot will be taken by the driver. + +The ``cr-space`` region will contain the firmware PCI crspace contents. The +``fw-health`` region will contain the device firmware's health buffer. +Snapshots for both of these regions are taken on the same event triggers. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx5.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx5.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..629a6e69c036 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlx5.rst @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +==================== +mlx5 devlink support +==================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``mlx5`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``enable_roce`` + - driverinit + +The ``mlx5`` driver also implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``flow_steering_mode`` + - string + - runtime + - Controls the flow steering mode of the driver + + * ``dmfs`` Device managed flow steering. In DMFS mode, the HW + steering entities are created and managed through firmware. + * ``smfs`` Software managed flow steering. In SMFS mode, the HW + steering entities are created and manage through the driver without + firmware intervention. + +The ``mlx5`` driver supports reloading via ``DEVLINK_CMD_RELOAD`` + +Info versions +============= + +The ``mlx5`` driver reports the following versions + +.. list-table:: devlink info versions implemented + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``fw.psid`` + - fixed + - Used to represent the board id of the device. + * - ``fw.version`` + - stored, running + - Three digit major.minor.subminor firmware version number. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlxsw.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlxsw.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..cf857cb4ba8f --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mlxsw.rst @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +===================== +mlxsw devlink support +===================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``mlxsw`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``fw_load_policy`` + - driverinit + +The ``mlxsw`` driver also implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``acl_region_rehash_interval`` + - u32 + - runtime + - Sets an interval for periodic ACL region rehashes. The value is + specified in milliseconds, with a minimum of ``3000``. The value of + ``0`` disables periodic work entirely. The first rehash will be run + immediately after the value is set. + +The ``mlxsw`` driver supports reloading via ``DEVLINK_CMD_RELOAD`` + +Info versions +============= + +The ``mlxsw`` driver reports the following versions + +.. list-table:: devlink info versions implemented + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``hw.revision`` + - fixed + - The hardware revision for this board + * - ``fw.psid`` + - fixed + - Firmware PSID + * - ``fw.version`` + - running + - Three digit firmware version + +Driver-specific Traps +===================== + +.. list-table:: List of Driver-specific Traps Registered by ``mlxsw`` + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``irif_disabled`` + - ``drop`` + - Traps packets that the device decided to drop because they need to be + routed from a disabled router interface (RIF). This can happen during + RIF dismantle, when the RIF is first disabled before being removed + completely + * - ``erif_disabled`` + - ``drop`` + - Traps packets that the device decided to drop because they need to be + routed through a disabled router interface (RIF). This can happen during + RIF dismantle, when the RIF is first disabled before being removed + completely diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/mv88e6xxx.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mv88e6xxx.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..c621212a47a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/mv88e6xxx.rst @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================= +mv88e6xxx devlink support +========================= + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``mv88e6xxx`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +The ``mv88e6xxx`` driver implements the following driver-specific parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``ATU_hash`` + - u8 + - runtime + - Select one of four possible hashing algorithms for MAC addresses in + the Address Translation Unit. A value of 3 may work better than the + default of 1 when many MAC addresses have the same OUI. Only the + values 0 to 3 are valid for this parameter. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/netdevsim.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/netdevsim.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2a266b7e7b38 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/netdevsim.rst @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +========================= +netdevsim devlink support +========================= + +This document describes the ``devlink`` features supported by the +``netdevsim`` device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``max_macs`` + - driverinit + +The ``netdevsim`` driver also implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``test1`` + - Boolean + - driverinit + - Test parameter used to show how a driver-specific devlink parameter + can be implemented. + +The ``netdevsim`` driver supports reloading via ``DEVLINK_CMD_RELOAD`` + +Regions +======= + +The ``netdevsim`` driver exposes a ``dummy`` region as an example of how the +devlink-region interfaces work. A snapshot is taken whenever the +``take_snapshot`` debugfs file is written to. + +Resources +========= + +The ``netdevsim`` driver exposes resources to control the number of FIB +entries and FIB rule entries that the driver will allow. + +.. code:: shell + + $ devlink resource set netdevsim/netdevsim0 path /IPv4/fib size 96 + $ devlink resource set netdevsim/netdevsim0 path /IPv4/fib-rules size 16 + $ devlink resource set netdevsim/netdevsim0 path /IPv6/fib size 64 + $ devlink resource set netdevsim/netdevsim0 path /IPv6/fib-rules size 16 + $ devlink dev reload netdevsim/netdevsim0 + +Driver-specific Traps +===================== + +.. list-table:: List of Driver-specific Traps Registered by ``netdevsim`` + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``fid_miss`` + - ``exception`` + - When a packet enters the device it is classified to a filtering + indentifier (FID) based on the ingress port and VLAN. This trap is used + to trap packets for which a FID could not be found diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/nfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/nfp.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..a1717db0dfcc --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/nfp.rst @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=================== +nfp devlink support +=================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``nfp`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +.. list-table:: Generic parameters implemented + + * - Name + - Mode + * - ``fw_load_policy`` + - permanent + * - ``reset_dev_on_drv_probe`` + - permanent + +Info versions +============= + +The ``nfp`` driver reports the following versions + +.. list-table:: devlink info versions implemented + :widths: 5 5 90 + + * - Name + - Type + - Description + * - ``board.id`` + - fixed + - Part number identifying the board design + * - ``board.rev`` + - fixed + - Revision of the board design + * - ``board.manufacture`` + - fixed + - Vendor of the board design + * - ``board.model`` + - fixed + - Model name of the board design + * - ``fw.bundle_id`` + - stored, running + - Firmware bundle id + * - ``fw.mgmt`` + - stored, running + - Version of the management firmware + * - ``fw.cpld`` + - stored, running + - The CPLD firmware component version + * - ``fw.app`` + - stored, running + - The APP firmware component version + * - ``fw.undi`` + - stored, running + - The UNDI firmware component version + * - ``fw.ncsi`` + - stored, running + - The NSCI firmware component version + * - ``chip.init`` + - stored, running + - The CFGR firmware component version diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/qed.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/qed.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..805c6f63621a --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/qed.rst @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +=================== +qed devlink support +=================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``qed`` core +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +The ``qed`` driver implements the following driver-specific parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``iwarp_cmt`` + - Boolean + - runtime + - Enable iWARP functionality for 100g devices. Note that this impacts + L2 performance, and is therefore not enabled by default. diff --git a/Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst b/Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dc399e32abaa --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +============================== +ti-cpsw-switch devlink support +============================== + +This document describes the devlink features implemented by the ``ti-cpsw-switch`` +device driver. + +Parameters +========== + +The ``ti-cpsw-switch`` driver implements the following driver-specific +parameters. + +.. list-table:: Driver-specific parameters implemented + :widths: 5 5 5 85 + + * - Name + - Type + - Mode + - Description + * - ``ale_bypass`` + - Boolean + - runtime + - Enables ALE_CONTROL(4).BYPASS mode for debugging purposes. In this + mode, all packets will be sent to the host port only. + * - ``switch_mode`` + - Boolean + - runtime + - Enable switch mode diff --git a/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst b/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst index eef20d0bcf7c..64553d8d91cb 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/dsa/sja1105.rst @@ -230,12 +230,6 @@ simultaneously on two ports. The driver checks the consistency of the schedules against this restriction and errors out when appropriate. Schedule analysis is needed to avoid this, which is outside the scope of the document. -At the moment, the time-aware scheduler can only be triggered based on a -standalone clock and not based on PTP time. This means the base-time argument -from tc-taprio is ignored and the schedule starts right away. It also means it -is more difficult to phase-align the scheduler with the other devices in the -network. - Device Tree bindings and board design ===================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ethtool-netlink.rst b/Documentation/networking/ethtool-netlink.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..f1f868479ceb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/networking/ethtool-netlink.rst @@ -0,0 +1,618 @@ +============================= +Netlink interface for ethtool +============================= + + +Basic information +================= + +Netlink interface for ethtool uses generic netlink family ``ethtool`` +(userspace application should use macros ``ETHTOOL_GENL_NAME`` and +``ETHTOOL_GENL_VERSION`` defined in ``<linux/ethtool_netlink.h>`` uapi +header). This family does not use a specific header, all information in +requests and replies is passed using netlink attributes. + +The ethtool netlink interface uses extended ACK for error and warning +reporting, userspace application developers are encouraged to make these +messages available to user in a suitable way. + +Requests can be divided into three categories: "get" (retrieving information), +"set" (setting parameters) and "action" (invoking an action). + +All "set" and "action" type requests require admin privileges +(``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` in the namespace). Most "get" type requests are allowed for +anyone but there are exceptions (where the response contains sensitive +information). In some cases, the request as such is allowed for anyone but +unprivileged users have attributes with sensitive information (e.g. +wake-on-lan password) omitted. + + +Conventions +=========== + +Attributes which represent a boolean value usually use NLA_U8 type so that we +can distinguish three states: "on", "off" and "not present" (meaning the +information is not available in "get" requests or value is not to be changed +in "set" requests). For these attributes, the "true" value should be passed as +number 1 but any non-zero value should be understood as "true" by recipient. +In the tables below, "bool" denotes NLA_U8 attributes interpreted in this way. + +In the message structure descriptions below, if an attribute name is suffixed +with "+", parent nest can contain multiple attributes of the same type. This +implements an array of entries. + + +Request header +============== + +Each request or reply message contains a nested attribute with common header. +Structure of this header is + + ============================== ====== ============================= + ``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_DEV_INDEX`` u32 device ifindex + ``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_DEV_NAME`` string device name + ``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_FLAGS`` u32 flags common for all requests + ============================== ====== ============================= + +``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_DEV_INDEX`` and ``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_DEV_NAME`` identify the +device message relates to. One of them is sufficient in requests, if both are +used, they must identify the same device. Some requests, e.g. global string +sets, do not require device identification. Most ``GET`` requests also allow +dump requests without device identification to query the same information for +all devices providing it (each device in a separate message). + +``ETHTOOL_A_HEADER_FLAGS`` is a bitmap of request flags common for all request +types. The interpretation of these flags is the same for all request types but +the flags may not apply to requests. Recognized flags are: + + ================================= =================================== + ``ETHTOOL_FLAG_COMPACT_BITSETS`` use compact format bitsets in reply + ``ETHTOOL_FLAG_OMIT_REPLY`` omit optional reply (_SET and _ACT) + ================================= =================================== + +New request flags should follow the general idea that if the flag is not set, +the behaviour is backward compatible, i.e. requests from old clients not aware +of the flag should be interpreted the way the client expects. A client must +not set flags it does not understand. + + +Bit sets +======== + +For short bitmaps of (reasonably) fixed length, standard ``NLA_BITFIELD32`` +type is used. For arbitrary length bitmaps, ethtool netlink uses a nested +attribute with contents of one of two forms: compact (two binary bitmaps +representing bit values and mask of affected bits) and bit-by-bit (list of +bits identified by either index or name). + +Verbose (bit-by-bit) bitsets allow sending symbolic names for bits together +with their values which saves a round trip (when the bitset is passed in a +request) or at least a second request (when the bitset is in a reply). This is +useful for one shot applications like traditional ethtool command. On the +other hand, long running applications like ethtool monitor (displaying +notifications) or network management daemons may prefer fetching the names +only once and using compact form to save message size. Notifications from +ethtool netlink interface always use compact form for bitsets. + +A bitset can represent either a value/mask pair (``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` +not set) or a single bitmap (``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` set). In requests +modifying a bitmap, the former changes the bit set in mask to values set in +value and preserves the rest; the latter sets the bits set in the bitmap and +clears the rest. + +Compact form: nested (bitset) atrribute contents: + + ============================ ====== ============================ + ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` flag no mask, only a list + ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_SIZE`` u32 number of significant bits + ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_VALUE`` binary bitmap of bit values + ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_MASK`` binary bitmap of valid bits + ============================ ====== ============================ + +Value and mask must have length at least ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_SIZE`` bits +rounded up to a multiple of 32 bits. They consist of 32-bit words in host byte +order, words ordered from least significant to most significant (i.e. the same +way as bitmaps are passed with ioctl interface). + +For compact form, ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_SIZE`` and ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_VALUE`` are +mandatory. ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_MASK`` attribute is mandatory if +``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` is not set (bitset represents a value/mask pair); +if ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` is not set, ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_MASK`` is not +allowed (bitset represents a single bitmap. + +Kernel bit set length may differ from userspace length if older application is +used on newer kernel or vice versa. If userspace bitmap is longer, an error is +issued only if the request actually tries to set values of some bits not +recognized by kernel. + +Bit-by-bit form: nested (bitset) attribute contents: + + +------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` | flag | no mask, only a list | + +------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_SIZE`` | u32 | number of significant bits | + +------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BITS`` | nested | array of bits | + +-+----------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BITS_BIT+`` | nested | one bit | + +-+-+--------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BIT_INDEX`` | u32 | bit index (0 for LSB) | + +-+-+--------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BIT_NAME`` | string | bit name | + +-+-+--------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BIT_VALUE`` | flag | present if bit is set | + +-+-+--------------------------------+--------+-----------------------------+ + +Bit size is optional for bit-by-bit form. ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BITS`` nest can +only contain ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BITS_BIT`` attributes but there can be an +arbitrary number of them. A bit may be identified by its index or by its +name. When used in requests, listed bits are set to 0 or 1 according to +``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BIT_VALUE``, the rest is preserved. A request fails if +index exceeds kernel bit length or if name is not recognized. + +When ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_NOMASK`` flag is present, bitset is interpreted as +a simple bitmap. ``ETHTOOL_A_BITSET_BIT_VALUE`` attributes are not used in +such case. Such bitset represents a bitmap with listed bits set and the rest +zero. + +In requests, application can use either form. Form used by kernel in reply is +determined by ``ETHTOOL_FLAG_COMPACT_BITSETS`` flag in flags field of request +header. Semantics of value and mask depends on the attribute. + + +List of message types +===================== + +All constants identifying message types use ``ETHTOOL_CMD_`` prefix and suffix +according to message purpose: + + ============== ====================================== + ``_GET`` userspace request to retrieve data + ``_SET`` userspace request to set data + ``_ACT`` userspace request to perform an action + ``_GET_REPLY`` kernel reply to a ``GET`` request + ``_SET_REPLY`` kernel reply to a ``SET`` request + ``_ACT_REPLY`` kernel reply to an ``ACT`` request + ``_NTF`` kernel notification + ============== ====================================== + +Userspace to kernel: + + ===================================== ================================ + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_STRSET_GET`` get string set + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_GET`` get link settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_SET`` set link settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_GET`` get link modes info + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_SET`` set link modes info + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKSTATE_GET`` get link state + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_GET`` get debugging settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_SET`` set debugging settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_GET`` get wake-on-lan settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_SET`` set wake-on-lan settings + ===================================== ================================ + +Kernel to userspace: + + ===================================== ================================= + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_STRSET_GET_REPLY`` string set contents + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_GET_REPLY`` link settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_NTF`` link settings notification + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_GET_REPLY`` link modes info + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_NTF`` link modes notification + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKSTATE_GET_REPLY`` link state info + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_GET_REPLY`` debugging settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_NTF`` debugging settings notification + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_GET_REPLY`` wake-on-lan settings + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_NTF`` wake-on-lan settings notification + ===================================== ================================= + +``GET`` requests are sent by userspace applications to retrieve device +information. They usually do not contain any message specific attributes. +Kernel replies with corresponding "GET_REPLY" message. For most types, ``GET`` +request with ``NLM_F_DUMP`` and no device identification can be used to query +the information for all devices supporting the request. + +If the data can be also modified, corresponding ``SET`` message with the same +layout as corresponding ``GET_REPLY`` is used to request changes. Only +attributes where a change is requested are included in such request (also, not +all attributes may be changed). Replies to most ``SET`` request consist only +of error code and extack; if kernel provides additional data, it is sent in +the form of corresponding ``SET_REPLY`` message which can be suppressed by +setting ``ETHTOOL_FLAG_OMIT_REPLY`` flag in request header. + +Data modification also triggers sending a ``NTF`` message with a notification. +These usually bear only a subset of attributes which was affected by the +change. The same notification is issued if the data is modified using other +means (mostly ioctl ethtool interface). Unlike notifications from ethtool +netlink code which are only sent if something actually changed, notifications +triggered by ioctl interface may be sent even if the request did not actually +change any data. + +``ACT`` messages request kernel (driver) to perform a specific action. If some +information is reported by kernel (which can be suppressed by setting +``ETHTOOL_FLAG_OMIT_REPLY`` flag in request header), the reply takes form of +an ``ACT_REPLY`` message. Performing an action also triggers a notification +(``NTF`` message). + +Later sections describe the format and semantics of these messages. + + +STRSET_GET +========== + +Requests contents of a string set as provided by ioctl commands +``ETHTOOL_GSSET_INFO`` and ``ETHTOOL_GSTRINGS.`` String sets are not user +writeable so that the corresponding ``STRSET_SET`` message is only used in +kernel replies. There are two types of string sets: global (independent of +a device, e.g. device feature names) and device specific (e.g. device private +flags). + +Request contents: + + +---------------------------------------+--------+------------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_HEADER`` | nested | request header | + +---------------------------------------+--------+------------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_STRINGSETS`` | nested | string set to request | + +-+-------------------------------------+--------+------------------------+ + | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSETS_STRINGSET+`` | nested | one string set | + +-+-+-----------------------------------+--------+------------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSET_ID`` | u32 | set id | + +-+-+-----------------------------------+--------+------------------------+ + +Kernel response contents: + + +---------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_HEADER`` | nested | reply header | + +---------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_STRINGSETS`` | nested | array of string sets | + +-+-------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSETS_STRINGSET+`` | nested | one string set | + +-+-+-----------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSET_ID`` | u32 | set id | + +-+-+-----------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSET_COUNT`` | u32 | number of strings | + +-+-+-----------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGSET_STRINGS`` | nested | array of strings | + +-+-+-+---------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRINGS_STRING+`` | nested | one string | + +-+-+-+-+-------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRING_INDEX`` | u32 | string index | + +-+-+-+-+-------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | | | | | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRING_VALUE`` | string | string value | + +-+-+-+-+-------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + | ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_COUNTS_ONLY`` | flag | return only counts | + +---------------------------------------+--------+-----------------------+ + +Device identification in request header is optional. Depending on its presence +a and ``NLM_F_DUMP`` flag, there are three type of ``STRSET_GET`` requests: + + - no ``NLM_F_DUMP,`` no device: get "global" stringsets + - no ``NLM_F_DUMP``, with device: get string sets related to the device + - ``NLM_F_DUMP``, no device: get device related string sets for all devices + +If there is no ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_STRINGSETS`` array, all string sets of +requested type are returned, otherwise only those specified in the request. +Flag ``ETHTOOL_A_STRSET_COUNTS_ONLY`` tells kernel to only return string +counts of the sets, not the actual strings. + + +LINKINFO_GET +============ + +Requests link settings as provided by ``ETHTOOL_GLINKSETTINGS`` except for +link modes and autonegotiation related information. The request does not use +any attributes. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_HEADER`` nested request header + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Kernel response contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_HEADER`` nested reply header + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_PORT`` u8 physical port + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_PHYADDR`` u8 phy MDIO address + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_TP_MDIX`` u8 MDI(-X) status + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_TP_MDIX_CTRL`` u8 MDI(-X) control + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_TRANSCEIVER`` u8 transceiver + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Attributes and their values have the same meaning as matching members of the +corresponding ioctl structures. + +``LINKINFO_GET`` allows dump requests (kernel returns reply message for all +devices supporting the request). + + +LINKINFO_SET +============ + +``LINKINFO_SET`` request allows setting some of the attributes reported by +``LINKINFO_GET``. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_HEADER`` nested request header + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_PORT`` u8 physical port + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_PHYADDR`` u8 phy MDIO address + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKINFO_TP_MDIX_CTRL`` u8 MDI(-X) control + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +MDI(-X) status and transceiver cannot be set, request with the corresponding +attributes is rejected. + + +LINKMODES_GET +============= + +Requests link modes (supported, advertised and peer advertised) and related +information (autonegotiation status, link speed and duplex) as provided by +``ETHTOOL_GLINKSETTINGS``. The request does not use any attributes. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_HEADER`` nested request header + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Kernel response contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_HEADER`` nested reply header + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_AUTONEG`` u8 autonegotiation status + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_OURS`` bitset advertised link modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_PEER`` bitset partner link modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_SPEED`` u32 link speed (Mb/s) + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_DUPLEX`` u8 duplex mode + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +For ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_OURS``, value represents advertised modes and mask +represents supported modes. ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_PEER`` in the reply is a bit +list. + +``LINKMODES_GET`` allows dump requests (kernel returns reply messages for all +devices supporting the request). + + +LINKMODES_SET +============= + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_HEADER`` nested request header + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_AUTONEG`` u8 autonegotiation status + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_OURS`` bitset advertised link modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_PEER`` bitset partner link modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_SPEED`` u32 link speed (Mb/s) + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_DUPLEX`` u8 duplex mode + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_OURS`` bit set allows setting advertised link modes. If +autonegotiation is on (either set now or kept from before), advertised modes +are not changed (no ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKMODES_OURS`` attribute) and at least one +of speed and duplex is specified, kernel adjusts advertised modes to all +supported modes matching speed, duplex or both (whatever is specified). This +autoselection is done on ethtool side with ioctl interface, netlink interface +is supposed to allow requesting changes without knowing what exactly kernel +supports. + + +LINKSTATE_GET +============= + +Requests link state information. At the moment, only link up/down flag (as +provided by ``ETHTOOL_GLINK`` ioctl command) is provided but some future +extensions are planned (e.g. link down reason). This request does not have any +attributes. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKSTATE_HEADER`` nested request header + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Kernel response contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKSTATE_HEADER`` nested reply header + ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKSTATE_LINK`` bool link state (up/down) + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +For most NIC drivers, the value of ``ETHTOOL_A_LINKSTATE_LINK`` returns +carrier flag provided by ``netif_carrier_ok()`` but there are drivers which +define their own handler. + +``LINKSTATE_GET`` allows dump requests (kernel returns reply messages for all +devices supporting the request). + + +DEBUG_GET +========= + +Requests debugging settings of a device. At the moment, only message mask is +provided. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_HEADER`` nested request header + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Kernel response contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_HEADER`` nested reply header + ``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_MSGMASK`` bitset message mask + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +The message mask (``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_MSGMASK``) is equal to message level as +provided by ``ETHTOOL_GMSGLVL`` and set by ``ETHTOOL_SMSGLVL`` in ioctl +interface. While it is called message level there for historical reasons, most +drivers and almost all newer drivers use it as a mask of enabled message +classes (represented by ``NETIF_MSG_*`` constants); therefore netlink +interface follows its actual use in practice. + +``DEBUG_GET`` allows dump requests (kernel returns reply messages for all +devices supporting the request). + + +DEBUG_SET +========= + +Set or update debugging settings of a device. At the moment, only message mask +is supported. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_HEADER`` nested request header + ``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_MSGMASK`` bitset message mask + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +``ETHTOOL_A_DEBUG_MSGMASK`` bit set allows setting or modifying mask of +enabled debugging message types for the device. + + +WOL_GET +======= + +Query device wake-on-lan settings. Unlike most "GET" type requests, +``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_GET`` requires (netns) ``CAP_NET_ADMIN`` privileges as it +(potentially) provides SecureOn(tm) password which is confidential. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_HEADER`` nested request header + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +Kernel response contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_HEADER`` nested reply header + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_MODES`` bitset mask of enabled WoL modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_SOPASS`` binary SecureOn(tm) password + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +In reply, ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_MODES`` mask consists of modes supported by the +device, value of modes which are enabled. ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_SOPASS`` is only +included in reply if ``WAKE_MAGICSECURE`` mode is supported. + + +WOL_SET +======= + +Set or update wake-on-lan settings. + +Request contents: + + ==================================== ====== ========================== + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_HEADER`` nested request header + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_MODES`` bitset enabled WoL modes + ``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_SOPASS`` binary SecureOn(tm) password + ==================================== ====== ========================== + +``ETHTOOL_A_WOL_SOPASS`` is only allowed for devices supporting +``WAKE_MAGICSECURE`` mode. + + +Request translation +=================== + +The following table maps ioctl commands to netlink commands providing their +functionality. Entries with "n/a" in right column are commands which do not +have their netlink replacement yet. + + =================================== ===================================== + ioctl command netlink command + =================================== ===================================== + ``ETHTOOL_GSET`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_SSET`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_GDRVINFO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GREGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GWOL`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_SWOL`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_WOL_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_GMSGLVL`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_SMSGLVL`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_DEBUG_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_NWAY_RST`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GLINK`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKSTATE_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_GEEPROM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SEEPROM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GCOALESCE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SCOALESCE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRINGPARAM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRINGPARAM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GPAUSEPARAM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SPAUSEPARAM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXCSUM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXCSUM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GTXCSUM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_STXCSUM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GSG`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SSG`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_TEST`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GSTRINGS`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_STRSET_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_PHYS_ID`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GSTATS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GTSO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_STSO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GPERMADDR`` rtnetlink ``RTM_GETLINK`` + ``ETHTOOL_GUFO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SUFO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GGSO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SGSO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GFLAGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SFLAGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GPFLAGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SPFLAGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXFH`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXFH`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GGRO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SGRO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXRINGS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXCLSRLCNT`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXCLSRULE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXCLSRLALL`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXCLSRLDEL`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXCLSRLINS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_FLASHDEV`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_RESET`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXNTUPLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRXNTUPLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GSSET_INFO`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_STRSET_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_GRXFHINDIR`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRXFHINDIR`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GFEATURES`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SFEATURES`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GCHANNELS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SCHANNELS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SET_DUMP`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GET_DUMP_FLAG`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GET_DUMP_DATA`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GET_TS_INFO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GMODULEINFO`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GMODULEEEPROM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GEEE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SEEE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GRSSH`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SRSSH`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GTUNABLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_STUNABLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GPHYSTATS`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_PERQUEUE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GLINKSETTINGS`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_GET`` + ``ETHTOOL_SLINKSETTINGS`` ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKINFO_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_MSG_LINKMODES_SET`` + ``ETHTOOL_PHY_GTUNABLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_PHY_STUNABLE`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_GFECPARAM`` n/a + ``ETHTOOL_SFECPARAM`` n/a + =================================== ===================================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/index.rst index 5acab1290e03..d07d9855dcd3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/index.rst @@ -13,9 +13,8 @@ Contents: can_ucan_protocol device_drivers/index dsa/index - devlink-info-versions - devlink-trap - devlink-trap-netdevsim + devlink/index + ethtool-netlink ieee802154 j1939 kapi diff --git a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt index fd26788e8c96..5f53faff4e25 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt +++ b/Documentation/networking/ip-sysctl.txt @@ -479,6 +479,10 @@ tcp_no_metrics_save - BOOLEAN degradation. If set, TCP will not cache metrics on closing connections. +tcp_no_ssthresh_metrics_save - BOOLEAN + Controls whether TCP saves ssthresh metrics in the route cache. + Default is 1, which disables ssthresh metrics. + tcp_orphan_retries - INTEGER This value influences the timeout of a locally closed TCP connection, when RTO retransmissions remain unacknowledged. @@ -603,7 +607,7 @@ tcp_synack_retries - INTEGER with the current initial RTO of 1second. With this the final timeout for a passive TCP connection will happen after 63seconds. -tcp_syncookies - BOOLEAN +tcp_syncookies - INTEGER Only valid when the kernel was compiled with CONFIG_SYN_COOKIES Send out syncookies when the syn backlog queue of a socket overflows. This is to prevent against the common 'SYN flood attack' diff --git a/Documentation/networking/j1939.rst b/Documentation/networking/j1939.rst index dc60b13fcd09..f5be243d250a 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/j1939.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/j1939.rst @@ -339,7 +339,7 @@ To claim an address following code example can be used: .pgn = J1939_PGN_ADDRESS_CLAIMED, .pgn_mask = J1939_PGN_PDU1_MAX, }, { - .pgn = J1939_PGN_ADDRESS_REQUEST, + .pgn = J1939_PGN_REQUEST, .pgn_mask = J1939_PGN_PDU1_MAX, }, { .pgn = J1939_PGN_ADDRESS_COMMANDED, diff --git a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst index 642fa963be3c..d5c9320901c3 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/netdev-FAQ.rst @@ -34,8 +34,8 @@ the names, the ``net`` tree is for fixes to existing code already in the mainline tree from Linus, and ``net-next`` is where the new code goes for the future release. You can find the trees here: -- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net.git -- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/davem/net-next.git +- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/netdev/net.git +- https://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/netdev/net-next.git Q: How often do changes from these trees make it to the mainline Linus tree? ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- diff --git a/Documentation/networking/phy.rst b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst index e0a7c7af6525..1e4735cc0553 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/phy.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/phy.rst @@ -267,6 +267,24 @@ Some of the interface modes are described below: duplex, pause or other settings. This is dependent on the MAC and/or PHY behaviour. +``PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_10GBASER`` + This is the IEEE 802.3 Clause 49 defined 10GBASE-R protocol used with + various different mediums. Please refer to the IEEE standard for a + definition of this. + + Note: 10GBASE-R is just one protocol that can be used with XFI and SFI. + XFI and SFI permit multiple protocols over a single SERDES lane, and + also defines the electrical characteristics of the signals with a host + compliance board plugged into the host XFP/SFP connector. Therefore, + XFI and SFI are not PHY interface types in their own right. + +``PHY_INTERFACE_MODE_10GKR`` + This is the IEEE 802.3 Clause 49 defined 10GBASE-R with Clause 73 + autonegotiation. Please refer to the IEEE standard for further + information. + + Note: due to legacy usage, some 10GBASE-R usage incorrectly makes + use of this definition. Pause frames / flow control =========================== diff --git a/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst index a5e00a159d21..d753a309f9d1 100644 --- a/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst +++ b/Documentation/networking/sfp-phylink.rst @@ -251,7 +251,8 @@ this documentation. phylink_mac_change(priv->phylink, link_is_up); where ``link_is_up`` is true if the link is currently up or false - otherwise. + otherwise. If a MAC is unable to provide these interrupts, then + it should set ``priv->phylink_config.pcs_poll = true;`` in step 9. 11. Verify that the driver does not call:: diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/maintainer-entry-profile.rst b/Documentation/nvdimm/maintainer-entry-profile.rst index 77081fd9be95..efe37adadcea 100644 --- a/Documentation/nvdimm/maintainer-entry-profile.rst +++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/maintainer-entry-profile.rst @@ -33,7 +33,8 @@ Those tests need to be passed before the patches go upstream, but not necessarily before initial posting. Contact the list if you need help getting the test environment set up. -### ACPI Device Specific Methods (_DSM) +ACPI Device Specific Methods (_DSM) +~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Before patches enabling for a new _DSM family will be considered it must be assigned a format-interface-code from the NVDIMM Sub-team of the ACPI Specification Working Group. In general, the stance of the subsystem is diff --git a/Documentation/padata.txt b/Documentation/padata.txt deleted file mode 100644 index b37ba1eaace3..000000000000 --- a/Documentation/padata.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,163 +0,0 @@ -======================================= -The padata parallel execution mechanism -======================================= - -:Last updated: for 2.6.36 - -Padata is a mechanism by which the kernel can farm work out to be done in -parallel on multiple CPUs while retaining the ordering of tasks. It was -developed for use with the IPsec code, which needs to be able to perform -encryption and decryption on large numbers of packets without reordering -those packets. The crypto developers made a point of writing padata in a -sufficiently general fashion that it could be put to other uses as well. - -The first step in using padata is to set up a padata_instance structure for -overall control of how tasks are to be run:: - - #include <linux/padata.h> - - struct padata_instance *padata_alloc(const char *name, - const struct cpumask *pcpumask, - const struct cpumask *cbcpumask); - -'name' simply identifies the instance. - -The pcpumask describes which processors will be used to execute work -submitted to this instance in parallel. The cbcpumask defines which -processors are allowed to be used as the serialization callback processor. -The workqueue wq is where the work will actually be done; it should be -a multithreaded queue, naturally. - -To allocate a padata instance with the cpu_possible_mask for both -cpumasks this helper function can be used:: - - struct padata_instance *padata_alloc_possible(struct workqueue_struct *wq); - -Note: Padata maintains two kinds of cpumasks internally. The user supplied -cpumasks, submitted by padata_alloc/padata_alloc_possible and the 'usable' -cpumasks. The usable cpumasks are always a subset of active CPUs in the -user supplied cpumasks; these are the cpumasks padata actually uses. So -it is legal to supply a cpumask to padata that contains offline CPUs. -Once an offline CPU in the user supplied cpumask comes online, padata -is going to use it. - -There are functions for enabling and disabling the instance:: - - int padata_start(struct padata_instance *pinst); - void padata_stop(struct padata_instance *pinst); - -These functions are setting or clearing the "PADATA_INIT" flag; -if that flag is not set, other functions will refuse to work. -padata_start returns zero on success (flag set) or -EINVAL if the -padata cpumask contains no active CPU (flag not set). -padata_stop clears the flag and blocks until the padata instance -is unused. - -The list of CPUs to be used can be adjusted with these functions:: - - int padata_set_cpumasks(struct padata_instance *pinst, - cpumask_var_t pcpumask, - cpumask_var_t cbcpumask); - int padata_set_cpumask(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpumask_type, - cpumask_var_t cpumask); - int padata_add_cpu(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpu, int mask); - int padata_remove_cpu(struct padata_instance *pinst, int cpu, int mask); - -Changing the CPU masks are expensive operations, though, so it should not be -done with great frequency. - -It's possible to change both cpumasks of a padata instance with -padata_set_cpumasks by specifying the cpumasks for parallel execution (pcpumask) -and for the serial callback function (cbcpumask). padata_set_cpumask is used to -change just one of the cpumasks. Here cpumask_type is one of PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, -PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL and cpumask specifies the new cpumask to use. -To simply add or remove one CPU from a certain cpumask the functions -padata_add_cpu/padata_remove_cpu are used. cpu specifies the CPU to add or -remove and mask is one of PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL. - -If a user is interested in padata cpumask changes, he can register to -the padata cpumask change notifier:: - - int padata_register_cpumask_notifier(struct padata_instance *pinst, - struct notifier_block *nblock); - -To unregister from that notifier:: - - int padata_unregister_cpumask_notifier(struct padata_instance *pinst, - struct notifier_block *nblock); - -The padata cpumask change notifier notifies about changes of the usable -cpumasks, i.e. the subset of active CPUs in the user supplied cpumask. - -Padata calls the notifier chain with:: - - blocking_notifier_call_chain(&pinst->cpumask_change_notifier, - notification_mask, - &pd_new->cpumask); - -Here cpumask_change_notifier is registered notifier, notification_mask -is one of PADATA_CPU_SERIAL, PADATA_CPU_PARALLEL and cpumask is a pointer -to a struct padata_cpumask that contains the new cpumask information. - -Actually submitting work to the padata instance requires the creation of a -padata_priv structure:: - - struct padata_priv { - /* Other stuff here... */ - void (*parallel)(struct padata_priv *padata); - void (*serial)(struct padata_priv *padata); - }; - -This structure will almost certainly be embedded within some larger -structure specific to the work to be done. Most of its fields are private to -padata, but the structure should be zeroed at initialisation time, and the -parallel() and serial() functions should be provided. Those functions will -be called in the process of getting the work done as we will see -momentarily. - -The submission of work is done with:: - - int padata_do_parallel(struct padata_instance *pinst, - struct padata_priv *padata, int cb_cpu); - -The pinst and padata structures must be set up as described above; cb_cpu -specifies which CPU will be used for the final callback when the work is -done; it must be in the current instance's CPU mask. The return value from -padata_do_parallel() is zero on success, indicating that the work is in -progress. -EBUSY means that somebody, somewhere else is messing with the -instance's CPU mask, while -EINVAL is a complaint about cb_cpu not being -in that CPU mask or about a not running instance. - -Each task submitted to padata_do_parallel() will, in turn, be passed to -exactly one call to the above-mentioned parallel() function, on one CPU, so -true parallelism is achieved by submitting multiple tasks. parallel() runs with -software interrupts disabled and thus cannot sleep. The parallel() -function gets the padata_priv structure pointer as its lone parameter; -information about the actual work to be done is probably obtained by using -container_of() to find the enclosing structure. - -Note that parallel() has no return value; the padata subsystem assumes that -parallel() will take responsibility for the task from this point. The work -need not be completed during this call, but, if parallel() leaves work -outstanding, it should be prepared to be called again with a new job before -the previous one completes. When a task does complete, parallel() (or -whatever function actually finishes the job) should inform padata of the -fact with a call to:: - - void padata_do_serial(struct padata_priv *padata); - -At some point in the future, padata_do_serial() will trigger a call to the -serial() function in the padata_priv structure. That call will happen on -the CPU requested in the initial call to padata_do_parallel(); it, too, is -run with local software interrupts disabled. -Note that this call may be deferred for a while since the padata code takes -pains to ensure that tasks are completed in the order in which they were -submitted. - -The one remaining function in the padata API should be called to clean up -when a padata instance is no longer needed:: - - void padata_free(struct padata_instance *pinst); - -This function will busy-wait while any remaining tasks are completed, so it -might be best not to call it while there is work outstanding. diff --git a/Documentation/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst b/Documentation/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst index 799580acc8de..33edae654599 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst @@ -1,3 +1,5 @@ +.. _embargoed_hardware_issues: + Embargoed hardware issues ========================= @@ -36,7 +38,10 @@ issue according to our documented process. The list is encrypted and email to the list can be sent by either PGP or S/MIME encrypted and must be signed with the reporter's PGP key or S/MIME certificate. The list's PGP key and S/MIME certificate are available from -https://www.kernel.org/.... +the following URLs: + + - PGP: https://www.kernel.org/static/files/hardware-security.asc + - S/MIME: https://www.kernel.org/static/files/hardware-security.crt While hardware security issues are often handled by the affected hardware vendor, we welcome contact from researchers or individuals who have @@ -55,14 +60,14 @@ Operation of mailing-lists ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ The encrypted mailing-lists which are used in our process are hosted on -Linux Foundation's IT infrastructure. By providing this service Linux -Foundation's director of IT Infrastructure security technically has the -ability to access the embargoed information, but is obliged to -confidentiality by his employment contract. Linux Foundation's director of -IT Infrastructure security is also responsible for the kernel.org -infrastructure. - -The Linux Foundation's current director of IT Infrastructure security is +Linux Foundation's IT infrastructure. By providing this service, members +of Linux Foundation's IT operations personnel technically have the +ability to access the embargoed information, but are obliged to +confidentiality by their employment contract. Linux Foundation IT +personnel are also responsible for operating and managing the rest of +kernel.org infrastructure. + +The Linux Foundation's current director of IT Project infrastructure is Konstantin Ryabitsev. @@ -255,7 +260,7 @@ an involved disclosed party. The current ambassadors list: Red Hat Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> SUSE Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz> - Amazon + Amazon Peter Bowen <pzb@amzn.com> Google Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> ============= ======================================================== @@ -274,7 +279,7 @@ software decrypts the email and re-encrypts it individually for each subscriber with the subscriber's PGP key or S/MIME certificate. Details about the mailing-list software and the setup which is used to ensure the security of the lists and protection of the data can be found here: -https://www.kernel.org/.... +https://korg.wiki.kernel.org/userdoc/remail. List keys ^^^^^^^^^ diff --git a/Documentation/process/index.rst b/Documentation/process/index.rst index 21aa7d5358e6..6399d92f0b21 100644 --- a/Documentation/process/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/process/index.rst @@ -60,6 +60,7 @@ lack of a better place. volatile-considered-harmful botching-up-ioctls clang-format + ../riscv/patch-acceptance .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/riscv/boot-image-header.rst b/Documentation/riscv/boot-image-header.rst index 518d46d2389d..d7752533865f 100644 --- a/Documentation/riscv/boot-image-header.rst +++ b/Documentation/riscv/boot-image-header.rst @@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ The following 64-byte header is present in decompressed Linux kernel image:: u64 res2 = 0; /* Reserved */ u64 magic = 0x5643534952; /* Magic number, little endian, "RISCV" */ u32 magic2 = 0x05435352; /* Magic number 2, little endian, "RSC\x05" */ - u32 res4; /* Reserved for PE COFF offset */ + u32 res3; /* Reserved for PE COFF offset */ This header format is compliant with PE/COFF header and largely inspired from ARM64 header. Thus, both ARM64 & RISC-V header can be combined into one common @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ Notes - This header can also be reused to support EFI stub for RISC-V in future. EFI specification needs PE/COFF image header in the beginning of the kernel image in order to load it as an EFI application. In order to support EFI stub, - code0 should be replaced with "MZ" magic string and res5(at offset 0x3c) should + code0 should be replaced with "MZ" magic string and res3(at offset 0x3c) should point to the rest of the PE/COFF header. - version field indicate header version number diff --git a/Documentation/riscv/index.rst b/Documentation/riscv/index.rst index 215fd3c1f2d5..fa33bffd8992 100644 --- a/Documentation/riscv/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/riscv/index.rst @@ -7,6 +7,7 @@ RISC-V architecture boot-image-header pmu + patch-acceptance .. only:: subproject and html diff --git a/Documentation/riscv/patch-acceptance.rst b/Documentation/riscv/patch-acceptance.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..dfe0ac5624fb --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/riscv/patch-acceptance.rst @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 + +arch/riscv maintenance guidelines for developers +================================================ + +Overview +-------- +The RISC-V instruction set architecture is developed in the open: +in-progress drafts are available for all to review and to experiment +with implementations. New module or extension drafts can change +during the development process - sometimes in ways that are +incompatible with previous drafts. This flexibility can present a +challenge for RISC-V Linux maintenance. Linux maintainers disapprove +of churn, and the Linux development process prefers well-reviewed and +tested code over experimental code. We wish to extend these same +principles to the RISC-V-related code that will be accepted for +inclusion in the kernel. + +Submit Checklist Addendum +------------------------- +We'll only accept patches for new modules or extensions if the +specifications for those modules or extensions are listed as being +"Frozen" or "Ratified" by the RISC-V Foundation. (Developers may, of +course, maintain their own Linux kernel trees that contain code for +any draft extensions that they wish.) + +Additionally, the RISC-V specification allows implementors to create +their own custom extensions. These custom extensions aren't required +to go through any review or ratification process by the RISC-V +Foundation. To avoid the maintenance complexity and potential +performance impact of adding kernel code for implementor-specific +RISC-V extensions, we'll only to accept patches for extensions that +have been officially frozen or ratified by the RISC-V Foundation. +(Implementors, may, of course, maintain their own Linux kernel trees +containing code for any custom extensions that they wish.) diff --git a/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst b/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst index 02aacd69ab96..392875a1b94e 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/alsa-configuration.rst @@ -495,7 +495,8 @@ Module for C-Media CMI8338/8738/8768/8770 PCI sound cards. mpu_port port address of MIDI interface (8338 only): 0x300,0x310,0x320,0x330 = legacy port, - 0 = disable (default) + 1 = integrated PCI port (default on 8738), + 0 = disable fm_port port address of OPL-3 FM synthesizer (8x38 only): 0x388 = legacy port, diff --git a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst index f169d58ca019..fa4968817696 100644 --- a/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst +++ b/Documentation/sound/kernel-api/writing-an-alsa-driver.rst @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ to details explained in the following section. { struct mychip *chip; int err; - static struct snd_device_ops ops = { + static const struct snd_device_ops ops = { .dev_free = snd_mychip_dev_free, }; @@ -675,7 +675,7 @@ low-level device with a specified ``ops``, :: - static struct snd_device_ops ops = { + static const struct snd_device_ops ops = { .dev_free = snd_mychip_dev_free, }; .... @@ -761,7 +761,7 @@ destructor and PCI entries. Example code is shown first, below. { struct mychip *chip; int err; - static struct snd_device_ops ops = { + static const struct snd_device_ops ops = { .dev_free = snd_mychip_dev_free, }; @@ -1058,7 +1058,7 @@ and the allocation would be like below: return err; } chip->iobase_phys = pci_resource_start(pci, 0); - chip->iobase_virt = ioremap_nocache(chip->iobase_phys, + chip->iobase_virt = ioremap(chip->iobase_phys, pci_resource_len(pci, 0)); and the corresponding destructor would be: @@ -3912,7 +3912,7 @@ For a raw-data proc-file, set the attributes as follows: :: - static struct snd_info_entry_ops my_file_io_ops = { + static const struct snd_info_entry_ops my_file_io_ops = { .read = my_file_io_read, }; diff --git a/Documentation/sphinx/automarkup.py b/Documentation/sphinx/automarkup.py index 5b6119ff69f4..b18236370742 100644 --- a/Documentation/sphinx/automarkup.py +++ b/Documentation/sphinx/automarkup.py @@ -5,8 +5,13 @@ # has been done. # from docutils import nodes +import sphinx from sphinx import addnodes -from sphinx.environment import NoUri +if sphinx.version_info[0] < 2 or \ + sphinx.version_info[0] == 2 and sphinx.version_info[1] < 1: + from sphinx.environment import NoUri +else: + from sphinx.errors import NoUri import re # diff --git a/Documentation/tee.txt b/Documentation/tee.txt index afacdf2fd1de..c8fad81c4563 100644 --- a/Documentation/tee.txt +++ b/Documentation/tee.txt @@ -112,6 +112,83 @@ kernel are handled by the kernel driver. Other RPC messages will be forwarded to tee-supplicant without further involvement of the driver, except switching shared memory buffer representation. +AMD-TEE driver +============== + +The AMD-TEE driver handles the communication with AMD's TEE environment. The +TEE environment is provided by AMD Secure Processor. + +The AMD Secure Processor (formerly called Platform Security Processor or PSP) +is a dedicated processor that features ARM TrustZone technology, along with a +software-based Trusted Execution Environment (TEE) designed to enable +third-party Trusted Applications. This feature is currently enabled only for +APUs. + +The following picture shows a high level overview of AMD-TEE:: + + | + x86 | + | + User space (Kernel space) | AMD Secure Processor (PSP) + ~~~~~~~~~~ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ | ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ + | + +--------+ | +-------------+ + | Client | | | Trusted | + +--------+ | | Application | + /\ | +-------------+ + || | /\ + || | || + || | \/ + || | +----------+ + || | | TEE | + || | | Internal | + \/ | | API | + +---------+ +-----------+---------+ +----------+ + | TEE | | TEE | AMD-TEE | | AMD-TEE | + | Client | | subsystem | driver | | Trusted | + | API | | | | | OS | + +---------+-----------+----+------+---------+---------+----------+ + | Generic TEE API | | ASP | Mailbox | + | IOCTL (TEE_IOC_*) | | driver | Register Protocol | + +--------------------------+ +---------+--------------------+ + +At the lowest level (in x86), the AMD Secure Processor (ASP) driver uses the +CPU to PSP mailbox regsister to submit commands to the PSP. The format of the +command buffer is opaque to the ASP driver. It's role is to submit commands to +the secure processor and return results to AMD-TEE driver. The interface +between AMD-TEE driver and AMD Secure Processor driver can be found in [6]. + +The AMD-TEE driver packages the command buffer payload for processing in TEE. +The command buffer format for the different TEE commands can be found in [7]. + +The TEE commands supported by AMD-TEE Trusted OS are: +* TEE_CMD_ID_LOAD_TA - loads a Trusted Application (TA) binary into + TEE environment. +* TEE_CMD_ID_UNLOAD_TA - unloads TA binary from TEE environment. +* TEE_CMD_ID_OPEN_SESSION - opens a session with a loaded TA. +* TEE_CMD_ID_CLOSE_SESSION - closes session with loaded TA +* TEE_CMD_ID_INVOKE_CMD - invokes a command with loaded TA +* TEE_CMD_ID_MAP_SHARED_MEM - maps shared memory +* TEE_CMD_ID_UNMAP_SHARED_MEM - unmaps shared memory + +AMD-TEE Trusted OS is the firmware running on AMD Secure Processor. + +The AMD-TEE driver registers itself with TEE subsystem and implements the +following driver function callbacks: + +* get_version - returns the driver implementation id and capability. +* open - sets up the driver context data structure. +* release - frees up driver resources. +* open_session - loads the TA binary and opens session with loaded TA. +* close_session - closes session with loaded TA and unloads it. +* invoke_func - invokes a command with loaded TA. + +cancel_req driver callback is not supported by AMD-TEE. + +The GlobalPlatform TEE Client API [5] can be used by the user space (client) to +talk to AMD's TEE. AMD's TEE provides a secure environment for loading, opening +a session, invoking commands and clossing session with TA. + References ========== @@ -125,3 +202,7 @@ References [5] http://www.globalplatform.org/specificationsdevice.asp look for "TEE Client API Specification v1.0" and click download. + +[6] include/linux/psp-tee.h + +[7] drivers/tee/amdtee/amdtee_if.h diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst index d2b5657ed33e..ff658e27d25b 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst +++ b/Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst @@ -95,7 +95,8 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: current_tracer: This is used to set or display the current tracer - that is configured. + that is configured. Changing the current tracer clears + the ring buffer content as well as the "snapshot" buffer. available_tracers: @@ -126,7 +127,8 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: This file holds the output of the trace in a human readable format (described below). Note, tracing is temporarily disabled when the file is open for reading. Once all readers - are closed, tracing is re-enabled. + are closed, tracing is re-enabled. Opening this file for + writing with the O_TRUNC flag clears the ring buffer content. trace_pipe: @@ -185,7 +187,8 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: CPU buffer and not total size of all buffers. The trace buffers are allocated in pages (blocks of memory that the kernel uses for allocation, usually 4 KB in size). - If the last page allocated has room for more bytes + A few extra pages may be allocated to accommodate buffer management + meta-data. If the last page allocated has room for more bytes than requested, the rest of the page will be used, making the actual allocation bigger than requested or shown. ( Note, the size may not be a multiple of the page size @@ -235,7 +238,7 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: This interface also allows for commands to be used. See the "Filter commands" section for more details. - As a speed up, since processing strings can't be quite expensive + As a speed up, since processing strings can be quite expensive and requires a check of all functions registered to tracing, instead an index can be written into this file. A number (starting with "1") written will instead select the same corresponding at the line position @@ -382,7 +385,7 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: By default, 128 comms are saved (see "saved_cmdlines" above). To increase or decrease the amount of comms that are cached, echo - in a the number of comms to cache, into this file. + the number of comms to cache into this file. saved_tgids: @@ -490,6 +493,9 @@ of ftrace. Here is a list of some of the key files: # echo global > trace_clock + Setting a clock clears the ring buffer content as well as the + "snapshot" buffer. + trace_marker: This is a very useful file for synchronizing user space @@ -3324,7 +3330,7 @@ directories after it is created. As you can see, the new directory looks similar to the tracing directory itself. In fact, it is very similar, except that the buffer and -events are agnostic from the main director, or from any other +events are agnostic from the main directory, or from any other instances that are created. The files in the new directory work just like the files with the diff --git a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt index ff747b6fa39b..2d53c6f25b91 100644 --- a/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt +++ b/Documentation/trace/ring-buffer-design.txt @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ commit_page - a pointer to the page with the last finished non-nested write. cmpxchg - hardware-assisted atomic transaction that performs the following: - A = B iff previous A == C + A = B if previous A == C R = cmpxchg(A, C, B) is saying that we replace A with B if and only if current A is equal to C, and we put the old (current) A into R diff --git a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt index f07c40a068b5..2e831ece6e26 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt +++ b/Documentation/translations/ko_KR/memory-barriers.txt @@ -2413,7 +2413,7 @@ _않습니다_. 알고 있는, - inb() 나 writel() 과 같은 - 적절한 액세스 루틴을 통해 이루어져야만 합니다. 이것들은 대부분의 경우에는 명시적 메모리 배리어 와 함께 사용될 필요가 없습니다만, 완화된 메모리 액세스 속성으로 I/O 메모리 윈도우로의 참조를 위해 -액세스 함수가 사용된다면 순서를 강제하기 위해 _madatory_ 메모리 배리어가 +액세스 함수가 사용된다면 순서를 강제하기 위해 _mandatory_ 메모리 배리어가 필요합니다. 더 많은 정보를 위해선 Documentation/driver-api/device-io.rst 를 참고하십시오. @@ -2528,7 +2528,7 @@ I/O 액세스를 통한 주변장치와의 통신은 아키텍쳐와 기기에 이것들은 readX() 와 writeX() 랑 비슷하지만, 더 완화된 메모리 순서 보장을 제공합니다. 구체적으로, 이것들은 일반적 메모리 액세스나 delay() 루프 (예:앞의 2-5 항목) 에 대해 순서를 보장하지 않습니다만 디폴트 I/O - 기능으로 매핑된 __iomem 포인터에 대해 동작할 때, 같은 CPU 쓰레드에 의해 + 기능으로 매핑된 __iomem 포인터에 대해 동작할 때, 같은 CPU 쓰레드에 의한 같은 주변장치로의 액세스에는 순서가 맞춰질 것이 보장됩니다. (*) readsX(), writesX(): diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..b93f1af68261 --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ +.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/embargoed-hardware-issues.rst <embargoed_hardware_issues>` +:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com> + +被限制的硬件问题 +================ + +范围 +---- + +导致安全问题的硬件问题与只影响Linux内核的纯软件错误是不同的安全错误类别。 + +必须区别对待诸如熔毁(Meltdown)、Spectre、L1TF等硬件问题，因为它们通常会影响 +所有操作系统（“OS”），因此需要在不同的OS供应商、发行版、硬件供应商和其他各方 +之间进行协调。对于某些问题，软件缓解可能依赖于微码或固件更新，这需要进一步的 +协调。 + +.. _zh_Contact: + +接触 +---- + +Linux内核硬件安全小组独立于普通的Linux内核安全小组。 + +该小组只负责协调被限制的硬件安全问题。Linux内核中纯软件安全漏洞的报告不由该 +小组处理，报告者将被引导至常规Linux内核安全小组(:ref:`Documentation/admin-guide/ +<securitybugs>`)联系。 + +可以通过电子邮件 <hardware-security@kernel.org> 与小组联系。这是一份私密的安全 +官名单，他们将帮助您根据我们的文档化流程协调问题。 + +邮件列表是加密的，发送到列表的电子邮件可以通过PGP或S/MIME加密，并且必须使用报告 +者的PGP密钥或S/MIME证书签名。该列表的PGP密钥和S/MIME证书可从 +https://www.kernel.org/.... 获得。 + +虽然硬件安全问题通常由受影响的硬件供应商处理，但我们欢迎发现潜在硬件缺陷的研究 +人员或个人与我们联系。 + +硬件安全官 +^^^^^^^^^^ + +目前的硬件安全官小组: + + - Linus Torvalds（Linux基金会院士） + - Greg Kroah Hartman（Linux基金会院士） + - Thomas Gleixner（Linux基金会院士） + +邮件列表的操作 +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +处理流程中使用的加密邮件列表托管在Linux Foundation的IT基础设施上。通过提供这项 +服务，Linux基金会的IT基础设施安全总监在技术上有能力访问被限制的信息，但根据他 +的雇佣合同，他必须保密。Linux基金会的IT基础设施安全总监还负责 kernel.org 基础 +设施。 + +Linux基金会目前的IT基础设施安全总监是 Konstantin Ryabitsev。 + +保密协议 +-------- + +Linux内核硬件安全小组不是正式的机构，因此无法签订任何保密协议。核心社区意识到 +这些问题的敏感性，并提供了一份谅解备忘录。 + +谅解备忘录 +---------- + +Linux内核社区深刻理解在不同操作系统供应商、发行商、硬件供应商和其他各方之间 +进行协调时，保持硬件安全问题处于限制状态的要求。 + +Linux内核社区在过去已经成功地处理了硬件安全问题，并且有必要的机制允许在限制 +限制下进行符合社区的开发。 + +Linux内核社区有一个专门的硬件安全小组负责初始联系，并监督在限制规则下处理 +此类问题的过程。 + +硬件安全小组确定开发人员（领域专家），他们将组成特定问题的初始响应小组。最初 +的响应小组可以引入更多的开发人员（领域专家）以最佳的技术方式解决这个问题。 + +所有相关开发商承诺遵守限制规定，并对收到的信息保密。违反承诺将导致立即从当前 +问题中排除，并从所有相关邮件列表中删除。此外，硬件安全小组还将把违反者排除在 +未来的问题之外。这一后果的影响在我们社区是一种非常有效的威慑。如果发生违规 +情况，硬件安全小组将立即通知相关方。如果您或任何人发现潜在的违规行为，请立即 +向硬件安全人员报告。 + +流程 +^^^^ + +由于Linux内核开发的全球分布式特性，面对面的会议几乎不可能解决硬件安全问题。 +由于时区和其他因素，电话会议很难协调，只能在绝对必要时使用。加密电子邮件已被 +证明是解决此类问题的最有效和最安全的通信方法。 + +开始披露 +"""""""" + +披露内容首先通过电子邮件联系Linux内核硬件安全小组。此初始联系人应包含问题的 +描述和任何已知受影响硬件的列表。如果您的组织制造或分发受影响的硬件，我们建议 +您也考虑哪些其他硬件可能会受到影响。 + +硬件安全小组将提供一个特定于事件的加密邮件列表，用于与报告者进行初步讨论、 +进一步披露和协调。 + +硬件安全小组将向披露方提供一份开发人员（领域专家）名单，在与开发人员确认他们 +将遵守本谅解备忘录和文件化流程后，应首先告知开发人员有关该问题的信息。这些开发 +人员组成初始响应小组，并在初始接触后负责处理问题。硬件安全小组支持响应小组， +但不一定参与缓解开发过程。 + +虽然个别开发人员可能通过其雇主受到保密协议的保护，但他们不能以Linux内核开发 +人员的身份签订个别保密协议。但是，他们将同意遵守这一书面程序和谅解备忘录。 + +披露方应提供已经或应该被告知该问题的所有其他实体的联系人名单。这有几个目的: + + - 披露的实体列表允许跨行业通信，例如其他操作系统供应商、硬件供应商等。 + + - 可联系已披露的实体，指定应参与缓解措施开发的专家。 + + - 如果需要处理某一问题的专家受雇于某一上市实体或某一上市实体的成员，则响应 + 小组可要求该实体披露该专家。这确保专家也是实体反应小组的一部分。 + +披露 +"""" + +披露方通过特定的加密邮件列表向初始响应小组提供详细信息。 + +根据我们的经验，这些问题的技术文档通常是一个足够的起点，最好通过电子邮件进行 +进一步的技术澄清。 + +缓解开发 +"""""""" + +初始响应小组设置加密邮件列表，或在适当的情况下重新修改现有邮件列表。 + +使用邮件列表接近于正常的Linux开发过程，并且在过去已经成功地用于为各种硬件安全 +问题开发缓解措施。 + +邮件列表的操作方式与正常的Linux开发相同。发布、讨论和审查修补程序，如果同意， +则应用于非公共git存储库，参与开发人员只能通过安全连接访问该存储库。存储库包含 +针对主线内核的主开发分支，并根据需要为稳定的内核版本提供向后移植分支。 + +最初的响应小组将根据需要从Linux内核开发人员社区中确定更多的专家。引进专家可以 +在开发过程中的任何时候发生，需要及时处理。 + +如果专家受雇于披露方提供的披露清单上的实体或其成员，则相关实体将要求其参与。 + +否则，披露方将被告知专家参与的情况。谅解备忘录涵盖了专家，要求披露方确认参与。 +如果披露方有令人信服的理由提出异议，则必须在五个工作日内提出异议，并立即与事件 +小组解决。如果披露方在五个工作日内未作出回应，则视为默许。 + +在确认或解决异议后，专家由事件小组披露，并进入开发过程。 + +协调发布 +"""""""" + +有关各方将协商限制结束的日期和时间。此时，准备好的缓解措施集成到相关的内核树中 +并发布。 + +虽然我们理解硬件安全问题需要协调限制时间，但限制时间应限制在所有有关各方制定、 +测试和准备缓解措施所需的最短时间内。人为地延长限制时间以满足会议讨论日期或其他 +非技术原因，会给相关的开发人员和响应小组带来了更多的工作和负担，因为补丁需要 +保持最新，以便跟踪正在进行的上游内核开发，这可能会造成冲突的更改。 + +CVE分配 +""""""" + +硬件安全小组和初始响应小组都不分配CVE，开发过程也不需要CVE。如果CVE是由披露方 +提供的，则可用于文档中。 + +流程专使 +-------- + +为了协助这一进程，我们在各组织设立了专使，他们可以回答有关报告流程和进一步处理 +的问题或提供指导。专使不参与特定问题的披露，除非响应小组或相关披露方提出要求。 +现任专使名单: + + ============= ======================================================== + ARM + AMD Tom Lendacky <tom.lendacky@amd.com> + IBM + Intel Tony Luck <tony.luck@intel.com> + Qualcomm Trilok Soni <tsoni@codeaurora.org> + + Microsoft Sasha Levin <sashal@kernel.org> + VMware + Xen Andrew Cooper <andrew.cooper3@citrix.com> + + Canonical Tyler Hicks <tyhicks@canonical.com> + Debian Ben Hutchings <ben@decadent.org.uk> + Oracle Konrad Rzeszutek Wilk <konrad.wilk@oracle.com> + Red Hat Josh Poimboeuf <jpoimboe@redhat.com> + SUSE Jiri Kosina <jkosina@suse.cz> + + Amazon + Google Kees Cook <keescook@chromium.org> + ============= ======================================================== + +如果要将您的组织添加到专使名单中，请与硬件安全小组联系。被提名的专使必须完全 +理解和支持我们的过程，并且在Linux内核社区中很容易联系。 + +加密邮件列表 +------------ + +我们使用加密邮件列表进行通信。这些列表的工作原理是，发送到列表的电子邮件使用 +列表的PGP密钥或列表的/MIME证书进行加密。邮件列表软件对电子邮件进行解密，并 +使用订阅者的PGP密钥或S/MIME证书为每个订阅者分别对其进行重新加密。有关邮件列表 +软件和用于确保列表安全和数据保护的设置的详细信息，请访问: +https://www.kernel.org/.... + +关键点 +^^^^^^ + +初次接触见 :ref:`zh_Contact`. 对于特定于事件的邮件列表，密钥和S/MIME证书通过 +特定列表发送的电子邮件传递给订阅者。 + +订阅事件特定列表 +^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ + +订阅由响应小组处理。希望参与通信的披露方将潜在订户的列表发送给响应组，以便 +响应组可以验证订阅请求。 + +每个订户都需要通过电子邮件向响应小组发送订阅请求。电子邮件必须使用订阅服务器 +的PGP密钥或S/MIME证书签名。如果使用PGP密钥，则必须从公钥服务器获得该密钥， +并且理想情况下该密钥连接到Linux内核的PGP信任网。另请参见: +https://www.kernel.org/signature.html. + +响应小组验证订阅者，并将订阅者添加到列表中。订阅后，订阅者将收到来自邮件列表 +的电子邮件，该邮件列表使用列表的PGP密钥或列表的/MIME证书签名。订阅者的电子邮件 +客户端可以从签名中提取PGP密钥或S/MIME证书，以便订阅者可以向列表发送加密电子 +邮件。 diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst index be1e764a80d2..8051a7b322c5 100644 --- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/index.rst @@ -31,6 +31,8 @@ development-process email-clients license-rules + kernel-enforcement-statement + kernel-driver-statement 其它大多数开发人员感兴趣的社区指南： @@ -43,6 +45,7 @@ stable-api-nonsense stable-kernel-rules management-style + embargoed-hardware-issues 这些是一些总体技术指南，由于缺乏更好的地方，现在已经放在这里 diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-driver-statement.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-driver-statement.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..2b3375bcccfd --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-driver-statement.rst @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ +.. _cn_process_statement_driver: + +.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/kernel-driver-statement.rst <process_statement_driver>` +:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com> + +内核驱动声明 +------------ + +关于Linux内核模块的立场声明 +=========================== + +我们，以下署名的Linux内核开发人员，认为任何封闭源Linux内核模块或驱动程序都是 +有害的和不可取的。我们已经一再发现它们对Linux用户，企业和更大的Linux生态系统 +有害。这样的模块否定了Linux开发模型的开放性，稳定性，灵活性和可维护性，并使 +他们的用户无法使用Linux社区的专业知识。提供闭源内核模块的供应商迫使其客户 +放弃Linux的主要优势或选择新的供应商。因此，为了充分利用开源所提供的成本节省和 +共享支持优势，我们敦促供应商采取措施，以开源内核代码在Linux上为其客户提供支持。 + +我们只为自己说话，而不是我们今天可能会为之工作，过去或将来会为之工作的任何公司。 + + - Dave Airlie + - Nick Andrew + - Jens Axboe + - Ralf Baechle + - Felipe Balbi + - Ohad Ben-Cohen + - Muli Ben-Yehuda + - Jiri Benc + - Arnd Bergmann + - Thomas Bogendoerfer + - Vitaly Bordug + - James Bottomley + - Josh Boyer + - Neil Brown + - Mark Brown + - David Brownell + - Michael Buesch + - Franck Bui-Huu + - Adrian Bunk + - François Cami + - Ralph Campbell + - Luiz Fernando N. Capitulino + - Mauro Carvalho Chehab + - Denis Cheng + - Jonathan Corbet + - Glauber Costa + - Alan Cox + - Magnus Damm + - Ahmed S. Darwish + - Robert P. J. Day + - Hans de Goede + - Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo + - Helge Deller + - Jean Delvare + - Mathieu Desnoyers + - Sven-Thorsten Dietrich + - Alexey Dobriyan + - Daniel Drake + - Alex Dubov + - Randy Dunlap + - Michael Ellerman + - Pekka Enberg + - Jan Engelhardt + - Mark Fasheh + - J. Bruce Fields + - Larry Finger + - Jeremy Fitzhardinge + - Mike Frysinger + - Kumar Gala + - Robin Getz + - Liam Girdwood + - Jan-Benedict Glaw + - Thomas Gleixner + - Brice Goglin + - Cyrill Gorcunov + - Andy Gospodarek + - Thomas Graf + - Krzysztof Halasa + - Harvey Harrison + - Stephen Hemminger + - Michael Hennerich + - Tejun Heo + - Benjamin Herrenschmidt + - Kristian Høgsberg + - Henrique de Moraes Holschuh + - Marcel Holtmann + - Mike Isely + - Takashi Iwai + - Olof Johansson + - Dave Jones + - Jesper Juhl + - Matthias Kaehlcke + - Kenji Kaneshige + - Jan Kara + - Jeremy Kerr + - Russell King + - Olaf Kirch + - Roel Kluin + - Hans-Jürgen Koch + - Auke Kok + - Peter Korsgaard + - Jiri Kosina + - Aaro Koskinen + - Mariusz Kozlowski + - Greg Kroah-Hartman + - Michael Krufky + - Aneesh Kumar + - Clemens Ladisch + - Christoph Lameter + - Gunnar Larisch + - Anders Larsen + - Grant Likely + - John W. Linville + - Yinghai Lu + - Tony Luck + - Pavel Machek + - Matt Mackall + - Paul Mackerras + - Roland McGrath + - Patrick McHardy + - Kyle McMartin + - Paul Menage + - Thierry Merle + - Eric Miao + - Akinobu Mita + - Ingo Molnar + - James Morris + - Andrew Morton + - Paul Mundt + - Oleg Nesterov + - Luca Olivetti + - S.Çağlar Onur + - Pierre Ossman + - Keith Owens + - Venkatesh Pallipadi + - Nick Piggin + - Nicolas Pitre + - Evgeniy Polyakov + - Richard Purdie + - Mike Rapoport + - Sam Ravnborg + - Gerrit Renker + - Stefan Richter + - David Rientjes + - Luis R. Rodriguez + - Stefan Roese + - Francois Romieu + - Rami Rosen + - Stephen Rothwell + - Maciej W. Rozycki + - Mark Salyzyn + - Yoshinori Sato + - Deepak Saxena + - Holger Schurig + - Amit Shah + - Yoshihiro Shimoda + - Sergei Shtylyov + - Kay Sievers + - Sebastian Siewior + - Rik Snel + - Jes Sorensen + - Alexey Starikovskiy + - Alan Stern + - Timur Tabi + - Hirokazu Takata + - Eliezer Tamir + - Eugene Teo + - Doug Thompson + - FUJITA Tomonori + - Dmitry Torokhov + - Marcelo Tosatti + - Steven Toth + - Theodore Tso + - Matthias Urlichs + - Geert Uytterhoeven + - Arjan van de Ven + - Ivo van Doorn + - Rik van Riel + - Wim Van Sebroeck + - Hans Verkuil + - Horst H. von Brand + - Dmitri Vorobiev + - Anton Vorontsov + - Daniel Walker + - Johannes Weiner + - Harald Welte + - Matthew Wilcox + - Dan J. Williams + - Darrick J. Wong + - David Woodhouse + - Chris Wright + - Bryan Wu + - Rafael J. Wysocki + - Herbert Xu + - Vlad Yasevich + - Peter Zijlstra + - Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst new file mode 100644 index 000000000000..75f7b7b9137c --- /dev/null +++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ +.. _cn_process_statement_kernel: + +.. include:: ../disclaimer-zh_CN.rst + +:Original: :ref:`Documentation/process/kernel-enforcement-statement.rst <process_statement_kernel>` +:Translator: Alex Shi <alex.shi@linux.alibaba.com> + +Linux 内核执行声明 +------------------ + +作为Linux内核的开发人员，我们对如何使用我们的软件以及如何实施软件许可证有着 +浓厚的兴趣。遵守GPL-2.0的互惠共享义务对我们软件和社区的长期可持续性至关重要。 + +虽然有权强制执行对我们社区的贡献中的单独版权权益，但我们有共同的利益，即确保 +个人强制执行行动的方式有利于我们的社区，不会对我们软件生态系统的健康和增长 +产生意外的负面影响。为了阻止无益的执法行动，我们同意代表我们自己和我们版权 +利益的任何继承人对Linux内核用户作出以下符合我们开发社区最大利益的承诺: + + 尽管有GPL-2.0的终止条款，我们同意，采用以下GPL-3.0条款作为我们许可证下的 + 附加许可，作为任何对许可证下权利的非防御性主张，这符合我们开发社区的最佳 + 利益。 + + 但是，如果您停止所有违反本许可证的行为，则您从特定版权持有人处获得的 + 许可证将被恢复：（a）暂时恢复，除非版权持有人明确并最终终止您的许可证； + 以及（b）永久恢复, 如果版权持有人未能在你终止违反后60天内以合理方式 + 通知您违反本许可证的行为，则永久恢复您的许可证。 + + 此外，如果版权所有者以某种合理的方式通知您违反了本许可，这是您第一次 + 从该版权所有者处收到违反本许可的通知（对于任何作品），并且您在收到通知 + 后的30天内纠正违规行为。则您从特定版权所有者处获得的许可将永久恢复. + +我们提供这些保证的目的是鼓励更多地使用该软件。我们希望公司和个人使用、修改和 +分发此软件。我们希望以公开和透明的方式与用户合作，以消除我们对法规遵从性或强制 +执行的任何不确定性，这些不确定性可能会限制我们软件的采用。我们将法律行动视为 +最后手段，只有在其他社区努力未能解决这一问题时才采取行动。 + +最后，一旦一个不合规问题得到解决，我们希望用户会感到欢迎，加入我们为之努力的 +这个项目。共同努力，我们会更强大。 + +除了下面提到的以外，我们只为自己说话，而不是为今天、过去或将来可能为之工作的 +任何公司说话。 + + - Laura Abbott + - Bjorn Andersson (Linaro) + - Andrea Arcangeli + - Neil Armstrong + - Jens Axboe + - Pablo Neira Ayuso + - Khalid Aziz + - Ralf Baechle + - Felipe Balbi + - Arnd Bergmann + - Ard Biesheuvel + - Tim Bird + - Paolo Bonzini + - Christian Borntraeger + - Mark Brown (Linaro) + - Paul Burton + - Javier Martinez Canillas + - Rob Clark + - Kees Cook (Google) + - Jonathan Corbet + - Dennis Dalessandro + - Vivien Didelot (Savoir-faire Linux) + - Hans de Goede + - Mel Gorman (SUSE) + - Sven Eckelmann + - Alex Elder (Linaro) + - Fabio Estevam + - Larry Finger + - Bhumika Goyal + - Andy Gross + - Juergen Gross + - Shawn Guo + - Ulf Hansson + - Stephen Hemminger (Microsoft) + - Tejun Heo + - Rob Herring + - Masami Hiramatsu + - Michal Hocko + - Simon Horman + - Johan Hovold (Hovold Consulting AB) + - Christophe JAILLET + - Olof Johansson + - Lee Jones (Linaro) + - Heiner Kallweit + - Srinivas Kandagatla + - Jan Kara + - Shuah Khan (Samsung) + - David Kershner + - Jaegeuk Kim + - Namhyung Kim + - Colin Ian King + - Jeff Kirsher + - Greg Kroah-Hartman (Linux Foundation) + - Christian König + - Vinod Koul + - Krzysztof Kozlowski + - Viresh Kumar + - Aneesh Kumar K.V + - Julia Lawall + - Doug Ledford + - Chuck Lever (Oracle) + - Daniel Lezcano + - Shaohua Li + - Xin Long + - Tony Luck + - Catalin Marinas (Arm Ltd) + - Mike Marshall + - Chris Mason + - Paul E. McKenney + - Arnaldo Carvalho de Melo + - David S. Miller + - Ingo Molnar + - Kuninori Morimoto + - Trond Myklebust + - Martin K. Petersen (Oracle) + - Borislav Petkov + - Jiri Pirko + - Josh Poimboeuf + - Sebastian Reichel (Collabora) + - Guenter Roeck + - Joerg Roedel + - Leon Romanovsky + - Steven Rostedt (VMware) + - Frank Rowand + - Ivan Safonov + - Anna Schumaker + - Jes Sorensen + - K.Y. Srinivasan + - David Sterba (SUSE) + - Heiko Stuebner + - Jiri Kosina (SUSE) + - Willy Tarreau + - Dmitry Torokhov + - Linus Torvalds + - Thierry Reding + - Rik van Riel + - Luis R. Rodriguez + - Geert Uytterhoeven (Glider bvba) + - Eduardo Valentin (Amazon.com) + - Daniel Vetter + - Linus Walleij + - Richard Weinberger + - Dan Williams + - Rafael J. Wysocki + - Arvind Yadav + - Masahiro Yamada + - Wei Yongjun + - Lv Zheng + - Marc Zyngier (Arm Ltd) diff --git a/Documentation/usb/index.rst b/Documentation/usb/index.rst index e55386a4abfb..36b6ebd9a9d9 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/index.rst +++ b/Documentation/usb/index.rst @@ -22,11 +22,9 @@ USB support misc_usbsevseg mtouchusb ohci - rio usbip_protocol usbmon usb-serial - wusb-design-overview usb-help text_files diff --git a/Documentation/usb/text_files.rst b/Documentation/usb/text_files.rst index 6a8d3fcf64b6..1c18c05c3920 100644 --- a/Documentation/usb/text_files.rst +++ b/Documentation/usb/text_files.rst @@ -16,12 +16,6 @@ USB devfs drop permissions source .. literalinclude:: usbdevfs-drop-permissions.c :language: c -WUSB command line script to manipulate auth credentials -------------------------------------------------------- - -.. literalinclude:: wusb-cbaf - :language: shell - Credits ------- diff --git a/Documentation/userspace-api/ioctl/ioctl-number.rst b/Documentation/userspace-api/ioctl/ioctl-number.rst index 4ef86433bd67..2e91370dc159 100644 --- a/Documentation/userspace-api/ioctl/ioctl-number.rst +++ b/Documentation/userspace-api/ioctl/ioctl-number.rst @@ -132,7 +132,6 @@ Code Seq# Include File Comments 'F' 80-8F linux/arcfb.h conflict! 'F' DD video/sstfb.h conflict! 'G' 00-3F drivers/misc/sgi-gru/grulib.h conflict! -'G' 00-0F linux/gigaset_dev.h conflict! 'H' 00-7F linux/hiddev.h conflict! 'H' 00-0F linux/hidraw.h conflict! 'H' 01 linux/mei.h conflict! diff --git a/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst b/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst index 893a8ba0e9fe..95fec5968362 100644 --- a/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst +++ b/Documentation/vm/hmm.rst @@ -149,14 +149,14 @@ CPU page table into a device page table; HMM helps keep both synchronized. A device driver that wants to mirror a process address space must start with the registration of a mmu_interval_notifier:: - mni->ops = &driver_ops; - int mmu_interval_notifier_insert(struct mmu_interval_notifier *mni, - unsigned long start, unsigned long length, - struct mm_struct *mm); + int mmu_interval_notifier_insert(struct mmu_interval_notifier *interval_sub, + struct mm_struct *mm, unsigned long start, + unsigned long length, + const struct mmu_interval_notifier_ops *ops); -During the driver_ops->invalidate() callback the device driver must perform -the update action to the range (mark range read only, or fully unmap, -etc.). The device must complete the update before the driver callback returns. +During the ops->invalidate() callback the device driver must perform the +update action to the range (mark range read only, or fully unmap, etc.). The +device must complete the update before the driver callback returns. When the device driver wants to populate a range of virtual addresses, it can use:: @@ -183,7 +183,7 @@ The usage pattern is:: struct hmm_range range; ... - range.notifier = &mni; + range.notifier = &interval_sub; range.start = ...; range.end = ...; range.pfns = ...; @@ -191,11 +191,11 @@ The usage pattern is:: range.values = ...; range.pfn_shift = ...; - if (!mmget_not_zero(mni->notifier.mm)) + if (!mmget_not_zero(interval_sub->notifier.mm)) return -EFAULT; again: - range.notifier_seq = mmu_interval_read_begin(&mni); + range.notifier_seq = mmu_interval_read_begin(&interval_sub); down_read(&mm->mmap_sem); ret = hmm_range_fault(&range, HMM_RANGE_SNAPSHOT); if (ret) { diff --git a/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq.rst b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq.rst index 345298a59e50..5347b5d9e90a 100644 --- a/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq.rst +++ b/Documentation/w1/masters/omap-hdq.rst @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ that the ID used should be same for both master and slave driver loading. e.g:: insmod omap_hdq.ko W1_ID=2 - inamod w1_bq27000.ko F_ID=2 + insmod w1_bq27000.ko F_ID=2 The driver also supports 1-wire mode. In this mode, there is no need to pass slave ID as parameter. The driver will auto-detect slaves connected diff --git a/Documentation/x86/boot.rst b/Documentation/x86/boot.rst index 90bb8f5ab384..c9c201596c3e 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/boot.rst +++ b/Documentation/x86/boot.rst @@ -69,11 +69,12 @@ Protocol 2.13 (Kernel 3.14) Support 32- and 64-bit flags being set in xloadflags to support booting a 64-bit kernel from 32-bit EFI -Protocol 2.14: BURNT BY INCORRECT COMMIT ae7e1238e68f2a472a125673ab506d49158c1889 +Protocol 2.14 BURNT BY INCORRECT COMMIT + ae7e1238e68f2a472a125673ab506d49158c1889 (x86/boot: Add ACPI RSDP address to setup_header) DO NOT USE!!! ASSUME SAME AS 2.13. -Protocol 2.15: (Kernel 5.5) Added the kernel_info and kernel_info.setup_type_max. +Protocol 2.15 (Kernel 5.5) Added the kernel_info and kernel_info.setup_type_max. ============= ============================================================ .. note:: @@ -251,7 +252,7 @@ setting fields in the header, you must make sure only to set fields supported by the protocol version in use. -Details of Harder Fileds +Details of Header Fields ======================== For each field, some are information from the kernel to the bootloader @@ -834,14 +835,14 @@ Protocol: 2.09+ chunks of memory are occupied by kernel data. Thus setup_indirect struct and SETUP_INDIRECT type were introduced in - protocol 2.15. + protocol 2.15:: - struct setup_indirect { - __u32 type; - __u32 reserved; /* Reserved, must be set to zero. */ - __u64 len; - __u64 addr; - }; + struct setup_indirect { + __u32 type; + __u32 reserved; /* Reserved, must be set to zero. */ + __u64 len; + __u64 addr; + }; The type member is a SETUP_INDIRECT | SETUP_* type. However, it cannot be SETUP_INDIRECT itself since making the setup_indirect a tree structure @@ -849,19 +850,19 @@ Protocol: 2.09+ and stack space can be limited in boot contexts. Let's give an example how to point to SETUP_E820_EXT data using setup_indirect. - In this case setup_data and setup_indirect will look like this: - - struct setup_data { - __u64 next = 0 or <addr_of_next_setup_data_struct>; - __u32 type = SETUP_INDIRECT; - __u32 len = sizeof(setup_data); - __u8 data[sizeof(setup_indirect)] = struct setup_indirect { - __u32 type = SETUP_INDIRECT | SETUP_E820_EXT; - __u32 reserved = 0; - __u64 len = <len_of_SETUP_E820_EXT_data>; - __u64 addr = <addr_of_SETUP_E820_EXT_data>; + In this case setup_data and setup_indirect will look like this:: + + struct setup_data { + __u64 next = 0 or <addr_of_next_setup_data_struct>; + __u32 type = SETUP_INDIRECT; + __u32 len = sizeof(setup_data); + __u8 data[sizeof(setup_indirect)] = struct setup_indirect { + __u32 type = SETUP_INDIRECT | SETUP_E820_EXT; + __u32 reserved = 0; + __u64 len = <len_of_SETUP_E820_EXT_data>; + __u64 addr = <addr_of_SETUP_E820_EXT_data>; + } } - } .. note:: SETUP_INDIRECT | SETUP_NONE objects cannot be properly distinguished @@ -964,7 +965,7 @@ expected to copy into a setup_data chunk. All kernel_info data should be part of this structure. Fixed size data have to be put before kernel_info_var_len_data label. Variable size data have to be put after kernel_info_var_len_data label. Each chunk of variable size data has to -be prefixed with header/magic and its size, e.g.: +be prefixed with header/magic and its size, e.g.:: kernel_info: .ascii "LToP" /* Header, Linux top (structure). */ diff --git a/Documentation/x86/pat.rst b/Documentation/x86/pat.rst index 9a298fd97d74..5d901771016d 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/pat.rst +++ b/Documentation/x86/pat.rst @@ -44,8 +44,6 @@ address range to avoid any aliasing. +------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+ | ioremap_uc | -- | UC | UC | +------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+ -| ioremap_nocache | -- | UC- | UC- | -+------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+ | ioremap_wc | -- | -- | WC | +------------------------+----------+--------------+------------------+ | ioremap_wt | -- | -- | WT | diff --git a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst index 267fc4808945..e5053404a1ae 100644 --- a/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst +++ b/Documentation/x86/x86_64/mm.rst @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ .. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 -================ -Memory Managment -================ +================= +Memory Management +================= Complete virtual memory map with 4-level page tables ==================================================== |